Ipswitch v12 IMail Server User manual
Reklāma
Reklāma
Ipswitch, Inc.
753 Broad Street
Suite 200
Augusta, GA 30901-5518
Web: www.imailserver.com
Phone: 706-312-3535
Fax: 706-868-8655
Copyrights
©2011 Ipswitch, Inc. All rights reserved.
IMail Server – Administration Help
This manual, as well as the software described in it, is furnished under license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of such license. Except as permitted by such license, no part of this publication may be reproduced, photocopied, stored on a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, recording, or otherwise, without the expressed prior written consent of Ipswitch, Inc.
The content of this manual is furnished for informational use only, is subject to change without notice, and should not be construed as a commitment by Ipswitch, Inc. While every effort has been made to assure the accuracy of the information contained herein, Ipswitch,
Inc. assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Ipswitch, Inc. also assumes no liability for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this document.
Ipswitch Collaboration Suite (ICS), the Ipswitch Collaboration Suite (ICS) logo, IMail, the IMail logo, WhatsUp, the WhatsUp logo, WS_FTP, the WS_FTP logos, Ipswitch Instant Messaging
(IM), the Ipswitch Instant Messaging (IM) logo, Ipswitch, and the Ipswitch logo are trademarks of Ipswitch, Inc. Other products and their brands or company names are or may be trademarks or registered trademarks, and are the property of their respective companies.
Update History
December 2011
April 2011
October 2010
May 2010 v12 v11.5 v11.03 v11.02
Contents
CHAPTER 1 Introduction to IMail Administrator
CHAPTER 2 Installing
CHAPTER 3 Mail Domain (Host) Configuration
i
CHAPTER 4 User Mail Accounts
CHAPTER 5 System Administration
ii
CHAPTER 6 Domain Administration
iii
CHAPTER 7 Anti-virus
iv
CHAPTER 8 Anti-spam
v
CHAPTER 9 Collaboration
vi
CHAPTER 10 Services
CHAPTER 11 Logging
vii
CHAPTER 12 Command Line Utilities
viii
CHAPTER 13 Using IMail Web Client
Index
ix
CHAPTER 1
Introduction to IMail Administrator
In This Chapter
Accessing the IMail Web Administration ................................................... 20
Using Internet Information Services (IIS) Virtual Directories .............. 21
About Help
About Ipswitch IMail Server Help
Copyrights© 1995-2011 Ipswitch, Inc. All rights reserved.
IMail Server Help
This help file, as well as the software described in it, is furnished under license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of such license. Except as permitted by such license, no part of this publication may be reproduced, photocopied, stored on a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, recording, or otherwise, without the expressed prior written consent of Ipswitch, Inc.
1
IMail v12 Administrator Help
The content of this help file is furnished for informational use only, is subject to change without notice, and should not be construed as a commitment by Ipswitch, Inc. While every effort has been made to assure the accuracy of the information contained herein, Ipswitch,
Inc. assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Ipswitch, Inc. also assumes no liability for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this document.
Ipswitch Collaboration Suite (ICS), the ICS logo, IMail, the IMail logo, WhatsUp, the WhatsUp logo, WS_FTP, the WS_FTP logos, Ipswitch Instant Messaging (IM), the Ipswitch Instant
Messaging (IM) logo, Ipswitch, and the Ipswitch logo are trademarks of Ipswitch, Inc. Other products and their brands or company names are or may be trademarks or registered trademarks, and are the property of their respective companies.
Revision History
IMail Server v12 - November 2011
IMail Server (Administrator) v11.5 - April 2011
IMail Server (Administrator) v11.03 - October 2010
IMail Server (Administrator) v11.02 - May 2010
IMail Server (Administrator) v11.01 - October 2009
IMail Server (Administrator) v11 - April 2009
IMail Server (Administrator) v10.02 - November 2008
IMail Server (Administrator) v10.01 - June 2008
IMail Server (Administrator) v10 - February 2008
IMail Server (Administrator) 2006.22 (v 9.22) October 2007
IMail Server (Administrator) 2006.21 (v 9.21) July 2007
IMail Server (Administrator) 2006.2 (v 9.2) February 2007
IMail Server (Administrator) 2006.1 (v 9.1) July 2006
IMail Server (Administrator) 2006.04 (v9.04) April 2006
IMail Server (Administrator) 2006.03 (v9.03) March 2006
IMail Server (Administrator) 2006.02 (v9.02), January 2006
IMail Server (Administrator) 2006.01 (v9.01), December 2005
IMail Server (Administrator) 2006, November 2005
IMail Server v8.14 October 2004
IMail Server v8.2 April 2005
2
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Web Administrator and Client
Web-based Administrator and Client
IMail Server
IMail Server (Administrator) is an Internet standards-based mail server system for
Microsoft® Windows® 2003 and Microsoft® Windows® 2008. It includes powerful administrative and anti-spam management tools all accessible via the Internet.
The Web Administrator and Console Administrator includes a series of programs that run as services: SMTP, POP3, IMAP4, LDAP3. These services can be stopped and restarted from the Service Administration page as well as from their respective pages.
IMail Server v11 and later provides local or remote access to IMail Server administration features via the Console Administrator or Web Administrator. You can administer all e-mail functions, including users, groups, services, shared calendars, contacts, tasks, notes, anti-spam and anti-virus settings (available separately).
Dictionary Attack
Options provide settings to secure your IMail Server from attacker security breaches on passwords and e-mail addresses.
Spam protection provides the ability to put the IP address of a spammer into the
Control Access list for a certain amount of time to keep the system from just reconnecting. Once the time period expires, the IP address is removed from the access list and is permitted to send mail again.
User Interface
A multi-featured main Web page allows easy administrative access to users, domains, collaboration settings for shared calendars, contacts, tasks and notes, services configuration, log viewing and management.
The IMail Console Administrator allows local administrative access to users, domains, services, log viewing and management. Collaboration settings can be accessed locally via the
Collaboration Console Administrator.
IMail Web Messaging
Web Messaging (Web mail client) lets you send and receive mail using a Web browser. You can log on to Web Messaging from a browser on any computer with a supported browser, and manage e-mail without installing e-mail client software. IMail Web Messaging directly
1
A method used to break security systems, specifically password-based security systems, in which the attacker systematically tests all possible passwords beginning with words that have a higher possibility of being used, such as names and places. The word “dictionary” refers to the attacker exhausting all of the words in a dictionary in an attempt to discover the password. Dictionary attacks are typically done with software instead of an individual manually entering each password. Also, an e-mail ...
3
IMail v12 Administrator Help
accesses the server to manage mail. When a user creates a mailbox in the Web client, the mailbox is created on the mail server and mail folders and messages reside on the server.
IMail Web Messaging includes an integrated Web-based client. This client replaces the current Web Client, Classic WebMail and Killer WebMail templates. This new web client sends and receives e-mail, lets you create contacts, calendars, tasks, notes and lets you organize and manage mail in folders.
If you used contacts or contact lists (distribution lists) in a previous version of Ipswitch Web
Messaging or in Microsoft Outlook with the IMail Collaboration plug-in, the contacts contact lists, calendars, tasks and notes are automatically imported into the new IMail Web
Messaging client. A new Contacts folder is created that includes contacts and contact lists.
User Interface
A unified main Web Client page allows user-friendly access to critical e-mail functions: Inbox, folders, composing, personal settings, rule and contact management, and the ability to switch between the client and the administrator pages if you have Administrator privileges.
Ipswitch Instant Messaging
Ipswitch Instant Messaging (server) provides local or remote access to Ipswitch Instant
Messaging administration features via a Web browser. You can administer all instant messaging functions, including users, public contact lists, stored conversations, and server access.
Additionally, Ipswitch Instant Messaging integrates with Microsoft® Office XP products by using Smart Tags. IIM Smart tags are person's names or e-mail addresses that are associated with an IIM contact. Microsoft Office automatically recognizes smart tags in any Office document.
IMail Collaboration
IMail Collaboration lets the people in your organization share their Outlook data, such as calendars, contacts, e-mail, tasks and notes, without the expense or expertise required by
Microsoft Exchange Server.
Optional Enhancements
IMail Anti-virus powered by Symantec™
IMail Anti-virus, available separately, can be fully integrated with IMail Server and is powered by Symantec™ CarrierScan Server, a high performance, scalable, reliable solution to protect against viruses.
IMail Anti-virus powered by BitDefender®
IMail Anti-virus, also available separately, can be fully integrated with IMail Server and is powered by SOFTWIN's BitDefender®, one of the most comprehensive virus scanners available.
IMail Anti-virus powered by Commtouch®
4
IMail v12 Administrator Help
IMail Anti-virus powered by Commtouch® has integrated Commtouch's Command
Anti-virus SDK and is now available for purchase with your IMail Server. With
Commtouch's acquisition of Command anti-virus a division of Authentium, IMail Server now offers Command Anti-virus as another optional possibility against the constant battle against spam. The Command Anti-virus engine blocks malware of all types, including worms, Trojans and spyware. Command Anti-virus has a proven track history for defending against malware for over 20 years.
Commtouch® Zero-Hour Virus Protection
Commtouch® Zero-Hour Virus Outbreak Protection provides a complementary shield to conventional AV technology, protecting in the earliest moments of malware outbreaks, and right through as each new variant emerges.
IMail Premium Anti-spam
Premium Anti-spam filtering (optional in IMail Premium), powered by Commtouch
Advanced Security Daemon (a.k.a. ctasd™) a plug-and-play email-borne spam and malware outbreak detection daemon that combines your current core messaging network infrastructure with advanced detection and classification capabilities. The daemon adds a layer of e-mail filtering to your mail delivery system in order to provide real-time classification, already in the first minutes after a new outbreak is launched.
Commtouch's GlobalView™ Mail Reputation services are used primarily to weed out spam messages and email-borne malware at the entry point before these messages enter the customer’s messaging network, thereby relieving the need for resource-consuming downstream filtering. This is accomplished by applying the most up-to-date IP reputation data to the sender IP, before the SMTP connection is accepted.
By applying GlobalView Mail Reputation services to the senders’ IP addresses before or during the SMTP session and before their messages enter the messaging network
Important: See the Table of Features (on page 24) to find out more about your options in the
Ipswitch family of IMail products.
IMail Administrator Requirements
The IMail Administrator provides local or remote access to IMail Server administration features via a Web browser.
IMail Web Administration supports:
Microsoft® Internet Explorer 8.0 and later
Mozilla Firefox 5.0 or later
Safari 2.0.4 for Macintosh, or, the upgraded version of Safari installed with Mac OS X version 10.4.8
Google Chrome
5
IMail v12 Administrator Help
You can access IMail Server Administrator options from the tabs across the top of the browser and the navigation links along the left side of the browser window. For more details, see
System Requirements. (on page 6)
Access the following IMail Server Administration features from the tabs:
Home. Provides easy access to other Installed Ipswitch Products.
System. Provides access to system settings, server level Realtime Blacklists, and the message queue
Domain. Provides access to IMail Server domains and lets you manage domain properties, users, spam filters, aliases, mailing lists, LDAP settings, attachment blocking, inbound and outbound rules, white lists, and peer lists.
Anti-virus. Provides access to enable and select the server Anti-virus options.
Anti-spam. Provides access to a variety of anti-spam features such as statistical and phrase filters (content filters), HTML feature filters, URL domain blacklists, broken
MIME headers, Sender Policy Framework (SPF), and connection checks for domain level realtime blacklists and various verification checks.
Collaboration. Provides access to options for sharing users' Outlook data, such as calendars, tasks, contacts, distribution lists, notes and e-mail. You can define data that users have access to through flexible access control lists.
Services. Provides access to the services status and options that IMail Server supports:
Simple Mail Transfer Protoco (on page 413)l (SMTP)
Post Office Protocol Version 3 (on page 402) (POP3)
Internet Message Access Protocol Version 4 (on page 392) (IMAP4)
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (on page 395) (LDAP)
Logging. Provides access to the log files in the IMail spool directory. Log files are named with the format logMMDD.txt where MM is the month and DD is the date.
System Requirements
Required Hardware
TCP/IP enabled network interface card (NIC) with a static IP address
Disk space is dependent on the number of users and usage.
Minimum Requirement
2
The mail queue also known as the spool, is a directory that stores mail messages that are waiting for delivery. Files in the queue include incoming messages, outgoing messages, attachments, and error messages. The queue releases messages one at a time in the order that they were received.
6
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Operating System
Windows 2003 SP1 (32-bit)
Windows 2003 SP1 (64-bit)
Windows 2008 (32-bit)
Windows 2008 (64-bit)
Windows 2008 R2
550 MHz
1 GB RAM
1.4 GHz
1 GB RAM
1 GHz
1 GB RAM
1.4 GHz
1 GB RAM
1.4 GHz
1 GB RAM
Recommended Minimum by Users
Number of Users Light Use Moderate Use Heavy Use
1 - 25
25 - 100
100 - 250
250 - 500
500 - 1000
1000 - 2500
2 GHz
1 GB RAM
2 GHz
1 GB RAM
2 GHz
1 GB RAM
2.4 GHz
2 GB RAM
2 GHz
Dual-Core
2 GB RAM
2 GHz
Dual-Core
2 GB RAM
2.4 GHz
1 GB RAM
2.4 GHz
2 GB RAM
2.4 GHz
2 GB RAM
2 GHz
Dual-Core
2 GB RAM
2 GHz
Dual-Core
2 GB RAM
2 GHz
Dual-Core
2 GB RAM
2.4 GHz
1 GB RAM
2 GHz
Dual-Core
2 GB RAM
2 GHz
Dual-Core
2 GB RAM
2 GHz
Dual-Core
2 GB RAM
2 GHz
Dual-Core
2 GB RAM
Quad-Core
4 GB RAM
2500+
2 GHz
Dual-Core
2 GB RAM
Quad-Core
4 GB RAM
Quad-Core +
4 GB RAM+
Light use is defined by the system primarily supporting POP3 users with less than
10% of users accessing mailboxes via web mail and/or mobile devices concurrently.
Moderate use is defined as a mix of IMAP and POP3 users accessing the system with an average mailbox size less than 200 MB and less than 40% using web and/or mobile devices concurrently.
7
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Heavy use is defined as a mix of IMAP and POP3 users accessing the system with an average mailbox size exceeding 200 MB and more than 40% of users using web and or mobile devices concurrently.
Microsoft recommends at least 2 GB RAM for Windows 2008.
System Guidelines for Mobile Synchronization Usage
These are general guidelines and are an approximation based on in-house performance testing. There is no guarantee that the recommendations stated below will exactly match each particular clients needs. These estimates are based on moderate mobile synchronization usage. Initial mobile synchronization and complete resynchronization of data tend to have very high cpu usage, depending on the amount of data being synchronized.
System performance will seriously be degraded should a large number of initial synchronizations happen simultaneously.
It may be necessary to run the IMailSync application pool with multiple processes should there be a large number of mobile users.
Warning: IMailSync, IAdmin, and IClient should never be run in the same application pool.
Also, both IClient and IAdmin do not support multiple processes.
Mobile User Count
10 Users
25 Users
100 Users
250 Users
500 Users
1000 or more users
Mobile System Recommendation
2 GHz Pentium 4 with 1 GB of RAM
2.4 GHz Pentium 4 with 1 GB of RAM
2 GHz Dual Core processor with 2 GB of RAM
2.2 GHz Dual Core processor and/or up to 2.8 GHz Xeon Dual Core processor with 2 GB or RAM
High end Dual Core or low end Quad Core with 3 GB of RAM
Quad Core with 3 GB Memory or more
Required Software
Microsoft® Windows 2003 Server Service Pack 2, Microsoft® Windows 2008 Server
Note: Windows 2000 Server is no longer supported for IMail Server
Browsers supported:
Firefox 7 or later (for Microsoft Windows and Macintosh)
Google Chrome
Safari 5 browser and later
Internet Explorer 8 and later
8
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Note: Internet Explorer 7 is no longer supported for IMail Server
Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS) 6.0 and later
Microsoft Data Access Component (MDAC) 2.8 SP1 or later
Microsoft® .NET Framework 3.5 Service Pack 1
Microsoft® .NET Framework 4.0
Req uire d soft war e
For best resu lts Where to get it if you don't have it
NO
TE:
Mic ros oft
200
0
Ser ver is no
Do not depl oy
IMai l on a
Win dow s
200
0
Do mai n ws
200
8
Ser ver
Mic ros oft
Win do
Mic ros oft
Win do ws
200
3
Ser ver
SP1
Use
NTF
S file syst em
(NO
T
FAT)
App ly late st servi ce pac ks
For service packs: www.windowsupdate.com
Advice on NTFS vs FAT: http://www.microsoft.com/windowsxp/using/setup/expert/russel_october01.ms
px
9
IMail v12 Administrator Help lon ger sup por ted
.
Req uire d soft war e
For best resu lts Where to get it if you don't have it
Dire ctor y envi ron men t.
Con troll er in an
Acti ve
Mic ros oft
.NE
T
Fra me wor k
3.5
SP1 via
Win dow s
Upd ate http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/details.aspx?displaylang=en&FamilyID=ab
99342f-5d1a-413d-8319-81da479ab0d7
Win do ws
Scri pt
5.6
(par t of
Mic
Mic ros oft
.NE
T
Fra me wor k 4 via
Win dow s
Upd ate
http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/en/details.aspx?FamilyID=9cfb2d51-5ff4-449
1-b0e5-b386f32c0992&displaylang=en http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/en/de
tails.aspx?FamilyID=9cfb2d51-5ff4-4491-b0e5-b386f32c0992&displaylang=en http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/details.aspx?familyid=C717D943-7E4B-46
22-86EB-95A22B832CAA&displaylang=en
10
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Req uire d soft war e
ros oft
Inte rnet
Exp lore r 6)
For best resu lts Where to get it if you don't have it
Co mp one nt
(M
DA
C)
2.8
Mic ros oft
Dat a
Acc ess
SP1 or late r rma tion
Ser vice s
(IIS)
Mic ros oft
Inte rnet
Info
Vers ion
6.0 or high er http://www.microsoft.com/WindowsServer2003/iis/default.mspx http://msdn2.microsoft.com/en-us/data/aa937730.aspx
11
IMail v12 Administrator Help
New for Version 12
What's New in IMail Server v12
Full release notes are available at:
http://docs.ipswitch.com/_Messaging/IMailServer/v12/ReleaseNotes/index.htm
- IMail Collaboration Client
IMail Collaboration 64-bit Client is now available to synchronize messages, contacts and appointments with Microsoft Outlook 64-bit.
- IMail Configuration Export Utility
A new command prompt utility IMail Configuration Export (IMailConfigExport.exe) is now available to export all IMail registry keys. See the Web Administration Help for more details under Command Line Utilities.
- Console and Web Administration
Require Password Change for the Web Client - New user interface has been created for both the Console and Web Administration to require users to change their password when logging into the Web Client.
Note: The Console Administration has the multiple user edit capability to allow setting this new feature very easily for many users.
Allow Web Calendaring has be reworded to Enable Personal Information
Management. Personal Information Management incorporates the use of
Calendaring, Tasks and Notes.
Note: Disabling Personal Information Management will disable all features. To disable only
Calendaring and allow Tasks and Notes see help on configuring your iclient.config under
Using IMail Web Client > Configuring New Web Client > Disabling Web Client Features.
- List Administration - Headers and Trailers
Header.txt / Header.html and Trailer.txt / Trailer.html - New user interface has been created for the List Administration Header and Trailer messages to correctly handle all outgoing messages. Header.html and Trailer.html has been added to handle all outgoing HTML messages, and Header.txt and Trailer.txt will only be used for plain text list messages.
Important: After upgrading go to Domain > List Administration > List > List Header and List Trailer in the Web or Console Administration to verify your
"header.txt"
and
"trailer.txt" files
converted correctly for each list.
12
IMail v12 Administrator Help
may not be handled correctly. Find the backup
"header.old" and "trailer.old"
and correct as necessary.
Note for Upgrades: For Administrators with a
"Header.txt"
or
"Trailer.txt"
in place, the install will follow these steps:
1 Backup the
"Header.txt" and
"Trailer.txt"
files to
"Header.old" and
"Trailer.old"
.
2 The
"Header.txt" and
"Trailer.txt"
file will be copied and renamed to
"Header.html" and
"Trailer.html"
, with <pre> tags wrapped around all existing text.
3 No attempt will be made to search and strip for any preexisting tags from the original
"Header.txt"
and
"Trailer.txt"
.files. It will be left up to the IMail
Administrator to correct any list header and trailer messages that contain html tags.
- Upgrade Installation
Detection of
"iclient.config"
at the root level has been added, enabling a prompt for customers to maintain the iclient.config at the root.
- New Web Client
New System Requirements for the new Web Client requires both Microsoft .NET
Framework 3.5 Service Pack 1 and Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0.
Warning: Administrators with custom external user databases configured for one or more domains will need to make the following changes to handle the meeting requests feature for the new Web Client.
The XML Files associated with user's mailboxes are no longer required with the new
Web Client.
New Branding document for customizing the new IMail Web Client.
http://docs.ipswitch.com/_Messaging/IMailServer/v12/PDF/Branding.pdf http://docs.ipsw
itch.com/_Messaging/IMailServer/v12/PDF/Branding.pdf
New improved Telerik editor correcting issues with font formatting when using
Firefox or Safari browsers.
Note: User's with signatures that are using deprecated HTML will display incorrectly, and will need to be manually updated to recognize the new HTML controls.
New tabbed user interface for greater usability experience.
Capability to Export a user's contacts information to
".csv"
or
"vCard"
format.
Capability to Import a user's contacts from
"csv"
or
".vcf"
file formats.
13
IMail v12 Administrator Help
New IClient.config setting to lockout user for 1 minute (default setting) after 3 tries (default setting). For more information on this settings read the Admin Help under Using IMail Web Client > Configuring "IClient.config" for the Web Client, view the Login Lockout Settings.
New Auto Logout setting in the IClient.config to automatically log a user off if inactivity has been detected. Default setting is 60 minutes. To customize this setting read the Admin Help under Using IMail Web Client > Configuring "IClient.config"
for the Web Client, view the Auto Logout Setting.
Capability for the IMail Administrator to configure websites that are accessible for all users. (e.g. Archiving url to allow user to access all archived email messages, or
Company website link.)
Notes and Tasks are now available with the Web Client to be included with Calendar,
Contacts and E-mail for synchronization with Outlook.
Meeting Requests are now available allowing the ability to create and accept using the new Web Client for synchronization with Outlook when IMail Collaboration is in place.
RSS Feed now available for user's subscriptions.
Web Sites configurable by the IMail Administrators allowing easy online access for common web links. (e.g. KB Link, Mail Archiving)
New Reporting Spam feature available
Allowing user's to report new messages as spam
Report false positive messages from a user's Spam folder as NOT Spam.
Sound and blinking tab notifications when new mail arrives, with the capability to customize on a per user level.
New Alternate From Addresses that can be customized at the user options level and used as needed when sending messages.
New Auto Save to Drafts allowing user's to recover most data when loss of computer power occurs or user inadvertently exits out of browser. This new feature is a user option can be customized under the User Options > Composing Messages tab.
New Auto-Login feature giving the user the capability to by-pass the login screen once it has been set.
New Auto-Logout feature that is configurable by IMail Administrator to automatically log a user out after a certain amount of inactivity.
New links to switch between the Lite Web Client and the regular Web Client.
The iclient.config file has been greatly enhanced allowing the IMail Administrators greater capability to customize the web client to their user's needs. For more information on settings read the Admin Help under Using IMail Web Client >
Configuring New Web Client.
Away message indicator above the navigator folders to remind user's when enabled
Tool tips show mail folders that have Auto responders enabled.
Address Book enhancements
Expanded Contact Infomration (multiple addresses, websites, personal information, business information).
14
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Addresses contain link to google maps or the map engine specified by the user.
Customizable user option to set a default address book, and a default contact sort.
Users can now create multiple personal contact folders.
Photos are now supported and can now be added for contacts.
Calendar enhancements
Customizable user option to set a default calendar.
Customizable user options to specify and display the beginning time and end time for the work day
Customizable user option to set the default calendar display by day, week or month.
Users can now create multiple personal calendar folders.
Calendar display format is set to the 12 hour (am/pm) time.
Improved performance throughout for mail access, calendars and contacts.
Web Client user access is now being written to the API Logs.
Messages can be multi-selected with the following actions
Report as Not Spam
Report as Spam
Move/Copy
Mark as Read
Mark as Unread
Improved timezone/DST support. User option to allow an override of the
Automatically Determined Time zone. Customizable user option located within the web client under User Options > General Options > Timezone Offset.
Lite Web Client to support mobile devices for Email, Contacts, Calendaring, Tasks and Notes.
The New Web Client allows easier branding for customizing and displaying company logos, colors, and text.
Easier method to create custom language files for the new web client.
New Web Client Themes with the ability for customers to create their own themes
New User Configurations
New IClient.Config Settings allowing the IMail Administrators more flexibility in controlling Web Client usage. For more details on all the numerous new settings, go to the Administrator Help and select Using Web Client > Configuring
"IClient.config" for the Web Client.
Capability to disable the Web Client Forwarding of user's email. Locate the key=
"EnableForwardTo"
within the "IClient.config" file.
Customizable user option View Messages > Reading Pane Location when reading messages.
Customizable user option View Messages > Paging Styles allowing users to define their own personal paging needs.
15
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Customizable user option View Messages > Number of Items Per Page allows users to define their own personal needs for the number of messages to be displayed per page.
Customizable User Option > Contacts > Default Address Book allows users to define the contacts to display first when selecting email addresses while composing a message.
Customizable user option View Messages > Column filtering allows users to always display the column filters, or to turn off and on as needed vis the mailbox Mail
Actions.
New user option to warn a user when sending a message without an attachment, when body of the letter uses the word attachment. Update your User Options >
Composing Messages to turn this feature off.
New user option to warn a user when sending a message without a subject.
Update your User Options > Composing Messages to turn this feature off.
Ability to have initial login open a specified folder (e.g. email folder, calendars, tasks, etc...). Customize this user option located at User Options > General Options (tab) >
Initial Item To Display.
Defect Fixes and New Features for IMail Server v12
Mobile Devices
Corrected issue with SmartForward and SmartReply, where messages were not arriving correctly, when the feature is used.
Corrected handle leak for file watcher when .net updates are applied for
Activesync®.
Web Administration
Apostrophe used in the full name correctly functions for adding, modifying and deleting when using both SQL user database or IMail registry
Domain Administrators will now be required to adhere to password policies set by the System Administrators when setting or resetting a user's password.
System Setting > Default Host - Will now warn when trying to update with a non virtual domain. Entering a host alias of an IP'd domain will automatically update the
OHN.
Sharing a user's or public folder with a group will now display correctly under the
Collaboration > User > Shared Items page
List Administration
Corrected issue with
"trailer.txt"
with lists becoming an attachment when being sent with Outlook. Headers and Trailers for lists are now correctly handled with HTML and plain text messages.
Installs
16
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Silent Installer for Mail Client Apps x86.exe Installation for Instant Messaging
Client and IMail Collaboration Client now correctly installs when running in silent mode.
Install will no longer hang due to multiple IP addresses assigned to the NIC.
Install will now automatically enable ASP.NET 32-bit applications when installing on a 64-bit 2003 Server.
Upgrade Installation - Commtouch files will all be correctly updated during upgrade.
Upgrade Installation with BitDefender will upgrade without log errors and Queue
Manager service failure, due to files being improperly overwritten.
Services
Queue Manager - DSN successful delivery notifications now successfully delivers the full headers.
Postini - Corrected issue to allow messages to send using SSL when using Postini.
Queue Manager - DNS lookup for recipient (remote) domains will no longer be performed when "Send All Remote Mail Through Gateway" is set.
Queue Manager - Domain Forwarding has been corrected to work when remote gateway is configured.
Outbound SSL Connections with Yahoo - Corrected issue when using SSL to re-establish a connection on port 25 when attempting a connection on port 465 to create an implicit SSL connection.
SMTP - Whitelist has been corrected to work for "Max Invalid Recipients Per Session" a
Dictionary Attack setting.
Queue Manager - "Helo" Banner from a remote server now correctly logs after
STARTTLS.
SMTP - Invalid users will be correctly "bounced"; will no longer connect to remote server after an550 invalid user.
Queue Manager - Corrected issue where a group of recipients do not receive delivery of message once one of the addresses receives a 554 deliver error.
Corrected issue where messages were bounced once Greylisted. Message will now be requeued with a 4xx error on the receipt to.
SMTP - Advanced Setting Mailbox delimiter when updated from the "-" default will now be honored and correctly deliver messages when Commtouch Anti-spam delivery settings are set to move to SPAM mailbox.
Queue Manager - Auto forwarded messages will now have the correct Time offset included in the header message.
SMTP - Connection Checks - Mail From validation has been deferred to the Data command, to avoid two IMail Servers from looping with Mail From validation turned on.
Log Manager - Control Access - Setting to
"Allow All Except"
will now log correctly.
Archiving
17
IMail v12 Administrator Help
MailArchiva - Corrected issue with spam getting through when archiving at the user level was not checked.
IMail Collaboration (WorkgroupShare)
IMail Collaboration database users will no longer be duplicated when the reply-to
address within the Console or Web Administration is modified.
IMail Collaboration logs when activated are now correctly logging to the correct path.
"..IMail\WorkgroupShare\Data\Logs"
IMail Collaboration synchronization of recurring appointments has been corrected when setting to First Day of every one month.
Utilities
IMail Collaboration Database Converter - Utility to convert your Access
Collaboration database to SQL. Corrected issue when clicking the SQL Server selection dropdown, duplicate entries would be generated. This utility is part of the
IMail Utilities a separate installation available for download.
Forward Finder - Utility to locate all users with a Forwarding Address, with a capability to also remove the forward. This utility is part of the IMail Utilities a separate installation available for download.
"wgscvt.exe" - Utility located under the
"../IMail"
directory has been updated to add new column names to handle meeting requests for the new web client.
Adduser.exe - Corrected issue when modifying a user
"-m"
and
"-p"
is not specified, the password is left as is.
Web Client
Corrected issue of Web Client displaying the Server Timezone for receive date and not the Client Timezone. POP and IMAP were unaffected and displayed correctly.
New Web Client messages will now open links in a new browser window, and not in the current preview pane.
Spell Check now available when composing in plain text.
Word wrapping corrected for plain text messages that would display in Outlook as one long line.
WCorrected word wrapping issues that were happening in odd places, making some sentences longer than others. corrected for plain te
Font Size increased for improved visibility for the address recipients of TO: CC: and
BCC: when composing a new message.
Default Contact Folder - New Web Client has new user option to set the default contact folder when composing new messages. In the Web Client go to Action >
Manage User Options > Contacts.
Calendar - Default Initial View - New Web Client has new user option to set the initial view (Day, Week, Month) when displaying calendars. In the Web Client go to
Action > Manage User Options > Calendaring.
Import Contacts from .csv or .vcf file format - Capability to Export a user's contact information to
".csv"
or
"vCard"
format, and import to another user's contacts.
Search Filters - New Web Client are can now correctly search double-byte characters in the subject and body.
18
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Reply To and Forwarding - No longer loses CRLF formating when using plain text messaging.
Reply and Forward - Icons now appear as part of the message when messages are replied to or forwarded.
IMIP Folder will no longer be created for meeting requests.
Web Client SMTP Port Setting- New "iclient.config" setting to specify the SMTP port
(default of 25) to be used for the Web Client.
New messages composed in the Web Client can set mail priority from the Compose
Option Settings.
Safari browsers no longer will have issue where the folder tree would not display upon login.
Safari browsers can now resize the message list and preview pane.
Attachments downloaded and saved from a Web Client message will no longer replace file name spaces with "+".
Contact Selection page for selecting mail recipients will no longer become unreadable from paging when composing a new message.
Contact Selection page for selecting mail recipients when composing a new message now has search capability and no longer requires manual searching.
Contact Auto Suggest now accesses all address books attached to user's Web Client.
Contacts paging slider was replaced with a scroll bar, correcting the problem of the paging bar disappearing when too many contacts were viewing telephone number information.
Issues using Shift+ Click when selecting multiple messages for deletion and random messages not deleting when not using checkboxes has been corrected with the new
Web Client.
Shift+ Click and Ctrl+ Click now works with the checkbox user option turned on.
Incorporating Calendars into the main navigation panel with the Web Client corrected the Calendar paging issue where no scroll bar appeared when multiple calendars existed.
With Calendars now available on the main navigation panel, reminders for calendar appointments will work with opening the calendar.
IE9 browsers can now handle Calendar start and stop times when creating/ updating a new appointment.
Message folder names containing special characters can now be used without issue.
Special characters that are problems will not be allowed as valid when created.
Issue with some messages displaying raw html incorrectly in the Web Client has been corrected.
Firefox issue of sending a blank message when user has new messages set to use plain text, and then opts to switch to "HTML".
Firefox context menu displays correctly when right-clicking on a mail message.
Corrected javascript error that was being thrown when using Firefox, IE7, IE8 and
IE9 browsers and clicking on Move/Copy when in a new window.
Corrected issue with chrome browsers not allowing the border between the message list and preview pane to be resized.
19
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Inserting bullets/numbering will no longer apply to all text within the body of the message, when composing a new message.
Ipswitch Instant Messaging
Corrected tiny font size when printing conversation headers.
Corrected issue of Ipswitch Instant Messaging Client no longer allowing drag and drop of user names into personal groups.
Adding a user via the IIM Console Administrator will now correctly add new users.
Messaging
Accessing the IMail Web Administration
After installation, you have the option to launch the IMail Web Administrator automatically. If you choose not to launch the IMail Web Administrator automatically, in your browser address box, type the IP address or URL of the IMail Web Server followed by the Web Admin path.
Note: Administrators can access their web admin using localhost to bypass login, when issues with domain configuration arise.
"http://localhost/IAdmin".
Example:
1 http ://123.100.100.80/IAdmin, then press ENTER. The Ipswitch Web Admin login page appears.
-OR-
For IMail Server, click Start > Programs > Ipswitch IMail Server > IMail Server
Administration. The Ipswitch Web Admin login page appears.
2 Enter your Username and Password. The Installed Ipswitch Products page appears.
3 Click IMail Server. The IMail Server Web Admin main page appears.
Note: Web Messaging directly accesses the server to manage mail, and no longer requires
IMAP.
on the Queue Manager (on page 408) and SMTP (on page 413) service in the Web Admin,
under the Services tab.
20
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Using Internet Information Services (IIS) Virtual
Directories
IMail Administrator and IMail Web Messaging (Web client) use Microsoft® Internet
Information Services (IIS) virtual directories to identify where the administrator and client
Web files are located. By default, the installation program installs the admin files in the
IAdmin virtual directory and the client files in the IClient virtual directory.
Changing IIS Virtual Directory names
If you want to change the IMail Administrator virtual directory, you need to change the following registry key entries to the new virtual directory name that you changed in the IIS
Console:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail\Global\WebRoot
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\Messenger Server \Settings\WebRoot
If you want to change the IMail Web Messaging virtual directory, no registry key change is required.
See the IIS help for additional information about renaming virtual directories.
Additional Resources
The following is a list of resources that you can use to get help with your IMail Server:
IMail Administration Server Help
Help is always available by clicking Help in all Ipswitch products. It provides information about IMail configuration, advanced configuration, services options, mailing lists, and more.
This online help is also available online at:
http://docs.ipswitch.com/_Messaging/IMailServer/v12/Help/Admin/index.htm
Release Notes
The release notes, located in the Start > Programs > Ipswitch IMail Server >
Documentation folder, provide an overview of changes, known issues, and bug fixes for the current release. The notes also contain instructions for upgrading IMail Server and configuring external databases.
These release notes are also available at:
http://docs.ipswitch.com/_Messaging/IMailServer/v12/ReleaseNotes/index.htm
DomainKeys / DKIM Getting Started Guide
The DomainKeys / DKIM Getting Started Guide was created to assist IMail
Administrators with initializing and setting up DomainKeys / DKIM selectors.
21
IMail v12 Administrator Help
http://docs.ipswitch.com/_Messaging/IMailServer/v11.01/PDF/DomainKeysGSG.pdf
Mobile Device setup to use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync®
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® can be activated with the purchase of a user license.
The Mobile Client Getting Started Guide is available to assist customers to configure their mobile devices to use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync®.
This document will help configure the following mobile devices:
Windows Mobile®
iPhone™ and iPod Touch™ with Software OS Version 2.2.1 and later
Blackberry®
Android™
http://docs.ipswitch.com/_Messaging/IMailServer/PDF/MobileDeviceConfig.pdf
Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS) Help
Use the IIS help for additional information about IIS setup and configuration.
Archiving Getting Started Guide (Archiving products available separately)
The Archiving Getting Started Guide will help IMail Administrators in deciding which
Archiving option is best for them, and then also to install and setup.
http://docs.ipswitch.com/_Messaging/Archiving/GettingStarted/Archiving2.6.p
df
IMail Server Getting Started Guide. Provides instructions for planning, installing, and testing your IMail Server software.
http://docs.ipswitch.com/_Messaging/IMailServer/v12/GettingStarted/index.ht
m
http://docs.ipswitch.com/_Messaging/IMailServer/v12/PDF/GettingStarted.pdf
-OR-
Start > All Programs > Ipswitch > IMail Server > Documentation > IMail Getting
Started Guide.
IMail Support Center
The IMail Support Center provides a number of resources including the following:
User Guides
Domain Name System (DNS) help
Access to product updates, utilities, Knowledge Base (KB) articles, and other IMail resources.
22
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Technical support information, such as e-mail support forms, service agreements, and licensing information.
IMail user forum, which gives you an opportunity to interact with other IMail and customers to share tips and tricks.
You can access the IMail Support Center at http://www.imailserver.com/support/.
Visit Our Web Site
For more information about Ipswitch products and services, visit the Ipswitch web site at
http://www.imailserver.com http://www.imailserver.com for IMail products and
http://www.ipswitch.com http://www.ipswitch.com for all Ipswitch products.
Sales
IMail Sales - (706) 312-3540
Fax - (706) 312-0899
Technical Support
IMail Support - (706) 312-3550
Main Support - (706) 312-3500
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
9:00 am - 6:00 pm EST
9:00 am - 6:00 pm EST
10:30 am - 6:00 pm EST
9:00 am - 6:00 pm EST
9:00 am - 6:00 pm EST
Be sure to have your Sales Agreement available before calling.
IMail Getting Started Guide Links
http://docs.ipswitch.com/_Messaging/IMailServer/v12/GettingStarted/index.ht
m
http://docs.ipswitch.com/_Messaging/IMailServer/v12/PDF/GettingStarted.pdf
-OR-
Start > All Programs > Ipswitch > IMail Server > Documentation > IMail Getting
Started Guide.
23
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Installing Patches and Upgrades
If a software patch is created to fix a bug in the currently shipping version of a product,
Ipswitch will make the patch available on our web site.
Product upgrades to extend capabilities are also made available on our FTP and Web sites. A valid service agreement for IMail Server includes major product upgrades for twelve months.
To download software from the Ipswitch web site:
1 In your Web browser, go to: http://www.imailserver.com/support/patch-upgrades.asp
2 Select the appropriate patch or upgrade.
3 Follow the on-screen instructions.
Important: If you are upgrading from IMail Server prior to version 8.1, an LDAP database conversion occurs during installation. The conversion can take a lengthy amount of time depending on the number of domains to convert. If the LDAP data is not available after the upgrade, run the LDAP Convert utility to correct the issue. In the command line utility, type: ldaper /CONVERT /Y
Related Topics
Upgrades/Repairs - Checking the Registry (regcheck.exe) (on page 459)
Table of Features
Feature
Solid, scalable, standards-bas ed Email
Server with
Web Mail and
List Server
Basic
anti-spam with blacklists,
Bayesian filters, phrase filters, and more.
IMa il
IMail
Premiu m
IMail
Secur e
Microsoft
Exchange
ActiveSyn c®
IMail
Anti-virus powered by
BitDefend er®
IMail
Anti-viru s powered by
Symante c™
IMail
Anti-virus powered by
Commtouc h®
Commtouc h®
Zero-Hour
Virus
Protection
24
IMail v12 Administrator Help
DomainKeys
/ DKIM is a domain-level e-mail authenticatio n standard that uses public/private key encryption and DNS to prove e-mail legitimacy.
IMail
Collaboratio
n - Microsoft®
Outlook contacts to transfer and sync with
IMail Web
Client and mobile devices.
Premium
Anti-spam
-by
Commtouch
Feature
Basic security with SMTP authenticatio n, dictionary attack sensing, and anti-hammeri ng.
IMa il
IMail
Premiu m
Secure
Instant
Messaging is a network-base d
Client/Server system with
Smart Tag support.
IMail
Secur e
Microsoft
Exchange
ActiveSyn c®
IMail
Anti-virus powered by
BitDefend er®
IMail
Anti-viru s powered by
Symante c™
IMail
Anti-virus powered by
Commtouc h®
Commtouc h®
Zero-Hour
Virus
Protection
25
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Feature
Advanced
Security
Daemon (aka ctasd™) a plug-and-play email-borne spam and malware outbreak detection daemon.
IMa il
Premium
Anti-spam by
Commtouch' s
GlobalView™
Reputation
Service (IP
Reputation) fights unwanted mail at the perimeter, reducing incoming messages at the entry-point, before these messages enter the network.
Microsoft
Exchange
ActiveSync®
allows synchronizing their e-mail, contacts, calendars, notes & tasks with their mobile devices.
IMail
Premiu m
IMail
Secur e
Microsoft
Exchange
ActiveSyn c®
IMail
Anti-virus powered by
BitDefend er®
IMail
Anti-viru s powered by
Symante c™
IMail
Anti-virus powered by
Commtouc h®
Commtouc h®
Zero-Hour
Virus
Protection
26
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Feature
IMail
Anti-virus powered by
BitDefender®
.
IMail
Anti-virus
powered by
Symantec™
IMail
Anti-virus
powered by
Commtouch®
IMa il
Commtouch®
Zero-hour
Virus
Protection
IMail
Premiu m
IMail
Secur e
Microsoft
Exchange
ActiveSyn c®
IMail
Anti-virus powered by
BitDefend er®
IMail
Anti-viru s powered by
Symante c™
IMail
Anti-virus powered by
Commtouc h®
Commtouc h®
Zero-Hour
Virus
Protection
Helpful Definitions
Address, Simple vs. Complete: A complete e-mail address includes the user ID and the domain name; for example, [email protected].
Authenticated users: Are users who have SMTP Authentication enabled on their e-mail client, or users who send mail from IMail Web Messaging.
By default, IMail Server forces users to authenticate, unless you select another option such as Relay Mail for Anyone or Relay Mail for Addresses in the Mail Relay Settings
(located at the Services tab > SMTP). This means that every time a user connects to the
IMail Server, he/she must enter a user ID and password.
Domain (Host) Administrator: A Domain Administrator can add, modify, or delete users or aliases (except program aliases) on the mail domain (host) he or she has permissions to. Domain Administrators also include all List Administrator permissions.
Domain Administrators cannot delete System Administrator accounts, permissions, or change other System Administrator settings. Domain Administrators will not display
System Administrator rules or file directory information.
List Administrator: A List Administrator can add, modify, or delete any list server mailing list on the mail domain(s) he or she has list admin permissions to.
27
IMail v12 Administrator Help
System Administrator: A System Administrator has full administration capabilities for all IMail permissions and options. System Administrators have both domain and list administrator permissions.
User ID: This is the user ID for the mail account. The user ID must be unique within the domain. It must be between 1 and 30 characters and cannot contain spaces.
Hyphens can be used in the user ID, but be aware that IMail Server will use the last hyphen in the user ID to delimit a mailbox name.
Example: If mail is sent to the address [email protected], IMail Server reads
"accounts" as a mailbox that belongs to mr-fred.
Windows NT registry, add a "GLOBAL IMail key of MailBoxSplitChar" and specify the new character as the first character of the string value.
File Attachment Settings
The installation program automatically configures Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS
) 6.0 or later.
An IIS configuration file, Web.config, is installed during the installation routine. A file attribute, maxRequestLength, in the Web.config file is set to 102400 KB (100 MB). This attribute sets the maximum amount of data that can be uploaded using IIS.
Important:
maxRequestLength attribute in the
Web.config file and that you manage the Max. Outbound Message Size and Single Message Maximum Size in the Domain Properties page of the Web
Administrator. For more information, contact your e-mail administrator.
IMail Processing Order
Incoming mail addressed to a valid local address is processed in the following order.
1 SMTP Access Control. The SMTPD service checks if the connecting IP is listed in the
Access Control dialog box. If it is listed in deny access list, the connection is denied. If it is listed in the grant access list, the connection is allowed and processing continues.
2 SMTP Kill File. The SMTP service checks if the e-mail address listed in the "Mail FROM" address command to see if it is listed in the Kill List.. If the address or domain present, the SMTP service returns an error to the connecting client and does not accept the message. If no match is found, the SMTP service accepts the message.
3 Commtouch's GlobalView™ Mail Reputation Service (IP Reputation available with
IMail Premium). If enabled, fights unwanted mail at the perimeter, reducing incoming messages at the entry-point, before these messages enter the network.
28
IMail v12 Administrator Help
4 DomainKeys / DKIM Verification. If you have DomainKeys / DKIM verification enabled, you can control incoming e-mail identified as spam by signature errors.
5 Connection Filtering (Realtime Blacklists). If you have Realtime Blacklists enabled,
IMail compares the connecting IP address to the blacklists to determine if a match occurs. If a match occurs, the e-mail may be deleted (depending on the Realtime
Blacklist configuration) or an X-Header may be added and processing continues.
6 Verification Tests. If you have the verification tests enabled, they verify the "Mail
FROM" address, the HELO/EHLO domain, and perform a reverse DNS lookup. If any of these checks fail, the e-mail may be deleted (depending on the configuration) or an
X-Header may be added and processing continues.
7 Sender Policy Framework (SPF). If you have the SPF feature enabled, it provides increased capability to stop incoming e-mail from forged e-mail addresses. Using a sender authentication scheme, a domain owner requires that legitimate messages from a domain must meet certain SPF criteria. Messages that do not meet the criteria are not accepted as a legitimate e-mail message and are processed according to the SPF options selected on the SPF tab.
8 IMail Anti-virus. If you have IMail Anti-virus installed, it checks the message for infected files or code. If infected, the mail is repaired, bounced, redirected, or deleted, according to the settings on the Anti-Virus tab. If the file is not infected, content filtering attempts to identify whether the message is spam .
9 Premium Anti-spam. If you have the optional Premium Anti-spam filter installed, it provides automated spam protection in addition to the Standard Anti-spam filter included in IMail. Premium Anti-spam filter settings are applied before Standard
Anti-spam filter settings.
10 Content Filtering. If you have content filtering enabled, it determines if the message is likely to be spam. If the message is determined to be spam, it is either deleted, sent to the specified address, or an X-Header is inserted. If the message is not spam, aliases are checked.
11 Alias. IMail Server checks to see if the addressee matches an alias in the destination domain. An alias is considered to be any of the following: standard alias, group alias, program alias, or a list-server mailing list name.
If there is a match to a program, IMail Server executes the program.
If there is a match to a standard or group alias, IMail Server resolves the alias to the appropriate user ID(s), and checks the user ID.
If there is a match to a list-server mailing list name, IMail Server (a) processes the mail according to the settings for that list, and (b) checks the user IDs specified in the list settings.
If no match to any alias, IMail Server checks the user ID.
12 User ID. IMail Server determines if the user ID is valid for the destination domain. If invalid, the mail is returned to the sender. If valid, the delivery rules for a list-server mailing list are checked.
13 Delivery rules. a) Delivery Rules for the List-Server mailing list. If the message matches the rule criteria for a list, delivery follows according to the rule. If not, then the message is sent to the list server. If the message is not addressed to a list, Forwarding is checked.
29
IMail v12 Administrator Help
b) Delivery Rules for the Host. IMail Server determines if the message matches a rule for the mail host. If so, delivery follows according to that rule. If not, then rules for the user ID are checked. c) Delivery Rules for the User ID. IMail Server determines if the message matches rule criteria for the user ID. If the message matches rule criteria for a user ID, then delivery follows according to the rule. If not, then Info Manager is checked.
14 Forwarding. IMail Server determines whether an address is present in the Forward box on the General tab for this account. If so, IMail Server forwards the mail. If not, the mail is delivered to the user ID according to the established delivery rules.
15 Info Manager. IMail Server determines whether the user ID has the Info Manager enabled. If so, the automatic response is sent and the message is delivered to either the forwarding address or (if no forwarding address) to the sub-area or mailbox specified. If the Info Manager is not enabled for this user ID, the vacation setting is checked as described in the next step.
16 Vacation. IMail Server determines whether the user ID has a vacation message enabled.
If so, the vacation message is sent. If not, the message is delivered to the User ID.
30
CHAPTER 2
Installing
In This Chapter
Installing IMail Server Administrator ........................................................... 31
Setting the E-Mail Domain Name (Official Host Name) ........................ 35
Folder Permissions and IIS Configuration .................................................. 37
Installing IMail Server Administrator
IMail Administrator uses InstallShield® Wizard to install the IMail Server on your computer.
Use the on-screen instructions to select the installation features that set up the mail server to your requirements.
In addition to using the IMail installation program, the following software components should be installed on your mail server computer to make the mail server fully functional:
Req uire d soft war e
For best resu lts Where to get it if you don't have it
Mic ros oft
Win do ws
200
3
Ser ver
SP1
Use
NTF
S
App ly late st servi ce pac ks
For service packs: www.windowsupdate.com
Advice on NTFS vs FAT: http://www.microsoft.com/windowsxp/using/setup/expert/russel_october01.ms
px
31
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Req uire d soft war e
Mic ros oft
Win do ws
200
8
Ser ver an
Acti ve
Dire ctor y
Do mai n
Con troll er in envi ron men t. a
Win dow s
200
0
Do not depl oy
IMai l on
ver is no lon ger sup por ted
.
NO
TE:
Mic ros oft
200
0
Ser
For best resu lts Where to get it if you don't have it
file syst em
(NO
T
FAT)
32
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Req uire d soft war e
For best resu lts Where to get it if you don't have it
Mic ros oft
.NE
T
Fra me wor k
3.5
SP1 via
Win dow s
Upd ate http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/details.aspx?displaylang=en&FamilyID=ab
99342f-5d1a-413d-8319-81da479ab0d7
(par t of
Mic ros oft
Inte rnet
Exp lore r 6)
Win do ws
Scri pt
5.6
Mic ros oft
.NE
T
Fra me wor k 4 via
Win dow s
Upd ate
http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/en/details.aspx?FamilyID=9cfb2d51-5ff4-449
1-b0e5-b386f32c0992&displaylang=en http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/en/de
tails.aspx?FamilyID=9cfb2d51-5ff4-4491-b0e5-b386f32c0992&displaylang=en http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/details.aspx?familyid=C717D943-7E4B-46
22-86EB-95A22B832CAA&displaylang=en
Mic ros oft
Inte rnet
Info
Vers ion
6.0 or high http://www.microsoft.com/WindowsServer2003/iis/default.mspx
33
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Co mp one nt
(M
DA
Mic ros oft
Dat a
Acc ess
C)
2.8
SP1 or late r
Req uire d soft war e
rma tion
Ser vice s
(IIS) er
For best resu lts Where to get it if you don't have it
http://msdn2.microsoft.com/en-us/data/aa937730.aspx
Install will prompt for any components that are not installed on the server and will cancel installation, until the component is installed.
Note: Administrators can access their Web Administrator using
"localhost"
to bypass login, when issues with domain configuration arise.
"http://localhost/IAdmin".
Related Topic
Upgrades/Repairs Only - Checking the Registry (regcheck.exe) (on page 459)
System Requirements (on page 6)
34
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Setting the E-Mail Domain Name (Official Host
Name)
Enter the complete e-mail domain name (official host name) for your IMail Server. For example, mail.domain.com.
IMail Server installation wizard attempts to automatically enter the fully qualified domain name of the machine for this field. Confirm (or enter) the official host name of the system on which you are installing IMail Server. This will be the "primary host."
The mail server host name and domain must be registered in the DNS (Domain Name System) in order for remote hosts to be able to communicate with your e-mail server. Your DNS must contain the proper entries for the host name you see here.
If you have any doubts about what to enter for the e-mail domain name, you can exit the installation program and check the DNS information for the system on which you intend to install IMail Server (the primary host).
The DNS server for the local network must appear as the first listed item on the Domain tab
menu list box. See Managing Domains (on page 129) for more information.
If you do not want to use the official host name of your server as the name of the primary mail host, you can create an alias for the primary mail host. See Setting Up an Alias for a Host
Setting Up an Alias for a Host
IMail Server accepts mail addressed to the official host name of the system on which IMail
Server is installed. You can set up an alias for the official host name so that IMail Server recognizes another name as valid. For example, if the official host name is mail.domain .com , you can receive mail addressed to [email protected], where "user" is a valid user on the host.
If you also want IMail Server to accept mail addressed to [email protected], you must enter
"domain.com" as an alias for the official host name. It can be entered in the Domain Aliases box on the Domain Properties page. To access the Domain Aliases box, see Getting to
Domain Properties.
Example:
If the mail domain name is mail.domain2.com , you can set an alias of domain2.com so that
IMail Server accepts mail addressed to [email protected] and [email protected].
Note: Host Alias requires also that the proper updates to DNS must be made to work correctly.
35
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Setting Database Options
Select the database you want to store user accounts in:
NT/AD User Database. IMail Server creates a user mail account for each user listed in the Windows NT Database, or Active Directory. users using IMail Administrator.
IMail User Database. User IDs and passwords for mail accounts are stored in a database on the IMail Server (in the registry).
External Database (ODBC Compliant). IMail uses an external database (on page 70)
to register and authenticate users. Users that you add and delete using IMail will be added to and deleted from that external database and vice versa.
System DSN
If you select External Database (on page 70), you must specify the ODBC System Data Source
Name (DSN ) for the database where the user information is stored. IMAILSECDB is the default name that the IMail ODBC link uses.
Installing SSL Keys
The IMail Server provides an SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) capability that lets SMTP , POP3 , and
IMAP connect more securely. The SSL capability relies on keys that are stored in the Windows registry.
If you have a third-party SSL certificate, click No. After installing IMail, create a
Self-Signed SSL Certificate(sslutility.exe) (on page 463)
If you do NOT have a third-party SSL certificate, but want to run the IMail web server using a "self-signed" SSL certificate, click Yes.
If you would like to read more about SSL before you make a decision, click No. You can install default keys later.
36
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Related Topic
Self-Signed SSL Certificate(sslutility.exe) (on page 463)
Folder Permissions and IIS Configuration
IMail Folder Permissions and IIS Configuration
Folder Rights
Product
Web Admin
Web Admin
Web Admin
Web Client
Web Client
Folder
Product Folder
(C:\Program Files\Ipswitch\IMail)
WorkgroupShare install folder, if outside of
IMail folder
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Ipswitch
(Registry)
Product Folder
(C:\Program Files\Ipswitch\IMail)
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Ipswitch
(Registry)
User
IIS6: computername_IUSR,
Network Service, and
IIS_WPG
IIS7: IUSR and
Network Service
IIS6: computername_IUSR,
Network Service, and
IIS_WPG
IIS7: IUSR and
Network Service
IIS6: computername_IUSR,
Network Service, and
IIS_WPG
IIS7: IUSR and
Network Service
IIS6: computername_IUSR,
Network Service, and
IIS_WPG
IIS7: IUSR and
Network Service
IIS6: computername_IUSR,
Network Service, and
IIS_WPG
IIS7: IUSR and
Network Service
Rights
Full
Full
Full
Full
Full
37
IMail v12 Administrator Help
IIS Settings
Enable ASP.NET (Version 6+ only)
IIS6: Create Virtual Directory: IAdmin
Path: C:\Program
Files\Ipswitch\IMail\WebDir\WebAdmin
Default Document: default.asp
Application Pool (IIS 6): DefaultAppPool
Application Pool (IIS7): Must use classic managed pipeline
Path: C:\Program
Files\Ipswitch\IMail\WebDir\WebAdmin
Default Document: default.aspx
Application Pool (IIS 6): DefaultAppPool
IIS7: Create Application: IAdmin
IIS6: Create Virtual Directory: IClient
IIS7: Create Application: IClient
Path: C:\Program
Files\Ipswitch\IMail\WebDir\WebAdmin
Default Document: default.aspx
Application Pool (IIS7): Must use classic managed pipeline
Path: C:\Program
Files\Ipswitch\IMail\WebDir\WebClient
Default Document: default.aspx
Application Pool (IIS 6): DefaultAppPool
Path: C:\Program
Files\Ipswitch\IMail\WebDir\WebClient
Default Document: default.aspx
Application Pool (IIS7): Must use classic managed pipeline
Disable anonymous access to the following directory:
Directory: IMail/Services
Disable Anonymous Access
Enable Parent Paths
Enable Parent Paths for the following virtual directories:
IAdmin
IClient
Important:
If Microsoft .NET is installed, but not configured to work with IIS, run the following command: x:\WINDOWS\Microsoft.NET\Framework\v2.0.50727\aspnet_regiis.exe -i
-enable (where x: is the appropriate drive letter).
If your mail domain is using an external user database, then you must set user permissions for the external database for it to function correctly in ICS.
38
IMail v12 Administrator Help
When you configure a DSN to an SQL data source in the Microsoft Windows ODBC Data
Source Administrator, it may default to Named Pipes network library. Make sure that you set the connection type to TCP/IP in order for the external database to work correctly.
If you are currently using an external user database with an earlier (pre-v7.0) version of IMail, you must add a new set of required columns to the database table in which user information is stored. Please refer to the "External Database Changes" entry in the Release Notes section of this document for details.
If you are upgrading from IMail Server prior to version 8.1, an LDAP database conversion occurs during installation. The conversion can take a lengthy amount of time depending on the number of domains to convert. If the LDAP data is not available after the upgrade, run the LDAP Convert utility to correct the issue. In the command line utility, type: ldaper /CONVERT /Y
For more information, see the IMail Administrator Help.
If you select an install directory other than the default install directory, make sure that the IIS IUSR_<computer name> user has Administrative access to that install directory. For more information, see the Folder Rights section.
Using IIS Virtual Directories
IMail Administrator and IMail Web Messaging (Web client) use Microsoft Internet Information
Services (IIS) virtual directories to identify where the administrator and client Web files are located. By default, the installation program will install the admin files in the IAdmin virtual directory and the client files in the IClient virtual directory.
Changing IIS Virtual Directory names
If you want to change the IMail Administrator virtual directory, you need to change the following registry key entries to the new virtual directory name that you changed in the IIS
Console:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail\Global\WebRoot
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\Messenger Server\Settings\WebRoot
If you want to change the IMail Web Messaging virtual directory, no registry key change is required. See the IIS help for additional information about renaming virtual directories.
Installing Patches and Upgrades
If a software patch is created to fix a bug in the currently shipping version of a product,
Ipswitch will make the patch available on our web site.
Product upgrades to extend capabilities are also made available on our FTP and Web sites. A valid service agreement for IMail Server includes major product upgrades for twelve months.
39
IMail v12 Administrator Help
To download software from the Ipswitch web site:
1 In your Web browser, go to: http://www.imailserver.com/support/patch-upgrades.asp
2 Select the appropriate patch or upgrade.
3 Follow the on-screen instructions.
Important: If you are upgrading from IMail Server prior to version 8.1, an LDAP database conversion occurs during installation. The conversion can take a lengthy amount of time depending on the number of domains to convert. If the LDAP data is not available after the upgrade, run the LDAP Convert utility to correct the issue. In the command line utility, type: ldaper /CONVERT /Y
Related Topics
Upgrades/Repairs - Checking the Registry (regcheck.exe) (on page 459)
Using the IMail Installation Log File
The IMail installation wizard generates an install log file to help you troubleshoot software installation issues. If you selected the default installation folders, the log file is located in
C:\install-log-mm-dd-yyyy.txt.
During installation each action that occurred with respect to permissions or IIS is prefixed with "***".
Permissions are logged as follows:
*** C:\WINDOWS\system32\cacls.exe "C:\Program Files\Ipswitch\IMail" /T /E
/G IUSR_WIN2K3- SRVR:F processed dir: C:\Program Files\Ipswitch\IMail processed file: C:\Program Files\Ipswitch\IMail\ActivationStub.exe
processed file: C:\Program Files\Ipswitch\IMail\AVReadMe.htm
processed file: C:\Program Files\Ipswitch\IMail\IMailLogo.jpg
processed file: C:\Program Files\Ipswitch\IMail\css_releasenotes.css
Tip: "No
Mapping" or "!!!."
The first line is the command string used to set the permissions. If this fails, instead of seeing
"processed" lines in the log file, you will see:
*** C:\WINDOWS\system32\cacls.exe "C:\Program
Files\Ipswitch\Collaboration Suite" /T /E /G IUSR_WIN2K3- SRVR:F
40
IMail v12 Administrator Help
No mapping between account names and security IDs was done.
IIS settings in the log file are not as detailed. If the item is not prefixed with "!!!" followed by
"Failed," then it was successful. For example, the first line in the following example is a success:
*** Disabling anonymous rights on "IIM /Status.asp".
*** Disabling anonymous rights on "IIM/StartStopServices.asp".
The following line, disabling the anonymous rights on IIM/StartStopServices.asp, failed because it is followed by an "!!! Failed.":
!!! Failed to disable anonymous rights on "IIM/StartStopServices.asp".
41
CHAPTER 3
Mail Domain (Host) Configuration
In This Chapter
Configuring an NT/AD database ................................................................... 55
About Virtual Mail Domains (Hosts) ............................................................. 56
Bouncing Spam Messages using Rules ....................................................... 58
Setting up a Dial-up Internet Connection ................................................. 59
Changing the IP Address of a Host ............................................................... 63
Setting up IMail Server as a Backup Mail Spooler ................................... 65
Domain Properties
How to get here
Use the Domain Properties to add a new mail domain, add or update a domain alias, enable virus scanning, and set other message and mailbox properties.
General Domain Settings
Domain Name (Official Host Name or OHN ). The current domain name used to address mail to the users on the mail domain is displayed. For example, company.com is the domain name in the address [email protected].
TCP /IP Address. Select "Select an IP Address" to use an IP address (domain) for the
mail domain or select Virtual (virtual IP address (on page 56)) to use a non-IP-ed
domain.
Changing the IP Address of a Host (on page 63) for more information.
Top Directory. Enter the name or Browse to the directory where users, lists, and web files for this mail domain are stored.
42
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Domain Aliases. Specify alternate domain names for which you want the mail domain to accept mail. Multiple aliases are separated by a space. This field is limited to 255 characters.
Administration (on page 386) page in order for the change to take effect correctly.
Example: If the mail domain name is mail.domain2.com , you can set an alias of domain2.com so that IMail Server accepts mail addressed to [email protected] and [email protected].
Note: Host Alias requires also that the proper updates to DNS must be made to work correctly.
Domain Options
Enable Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync®. (Enabled by default) Allows all enabled users for the specified domain to use ActiveSync® for synchronizing mobile devices with their web client information for e-mail, contacts, calendars, tasks and notes.
Outlook synchronization is also capable, but requires installing the IMail Collaboration
Client. Once installed Outlook will synchronize e-mail, contacts, calendars, tasks and notes with their mobile devices.
See the Mobile Synchronization Setup (on page 83) for more information.
Warning: Disabling ActiveSync® at the domain level will disable all ActiveSync® users on the specified domain, overriding the User Property setting.
Tip: For a single user to begin using Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® there are 3 levels that require Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® to be enabled: 1) System level, 2) Domain level
(see Domain Properties) and 3) the User level (See User Properties).
Enable Personal Information Management. Enables the use of Calendaring, Notes and Tasks for all Web Client users within the domain.
Important:
"iclient.config"
can control the access of the above tools on a system wide
basis only.
Example:
To enable Calendaring, and disable Notes and Tasks. The domain level or user level
Personal Information Management must be enabled, then modify the following keys in
"iclient.config"
:
<add value="true" Key="EnableAppointments"/>
<add value="true" Key="EnableMeetingRequests"/>
43
IMail v12 Administrator Help
<add value="false" Key="EnableNotes"/>
<add value="false" Key="EnableTasks"/>
Enable Ipswitch Instant Messaging (selected by default if available in software version). Specify whether the current mail domain will allow access to the Ipswitch
Instant Messaging service.
Note: If Enable Ipswitch Instant Messaging and/or Enable Personal Information
Management is selected at the mail domain level, it can be selected or cleared for each user
of the mail domain on the User Properties (on page 145) page.
Enable Virus Scanning (selected by default if available in software version).
If this option is selected, virus scanning is performed for:
the primary domain
any virtual domain (IP-less) that is bound to the primary domain
If this option is cleared, virus scanning is performed for:
any virtual domain (IP-less) that is bound to the primary domain and has the anti-virus option selected at the virtual domain level.
Enable image suppression for e-mail messages. Checked by default. This feature will suppress images for all messages. Once the link has been clicked, the images will always display when the message is selected.
Note: Once the link above the message is clicked, the images will always display when the message is selected.
Tip: When enabled at the Domain Property level, control is hidden from the users. Disabling at the Domain Property level gives user capability to control this option under their user settings.
Enable javascript removal for e-mail messages. Checked by default. This feature when checked will search all messages and disable any javascript encountered.
Tip: When enabled at the Domain Property level, control is hidden from the users. Disabling at the Domain Property level gives user capability to control this option under their user settings.
Enable Archiving. This check box allows the IMail Administrator the control of enabling/disabling specific domains for message archiving. Further user-level control can be made on the User Properties page.
Tip: The System Setting must be enabled for Mail-box Based Archiving, to allow domain-level Archiving to be enabled.
Tip: For existing domains with users requiring disabling/enabling for archiving use the
Console Administrator bulk-edit feature. Simply select necessary users on the Users page, and click edit. Any modifications made will update only selected users.
44
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Note: Disabling Archiving at the domain-level will ignore all user-level settings.
Message and Mailbox Options
Default Maximum Mailbox Size. (0 is default value). Enter the default maximum size
(in bytes, KB, MB, or GB) of all the mailboxes in each user account. Enter zero for an unlimited mailbox size for each user.
Max. Outbound Message Size. (0 is default value). Enter the maximum size (in bytes,
KB, MB, or GB) of an outbound message. Any message that is larger than the size entered will be bounced. Enter 0 for an unlimited maximum outbound message size.
For more information, see File Attachment Settings. (on page 28)
Single Message Maximum Size. (0 is default value). Enter the maximum size (in bytes, KB, MB, or GB) of a single message. Messages that exceed this size are returned to the sender. Enter 0 for an unlimited single message maximum size. For more
information, see File Attachment Settings. (on page 28)
Full Mailbox Notify (percentage). (0 is default value). Enter a percentage that users will be notified when their mailbox is within a specified percentage of being full.
Enter 0 for no full mailbox notification. Example (on page 73). See also customizing the
notification message (on page 73).
Full Mailbox Notify Address. Enter an additional address where an e-mail will be sent when a user's mailbox is almost full. For example, this could be the system administrator's address.
Default Maximum Messages. (0 is default value) Enter the default maximum number of messages allowed in each user’s mailbox. Enter 0 for an unlimited number of messages.
Maximum User Count. (0 is default value) Enter the maximum number of users that can be registered for this mail domain. Enter 0 for an unlimited number of users.
Designed as a control for Domain Administrators only.
Domain Administrators will not be able to add users once the Max User Count has been met. A message on the User Administration page will also display: "The User
Limit for the domain has been reached".
System Administrators will override the maximum user count. Only Domain
Administrators will be stopped from adding new users past the maximum allowed.
Current User Count. Displays the current number of users registered for this mail domain.
Sub- mailbox Creation. Select how to handle a message when it arrives for a user and is addressed to a sub-mailbox that does not exist. Select one of the following actions:
Create. (Default setting) Creates the sub-mailbox and delivers the message.
45
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Send to Inbox. Does not create the sub-mailbox. Instead the message is delivered to the "main" mailbox.
Bounce. Bounces the mail back to the sender as an invalid e-mail address.
Minimum POP Frequency (minutes). Enter the number of minutes delay between
POP logins for each user. The default is 0 (or unlimited) logins. popping to one mailbox per user per domain. If you create more than one mailbox for a user, that mailbox will receive mail, but the user will be unable to access it unless the POP frequency is set at 0 (zero). An error message is sent to the client and logging in is denied,
Different e-mail clients may handle this error differently.
Example: Outlook and Outlook Express display the userid/password dialog box continuously. If you click Cancel, the error message the POP server returns is: "-ERR login frequency exceeded - try again later" User Database Setting.
User Login Settings
Tip: To reset a suspended account, go to User Properties page and uncheck "Account
Suspended" check box. This will reset the user's failed login attempts to zero.
Tip: A successful login will also reset failed login attempts to zero.
Allowed Login Attempts Before Account Lockout (Default Setting = 3). Allows the user "X" login attempts before displaying:
"You have exceeded the maximum number of allowed login attempts. Please try
again later." feature.
Allowed Lockouts Before Account Suspension. (Default Setting = 3). Allows the user "X" of the above message before being suspended and requiring an
Administrator intervention, with the message:
"Due to multiple failed login attempts, your account access has been suspended." feature.
Required Password Strength. (Default Setting = Weak).
46
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Web Client login will check the user's current password against the required password strength, if the password does not meet the minimum requirements, the users will be redirected to a "Change Password" page before allowing mail access to the web client.
Drop down text box contains the following password complexity settings:
0 - Weak (Default Setting). Requires password to be:
Must be at least 3 characters in length
And not to exceed 30 characters
White space characters are not allowed
1 - Simple. Requires password to be:
Must be at least 6 characters in length
And not to exceed 30 characters
Must contain at least 1 letter (regardless of case)
Must contain at least 1 number or special character
White space characters are not allowed
2 - Moderate. Requires password to be:
Must be at least 6 characters in length
And not to exceed 30 characters
Must contain at least 1 letter (lower case)
Must contain at least 1 number
Must contain at least 1 special character or 1 capital letter
White space characters are not allowed
3 - Strong. Requires password to be:
Must be at least 8 characters in length
And not to exceed 30 characters
Must contain at least 1 lower case letter
Must contain at least 1 capital letter
Must contain at least 1 number
Must contain at least 1 special character
White space characters are not allowed
4 - Extreme. Requires password to be:
Must be at least 8 characters in length
And not to exceed 30 characters
Must contain at least 2 lower case letters
Must contain at least 2 capital letters
Must contain at least 2 numbers
47
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Must contain at least 2 special characters
White space characters are not allowed
Note: The following are valid special characters
[! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ + } { " : '
? / > . < ; , ]
User Database Setting
User Database Type area, select one of the following:
Configure. Click to Configure your NT or Active Directory database (on page 55).
External Database (on page 70)
Configure. Click to Configure an external database (on page 70).
Save. Click Save to save changes.
Cancel. Click Cancel to exit without saving changes.
Related Topics
Adding a New IMail Domain (on page 48)
Adding a New IMail User (on page 166)
Creating an E-mail Alias (on page 209)
Changing the IP Address of a Host (on page 63)
Virtual mail domains with IP addresses (on page 142)
Virtual mail domains without IP addresses (on page 142)
Adding a New IMail Domain
How to get here
Select Add from the Domains page. Select from the following domain options to add a new mail domain.
48
IMail v12 Administrator Help
General Domain Settings
Domain Name (Official Host Name or OHN ). The current domain name used to address mail to the users on the mail domain is displayed. For example, company.com is the domain name in the address [email protected].
TCP /IP Address. Select "Select an IP Address" to use an IP address (domain) for the
mail domain or select Virtual (virtual IP address (on page 56)) to use a non-IP-ed
domain.
Changing the IP Address of a Host (on page 63) for more information.
Top Directory. Enter the name or Browse to the directory where users, lists, and web files for this mail domain are stored.
Domain Aliases. Specify alternate domain names for which you want the mail domain to accept mail. Multiple aliases are separated by a space. This field is limited to 255 characters.
Administration (on page 386) page in order for the change to take effect correctly.
Example: If the mail domain name is mail.domain2.com , you can set an alias of domain2.com so that IMail Server accepts mail addressed to [email protected] and [email protected].
Note: Host Alias requires also that the proper updates to DNS must be made to work correctly.
Domain Options
Enable Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync®. (Enabled by default) Allows all enabled users for the specified domain to use ActiveSync® for synchronizing mobile devices with their web client information for e-mail, contacts, calendars, tasks and notes.
Outlook synchronization is also capable, but requires installing the IMail Collaboration
Client. Once installed Outlook will synchronize e-mail, contacts, calendars, tasks and notes with their mobile devices.
See the Mobile Synchronization Setup (on page 83) for more information.
Warning: Disabling ActiveSync® at the domain level will disable all ActiveSync® users on the specified domain, overriding the User Property setting.
Tip: For a single user to begin using Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® there are 3 levels that require Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® to be enabled: 1) System level, 2) Domain level
(see Domain Properties) and 3) the User level (See User Properties).
49
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Enable Personal Information Management. Enables the use of Calendaring, Notes and Tasks for all Web Client users within the domain.
Important:
"iclient.config"
can control the access of the above tools on a system wide
basis only.
Example:
To enable Calendaring, and disable Notes and Tasks. The domain level or user level
Personal Information Management must be enabled, then modify the following keys in
"iclient.config"
:
<add value="true" Key="EnableAppointments"/>
<add value="true" Key="EnableMeetingRequests"/>
<add value="false" Key="EnableNotes"/>
<add value="false" Key="EnableTasks"/>
Enable Ipswitch Instant Messaging (selected by default if available in software version). Specify whether the current mail domain will allow access to the Ipswitch
Instant Messaging service.
Note: If Enable Ipswitch Instant Messaging and/or Enable Personal Information
Management is selected at the mail domain level, it can be selected or cleared for each user
of the mail domain on the User Properties (on page 145) page.
Enable Virus Scanning (selected by default if available in software version).
If this option is selected, virus scanning is performed for:
the primary domain
any virtual domain (IP-less) that is bound to the primary domain
If this option is cleared, virus scanning is performed for:
any virtual domain (IP-less) that is bound to the primary domain and has the anti-virus option selected at the virtual domain level.
Enable image suppression for e-mail messages. Checked by default. This feature will suppress images for all messages. Once the link has been clicked, the images will always display when the message is selected.
Note: Once the link above the message is clicked, the images will always display when the message is selected.
Tip: When enabled at the Domain Property level, control is hidden from the users. Disabling at the Domain Property level gives user capability to control this option under their user settings.
Enable javascript removal for e-mail messages. Checked by default. This feature when checked will search all messages and disable any javascript encountered.
50
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Tip: When enabled at the Domain Property level, control is hidden from the users. Disabling at the Domain Property level gives user capability to control this option under their user settings.
Enable Archiving. This check box allows the IMail Administrator the control of enabling/disabling specific domains for message archiving. Further user-level control can be made on the User Properties page.
Tip: The System Setting must be enabled for Mail-box Based Archiving, to allow domain-level Archiving to be enabled.
Tip: For existing domains with users requiring disabling/enabling for archiving use the
Console Administrator bulk-edit feature. Simply select necessary users on the Users page, and click edit. Any modifications made will update only selected users.
Note: Disabling Archiving at the domain-level will ignore all user-level settings.
Message and Mailbox Options
Default Maximum Mailbox Size. (0 is default value). Enter the default maximum size
(in bytes, KB, MB, or GB) of all the mailboxes in each user account. Enter zero for an unlimited mailbox size for each user.
Max. Outbound Message Size. (0 is default value). Enter the maximum size (in bytes,
KB, MB, or GB) of an outbound message. Any message that is larger than the size entered will be bounced. Enter 0 for an unlimited maximum outbound message size.
For more information, see File Attachment Settings. (on page 28)
Single Message Maximum Size. (0 is default value). Enter the maximum size (in bytes, KB, MB, or GB) of a single message. Messages that exceed this size are returned to the sender. Enter 0 for an unlimited single message maximum size. For more
information, see File Attachment Settings. (on page 28)
Full Mailbox Notify (percentage). (0 is default value). Enter a percentage that users will be notified when their mailbox is within a specified percentage of being full.
Enter 0 for no full mailbox notification. Example (on page 73). See also customizing the
notification message (on page 73).
Full Mailbox Notify Address. Enter an additional address where an e-mail will be sent when a user's mailbox is almost full. For example, this could be the system administrator's address.
Default Maximum Messages. (0 is default value) Enter the default maximum number of messages allowed in each user’s mailbox. Enter 0 for an unlimited number of messages.
Maximum User Count. (0 is default value) Enter the maximum number of users that can be registered for this mail domain. Enter 0 for an unlimited number of users.
Designed as a control for Domain Administrators only.
51
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Domain Administrators will not be able to add users once the Max User Count has been met. A message on the User Administration page will also display: "The User
Limit for the domain has been reached".
System Administrators will override the maximum user count. Only Domain
Administrators will be stopped from adding new users past the maximum allowed.
Current User Count. Displays the current number of users registered for this mail domain.
Sub- mailbox Creation. Select how to handle a message when it arrives for a user and is addressed to a sub-mailbox that does not exist. Select one of the following actions:
Create. (Default setting) Creates the sub-mailbox and delivers the message.
Send to Inbox. Does not create the sub-mailbox. Instead the message is delivered to the "main" mailbox.
Bounce. Bounces the mail back to the sender as an invalid e-mail address.
Minimum POP Frequency (minutes). Enter the number of minutes delay between
POP logins for each user. The default is 0 (or unlimited) logins. popping to one mailbox per user per domain. If you create more than one mailbox for a user, that mailbox will receive mail, but the user will be unable to access it unless the POP frequency is set at 0 (zero). An error message is sent to the client and logging in is denied,
Different e-mail clients may handle this error differently.
Example: Outlook and Outlook Express display the userid/password dialog box continuously. If you click Cancel, the error message the POP server returns is: "-ERR login frequency exceeded - try again later" User Database Setting.
User Login Settings
Tip: To reset a suspended account, go to User Properties page and uncheck "Account
Suspended" check box. This will reset the user's failed login attempts to zero.
Tip: A successful login will also reset failed login attempts to zero.
Allowed Login Attempts Before Account Lockout (Default Setting = 3). Allows the user "X" login attempts before displaying:
52
IMail v12 Administrator Help
"You have exceeded the maximum number of allowed login attempts. Please try
again later." feature.
Allowed Lockouts Before Account Suspension. (Default Setting = 3). Allows the user "X" of the above message before being suspended and requiring an
Administrator intervention, with the message:
"Due to multiple failed login attempts, your account access has been suspended." feature.
Required Password Strength. (Default Setting = Weak).
Web Client login will check the user's current password against the required password strength, if the password does not meet the minimum requirements, the users will be redirected to a "Change Password" page before allowing mail access to the web client.
Drop down text box contains the following password complexity settings:
0 - Weak (Default Setting). Requires password to be:
Must be at least 3 characters in length
And not to exceed 30 characters
White space characters are not allowed
1 - Simple. Requires password to be:
Must be at least 6 characters in length
And not to exceed 30 characters
Must contain at least 1 letter (regardless of case)
Must contain at least 1 number or special character
White space characters are not allowed
2 - Moderate. Requires password to be:
Must be at least 6 characters in length
And not to exceed 30 characters
Must contain at least 1 letter (lower case)
Must contain at least 1 number
Must contain at least 1 special character or 1 capital letter
White space characters are not allowed
3 - Strong. Requires password to be:
53
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Must be at least 8 characters in length
And not to exceed 30 characters
Must contain at least 1 lower case letter
Must contain at least 1 capital letter
Must contain at least 1 number
Must contain at least 1 special character
White space characters are not allowed
4 - Extreme. Requires password to be:
Must be at least 8 characters in length
And not to exceed 30 characters
Must contain at least 2 lower case letters
Must contain at least 2 capital letters
Must contain at least 2 numbers
Must contain at least 2 special characters
White space characters are not allowed
Note: The following are valid special characters
[! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ + } { " : '
? / > . < ; , ]
User Database Setting
User Database Type area, select one of the following:
Configure. Click to Configure your NT or Active Directory database (on page 55).
External Database (on page 70)
Configure. Click to Configure an external database (on page 70).
Related Topics
Adding a New IMail User (on page 166)
54
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Configuring an NT/AD database
Use this page to configure your NT or Active Directory database. See also Using the Windows
NT Database
NT Domain Name. Enter the name of your NT Domain.
Machine name of Domain Controller. Enter the machine name for your Domain
Controller.
Active Directory Database
Important: To hide Active Directory users from the IMail Server, under user properties, add
the word "built-in" in the front of the user description. Example. (on page 55)
Use Active Directory. Select the check box to use Active Directory.
Naming Context. If the Active Directory check box is selected, the naming context will be pulled from the Root DSE Directory Service Entry. If you choose to not use the default naming context, you can enter one of your choice.
Test. Click to test the naming context. A successful test will tell you how many users are in that context.
OK. Click to save your settings.
Cancel. Click to cancel your settings and return to the Domain Properties page.
Related Topic
Example of Active Directory "built-in" (on page 55)
Example of Active Directory "built-in"
The example below will hide User1 from the IMail Server as a valid user.
1 Go to Start > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Active Directory (AD) Users
and Computers.
2 Select AD container with users.
3 Right click specified user that you would like to hide from the IMail Server, and select
Properties.
4 Enter the word
"built-in"
into the Description field.
5 Click "OK"
Note:
"built-in"
must be at the front of the description text box. Trailing words are permitted.
55
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Related Topics
Domain Properties (on page 42)
Configuring NT/AD Database (on page 55)
About Virtual Mail Domains (Hosts)
If you want IMail Server to receive mail for a second mail domain with its own users, you need to set up a virtual mail domain for the second domain. For example, if your mail server provides mail service for domain1.com, and you also want it to provide mail service for domain2.com, you can create a virtual mail domain for domain2.com.
There are two types of virtual mail domains:
Virtual mail domains with IP addresses (on page 142)
Virtual mail domains without IP addresses (on page 142)
must make DNS entries for your domain(s).
Related Topics
Adding a New IMail Domain (on page 48)
56
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Setting Up a Virtual IMail Domain With an IP Address (on page 142)
Setting Up a Virtual IMail Domain Without an IP Address (on page 142)
LDAP Settings
How to get here
Use the LDAP Settings page to configure host options for OpenLDAP. This information is necessary for an LDAP client to edit the LDAP database. It is not necessary to enter an ID or password if you only want to view the OpenLDAP data.
Domain: Shows the current selected domain. From the drop down you can pick any of the domains available to this administrative user account.
LDAP Settings
LDAP Admin ID. Displays the LDAP administrator ID for the e-mail domain. This information is auto-populated. The administrator ID cannot be an IMail user ID.
Password. Enter the LDAP administrator password.
Confirm Password. Enter the password a second time to confirm the original password. The two password entries must match in order for the value to be saved. user IDs only that are stored in the Windows registry. First try synchronizing the LDAP database to resolve any problems. importation, we highly recommend that you change it as soon as possible after completing setting up LDAP.
Important: You can also use the iLDAP.exe utility (on page 401) to Init or Sync a specified
LDAP domain or all the LDAP domains. This utility can be used in the case when the Web
Administrator does not properly Init or Sync all the LDAP domains on a server. This issue sometimes occurs on servers running Microsoft Windows 2003 machines with over 30 domains.
LDAP Actions
Init LDAP (Initialize the LDAP database). Click to Initialize the LDAP database
created for the current e-mail domain by the LDAP server (on page 395).
Sync LDAP (Synchronize the LDAP database). Click to synchronize the LDAP database. Synchronizing removes multiple database entries, deletes old accounts, and adds new accounts.
Save. Click to save settings. An "Update Successful" message and the time of the update appear.
57
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Related Topics
About LDAP Server (on page 395)
LDAP Service Settings (on page 396)
LDAP User Information (on page 172)
Populating the LDAP Database Using Ldaper.exe (on page 400)
Init & Sync LDAP DB - iLDAP.exe utility (on page 401)
Bouncing Spam Messages using Rules
To bounce a message that is identified as spam, you must set up a delivery rule at the host level. Before you setup a rule, determine the reason you want to bounce spam messages and identify the corresponding X-IMAIL-SPAM header that is inserted into these types of messages (i.e. X-IMAIL-SPAM- DNSBL). If you want to bounce all spam messages regardless of the reason it was identified as spam, you need to create a rule or rules that search for the generic X-IMAIL- SPAM header. For more information, see Spam X-Header Explanations (on
Example:
The following example assumes that you want to bounce all messages that are identified as spam.
To bounce a message that is identified as spam:
1 Make sure that all of the antispam features are setup with the Insert X-Header action to be taken when e-mail is determined to be spam. For more information, see Getting to
IMail Inbound Rules Options.
2 Click on an e-mail domain's Inbound Rules (on page 246) page, then click Add. Enter
the following rule parameters:
Field: Header
Comparison: Contains
Search Text: X-IMAIL-SPAM
1 Click Add. The new rule is added to the list of rules.
2 Select the rule you just added.
3 On the Action Type list, select Bounce.
4 Click Save.
58
IMail v12 Administrator Help
IMail Server Default Service Ports
Ports are used to facilitate communications between client and server programs, such as IMail
Administrator services (on page 388). The following are the default service ports for IMail
Server and can be configured.
TCP Ports:
SMTP : Port 25
SMTP Alternate Port : 587
SMTP SSL : Port 465
IMAP4 : Port 143
IMAP4 SSL: Port 993
LDAP : Port 389
POP3 : Port 110
POP3 SSL: 995
CommTouch : 8088
CommTouch IP Reputation : 8181
WorkgroupShare : 8100 (Unsecure)
WorkgroupShare : 8101 (Secured)
WorkgroupShare Free/Busy : 8109
Instant Messaging Server : 5177
Instant Messaging Client : 5188 (Persistent connections not enabled)
Archiving
MailArchiva SMTP : 8091
MailArchiva : 8090
MailArchiva - IMail Web Service : 8080
-OR-
Sonian SMTP - 25
Setting up a Dial-up Internet Connection
IMail Server is designed to work on a 7-day, 24-hour Internet Connection, but you can also set up IMail Server to support dial-up connections. You can create a dial-up Internet connection from IMail Server to your Internet Service Provider (ISP), allowing you to receive mail from an account with your ISP.
59
IMail v12 Administrator Help
IMail Server does not perform dial-up functions or spawn off dialing commands. To start your
RAS/PPP connection to your ISP, you need to either use a scheduling program or start the connection manually.
IMail Server uses the TCP/IP transport on Windows; it does not configure the Windows TCP/IP transport. If you need to set up a RAS/PPP connection, refer to your Windows Help.
Receiving Mail from an Internet Service Provider
When you use a dial-up connection, your inbound mail from the Internet must be stored somewhere, usually with your ISP. Your ISP can store your mail in several ways. Three of the more popular ways are:
Method 1: The ISP sets up individual mail accounts on the ISP computers. This method usually uses the POP3 mail protocol to read or retrieve mail. Each user dials up the ISP and either reads or downloads mail.
Method 2: The ISP sets up individual mail accounts on the ISP computers, but the ISP forwards all mail for your users to your mail server when your dial-up connection is
up. This method uses the ISP's Internet domain name. Example. (on page 62)
Method 3: You have a registered Internet domain of your own, and you register your domain to point to the ISP computer. Your ISP stores incoming mail and forwards it to
your mail server when your dial-up connection is up. Example. (on page 63)
To register your own domain, contact your ISP. In most cases, they will do the work for you.
All you have to do is come up with a name.
If you currently use Method 1, then you must change to either Method 2 or 3 to receive mail from your ISP. IMail Server cannot log into individual mail accounts on your ISP mail server, retrieve the mail, and then parse the mail correctly.
Setting Up the Server for Dial-up Access
1 Setting up IMail Server using a dial-up connection is the same for both Methods 2 and 3, above. To do this, you need to create mail accounts for users on the IMail Server computer. For more information, see Administering IMail Users. If you use Method 2, user names must be the same on both the ISP's computer and your IMail Server computer.
2 Tell Windows about your e-mail domain name. When Windows looks up a domain name, it first searches the \winnt\system32\drivers\hosts file. If there is no match, it asks a Domain Name Server (DNS) for the IP address for the domain name.
60
IMail v12 Administrator Help
This creates a problem, as your Windows computer has a different IP address than your
ISP's computer. When IMail Server looks at the incoming mail, it looks up the domain name to which the email is addressed. If the domain name points to your ISP's computer
(your ISP's IP address), then IMail Server sends the mail back to your ISP's computer
(which it thinks is correct). Mail will be bounced back and forth until one of the computers sends the message back to the original sender.
To avoid this problem, set up the domain as a virtual host , then add the domain name to which your incoming mail is addressed -- either your ISP's (Method 2, see Example (on
page 62)), or your own (Method 3, see Example (on page 63)) on the Add New Domain
page. See Adding a New IMail Domain (on page 48), Setting Up a Virtual IMail Domain With
3 Unless you plan on maintaining a 24-hour, 7-day a week dial-up Internet connection, your ISP must spool all mail for your company. Then, have your ISP set up their computer to try to periodically send mail to the IMail Server computer. How often the
ISP attempts to send mail to your server depends on how often your dial-up connection is up. Consider the following factors in determining queue times. The first factor is the most important.
How long will your dial-up connection last (10, 20, 30 minutes)?
How often will your ISP's computer try to send the spooled mail to your computer?
How often will your computer try to send mail to the Internet?
How much mail will you receive and send when you make your dial-up connection?
For example, if the connection time will be 20 minutes, and you will have relatively light traffic (50 received and 50 sent) and relatively short messages (no attachments or large files) you could set up the queue times as follows:
Queue Time
Connection Time
Minutes
20
ISP Queue Time
IMail Server Queue Time
E-mail Quantity
15
15
50 received/50 sent (short messages)
In this example, the Connection Time is the amount of time your IMail Server is connected to the ISP's computer. This would be set in your scheduling program. The ISP Queue Time determines how often the ISP mail computer tries to send mail to the IMail Server. The IMail
Server Queue Time determines how often IMail Server tries to send mail to the ISP or Internet
(this is set up on the SMTP Options (on page 413) page).
To be sure your mail gets processed, regardless of the connection time, make the queue times less than the connection time. If you expect to receive or send greater numbers of messages, or more lengthy mail than in the example, you can either increase the connection time, or decrease both queue times.
Alternatively, you can use the ETRN command to manually retrieve mail from the ISP's mail
server. See Using ETRN to Retrieve Mail on a Dial-up Connection (on page 62).
61
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Method 2 Example
If you are using Method 2, and the computers have the following addresses and names:
ISP's IP address : 156.21.50.1
ISP's domain name: isp_are_us.com
IMail Server IP address: 156.21.50.240
IMail Server Name: my_imail_machine you would make the following entries in the \winnt\system32\drivers\hosts file:
156.21.50.240
my_imail_machine
156.21.50.240
isp_domain_name.com
You can have multiple names pointing to the same IP address. This also helps if your computer is receiving mail for multiple domains. Place each domain name in the hosts file, pointing to the IMail Server computer's IP address.
Related Topics
Setting Up a Dial-Up Internet Connection (on page 59)
Using ETRN to Retrieve Mail on a Dial-up Connection.
There are several cases where you or your customer may want to manually retrieve mail from another mail server:
If your IMail Server is set up as an SMTP mail gateway or as a backup server for another mail server, then IMail Server stores mail for that domain until the other server is online, or, until the Tries before Return To Sender setting has elapsed. The administrator of the other server can retrieve mail manually at any time.
If your IMail Server dials in to an ISP's mail server, then the ISP's server stores mail for you. You can retrieve it manually at any time.
To retrieve mail manually:
Use a Telnet program to connect to port 25 (the SMTP port) on the other mail server, and then issue the ETRN command for their domain. For example:
ETRN @domain2.com
Or
ETRN mail.domain2.com
62
IMail v12 Administrator Help
The first command retrieves all queued mail for the domain. The second command retrieves all queued mail for the mail host.
Related Topics
Setting Up a Dial-Up Internet Connection (on page 59)
Method 3 Example
If you are using Method 3, and the computers involved have the following addresses and names:
ISP's IP Address : 156.21.50.1
Your Domain Name: my_domain_name.com
IP address for my_domain_name.com: 156.21.50.1
IMail Server Name: my_imail_machine
IMail Server IP address: 156.21.50.240 you would make the following entries in the \winnt\system32\drivers\hosts file:
156.21.50.240
my_imail_machine
156.21.50.240
my_domain_name.com
Related Topics
Setting Up a Dial-Up Internet Connection (on page 59)
Changing the IP Address of a Host
Before changing the IP address of a domain, back up your IMail registry (on page 125).
To change the host IP address:
1 If you have not done so, bind the new IP address to the NIC (network interface card).
Navigate to Control Panel/Network Connections/LAN or High Speed Internet
Connection.
Right-click on the Connection icon and select Properties. Scroll through the list under
This Connection Uses the following items to (Internet Protocol ) TCP /IP. Click the
Properties button.
The General tab appears. Enter the new IP address in the appropriate text box.
2 Run Regedit and locate the following key:
63
IMail v12 Administrator Help
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE/Software/Ipswitch/IMail/Domains
3 If you see keys for both the old and the new IP addresses, delete the old one. First, make sure that the "Official" value under the new IP address key shows the correct host name.
If you only see a key for the old IP address you can rename that key to the new IP address.
4 Highlight the host name key associated with that IP address, and make sure its "address" value is set to the correct (new) IP address for that host. If it is not, then change it.
5 Stop and restart all services. (on page 388)
Related Tasks
Back Up IMail Registry (on page 125)
Setting Up a Mail Gateway
You can set up IMail Server to function as a mail gateway for another mail server so that mail for the other server is sent and received through the IMail Server. Often, people set up a mail gateway because their mail server uses a dial-up connection and is not always connected to the Internet.
To set up IMail Server as a gateway for another mail server, check the following:
The other server must be running SMTP .
The mail domain (for example, domain2.com ) for which IMail Server is a gateway does not appear in IMail Server.
User accounts for the mail domain are on the other server.
The MX record for the mail domain must point to the IMail Server host. Thus, mail addressed to that domain will come to the IMail Server host. (This MX record is in the
DNS used by the other mail server.)
The IMail Server host must be able to resolve the domain name to the IP address of the other SMTP server. This is accomplished by making an entry for the domain name and IP in the hosts file (\windows\system32\drivers\etc\hosts) on the IMail Server host.
This works because IMail Server checks the hosts file and IP information before checking the DNS server. IMail Server queues the mail until it is delivered to the other server, or until the number of Tries Before Return to Sender (set up on the SMTP
Settings page) is exhausted.
If you are using any of the Relay Mail for options on the SMTP Settings Page and want to relay outgoing mail for another mail server, the address of the other server must be added by clicking the Addresses button and adding the IP address on the Relay Mail for Addresses page. For further information, see Setting IMail SMTP Options (on
Example:
64
IMail v12 Administrator Help
The following example shows how you can set up IMail Server to accept mail for a domain
(domain2.com) and forward all mail for this domain to another SMTP server. Assume the following:
Other mail domain: namedomain2.com
Host name of other SMTP server: other_SMTP_server
IP address of other SMTP server: 156.21.50.240
Host name of IMail Server: my_imail_machine
IP address of IMail Server: 156.21.50.10
When Windows looks up a domain name, it first searches the
\WINDOWS\system32\drivers\etc\hosts file. So, in the hosts file, point the domain name to the IP address of the other SMTP server:
156.21.50.240 domain2.com.
See Using ETRN to Retrieve Mail on a Dial-up Connection (on page 62) for more information.
Setting up IMail Server as a Backup Mail Spooler
You can set up IMail Server to act as a backup spooler for a customer's mail server. If the customer's computer is down, the mail for his domain will collect on your IMail Server until his is back up. The customer's mail server must have a static, unchanging IP address.
To configure this, have the customer set his computer up to log into his ISP at intervals where he can catch the queue processing interval (Times Before Return to Sender setting on the
SMTP Settings page) of your server. For example, if your retry timer is set for 30 minutes, have him connect to his ISP once every 20 minutes or so. He has to be online and ready to receive when your timer cycles.
Alternatively, he could Telnet to port 25 (the SMTP port) of your computer and issue the ETRN command with this format: etrn his_domain.com
This will dump the queued mail to his computer.
In DNS, your server will be the secondary MX for his domain (lower priority), whereas his server will be the primary MX.
You must also make an entry in your hosts file (\WINDOWS\system32\drivers\etc\hosts) which associates his IP address with his domain name. For example:
65
IMail v12 Administrator Help
his.i.p.address
his.domainname
This way, IMail Server attempts to deliver mail it receives for that domain to his computer, bypassing the MX records in DNS, which points to itself and can create a mail loop.
If you are using IMail's SMTP security to prevent spammers from using your computer as a
spam relay , add his server's IP address to the Access Control (on page 421) page.
For example, if the remote host's DNS is set up to receive mail for a primary domain, such as mail.widgets.com, and points to your IMail Server, mail.domain.com as a backup server, then the MX record for the remote host's DNS will look like this:
MX
10 mail.widgets.com
20 mail.domain.com
When mail.widgets.com is down, mail is sent to your computer mail.domain.com. To relay mail for the mail.widgets.com domain, you must specify its host name and IP address in the hosts file on your IMail Server host.
66
CHAPTER 4
User Mail Accounts
In This Chapter
Working with Individual User Accounts ..................................................... 72
Creating User Database
In This Section
Creating NT/AD User Database (on page 67)
Using IMail Database (on page 70)
Creating External Database (on page 70)
Importing Windows NT Users (on page 68)
Using the Windows NT/Active Directory Database
If your IMail user database is a Windows NT Database, IMail Server creates a user mail account for each user listed in the Windows NT Database. The user mail accounts are created, as necessary, when the mail server receives a message addressed to the user or when a user accesses the IMail Server from a mail client . You cannot add or delete users using IMail Server
Administrator; instead, you need to use the Windows NT User Manager. If you are using
Active Directory, you need to set IIS to use a domain user.
To configure IMail Administrator virtual directory for anonymous access in IIS:
1 Click Start > Programs > Administrative Tools > Internet Information Services. The
Internet Information Services Manager appears.
2 Click + next to Web Sites. The Web Sites folders expand.
67
IMail v12 Administrator Help
3 Click + next to Default Web Site. The Web Sites folder expands.
4 Right-click IAdmin, select Properties. The IAdmin Properties dialog box appears.
5 Click the Directory Security tab, then click Edit in the Anonymous access and
authentication control section. The Authentication Methods dialog box appears.
6 Click to clear the Anonymous access option.
7 Make sure that the Integrated Windows authentication option is selected.
8 Click OK to exit the dialog boxes.
9 Make sure that the IMail administrator has domain administrative privileges for the domain that the remote server is on.
Related Topics
Importing Windows NT Users (on page 68)
Importing Windows NT Users
How to get here
If a host uses the IMail Database for user mail accounts, you can import users from the NT
Database and add them to the IMail database on the Import NT Users page.
68
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Note: This differs from actually using the Windows NT Database, in that although the users keep their same user IDs, Administrators are required to set a default required password for importing these NT Users into the IMail database. Users can change the password after they have been imported.
Domain. Shows the current selected domain. From the drop down you can pick any of the domains available to this administrative user account.
Import NT User Options
Initial Password. Use this text box to enter an initial password setting for users being imported.
Note: The password must be between 3 and 15 characters.
Confirm password. Use this text box to confirm the password setting for users being imported.
Add as Collaboration User. Select this check box to enable a User or Users selected from the Username list to access the Collaboration tools.
Add as Ipswitch Instant Messaging User. Select this check box to enable a User or
Users selected from the Username list to access Ipswitch Instant Messaging.
Existing Users on the NT Database
Search Box. Requires entering a minimum of two characters, and the search will automatically begin narrowing the list of users. The search assumes a wildcard automatically after the characters entered.
Username. This column lists the usernames of all users imported from the NT database. You can click on the link under the username to access the user's User
Properties.
Full Name. This column lists the display names of the users.
Import. To add a user and password, select a user from the list by selecting the check box next to the Username, enter the initial password and the confirm password, and click Import.
Cancel. Click the Cancel button to return to the Utility page.
Related Topics
Using the Windows NT Database (on page 67)
69
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Using the IMail Database
How to get here
If you select IMail Database, user IDs and passwords for mail accounts are stored in a database in the registry on the IMail Server system, separate from either the Windows NT database or any external database.
You can also import Windows NT users into an IMail database, without having them linked to the Windows NT database.
Creating External User Database for a Mail Domain
IMail Server can use an external database to register and authenticate users on a particular mail domain. Users that you add to and delete from an IMail Server host are also added to and deleted from the external database.
Important: Remember to restart the IMail Services, after creating external database.
Before you use an external database for a mail domain, use the Windows Control Panel to make sure there is a System DSN (Data Source Name) that points to a valid database name.
See your Windows and database documentation for information on the System DSN.
Important: When you configure a DSN to an SQL data source in the Microsoft Windows
ODBC Data Source Administrator, it may default to Named Pipes network library. Make sure that you set the connection type to TCP/IP in order for the external database to work
correctly.
After you have verified the System DSN that points to the database you want to use, you can configure an external database.
Note: The external database can reside locally with the IMail Server.
Configuring an External User Database
The connection between IMail Server and an external user database is accomplished via a dynamic link library (DLL file). IMail Server includes a sample .dll file (ODBCUSER.DLL). This
DLL uses the ODBC method, but can be modified to support other external database methods. The complete source code for this DLL is provided upon request from Ipswitch.
When you configure an external user database, IMail Server creates an ODBC database that holds tables configured with the correct fields. The fields are identified in the Table Name text box. After the database is created and the ODBC system data source name is established in the ODBC Source Administration tool (located in the Windows Control Panel), you can use the database to store user authentication information and user properties. This information can be managed through IMail Administrator, including adding and deleting users.
70
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Important: When using an external database, any IMail service you run (except the Log
Server) must be set up from the Windows Control Panel Services application so the account that IMail Server runs under has access to the external database.
To create a mail domain that uses an external database:
1 In IMail Administrator, click Domain > Domain Properties.
2 In the User Database section, select External Database from the User Database type list box.
3 Click the Configure button. A domain options page appears.
External Database Implementation DLL. Enter the full path to the odbcuser.dll installed on your local server or the path of a .DLL that supports the functions:
GetUserEntry, SetUserEntry, DeleteUserEntry, AuthorizeUser, GetFirstUserEntry, and
GetNextUserEntry. (These are defined in the odbcuser.h file.)
ODBC System Data Source Name (DSN). Enter the source name for the database where the user information is stored. IMAILSECDB is the default name that the ODBC link uses.
Important: For users using SQL 7.0 or above, enter the following information after the ODBC
System Data Source Name box:
DSN_NAME;UID=<username>;PWD=<password>.
The user name and password need to be the User ID and password for the SQL database and not an
IMail Server account.
Table Name. Enter the table name within your ODBC database. Leaving "[default]" in this text box will use your domain name as the table name. All periods will be replaced with underscores.
Example:
If you use the Data Source Name IMAILSECDB and the username AUGUSTA and password
GEORGIA, the correct format of the ODBC System Data Source Name box is:
IMAILSECDB;UID=AUGUSTA;PWD=GEORGIA
Table name. Enter the database table name. If the field is blank or contains [default], the host name is used with dots replaced by underscores. The Table name cannot begin with a number.
Enable Multiple Connections to allow multiple connections from the external database to IMail Server.
Maximum Number of Connections to set the maximum number of connections from the external database to IMail Server.
Save. Click this button to save your settings.
Cancel. Click Cancel to exit without saving changes.
71
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Working with Individual User Accounts
In This Section
Vacation Message for Users (on page 72)
Customizing the Notification Message (on page 73)
Full Mailbox Notification Example (on page 73)
Vacation Message
How to get here
Note: Vacation Message can handle all foreign characters for display in the Web Admin.
You can create a vacation message for each e-mail user account. When the vacation message is enabled, IMail Server sends an automated vacation message to each email address the user receives mail from. The vacation message is stored in the vacation.ima file in the user's IMail
Server home directory.
Note: Vacation Message can also be enabled and disabled within the user's Web Client.
Domain Name (OHN). The current domain name used to address mail to the users on the mail domain is displayed.
User ID. Displays the selected user ID (user name) for the e-mail account.
Enable Vacation. Check box to enable or disable the Vacation Message text box. Disabling the vacation message will clear the "vacation snt" file.
Vacation Message. Text box when enabled, allows a vacation message to respond to all new mail messages received. The vacation response will only be sent once to each unique e-mail address.
Save. Click this button to save your settings.
To create a vacation message:
1 Select Enable Vacation.
2 In the Vacation Message text box, enter the reply message you want to send while the user is away. The vacation message is sent one time to each e-mail address from whom the recipient receives mail. IMail Server saves the message sender's e-mail address in a file (vacation.snt). This file provides the user with a list of users that sent e-mail while
72
IMail v12 Administrator Help
away and also keeps track of the senders so the vacation message is only sent one time to each sender.
3 Click Save.
Customizing the Full Mailbox Notification Message
The notification e-mail message that is sent to a user is configurable. You can customize the text for this message in the
"Notify.txt"
file that is located in the
"...\IMail" top directory.
If there is no Notify.txt file, the notification will contain the standard text as follows:
"User <!--imail.user--> Host <!--imail.host- -> Your mailbox is nearly full, please remove some messages. If you have any questions, see your system administrator."
The above two tags will be replaced with the User ID and the domain .
Related Topics
Full Mailbox Notification Example (on page 73)
Full Mailbox Notify Example
Example:
If
"80"
is entered in the Full Mailbox Notify text box on the Domain properties page, a user will receive an e-mail when his/her mailbox is 80% full.
The user will receive a maximum of one message a day, for three days, as long as the mailbox is over 80%. The messages will stop when the mailbox size drops below 80% or it has sent 3 warning messages.
Note: The user will not receive this message if there is no mail activity.
Related Topics
Customizing the Full Mailbox Notification Message (on page 73)
73
CHAPTER 5
System Administration
In This Chapter
System Default Web Client User Options ................................................ 119
Licensing
How to get here
The Licensing page will display all IMail Products licensed for the current IMail Server installation. To upgrade or renew, visit the MyIpswitch.com website.
IMail Server License
Product Name (Display Only). Ipswitch IMail Server Product Name.
Serial Number (Display Only). Assigned at registration. Although not needed for installation of product, it is needed to receive Customer and Technical Support. It confirms current sales agreement and is also used to assist with upgrades/crossgrades.
Version Number (Display Only). Version Number of IMail Server Product.
Activation Date (Display Only). Date IMail Server Product was installed.
Licensed User Count (Display Only). Licensed User Count of IMail Server Product.
Number of Active Users (Display Only). This count displays active users that are able to access their accounts. This does not count disabled users.
74
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Anti-virus
Name. Anti-virus product name. available for Symantec Anti-virus.
License Type. Type of license installed.
Activation Date. Date of product activation.
Expiration Date. Date of product expiration.
Days Left. Calculated days left before license expires.
Commtouch Premium Anti-spam License
License Type. Type of license installed.
Activation Date. Date of product activation.
Expiration Date. Date of product expiration.
Days Left. Calculated days left before license expires.
Commtouch Zero-Hour Virus License
License Type. Type of license installed.
Activation Date. Date of product activation.
Expiration Date. Date of product expiration.
Days Left. Calculated days left before license expires.
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync License
License Type. Type of license installed.
Activation Date. Date of product activation.
Expiration Date. Date of product expiration.
Days Left. Calculated days left before license expires.
Total Licenses. Number of ActiveSync licenses purchased.
Licenses in Use. Number of ActiveSync licenses being used.
Refresh License. Click this button to refresh an active license that has changed and requires refreshing. Be sure that Queue Manager is restarted to pick up the license changes.
Example: Updates or changes to CommTouch™ license agreement or ActiveSync® license agreement.
Related Topic
75
IMail v12 Administrator Help
System Settings
How to get here
System Settings
The System Settings page allows you to configure the settings for the IMail domain.
Domain Name (OHN). Enter the Official Host Name (OHN) that will be used to address mail to the users on the domain.
Gateway Host. Enter the name of another host (IMail Server) to send mail to when it cannot be delivered directly to the destination host. This can also be used in conjunction with the Send All Remote Mail Through Gateway option (on the Services tab, Queue Manager Settings page) to force mail delivery through the gateway host.
Since IMail Server should be able to reach all hosts directly, this field should typically be left blank.
Default Host. By default the Default Host is set to the Domain Name (OHN) as shown above. This entry is used when no mail domain is specified in the e-mail address.
Important: Restart Web Service after changing the value of the Default Host.
Top Directory. The directory where IMail application files are installed. This is specified during installation.
Spool Directory. This is the temporary directory where messages are spooled while awaiting processing and where log files are kept. Use this text box to change the directory that stores log and temp files, as well as mail messages, attachments, etc. that are waiting for delivery.
Browse. Use this button to browse to the directory that stores log and temp files, as well as mail messages, attachments, etc. that are waiting for delivery. See above instructions to create a new folder.
Log Directory. If you wish to separate log messages from spooled messages, use this text box to set up a separate directory.
Browse. Click this button to set up a separate directory to store log files. See above instructions to create a new folder.
Log Server. Enter the IP address of the server to which IMail sends the log files.
Archiving (If Installed)
Caution: Do not enable this feature unless archiving has been installed, as the Spool
Manager will no longer function correctly.
Note: A utility exists to archive all current e-mail messages. This utility called "archive.exe" is located under \IMail directory, to archive existing messages that have never archived.
76
IMail v12 Administrator Help
View Getting Started Guide
(http://docs.ipswitch.com/_Messaging/Archiving/GettingStarted/Archiving.pdf). PDF link to Archiving Getting Started Guide.
None. (Default Setting)
SMTP-based. This radio button should be checked to enable a third party archiving engine to use the SMTP-based transport mechanism.
Server. Location of third party archiving SMTP gateway server. Enter the valid IP address of the SMTP gateway server, or localhost.
Port. Port setting for your third party archiving server to listen on and communicate with your IMail Server.
Recipient. E-mail address of your third party archiving recipient.
Archive Orphaned Messages. Orphaned files, by default, will not be archived.
Mailbox-based. This radio button should be checked to enable a third party archiving process to deliver e-mail to a specified recipient.
Recipient. Location of mailbox that will accept all archiving from your third party process. This recipient can be any valid user on the primary domain.
Archive Orphaned Messages. Orphaned files, by default, will not be archived.
Mailbox-Based Archiving Settings
Mailbox-Based Archiving Settings will enable message archiving for the system.
Mailbox-based must be selected to reveal the extra mailbox-based options. Further control for Mail-box Based Archiving can be made at the domain and user-level. See Domain
Properties (on page 42) and User Properties page (on page 145).
Tip: For existing domains and users; use the bulk-edit feature in Console Administrator to enable all users. Simply select all users on the Users page, and click edit. Any modifications made will update all selected users.
Note: Disabling Archiving at the system-level will stop all archiving.
Note: Disabling Archiving at the domain-level will stop archiving for the specified domain, ignoring all user-level settings.
Mailbox Name. The archiving mailbox name that will exist under the users folder of the above specified recipient email address.
Rollover. Allows IMail Administrators to control when a mailbox is rolled over to a new mailbox. Formating of the mailbox name is as follows:
Rollover Type Rollover Format
No Rollover MailboxName.mbx
Daily MailboxNameTYYYYMMDD.mbx
Size MailboxNameTYYYYMMDD_HHMMSS.mbx
Save. Click to save your settings.
77
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Related Topic
Domain Level Archiving (on page 42)
User Level Archiving (on page 145)
Alias Level Archiving (on page 207)
List Level Archiving (on page 216)
System Trailer
How to get here
The System Trailer page allows the System Administrator to maintain a trailer message that will be appended to every outgoing message (This does not include locally sent messages within the server).
Tip: Trailer messages can now be setup separately by domain. See Domain > Domain Trailer
Two text files will be created, one for plain text, and one for html. The text file names are
"trailer.txt"
and
"trailer.html"
located in the
"\IMail"
directory.
Note: Messages send locally within the IMail Server do NOT include the trailer.
Depending on the type of message being sent, the IMail Server will append the trailer as follows:
A "Plain Text" message will append the
"trailer.txt"
text file.
An HTML message will append the
"trailer.html"
text file.
Enable System Trailer. Disabled by default. This check box controls the System Trailer for domains that have Domain Trailers set to use the System Trailer.
Note: Domains using the setting of
"Domain Trailer"
or
"No Trailer"
are not affected.
Encoding. Set by default to the System User Default Message Encoding. Message encoding used for sending the trailer.
Unicode (UTF-8). Choose this character set for multi-language mail. In IMail, this includes English, Chinese Simplified, Chinese Traditional, French, German, Italian,
Japanese, or Spanish.
78
IMail v12 Administrator Help
English (US-ASCII). For composing e-mail for English-speaking readers, based on the
English alphabet.
Western European (ISO-8859-15). For composing e-mail in French, Italian, German, or Spanish.
Chinese Traditional (BIG5). For composing e-mail in traditional Chinese.
Chinese Simplified (GB2312). For composing e-mail in simplified Chinese.
Japanese (ISO-2022-JP). For composing e-mail in Japanese.
HTML System Trailer
Note: The online HTML WYSIWYG editor is the same editor used in the web client when creating new messages.
HTML Trailer Text. Displays the trailer message that will be appended to every HTML outgoing message that is not locally sent within the server.
Plain Text System Trailer
Text. Displays the trailer message that will be appended to every
"Plain Text" outgoing message that is not locally sent within the server.
Save. Click to save your settings.
Related Topics
TML Online Editor Help (on page 79)
HTML Online Editor
The System Trailer page allows the System Administrator to maintain a trailer message that will be appended to every outgoing message (This does not include locally sent messages within the server). This text file is named
"trailer.txt"
and can be located in the
"\IMail"
directory.
Text Styles and Formatting Toolbars
By selecting formatting styles, font types, sizes and colors from the list boxes, you can customize your messages. Individual help (known as Tool Tips) is available for each button by mousing over the button.
Mouse over the adjacent buttons to access information on the functions of the different tools.
The formatting list boxes let you choose:
paragraph alignment
79
IMail v12 Administrator Help
font types
font size
zoom = To allow for easier viewing (25% - 400%) from original size
Much like a word processor there are familiar buttons along with some new icons as follows:
= New Document - Clears text box
= Find & Replace
= Print Preview
= Fit To Window - Enlarges text box. Click again return to original size.
= Undo Button
= Cleanup HTML
= Redo Button
= Insert Paragraph
= Insert Current Time
= Special Characters
= Bold
= Underline
= Left Justify
= Center Text
= Reset all text to Left Justify
= Insert numbered list
= Direction Left to Right
= Insert Hyperlink
= Insert Today's Date
= Insert Anchor
= Universal Keyboard
= Italics
= Right Justify
= Full Justify text
= Insert bulleted list
= Direction Right to Left
= Remove Hyperlink
= Strikethrough text
80
IMail v12 Administrator Help
System WebMail Message
How to get here
The System WebMail Message page allows the System Administrator to maintain a message that will display above the Web Client login page. Once enabled, this message is a system wide message and will display all users using the Web Client.
This text file is named
"webmailmsg.txt"
and can be located in the
"\IMail"
directory.
Note: "webmailmsg.txt" is set to work for the entire IMail Server, and does not work on a per domain level.
Enabled. Check this box to activate the display for messages above web client login page.
Tip: This does not disable the Administrator from updating the text area. This allows the
Administrator to update the message before displaying to the users.
Normal. Set by default. By design the "webmailmsg.txt" is an html file. Copying and pasting a web page will automatically copy all the source to this page. Click on HTML to view the source.
HTML. This will display the text as HTML source.
Note: Switching from the Normal text to HTML will display all tags and text that were in place with the Normal editor.
Preview. Displays how the message that will appear on the web client page.
Save. Click to save your settings.
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync
How to get here
The Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® page allows the System Administrator to view of all users that are enabled for mobile synchronization with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync®.
81
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Tip: For a single user to begin using Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® there are 3 levels that require Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® to be enabled: 1) System level, 2) Domain level
(see Domain Properties) and 3) the User level (See User Properties).
Select to allow your users capability to use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® to synchronize mobile devices with their web client information for e-mail, contacts, calendars, tasks and notes. Outlook synchronization is also capable, but requires installing the IMail Collaboration
Client. This enables synchronizing e-mail, contacts, calendars, tasks, and notes with mobile devices.
See Synchronizing with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® (on page 83) for more
information on mobile device setup to use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync®.
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® License Information
Displayed on this page is your Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® user license limit, with the number of enabled users by domain. Selecting a domain will display all the enabled users first, followed by the disabled users, with the capability to enable / disable multiple users at a time.
Should your license for Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® users go over the limit that you have purchased, a message will display at the top of the screen:
"You have reached your
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® licensed user limit"
Warning: Should your Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® license be over the limit, new users will have Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® disabled; and existing users can not be enabled until the limit is less than the Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® licensed user limit.
Status. (Enabled by default) System wide setting for Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync®. This allows all enabled domains with enabled ActiveSync® users to synchronize their mobile devices with their web client information for e-mail, contacts, calendars, tasks and notes.
Enable / Disable button is a system-wide setting that will activate or de-activate
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® for all users.
Warning: Disabling Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® at the System level will disable all
ActiveSync® users on all domains, overriding both Domain and User Properties.
Total Number of ActiveSync® Licenses. Total number of users authorized for ActiveSync® usage.
Total Number of ActiveSync® Licenses in Use. Total number of users with ActiveSync® enabled.
Days Remaining in ActiveSync® Licenses. Number of days remaining before license expires for Microsoft Exchange Activesync®.
82
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Search Box. Typing will automatically begin narrowing the list. The search assumes a wildcard automatically after the characters entered.
Note: Column Titles when clicked will sort the list for the current session only. Refreshing the page will reset the original sort.
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® Usage by Domain
Domain. Domain name on the IMail Server.
ActiveSync Enabled. (Yes / No) This is the Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® in the domain properties setting.
ActiveSync User Count. Total active users for the selected domain with Microsoft
Exchange ActiveSync® enabled. This count is totaling all users in the domain with
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® enabled at the user level.
Note: Domains that have Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® disabled will always display a zero for ActiveSync® User Count, ignoring the actual user settings.
Enable. Select a domain and click Enable to allow Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® access for the domain.
Disable. Select a domain and click Disable to turn off Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® access for the domain.
Related Topics
Synchronizing with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® (on page 83)
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® Users (on page 158)
Synchronizing With Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync
Mobile Device Synchronization with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync®
Note: See the Mobile Client White Paper for more detail information on mobile device setup.
IMail Server now supports Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® for the synchronization of data between a user's mobile device and your IMail Server. Once configuration of your mobile device is complete, synchronization will allow access to your e-mail messages, calendar appointments, contact information, tasks and notes.
IMail Server currently supports the following mobile devices:
Windows Mobile® 5
Windows Mobile® 6
83
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Windows Mobile® 6.1
iPhone™ and iPod Touch™ Software version 2.2.1 or later
Google Android™ Incredible by HTC
Google Android™ Droid by Motorola
Google Android™ Droid X by Motorola
Mobile Client Requirements
Two requirements are essential for mobile device synchronization:
1 Windows Mobile® 5.0 and later are the only devices that IMail currently supports for synchronizing data to your mobile device.
2 Data Access for synchronization by either:
A data plan provided by your cellular provider or
A wireless connection with internet data access
Mobile Device Synchronization
To correctly allow users to set up their mobile devices to synchronize with your IMail Server,
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® must be configured to run on their mobile device. Microsoft
Exchange ActiveSync® compares the information on your device with the information on your IMail Server and updates all locations with the most recent information. Microsoft
Exchange ActiveSync® will synchronize with your IMail Server information from your E-mail,
Contacts, Calendar, Tasks and Notes through your Web Client.
Outlook Synchronization
For Outlook synchronization, the IMail Collaboration Client must be installed. The IMail
Collaboration Client is located under your
...IMail\WorkgroupShare\ClientSetup\ folder and the application name is
"ClientInternationalSetup.exe".
Once installed Outlook will synchronize E-mail, Contacts, Calendar, Tasks and Notes with the
IMail Server. For more detail information see both the IMail Collaboration Server Guide
(http://docs.ipswitch.com/_Messaging/WorkgroupShare/WGS2.3/WGSServer.pdf) and the IMail
Collaboration Client Guide
(
http://docs.ipswitch.com/_Messaging/WorkgroupShare/WGSClient.pdf
).
Web Client Synchronization
Your web client has direct access to E-mail, Contacts and Calendar data, Tasks and Notes, which does not require synchronization. Once the IMail Collaboration Client and Microsoft
Exchange ActiveSync® are correctly configured, information updated using the Web Client will synchronize with both your user's mobile devices and Outlook.
Sync Log. This log defaults to the spool directory will only exist when errors are generated.
Errors that occur with mobile synchronization will log to
"syncmmddyyyy.log".
Related Topics
Mobile Client White Paper
84
IMail v12 Administrator Help
IMail Collaboration Server Guide
(http://docs.ipswitch.com/_Messaging/WorkgroupShare/WGS2.3/WGSServer.pdf)
IMail Collaboration Client Guide
(http://docs.ipswitch.com/_Messaging/WorkgroupShare/WGSClient.pdf)
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® License Summary (on page 81)
DomainKeys / DKIM
DomainKeys and DomainKeys Identified Mail (DKIM) are e-mail authentication methodologies designed to verify digitally signed e-mail on a per-domain basis. Both methods were designed for protection of e-mail identity and have assisted in the control of
"spam" and "phishing". DomainKeys and DKIM use asymmetric key cryptography to sign messages with a private key and use DNS to distribute the public key for signature verification.
DomainKeys (RFC4870 (http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc4870)) is a precursor to DKIM (RFC4871
(http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc4871)), though both are currently in use, DomainKeys is considered deprecated by DKIM.
See the following PDF for help in Getting Started with DomainKeys / DKIM.
DomainKeys
DomainKeys is a domain-level e-mail authentication standard that uses public/private key encryption and DNS to prove the legitimacy and contents of an e-mail message, and also verifies that the domain used in the "from" or "sender" header of a message has not been modified while in transit.
Public Key / Private Key
A public key/private key-pair is created for the sending domain. The private key is stored securely on the mail server and is used to sign all outgoing messages. The public key is stored and published in DNS as a TXT record of the domain.
When an e-mail is sent, the mail server will use the private key to digitally sign it, which is part of the message header. When the e-mail message is received, the DomainKeys signature can be verified against the public key on the domain's DNS.
For detail specifications on DomainKeys see RFC4870 (http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc4870).
DKIM
DKIM is very similar in functionality to DomainKeys, with an enhanced standard that provides more flexibility and security. Although DKIM does not filter or identify spam, widespread use of DKIM can prevent spammers from forging the source address of their messages. If
85
IMail v12 Administrator Help
spammers are forced to show a correct source domain, then the other spam filtering techniques will work more effectively.
Some of the improvements provided by DKIM are as follows:
Multiple hashing algorithms (as opposed to just one available with DomainKeys).
Capability for one DNS text record to handle multiple domains.
Improved option for canonicalization that validates header and body separately.
Capability to delegate signing to third parties.
Capability to self-sign additional headers.
More advanced options for customization using DKIM. (e.g. Hash Algorithms, Body
Settings, Expiration)
For detail specifications on DKIM see RFC4871 (http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc4871).
Related Topics
System Signing List (Selectors) (on page 86)
Domain Signing List (Selectors) (on page 185)
System Selector List (Signatures)
How to get here
Selectors allow a domain to have one DomainKeys selector and one DKIM selector enabled at one time. Multiple selectors are allowed in a domain to give the IMail Administrator capability to easily change from one public-key in DNS to another.
Important: Only one DomainKey selector and one DKIM selector can be enabled at one
time for a domain. Example: A DKIM selector "selector1" is enabled for domain1.com. The
IMail Administrator decides to enable "selector2" for domain1.com. "selector1" will automatically be disabled for domain1.com.
Important: After updating or creating a selector be sure to restart your SMTP and Queue
Manager services.
System Signatures (Selectors)
Status. (Disabled by default) A system-wide status setting for DomainKeys / DKIM.
Enable / Disable button is a system-wide setting that will activate / de-activate
DomainKeys / DKIM for all domains.
Search Box. Typing will automatically begin narrowing the list. The search assumes a wildcard automatically after the characters entered.
86
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Note: Column Titles when clicked will sort the list for the current session only. Refreshing the page will reset the original sort.
Selector List
Name. Name used to identify selector.
DNS Text Record. Name used to identify the selector in DNS. This text name allows any text string that is a legal DNS domain name.
Example: DNS Text Record set to MyDNSName will be named
"MyDNSName_domainkey.domainname.com"
Domains. Domain names that are assigned to selector.
Type. E-mail authentication type to verify the DNS domain of an E-mail sender and the message integrity.
DomainKeys. DomainKeys uses the Message Algorithm as the specified canonicalization method.
DKIM. (DomainKeys Identified Mail) is an enhanced protocol of DomainKeys, using public-key cryptography and key server technology to verify the source and contents of e-mail. DKIM uses the Header and Body Algorithm as the specified canonicalization method.
Add (on page 87). Click to add a new selector. This will give the following two options
Wizard (on page 200). Run this option for Administrators that are new to
DomainKeys.
Advanced (on page 87). Click this option for Administrators that are familiar with all
DomainKeys options.
Delete. Click this after selecting item(s) from the list to delete.
Related Topics
System Selector Add / Edit (on page 87)
System Selector Add / Edit
How to get here
87
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Important: After updating or creating a selector be sure to restart your SMTP and Queue
Manager services.
Selector Signing Properties
Type.
DomainKeys. Uses Message Algorithm for Preparation Signing.
DKIM. Uses Header and Body Algorithm for Preparation Signing.
Name. Value used to identify the selector in the IMail Administrator.
DNS Text Record. Name that will associate the selector in DNS. This text name allows any text string that is a legal DNS domain name.
Example: DNS Text Record set to MyDNSName will be named
"MyDNSName_domainkey.domainname.com"
Status. (On by default) Click "Off" to disable the selector.
Description. Free format text box limited to 1024 characters.
Header Algorithm (DKIM only). DKIM uses both the Header and Body Algorithm as the specified canonicalization method.
Simple. This algorithm is designed to be the least tolerant. Each header is unfolded per RFC2822 and is converted to lowercase.
Relaxed. (Set by default) This algorithm tolerates common modifications such as white-space replacement and header line re-wrapping.
Body Algorithm (DKIM only).
Simple. This algorithm is designed to be the least tolerant.
Relaxed. (Set by default) This algorithm tolerates common modifications such as white-space replacement and header line re-wrapping.
Message Algorithm (DomainKeys only). DomainKeys uses the Message Algorithm as the specified canonicalization method.
Simple. Allows toleration of almost no modification.
No Folding Whitespace (nofws). (Set by Default) Allows common modifications such as white-space replacement and header line re-wrapping.
Public Key. The public key which is automatically generated is what must be stored and published in DNS as a TXT record of the associated domain.
Tip: Remember to check for the "p=" in front of the key
88
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Advanced Properties
DomainKeys and DKIM Option
Private Key. Text box displaying text string of Private Key. The private key is stored securely on the mail server and is used to sign all outgoing messages.
Generate New Key. (Default is 1024 Kb) Clicking this button will generate a new
Private Key, with a pop-up option for the private key length (512, 768, 1024, 1536,
2048).
DKIM Advanced Options Only
Hash Algorithm. SHA (Secure Hash Algorithm) hash functions are a set of cryptographic hash functions designed by the NSA and published by the NIST as a US Federal Information
Processing Standard.
SHA-256. (Set by default) Is an improved hash function in the SHA-2 family, computed with 32-bit words.
SHA-1. The best established of the existing SHA hash functions, and is employed in several widely used security applications and protocols.
Body Settings. Options for body length limits when signing.
Sign Entire Body. (Set by default)
Sign Entire Body and Include Length Tag. Including the length tag allows message trailers to be better tolerated after the message is sent.
Specify Max Body Length for Signing. Textbox for max amount of bytes to sign.
Expiration. When both the Timestamp and Expiration Tag are set, then a validation check will be done to verify that the Expiration Tag is greater than the Timestamp when the signature is verified.
Include Timestamp. (Set by Default) This tag tells the verifying server when the signature was generated.
Include Expiration Tag. (Optional) When used, this tag tells the verifying server to ignore this signature after the time specified.
Time in Which to Expire. Time is counted by minutes, hours or days. The expiration time will be calculated based on the time when the signature is generated.
Authoritative Domain.
Use the Domain's Auth Name. (Set by default) This option requires a DNS text record for each domain signature selector.
Use the Sending User's Domain Name. This option requires a DNS text record for each domain signature selector.
Use the Following Auth Name. (Set by default for DKIM Wizard) This option allows the administrator to create one DNS text record to handle many domains.
89
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Assigning Domains
Domains can easily be assigned to a selector, allowing the domain to use as a signature.
Available Domains not Assigned
The left box displays all available domains that do not have the selector assigned.
Domain Name. Domain name that currently does not have the current selector assigned.
(Add Domain to Selector). Select an available domain and click to add to the current selector.
(Remove Domain from Selector). Select a domain from the domains currently assigned and click to remove the current selector.
(Add All Domains to Selector). Click to add all available domains to the current selector.
(Remove All Domains From Selector). Click to remove all domains from the current selector.
Assigned Domains for Current Selector
Domain Name. Domain name that has the current selected assigned.
Enabled. Check this box to activate and allow the domain to use the selector.
Enable All. Click this button to activate all the assigned selectors.
Disable All. Click this button to deactivate all the assigned selectors. The selector will be assigned to all the domains, but the selector will be disabled for use as a domain signature.
Test DNS Setup. Click this button to test the current selector against your current DNS setup.
The DNS Test button will display "successful" for each domain. A link to assist with DNS problems will display for domains that "failed".
See the following KB for DNS help -
http://kb.imailserver.com/cgi-bin/imail.cfg/php/enduser/std_adp.php?p_faqid=727
(http://kb.imailserver.com/cgi-bin/imail.cfg/php/enduser/std_adp.php?p_faqid=727)
Headers List
Sign All Headers. (Not set by default) See all Headers.
Sign All Headers when setting Prevent Adding for a signature will be unchecked, unless the header list is specified otherwise.
Warning: Disabling the default set of headers to be signed opens the possibility of header modifications and spoofing depending on the headers that are being signed.
DomainKeys / DKIM Headers
By default (RFC minimum recommendation) the following headers are set for signing:
90
IMail v12 Administrator Help
CC
Content-Description
Content-ID
Content-Transfer-Encoding
Content-Type, Date
From, In-Reply-To
List-Archive
List-Help
List-ID
List-Owner
List-Post
List-Subscribe
List-Unsubscribe
Message-ID
MIME-Version
References
Reply-To
Resent-CC
Resent-Date
Resent-From
Resent-Message-ID
Resent-Sender
Resent-To
Sender, Subject
To
TIP: The default headers are recommended as the minimum headers necessary for maintaining secure header signing.
DomainKeys Header List
Name. Header name selected to be signed.
DKIM Header List
Name. Header name selected to be signed.
Maximum Number To Sign. (Default set to 1) Maximum number of same headers allowed to be signed.
Sign All. (True by Default) Signatures will sign all headers with the same headers for the domain.
91
IMail v12 Administrator Help
check box is set.
Prevent Adding. (False by Default) A signature will not tolerate headers with the same header name to be added.
Add Header. Click the Add button to create a custom header or select a header from the drop down for a list of all headers.
Edit Header. (DKIM functionality only) Select a header and click the Edit button to update the header options.
Delete Header. Select a header and click the Delete button to remove.
Note: To maintain a secure header signing, it is not recommended to remove a default header.
Related Topics
About DomainKeys / DKIM (on page 85)
System Selector List (Signatures) (on page 86)
Realtime Blacklists (Server Level)
How to get here
Server level Realtime Blacklists are spam databases that store information about IP addresses that are known to send spam. IP addresses that have open mail relays (relays mail for anyone) are also commonly listed in blacklists, because those servers have the potential to be easily hijacked by spammers. Each blacklist compares the IP addresses from which an e-mail is sent against the spam database to look for a match. If a domain’s IP address is listed in one of the blacklists, mail from that domain should be suspected of being spam.
All blacklists must be configured and enabled at the server level before an IMail e-mail domain can use them. This lets a system administrator decide which blacklists to allow an e-mail domain to use. Only blacklists that are enabled on the Realtime Blacklists page are available for use in domain (host) level configurations.
Use Realtime Blacklists Options to add, edit and delete server blacklists. All blacklists that are currently configured for the server are displayed in the realtime blacklist. The realtime blacklist information is stored in the
"spamblkm.txt"
file located in the
"...\IMail"
top directory.
92
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Note: Realtime Blacklists must be enabled at the server level before they are made available for use at the email domain level. Realtime blacklists ar then used at the domain level (when bound to an IP address), where administrators can choose which blacklists to
enable for the host on the Connection Checks (on page 333) page.
Realtime Blacklist
Realtime Blacklist Name. Enter a name in the text box to identify a new blacklist.
This can be any name that you want, and will be used in log lines to identify the blacklist entry.
Type. Select the type of lookup that the blacklist performs from the list box.
ADDR (ADDRESS). This type of blacklist uses a message's "FROM" address to determine whether the message is spam.
DNS. This type of blacklist checks the IP address of the connecting SMTP server against spam databases to determine whether the message is spam. If the IP address is listed in one of the blacklist's databases, the message is identified as spam.
HELO. This type of blacklist checks the domain supplied in the HELO or EHLO command to determine whether to accept the message. The domain name that is given in the HELO/EHLO command must match the IP address.
RHS (RIGHT-HAND SIDE). This type of blacklist checks the information following the
@ symbol supplied in the "MAIL FROM" command to determine whether the message is spam.
Server. In the text box, enter the domain name or IP address of the DNS server to contact for blacklist queries. This field contains an asterisk (*) by default, which indicates that the default IMail Server DNS is used for blacklist queries, where it relays the DNS query to the DNS server for the blacklist. Using the asterisk eliminates the need to enter the IP address or domain.
Query Domain. In the text box, enter the domain to query in the zone file. This name usually matches the server domain name. However, sometimes a blacklist will contain multiple zones to query on the same server. When this happens, the server name and the query domain will be different. The only way to know this is to read the documentation for the blacklist being used.
Enable. Select the check box to enable the blacklist.
TCP/IP First. Some blacklists, especially ones that supply .txt records, have packets that are too large to transmit via the UDP protocol. These lists disable UDP access and require TCP to query the blacklist. Select this check box to allow the administrator to flag a list as one of these types.
Add. Click this button to Add to Realtime Blacklist (on page 94) page.
Edit. Select an item and click this button to Edit the Realtime Blacklist (on page 94) to
the Realtime Blacklist.
Delete. Select an item to delete and click the Delete button.
93
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Important: Updates made to the Realtime Blacklist will not successfully update until the
"Save" button has been clicked, and the message "Your changes have been saved" is displayed at the top.
Save. Click to save your settings. An "Update Successful" message and the time of the update appear.
Related Topics
Server Level Anti-spam Options (Blacklists) (on page 97)
Understanding Realtime Blacklists (on page 95)
How Blacklists Work (on page 96)
Adding a Realtime Blacklist (on page 94)
Setting Connection Checks Options (on page 333)
Add/Edit Realtime Blacklist
How to get here
This pop-up enables you to either edit an existing realtime blacklist or configure a new realtime blacklist.
Important: Fields cannot be left blank or contain spaces.
Realtime Blacklist Name. Enter a name in the text box to identify a new blacklist.
This can be any name that you want, and will be used in log lines to identify the blacklist entry.
Type. Select the type of lookup that the blacklist performs from the list box.
ADDR (ADDRESS). This type of blacklist uses a message's "FROM" address to determine whether the message is spam.
DNS. This type of blacklist checks the IP address of the connecting SMTP server against spam databases to determine whether the message is spam. If the IP address is listed in one of the blacklist's databases, the message is identified as spam.
HELO. This type of blacklist checks the domain supplied in the HELO or EHLO command to determine whether to accept the message. The domain name that is given in the HELO/EHLO command must match the IP address.
RHS (RIGHT-HAND SIDE). This type of blacklist checks the information following the
@ symbol supplied in the "MAIL FROM" command to determine whether the message is spam.
94
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Server. In the text box, enter the domain name or IP address of the DNS server to contact for blacklist queries. This field contains an asterisk (*) by default, which indicates that the default IMail Server DNS is used for blacklist queries, where it relays the DNS query to the DNS server for the blacklist. Using the asterisk eliminates the need to enter the IP address or domain.
Query Domain. In the text box, enter the domain to query in the zone file. This name usually matches the server domain name. However, sometimes a blacklist will contain multiple zones to query on the same server. When this happens, the server name and the query domain will be different. The only way to know this is to read the documentation for the blacklist being used.
Enable. Select the check box to enable the blacklist.
TCP/IP First. Some blacklists, especially ones that supply .txt records, have packets that are too large to transmit via the UDP protocol. These lists disable UDP access and require TCP to query the blacklist. Select this check box to allow the administrator to flag a list as one of these types.
OK. Click this button to add to Realtime Blacklist. The new blacklist appears on the Realtime
Blacklists page, but will not be permanent until the "Save" button is clicked.
Cancel. Click this button to cancel adding a new blacklist. No new information should appear on the Realtime Blacklists page.
Related Topics
Understanding Realtime Blacklists (on page 95)
How Blacklists Work (on page 96)
Setting Realtime Blacklist Options (on page 336)
Setting Connection Checks Options (on page 333)
Understanding Realtime Blacklists
What is a Realtime Blacklist?
Realtime blacklists are databases of known spammers. These databases contain IP addresses that are known to send spam. They also contain IP addresses that have open mail relays, because a spammer can easily use these systems to send out spam.
How IMail Server Uses Realtime Blacklists
IMail Server uses realtime blacklists during connection filtering. In order to fully understand how anti-spam and connection filtering work, it is necessary to understand realtime blacklists.
Connection filtering compares each message against the configured realtime blacklists to see if the IP address of the connecting server is listed. If the result is positive, the message is either deleted or an X-Header is inserted into the message.
95
IMail v12 Administrator Help
"Standard" and "Trusted" Realtime Blacklists
You can separate realtime blacklists into two categories: Standard Realtime Blacklists and
Trusted Realtime Blacklists.
A Trusted Realtime Blacklist is one that you know is updated frequently, and is more likely to be accurate. You may also identify a blacklist as trusted because you find that for your uses it produces the least number of false positives.
Warning: If a message makes a match on the Trusted Blacklist, it is automatically deleted.
A Standard Realtime Blacklist is a blacklist of which you are uncertain about its accuracy. If a message matches one of these lists, an X-Header is inserted into the message, indicating which blacklist it matched.
Configurable for Each Host
Realtime blacklists are configurable for the entire server, which enables a system administrator to decide which realtime blacklists are available to each domain. Each domain administrator is then responsible for enabling the configured blacklist for the domain. A domain cannot use a blacklist that is not configured and enabled for the server.
Related Topics
Server Level Anti-spam Options (Blacklists) (on page 97)
How Blacklists Work (on page 96)
Server Level Realtime Blacklists (on page 92)
Trusted Blacklists (on page 336)
Add/Edit the Realtime Blacklist (on page 94)
How Blacklists Work
Realtime blacklist databases contain a list of IP addresses that are known to send spam. They also contain IP addresses that have open mail relays, because a spammer can easily hijack these systems to send out spam. Each blacklist has different reasons for why an IP address is blacklisted. Among the more common reasons are: dialups, bulk mailers, spammers and open relays.
Categorizing IP Addresses in Separate Domains
Just as blacklists have different criteria for including IP addresses, they also have different ways of categorizing the IP addresses. Some blacklists use different domains (called query domains) to separate IP addresses based on the reason they are blacklisted. One domain will contain only IP addresses for dialup accounts, another domain will contain only IP addresses for bulk mailers. This type of categorization allows you to select the reasons for which you do
96
IMail v12 Administrator Help
not want to accept blacklisted mail, and use the domain that contains IP addresses for that reason.
Categorizing IP Addresses by a Reason Code/IP Address
Other blacklists return a reason code/IP address (i.e. 127.0.0.3) as to why an IP address is blacklisted. Although all IP addresses are listed in one domain, each will contain a reason code that explains why it is included. For example, a code of 127.0.0.3 may represent a dial-up account, and a code of 127.0.0.4 might represent a bulk mailer. The Fiveten blacklist is an example of one of these blacklists.
How to Determine Which Method a Blacklist Uses
Unfortunately, there is no standard across blacklists. One blacklist may use separate query domains, and another may use reason/IP codes. Likewise, there is no standard across the reason/IP codes that are returned. For one blacklist, 127.0.0.3 may represent dial-ups, and on another blacklist this code may represent bulk mailers. The best resources for finding out this information are the blacklists themselves. By going to their web sites, you can learn how each blacklist classifies the listed IP addresses.
Related Topics
Server Level Anti-spam Options (Blacklists) (on page 97)
Understanding Realtime Blacklists (on page 95)
Server Level Realtime Blacklists (on page 92)
Trusted Blacklists (on page 336)
Add/Edit the Realtime Blacklist (on page 94)
Server Level Anti-spam Options (Blacklists)
You can separate Realtime Blacklists into two categories:
Standard Realtime Blacklists. A trusted realtime blacklist is the one that is updated frequently, and is more likely to be accurate. You may also identify a blacklist as trusted because you find that it produces the least number of false positives. If a message matches one of these blacklists, it is automatically deleted.
Trusted Realtime Blacklists. A standard realtime blacklist is a blacklist of which you are uncertain about its accuracy. If a message matches one of these lists, an X-Header is inserted into the message, indicating which blacklist it matched.
Related Topics
How Blacklists Work (on page 96)
Understanding Realtime Blacklists (on page 95)
Server Level Realtime Blacklists (on page 92)
97
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Creating a rule to filter messages listed in a blacklist
Suppose you want to accept all messages whose IP addresses are listed in the FIVETEN blacklist because they are dialup addresses. You can filter the e-mail based on the X-Header that is inserted into the message and the IP/reason code that is returned from the blacklist. In the following example, 127.0.0.3 is the IP/reason code for dial up connections used by the
FIVETEN blacklist. For more information on IP/reason codes, see How Blacklists Work (on
Example of creating a rule to accept blacklists for specific reasons:
1 Make sure that all of the anti-spam features are setup with the Insert X-Header action to be taken when e-mail is determined to be spam.
2 Set up a delivery rule (Inbound Rule) at either the host or user level that will search for all messages that contain the following X-Header:
X-IMAIL-SPAM-DNSBL: (FIVETEN, +\d, 127.0.0.3)
The rule looks as follows in the Rules dialog box:
Header Contains X-IMAIL-SPAM-DNSBL:(FIVETEN, +\d,127.0.0.3)
For more information, see Setting Inbound Rules (on page 228).
Choose one of the following rule actions: Forward, Move to Mailbox, or Copy. For example, select Move to Mailbox and in the Address text box enter "Spam".
This rule searches for all messages whose IP addresses are in the FIVETEN blacklist because they are dialups and sends them to a mailbox called "Spam".
The example rule looks as follows in the rules.ima file:
H~ X-
IMAIL-SPAM-DNSBL:(FIVETEN):Spam evaluate the messages that are trapped to ensure that no legitimate mail gets caught by mistake.
Realtime Whitelists (Server Level)
How to get here
Realtime Whitelists are whitelist databases that store IP addresses and domain names of trusted sources. E-mail messages that find a Realtime Whitelist match will be considered trusted and further validation checks as set by the IMail Administrator will be bypassed.
Trusted Realtime Whitelist
98
IMail v12 Administrator Help
A match made with a trusted realtime whitelist will bypass the following validations.
DomainKeys will be bypassed if enabled.
IP Reputation (if Premium Anti-spam is installed) if enabled.
Realtime Blacklists will not be checked.
Content Filtering checks will be skipped.
Premium Content Filtering (if installed) will be bypassed if enabled.
Attachment Blocking is skipped (checkbox is set by default). This check box can overridden by the IMail Administrator.
Important: Updates made to the Realtime Whitelist will not successfully update until the
"Save" or "Apply" button has been clicked.
Note: Be sure that the SMTP and Queue Manager services have been restarted after updates have been applied.
Realtime Whitelist
Important: Fields cannot be left blank or contain spaces.
Realtime Whitelist Name. Enter a name in the text box to identify a new whitelist.
This can be any name that you want, and will be used in log lines to identify the realtime whitelist entry.
Type. Select the type of lookup that the realtime whitelist performs from the list box.
ADDR (ADDRESS). This type of whitelist uses a message's "FROM" address to determine whether the message is whitelisted.
DNS. (Set by Default) This type of whitelist checks the IP address of the connecting
SMTP server against spam databases to determine whether the message is whitelisted.
Tip: Be sure that the IP address of your DNS Server matches the DNS Server as set in Queue
Manager > Service Properties.
HELO. This type of whitelist checks the domain supplied in the HELO or EHLO command to determine whether to accept the message. The domain name that is given in the HELO/EHLO command must match the IP address.
RHS (RIGHT-HAND SIDE). This type of whitelist checks the information following the
@ symbol supplied in the "MAIL FROM" command to determine whether the message is whitelisted.
Server. Enter the domain name or IP address of the DNS server to contact for whitelist queries, where it will relay the DNS Query to the DNS server for the whitelist.
By default this text box contains an asterisk (*), to indicate use of the default IMail
DNS Server (as set in Queue Manager > Service Properties) for whitelist queries.
99
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Note: Use of an asterisk eliminates the need to enter the IMail DNS Server address.
Query Domain. In the text box, enter the domain to query in the zone file. This name usually matches the server domain name. However, sometimes a whitelist will contain multiple zones to query on the same server. When this happens, the server name and the query domain will be different. The only way to know this is to read the documentation for the whitelist being used.
Enable. Select the check box to enable the whitelist.
Add. Click this button to Add to Realtime Whitelist (on page 100) page.
Edit. Select an item and click this button to Edit the Realtime Whitelist (on page 100)
to the Realtime Whitelist.
Delete. Select an item to delete and click the Delete button.
Important: Updates made to the Realtime Whitelist will not successfully update until the
"Save" button has been clicked, and the message "Your changes have been saved" is displayed at the top.
Save. Click to save your settings. An "Update Successful" message and the time of the update appear.
Related Topics
Understanding Realtime Whitelists (on page 102)
Adding a Realtime Whitelist (on page 100)
Setting Realtime Domain Whitelist (on page 269)
Realtime Whitelist - Add / Edit
How to get here
This pop-up enables you to either edit an existing realtime whitelist or configure a new realtime whitelist.
Important: Fields cannot be left blank or contain spaces.
Realtime Whitelist Name. Enter a name in the text box to identify a new whitelist.
This can be any name that you want, and will be used in log lines to identify the realtime whitelist entry.
Type. Select the type of lookup that the realtime whitelist performs from the list box.
ADDR (ADDRESS). This type of whitelist uses a message's "FROM" address to determine whether the message is whitelisted.
100
IMail v12 Administrator Help
DNS. (Set by Default) This type of whitelist checks the IP address of the connecting
SMTP server against spam databases to determine whether the message is whitelisted.
Tip: Be sure that the IP address of your DNS Server matches the DNS Server as set in Queue
Manager > Service Properties.
HELO. This type of whitelist checks the domain supplied in the HELO or EHLO command to determine whether to accept the message. The domain name that is given in the HELO/EHLO command must match the IP address.
RHS (RIGHT-HAND SIDE). This type of whitelist checks the information following the
@ symbol supplied in the "MAIL FROM" command to determine whether the message is whitelisted.
Server. Enter the domain name or IP address of the DNS server to contact for whitelist queries, where it will relay the DNS Query to the DNS server for the whitelist.
By default this text box contains an asterisk (*), to indicate use of the default IMail
DNS Server (as set in Queue Manager > Service Properties) for whitelist queries.
Note: Use of an asterisk eliminates the need to enter the IMail DNS Server address.
Query Domain. In the text box, enter the domain to query in the zone file. This name usually matches the server domain name. However, sometimes a whitelist will contain multiple zones to query on the same server. When this happens, the server name and the query domain will be different. The only way to know this is to read the documentation for the whitelist being used.
Enable. Select the check box to enable the whitelist.
Save. Click to save your settings.
Cancel. Click Cancel to exit without saving changes.
OK. Click this button to add to Realtime Whitelist The new whitelist appears on the Realtime
Whitelists page, but will not be permanent until the "Save" button is clicked.
Cancel. Click this button to cancel adding a new whitelist. No new information should appear on the Realtime Whitelists page.
Related Topics
Understanding Realtime Whitelist (on page 102)
Realtime Whitelists (Server Level) (on page 98)
Setting Domain Realtime Whitelist (on page 270)
101
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Understanding Realtime Whitelists
Realtime Whitelists are whitelist databases that store IP addresses and domain names of trusted sources. E-mail messages that find a Realtime Whitelist match will be considered trusted and further validation checks as set by the IMail Administrator will be bypassed.
Trusted Realtime Whitelist
A match made with a trusted realtime whitelist will bypass the following validations.
DomainKeys will be bypassed if enabled.
IP Reputation (if Premium Anti-spam is installed) if enabled.
Realtime Blacklists will not be checked.
Content Filtering checks will be skipped.
Premium Content Filtering (if installed) will be bypassed if enabled.
Attachment Blocking is skipped (checkbox is set by default). This check box can overridden by the IMail Administrator.
Important: Updates made to the Realtime Whitelist will not successfully update until the
"Save" or "Apply" button has been clicked.
Note: Be sure that the SMTP and Queue Manager services have been restarted after updates have been applied.
Each enabled Domain level Realtime Whitelist compares the IP addresses from the e-mail sender to look for a match. If a domain’s IP address is matched, mail from that domain is trusted and allowed to bypass validations as set by the IMail Administrator.
All Realtime Whitelists must be configured and enabled at the server level before an IMail e-mail domain can be set and used. This allows the IMail System Administrator to decide which whitelists should be allowed an e-mail domain for use. Only whitelists that are enabled on the system level Realtime Whitelists page are available for use and configuration at the
Domain level Realtime Whitelists.
Use Realtime Whitelists Options to add, edit and delete server whitelists. All whitelists that are currently configured for the server are displayed in the realtime whitelist. The realtime whitelist information is stored in the under the IMail registry under the
"DNSWhitelist"
key.
Note: Realtime Whitelists must be enabled at the server level before they are made available for use at the e-mail domain level. Realtime Whitelists are then used at the domain level (when bound to an IP address), where administrators can choose which whitelists to
enable for the selected domain at the Domain > Realtime Whitelist (on page 269) page.
Related Topics
Realtime Whitelists (Server Level) (on page 98)
Realtime Domain Whitelists (on page 269)
102
IMail v12 Administrator Help
External Address Verification
How to get here
External Address Verification (available and sold separately) allows IMail Administrators capability to use the IMail Server as a gateway to determine valid users on the destination server and reject all other recipients as invalid at the gateway.
This user verification process can be made by setting up an External Address Verifier. The
External Address Verifier simply identifies users as valid or invalid.
The External Address Verifier is highly configurable, but currently only LDAP is supported as a verification database.
External Address Verification
Note: Restart SMTP Services after modifications are made to External Address Verifiers.
System Setting to Enable External Address Verification
Verification Disabled. (Set by default) Globally disabled all External Address
Verification.
Verification Enabled. Enables Address verification as defined by the Verification List.
Enabled for Specified Domains. This setting will process address verification for only specified domains.
Note: Domains that are not on this list, will bypass all External Address Verifications and process as usual.
Enabled for Specified Domains
Domain Name. This list is available only when Enabled for Specified Domain Names is set. This list identifies domains that use External Address Verification.
Wildcard capability is available. See Examples (on page 107).
Note: Domain Names list will only display when "Enabled for Specified Domains" is selected
Verifiers
Verifier Name. Enter a name in the text box to identify the Verifier. This can be any name that you want, and will be used in log lines to identify the External Address
Verification entry.
Verifier Type. Select the type of lookup that the Verifier performs.
103
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Verifier Enabled. (True by Default) Displays the verifiers that are active. Click "Edit" to disable a verifier temporarily.
Note: Use "Delete" to permanently remove a verifier.
Add (on page 105). Click to create a new verifier.
Delete. Click to permanently remove a verifier.
To modify the order of verification, select a verifier and click one of the following buttons
Move Up. Moves selected verifier up one line.
Move Down. Moves selected verifier down one line.
Move To Top. Moves selected verifier to the top of the list.
Move To Bottom. Moves selected verifier to the bottom of the list.
Advanced Settings
Caching Enabled. (Not set by Default) The verification process is considered an expensive cpu resource, and with a busy mail server this could at times backup the mail process. Activating Verification Caching will allow storage of verified addresses and bypass the expensive duplicate address lookups. Verified addresses will only remain in cache for the duration of the Entry Timeout Interval setting (this setting is reset each time a match is made in cache). If the cache settings for Memory Limits are left at their default zero settings then the operating system will calculate settings based on system experience and history, which usually is unlimited.
Note: It is recommended that IMail Administrators set their Memory Limits and tweak as necessary to attain the best server efficiency.
Memory Limit (MB). (Default = 0) Maximum amount of memory allowed for caching.
Once this maximum space is met, the oldest cache listings will be dropped. The default setting of zero allows the operating system to determine the limit, which effectively is unlimited.
Memory Limit (%). (Default = 0) Maximum percentage of memory allowed for caching. Once this percentage is met, the oldest cache listings will be dropped.
Entry Timeout Interval (minutes). (Default = 240) Length of time that an entry will remain in cache before being cleared out.
Note: Each time a cached entry is verified the Entry Timeout Interval is reset.
104
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Polling Interval (minutes). (Default = 2) The time interval set for cache to be poll itself. The polling process includes cleaning out expired address and also removes entries necessary to keep the memory limits within settings.
Note: Polling is an expensive process, it is recommended not to change the default setting.
Add. Click this button to Add to External Address Verifier (on page 105) page.
Delete. Select an item to delete and click the Delete button.
Warning: Updates made to the External Address Verification list will not successfully update until the "Save" button has been clicked, and the message "Your changes have been saved" is displayed at the top.
Save. Click to save your settings.
Related Topics
Logging for External Address Verification (on page 109)
Add / Edit External Address Verifier (on page 105)
About External Address Verification (on page 109)
Add/Edit External Address Verifier
How to get here
This pop-up enables you to either edit an existing Verifier or configure a new Verifier. See
Active Directory / LDAP Verifier
Auto Detect For Active Directory. Check this box if your mail server is on an Active
Directory domain. Auto Detect will automatically pull information using the current domain and search all the sub-containers.
Note: The settings used for Auto Detect will not fill user interface text boxes.
Enabled. (Set by Default) Enables verifier for use once saved.
Verifier Name. (Required) Enter a name in the text box to identify the Address
Verifier. This can be any name that you want, and will be used in log lines to identify the Address Verifier.
Host Address. The fully qualified domain name or IP address of the LDAP server. The
IMail Server will attempt to resolve this information automatically if left blank.
Port. The TCP port for your LDAP Server. Port 389 is the default when left blank.
105
IMail v12 Administrator Help
DN. The Distinguished Name of the LDAP container on the server to connect to and query. The IMail Server will attempt a rootDSE call for the Default Naming Context to set the DN when left blank.
Username / Password. Credentials used for connecting to your LDAP Server.
Normally this would only be used if the mail server is not a member of the domain being used. If left blank the SMTP Service user context is used, which is normally
"NT authority\LocalSystem"
.
Filter. This is an advanced option feature and should only be used with a full understanding of LDAP filter strings. Normally this is used only to connect with a custom LDAP Server. For an Active Directory database sAMAccountName, User
Principal Name, CN, and OpenLDAP uid are used as part of the default search string.
Enable Sub-level Search. Set by Default. This setting will allow LDAP to search the current container and all sub containers indicated by the DN. Leaving this unchecked will limit LDAP to search only the the container indicated by DN.
Authentication Type. This drop down identifies the Authentication Type to be used with the LDAP Verifier.
Secure. For secure authentication, the Address Verifier will authenticate using NTLM or Kerberos depending on the OS is configuration to use Windows NT or an Active
Directory provider. This is the value that will be used when the Auto Detect is being used.
ServerBind. Uses standard LDAP authentication against the server. This should be used when connecting to other LDAP servers (including the IMail LDAP Server).
Note: If the Active Directory path includes a server name, then specify this flag when using
LDAP. Do not use this flag for paths that include a domain name or for serverless paths.
Anonymous. Selected this setting only if the LDAP does not require authentication.
Test Verifier. Click this button to test the current verifier settings. Saving is not required for use of the test button.
Address to Verify. Email address to test.
OK. Click this button to add / update the External Address Verifier. The new verifier will appear on the External Address Verification list, but will not be permanent until the "Save" button is clicked.
Cancel. Click to return to External Address Verifier page without saving.
Related Topics
About External Address Verification (on page 95)
External Address Verification (on page 103)
Logging for External Address Verification (on page 109)
106
IMail v12 Administrator Help
External Address Verification - Wildcard Examples
Wildcard Usage for Domain Names
Example 1 (No Wildcards):
External Address Verification is enabled for specified domains. Only the following specified domain names will be available for External Address Verification. No wildcard usage is made.
Domain Name
"mail.domain.com"
"mail.subname.domain.com"
"subname.domain.com"
"domain.com"
Example 2 (Wildcard Usage):
External Address Verification is enabled for specified domains. The following are examples of
valid and invalid wildcards designed for External Address Verification.
Domain Name
*.domain.com
*domain.com
domain.*.com dom*.com dom* domain.*
*.domain.*.com
mail.domain.com - VALID
mail.dude.domain.com - VALID
subway.atlanta.domain.com - VALID
mail.newyorkdomain.com - NOT VALID
domain.noway.com - NOT VALID
mail.newyorkdomain.com - VALID
domain.noway.com - VALID
mail.domain.com - NOT VALID
mail.dude.domain.com - NOT VALID
subway.atlanta.domain.com - NOT VALID
NOT A VALID WILDCARD
NOT A VALID WILDCARD
NOT A VALID WILDCARD
NOT A VALID WILDCARD
NOT A VALID WILDCARD - Only one asterisk is honored and handled as a wildcard.
External Address Verification - Verifier Example
Active Directory Verifier
Example
107
IMail v12 Administrator Help
The following verifier is explained below
Auto Detect For Active Directory.
"Not checked"
as this verifier is not on the specified domain.
Enabled. (Set by Default) Enables verifier for use once saved.
Verifier Name. (Required)
"qatest"
Name set to identify the LDAP Verifier.
Host Address.
"192.168.6.225"
The IP address of the Active Directory server.
Port. Left blank defaults to port 389 .
DN.
"dc=qatest,dc=local"
The domain component that will be connected and queried.
Username / Password.
"user1"
Credentials to be used to connect.
Filter. No filter in place. The default filter will be used.
Enable Sub-level Search.
"Enabled"
To search the current container and all sub containers indicated by the DN.
Authentication Type. Secure.
108
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Address to Verify. salesuser1 verified.
About External Address Verification
External Address Verification (available and sold separately) allows IMail Administrators capability to use the IMail Server as a gateway to determine valid users on the destination server and reject all other recipients as invalid at the gateway.
This user verification process can be made by setting up an External Address Verifier. The
External Address Verifier simply identifies users as valid or invalid.
The External Address Verifier is highly configurable, but currently only LDAP is supported as a verification database.
Related Topics
Logging for External Address Verification (on page 109)
External Address Verification (on page 103)
Add / Edit External Address Verifier (on page 105)
Logging for External Address Verification
Logging for Address Verification are written to the syslogs, located under the Log Directory path at System > System Settings > Log Directory. default path is
"c:\Program Files\Ipswitch\IMail\logs"
Note: Debug Messages and Verbose Logging has been turned on for SMTP Logging.
Sample of Address Verification Logging
Enabled for Specified Domains
Address not successfully verified. Domain address not a specified domain.
109
IMail v12 Administrator Help
03:10 13:26 SMTPD(8c61000000010002) <<< RCPT TO:
03:10 13:26 SMTPD(8c61000000010002) [192.168.5.200] RCPT TO:
03:10 13:26 SMTPD(8c61000000010002) [x] looking up internal.server.local in HOSTS
03:10 13:26 SMTPD(8c61000000010002) External Address Verification rejected address [email protected]. Domain is not allowed.
03:10 13:26 SMTPD(8c61000000010002) >>> 550 not local host internal.server.local, not a gateway
Address not successfully verified. User invalid for a specified domain.
03:10 13:29 SMTPD(3d63000000010002) <<< RCPT TO:
03:10 13:29 SMTPD(3d63000000010002) [192.168.5.200] RCPT TO:
03:10 13:29 SMTPD(3d63000000010002) [x] looking up internal.server.local in HOSTS
03:10 13:29 SMTPD(3d63000000010002) External Address Verification rejected address [email protected].
03:10 13:29 SMTPD(3d63000000010002) >>> 550 not local host internal.server.local, not a gateway
Address successfully verified.
03:10 13:18 SMTPD(6086000000020002) <<< RCPT TO:
03:10 13:18 SMTPD(6086000000020002) [192.168.5.200] RCPT TO:
03:10 13:18 SMTPD(6086000000020002) [x] looking up internal.server.local in HOSTS
03:10 13:18 SMTPD(6086000000020002) External Address Verification verified address [email protected]. Verifier Name: QATest
AD Database
03:10 13:18 SMTPD(6086000000020002) >>> 250 ok its for
Address successfully verified from a cache entry.
110
IMail v12 Administrator Help
03:10 13:36 SMTPD(8e2a000000010002) <<< VRFY
03:10 13:36 SMTPD(8e2a000000010002) [x] looking up internal.server.local in HOSTS
03:10 13:36 SMTPD(8e2a000000010002) External Address Verification verified address [email protected]. Address found in the address results cache.
03:10 13:36 SMTPD(8e2a000000010002) >>> 250 ok its for
03:10 13:36 SMTPD(8e2a000000010002) [192.168.5.200] VRFY Successful for: <[email protected]>
SMTP Startup Logging
External Address Verification is enabled - 3 verifiers are active, 1 is disabled, and the cache is enabled.
03:10 12:31 SMTPD(0000000000000000) Auto Restart Queue Manager:
False
03:10 12:31 SMTPD(0000000000000000) External Address Verification loaded and enabled.
03:10 12:31 SMTPD(0000000000000000) Caching enabled
03:10 12:31 SMTPD(0000000000000000)
04:00:00
Item Expiration:
03:10 12:31 SMTPD(0000000000000000)
03:10 12:31 SMTPD(0000000000000000)
03:10 12:31 SMTPD(0000000000000000)
Memory Limit (MB): 0
Memory Limit (%): 0
Polling Interval:
00:02:00
03:10 12:31 SMTPD(0000000000000000) Verifiers Active: 2, Verifiers
Disabled: 1
03:10 12:31 SMTPD(0000000000000000) 0: (Enabled) Name=QATest
AD Database |
Type=Ipswitch.Messaging.AddressVerification.LdapAddressVerifier
03:10 12:31 SMTPD(0000000000000000) 1: (Enabled)
Name=Ipswitch_m AD Database |
Type=Ipswitch.Messaging.AddressVerification.LdapAddressVerifier
03:10 12:31 SMTPD(0000000000000000) 2: (Disabled)
Name=Internal LDAP Database |
Type=Ipswitch.Messaging.AddressVerification.LdapAddressVerifier
03:10 12:31 SMTPD(0000000000000000) SMTP Service Started
Verifiers failed to load. With Debug Messages and Verbose Logging enabled, Log lines will display error details.
111
IMail v12 Administrator Help
03:10 12:48 SMTPD(0000000000000000) External Address Verification loaded and enabled.
......
03:10 12:48 SMTPD(0000000000000000) External Address Verification failed to load 1 verifiers.
03:10 12:48 SMTPD(0000000000000000) Name: Broken Verifier
03:10 12:48 SMTPD(0000000000000000) Error:
Ipswitch.Messaging.AddressVerification.AddressVerifierInfoLoadExcepti
on - TypeName is not a valid type.
03:10 12:48 SMTPD(0000000000000000) SMTP Service Started
Related Topics
External Address Verification (on page 103)
Add / Edit External Address Verifier (on page 105)
About External Address Verification (on page 109)
Spool Manager
How to get here
The Spool directory is also known as "the queue" since it is the place where messages wait to be delivered. Messages in the queue include incoming messages, outgoing messages, and attachments, as well as error messages generated by IMail Server or other mail servers. The
Spool directory is also where the IMail Server log files (on page 429) are stored.
Files in the Spool directory are all plain text and can be viewed using Windows Notepad.
Note, however, that if you edit a D (data file) or Q file (message awaiting delivery), you could render the file incompatible with IMail Server.
To view the files in the queue, see Managing Messages in the Spool (on page 113).
Files in the Queue
Files in the queue are on the way in or out. The Number of Tries column shows the number of times IMail has attempted to deliver a message. When this number reaches the number of
Tries Before Return to Sender, which is set on the IMail SMTP Services (on page 413) page,
the message is returned to the sender as "undeliverable."
When you look at the files in the queue, you can determine what stage a message is in. This is
112
IMail v12 Administrator Help
File Locking
IMail employs a built-in locking system for files in the Spool Directory to eliminate concurrency problems. Locks are created by modifying the first character of a file name and creating a special file in the same directory as the locked file.
Files in the Spool Directory are only locked while critical reads or writes are being performed on the file. Old locks are removed if they are more than one hour old. This means a user may be locked out of accessing a file or a service for up to one hour as a result of a system crash during a critical time period.
It is possible to manually remove a locked file if you are positive that no process is actually accessing that file. One reason for the long time period is to allow for any time required to transmit large files over slow links. For example, the time-out should be long enough to transmit a 2+ megabyte file across a 2400 baud dial-up connection with processing delays caused by the remote end.
Attachments
Attached files also appear in the queue. For multiple attachments, the Windows Explorer naming convention is used. For example, attach.txt, attach(1).txt, attach(2).txt, and so on.
Troubleshooting
Normally, IMail Server cleans up its .tmp and attached files as part of the delivery process.
However, as with SMTP, if there is some catastrophic failure during delivery, these files may not get deleted. You can run the Spool Cleaner utility to delete old files. For more
information, see Cleaning the Spool Directory (on page 114).
Related Topics
Beginning Character of Files in the Spool (on page 115)
File Extensions of Files in the Spool (on page 115)
Troubleshooting the Spool Directory (on page 412)
Cleaning the Spool Directory (on page 114)
Managing Spool Manager
How to get here
The mail queue, also known as the spool, is a directory that stores mail messages that are waiting for delivery. Files in the queue include incoming messages, outgoing messages, attachments, and error messages. The queue releases messages one at a time in the order that they were received. The Spool Manager provides status information about the IMail queue.
113
IMail v12 Administrator Help
File Name. File names determine what stage a message is in. see Beginning
Status. Current status of files in the queue. Click Refresh List to update.
Date Created. Creation date of the file.
Tries. Number of times IMail has attempted to deliver a message. When this number reaches the number of Tries Before Return to Sender, which is set on the IMail SMTP
Services (on page 413) page, the message is returned to the sender as "undeliverable."
From. Displays e-mail address from whom the message was created.
Recipients. Displays e-mail address of all recipients.
Delete File. Click Delete File to delete selected file(s) from the spool directory.
Send Now. Click Send Now to attempt delivery of only the selected messages in the spool list.
Refresh List. Refresh page to display the most current files in the spool.
Start Queue Run. Click Start Queue Run to attempt to force delivery of all of the messages in the queue.
Related Topics
About the Spool Directory (Queue) (on page 112)
Beginning Character of Files in the Spool (on page 115)
File Extensions of Files in the Spool (on page 115)
Troubleshooting the Spool Directory (on page 412)
Cleaning the Spool Directory (Isplcln.exe)
Isplcln.exe is a command utility that deletes all files in the spool directory that are older than a specified number of days.
Basic Command Syntax
isplcln -n x -l y
Where x is the number of days old a non-log file has to be before it is deleted, and y is the number of days old a log file has to be before it is deleted.
Note: Note that isplcln.exe deletes all files in the spool directory based on the parameters supplied without regard to whether a file is locked or not.
Example:
114
IMail v12 Administrator Help
isplcln -n 5 -l 30
The above example deletes all non-log files that are five days old or older and deletes all log files that are thirty days old or older.
Command
-x
-y
Function
The number of days old a file must be before it is deleted.
The number of days old a log file must be before it is deleted.
File Extensions of Files in the Spool
The file extension also indicates the type of file.
.smd
and .
smp
file extensions indicate regular mail messages being processed by
SMTP.
.fwd
and .
fwp
file extensions indicate forwarded messages.
.lst
file extensions indicate messages to subscribers of a list server mailing list.
.tmp are Web Messaging.
.gse
and .
gsp
file extensions indicate error messages being returned to the senders.
These are usually generated by the server (postmaster)
Files that contain a tilde (~) in the file extension, such as
.~mp
and
.~md
, are locked files that are in process. These files also have an underscore as the first character in the file name.
Related Topics
About the Spool Manager (Queue) (on page 112)
Beginning Character of Files in the Spool (on page 115)
Troubleshooting the Spool Manager (on page 412)
Beginning Character of Files in the Spool
Files in the spool are mail messages on the way in or out of the spool. You can determine what stage a message is in by looking at the first character in the file name and by looking at the file extension.
When an e-mail message is in the spool, it is a "data file" with a file name that begins with D.
Data files have matching T, Q, and A files as they get processed.
115
IMail v12 Administrator Help
First Character in Filename
A
D
T
A
*~??
F
Explanation
A data file undergoing connection filtering and SPF testing; deleted when message is delivered.
A file that matches the data file while the message is inbound; when the message is fully received; the T file is renamed to a Q.
A file that matches the data file while the IMail Server attempts to deliver the message.
A locked file that is being processed. These files also have a tilde (~) in the file extension. (If three characters of the filename are nex, the file is being processed via (??web messaging or the IMail Web
Client) or imail1.exe).
A locked file that is being processed. These files also have a tilde (~) in the file extension. (If three characters of the filename are nex, the file is being processed by (??web messaging or the IMail Web
Client) or imail1.exe).
A Mail to Fax file.
Normally, messages are processed in a few seconds or minutes. However, if there is message delivery problem, the associated files may stay in the spool longer.
IMail does not delete the data file when a message is not deliverable; therefore, no message is ever truly lost.
If you reboot your system while a message is being received, IMail may leave behind the T
and D files. You can use the Spool Cleaner utility (on page 114) to clean up these files.
Related Topics
About the Spool Directory (Queue) (on page 112)
File Extensions of Files in the Spool (on page 115)
Troubleshooting the Spool Manager (on page 412)
116
IMail v12 Administrator Help
System Default User Settings
How to get here
The System Default User Settings are the default values used for setting the Domain
Default User Settings when a new domain is created.
Default Maximum Mailbox Size. (Unlimited is default value) In the list box, click select Specify size and enter the default maximum size (in bytes, KB, MB, or GB) of all the mailboxes in each user account or select Unlimited mailbox size for each user.
The following will occur when a users mailbox is over the Max Mailbox Size:
All new incoming mail will no longer be received, they will get bounced.
New messages can still be sent.
Other users sending messages to a users full mailbox will receive a postmaster message stating the user's mailbox is exceeding the allowed limit.
When users mailbox is below the Max Mailbox Size, it will begin receiving mail again. be displayed when users log into the Web client. To turn it off, see Managing the Client Disk
Space Indicator (on page 171).
user settings, it will override the e-mail domain's default settings. In this case, the unlimited value is no longer unlimited for the domain default settings. For more information, see
Adding a New IMail User (on page 166).
Default Maximum Messages. (Unlimited is default value) Enter the default maximum number of messages allowed in each user's mailbox. the user settings, it will override the e-mail domain's default settings. In this case, the unlimited value is no longer unlimited for the domain default settings. For more information,
see Adding a New IMail User (on page 166).
Default Message Encoding. Default message encoding used for sending messages.
Default setting is Unicode (UTF-8).
Unicode (UTF-8). Choose this character set for multi-language mail. In IMail, this includes English, Chinese Simplified, Chinese Traditional, French, German, Italian,
Japanese, or Spanish.
English (US-ASCII). For composing e-mail for English-speaking readers, based on the
English alphabet.
Western European (ISO-8859-15). For composing e-mail in French, Italian, German, or Spanish.
Chinese Traditional (BIG5). For composing e-mail in traditional Chinese.
Chinese Simplified (GB2312). For composing e-mail in simplified Chinese.
117
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Japanese (ISO-2022-JP). For composing e-mail in Japanese.
Enable Password Change (selected by default). Select to let the user change his/her password in Web Messaging.
Account Enabled (selected by default). Select to let the user use the e-mail account remotely through POP3 or IMAP4. You can clear this option to disable the account without changing the user's password or removing him/her from the domain.
Require Password Change in Web Client (Not selected by default). This setting when set will require the user to change their password upon the next login.
Note: The system will automatically uncheck this feature, once the user has changed their password.
Access Information Services (selected by default). Select to make the user's LDAP information available in the LDAP database.
Caution: Clearing the Access Information Services check box permanently deletes the user's information from the LDAP database and prevents distribution of user information via the IMail LDAP service. There is currently no method available to hide information within an
OpenLDAP database, except to use this option to clear user information. If you want to show
LDAP information for this user after clearing this option, you must add the LDAP information back into the user information.
Access LDAP Attributes (selected by default). Select to let the user modify his/her
LDAP attributes (name, address, organization, etc.).
Enable Personal Information Management. Enables the use of Calendaring, Notes and Tasks for the specified user.
Important:
"iclient.config"
can control the access of the above tools on a system wide
basis only.
Example:
To enable Calendaring, and disable Notes and Tasks. The domain level or user level
Personal Information Management must be enabled, then modify the following keys in
"iclient.config"
:
<add value="true" Key="EnableAppointments"/>
<add value="true" Key="EnableMeetingRequests"/>
<add value="false" Key="EnableNotes"/>
<add value="false" Key="EnableTasks"/>
Enable Ipswitch Instant Messaging. (Only present if Ipswitch Instant Messaging is installed). Select to let the user have access to Instant Messaging. Clear the check box to disable the user's access.
Enable Web Access. Select to let a user access his/her IMail Web Messaging client.
118
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Enable Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync. Checked by default. Setting allows a user with a mobile device to synchronize with their web client information for e-mail, contacts, calendars, tasks and notes.
Outlook synchronization is also capable, but requires installing the IMail Collaboration
Client. This enables synchronizing e-mail, contacts, calendars, tasks and notes with mobile devices.
See the Mobile Synchronization Setup (on page 83) for more client help.
Note: Disabling Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync at the User Property Level will disable synchronization for only the specified user.
Tip: For a single user to begin using Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® there are 3 levels that require Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® to be enabled: 1) System level, 2) Domain level
(see Domain Properties (on page 42)) and 3) the User level (See User Properties (on
List Administrator Permissions (not checked default). Select to let a user add, modify, or delete any list server mailing list on the mail domain(s) he or she has List
Administrator permissions to.
Domain Administrator Permissions (not checked default). Select to let a user add, modify, or delete users and aliases (except program aliases) on the mail domain (host) he or she has domain administrator permission to.
System Administrator Permissions (not checked default). Select to let a user have full administration capabilities with all IMail features and options. System
Administrators have Domain Administrator and List Administrator permissions.
Save. Click to save your settings.
System Default Web Client User Options
How to get here
The IMail Administrator has the capability to globally set most default Web Client User
Options for all new users.
General Options
Display compose shortcut on menu bar. Checked by default. Unchecking this option will remove the Compose New Message button from the main menu and place it under the Action menu dropdown.
119
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Receiving Options
New Mail Check Frequency. Default setting is 10 minutes. Allows the user to define how often their mailbox's are checked for new messages.
Only check for new messages in the Inbox. Default setting is unchecked. For users with large mailboxes and only receive Inbox mail messages. This feature can save computer processing time, for user's that do not receive messages to other sub-folders.
Enable new messages notification pop-up. Default setting is checked. This feature controls the small brief notification pop-up when new messages arrive.
Make the browser tab text blink when new messages arrive. Checked by default.
This feature allows the user to control the number of blinks when a new message arrives.
Number of times to blink the text. By default the browser tab will blink 5 times. This feature allows the user to control the number of blinks when a new message arrives.
Play a sound when new messages arrive. Set by default. This feature allows the user to turn the sound off when new messages arrive.
Viewing Options
Reading Pane Location: Default setting is "Below". This drop down box allows customizing how to display the message to the user.
Note: Beside and Below will split your message list window, and allow previewing of the selected message within the same tab.
None. Selection of a message will open a new tab for message preview.
Beside. Selection of message will open to the right of the message list, within the same tab for message preview.
Below. Selection of message will open below the message list for message preview.
Paging Style. Set to Next, Previous and Numeric Pages by Default. This option allows a multitude of paging options. Select one to best suit your need.
Paging Location. Set to Bottom by default. This option controls the display of the paging location on the message list.
Top
Bottom
Top and Bottom
Number of Items Per Page. Set to 10 by default. This controls the number of messages to display per page of your message list before paging. A scroll bar will appear when page overflows.
Paging Always Visible. Not checked by default. This option controls the paging display. Unchecked, the paging will not display when only one page of messages are present.
120
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Display Text Alongside Paging Buttons. Not checked by default. This option controls the display for the total message count located to the right of the paging control.
Enable Selection Checkbox In Message List. Checked by default. This feature allows selection of a message by use of a check boxes. Unchecked this checkbox will revert to usage of message highlighting with usage of the shift+ key for blocks of messages, or the ctrl+ for multiple random messages on a page. will be turned off. For existing users that have never saved their preferences, they will be treated as a new user with the check box option turned on.
Important: "Check All" will only apply to the currently displayed page for the standard web client.
Show Column Filtering Upon Load. Not checked by default. This will add search filtering capability to the mailbox being displayed. Click on the filter icon to fine tune and narrow your message search.
Display Embedded Images as Attachments. Not checked by default. Embedded images within a message take up a lot of your email storage space and take longer to load for viewing. Checking this option will make all embedded images as mail attachments.
Enable image suppression in messages. Checked by default. This feature will suppress images for all messages. Once the link has been clicked, the images will always display when the message is selected. A link will appear at the top of the message display.
Note: Once this link is clicked, the images will always display when the message is selected.
Enable Javascript suppression in messages. Checked by default. This feature when checked will search all messages and disable any javascript encountered.
Note: Your IMail Administrator may have made this setting a mandatory requirement for all your mail messages, in which the Enable image suppression and Enable Javascript suppression will not display as user options.
Composing Options
Send Messages As Plain Text By Default. Not checked by default. HTML is the default setting to compose your messages. Includes many features such as bold, italic, underlining, multiple fonts, multiple colors, bullets, numbering, etc. Checking this option will compose your message using no formating.
121
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Show the CC Field By Default. Checked by default. Select this checkbox to always display the CC field when composing a new message.
Show the BCC Field By Default. Not checked by default. Select this checkbox to always display the BCC (Blind Copy) field when composing a new message.
Save a copy of the Message in the Sent Folder. Checked by default. Choose this option if you wish to keep copies of your messages in the Sent folder.
Automatically add recipients as contacts. Not checked by default. Choose this option if you wish to automatically add recipients to your Contacts when sending new messages.
Enable Recipient Auto-Suggestion. Checked by default. Choose this option to automatically suggest message recipient names as you type them in the "To" text box when writing a new message. If the recipient exists in your contacts, a drop down containing the complete name appears.
Note: This feature is not available in the Lite Client, due to the large bandwidth requirement.
Include Recipient Groups in Auto-Suggestion. Checked by default. This option when selected will include contact groups for selection from the "To" text box when writing a new message.
Show a warning before sending messages with a blank subject. Checked by default. This option controls the warning pop-up when a message is sent without a subject.
Show a warning before sending messages that contain attachment words but
have no attachment. Checked by default. This option is designed to assist in reminding users when a document contains references of an attachment, when an attachment does not exist.
Auto-Save To Draft Frequency. Default is 10 minutes. This option controls the message auto-saving to drafts feature. This number is the amount of minutes between each save to drafts when composing a message.
Note: To turn Auto-Save off completely, set the Auto-Save To Draft Frequency to zero.
Forwarding Options
Include Original Message When Forwarding. Checked by default. This check box will include the original message when forwarded.
Include Original Attachments When Forwarding. Checked by default. This check box will include the original attachments when forwarded.
Include Signature When Forwarding. Checked by default. This option will insert the user's signature when forwarding.
Replying Options
Include Original Message When Replying. Checked by default. This check box will include the original message in your reply.
122
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Include Original Attachment When Replying. Unchecked by default. This will include all original attachments when replying.
Include Signature When Replying. Checked by default. This option will insert the user's signature when replying.
Deleting Options
Show a Confirmation dialog before Deleting Messages. Set by default. Select this check box to have a request for confirmation before deleting the selected message(s).
Deleting. Radio button options.
Upon deletion, move messages to the Deleted folder. Set by default. Select this option to move deleted messages to the Deleted folder. These messages remain in the folder until you purge them by selecting one or more messages and clicking the
Delete button.
Upon deletion, purge messages from the system. Select this option to completely remove deleted messages. Purged messages are deleted from the server and cannot be recovered.
Reporting Options
The Spam Reporting tab is only available for email customers with IMail Premium Servers.
Customers with IMail Standard Servers will not display this tab option.
Show a confirmation dialog before reporting messages. Checked by default. This option ask for a confirmation before reporting the message as spam.
Spam Reporting Options (select one)
After reporting, do nothing to message. This option will report the message as spam and will be delivered to your Inbox as regular mail.
After reporting, delete message. Set by default. This option will report the message as spam and then delete the message.
After reporting, move message. Default is Spam. This option will report the message as spam and then move your message to another folder. If no folder is selected a default Spam folder will be created. Select from the drop down text box to move your spam messages to an alternate mail folder.
Note: When a mail folder is not selected from the drop down text box, then a Spam folder will be created after saving.
Contact Options
Default List Sort. Set to Display Name by default. This option controls the sort option for your contacts when initially displayed.
Calendaring Options
Show a confirmation dialog before deleting appointments and tasks. Set by default. Unchecking this option will suppress the confirmation prompt when deleting calendar appointments and tasks.
123
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Enable Reminders. Set by default. Unchecking this option will suppress all calendar reminders.
Day Start Time. Set to 5am by default. This option controls the actual start time of the day to display on the Day Calendar.
Day End Time. Set to 10pm by default. This option controls the actual end time of the day to display on the Day Calendar.
Note: Click Show 24 Hours to display (located at bottom of page of the Day Calendar) all hours of the day on the Day Calendar.
Workday Start Time. Set to 8am by default. This option controls the work day start time by setting a darker contrast on the Day Calendar.
Workday End Time. Set to 5pm by default. This option controls the work day end time by ending the darker contrast on the Day Calendar.
Minutes per Row. Set to 30 minutes by default. This option controls the number of minutes between each displayed row.
Number Of Days to Display in Multi-Day. Set to 3 by default. This option control the total number of days to display when using the Multi-Day function. An option found in the top right corner of the main Calendar page.
First Day of the Week. Default is Automatically Determined. This option controls which day of the week to display for the week. (e.g. United States uses Sunday as the first day of the week)
Initial View. Default is Day. This option controls the initial calendar view when tab is displayed. Options are Day, Week or Month.
Save. To save any changes made.
Registry Backup
In This Section
Back Up IMail Registry (on page 125)
Restoring IMail Registry (on page 126)
Backing Up System Files (on page 126)
Backing Up User Mailboxes (on page 127)
124
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Back Up IMail Registry
There are two methods of saving the IMail registry keys. Select one that is fits best.
Important: This will only backup user data for domains that use the IMail User Database.
Backing Up Registry with Command Line
To backup the registry keys for IMail using command line use the following steps.
1 Click Start > Run > "cmd". This will open a DOS window.
2 At the DOS prompt enter the following command all on one line: regedit /e c:\imail\imail.reg
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Ipswitch\IMail
3 Entering a different path or file name is up to the administrator.
This will copy the complete IMail registry "hive" to the c:\imail directory folder.
Backing up Up Registry Manually
To backup the registry keys manually using export with the following steps:
1 Click on Start > Run > type "regedit" and click OK.
2 Go to the path:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Ipswitch\IMail
3 Select "IMail" Registry key
4 Right click and select "Export".
5 Select the desired path, and name the file.
6 The "selected branch" field should show the following:
7
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Ipswitch\IMail
8 Click Save.
This will save all domain data, user names and user passwords for all domains that use the
IMail user database.
Related Topics
Restoring IMail Registry (on page 126)
125
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Backing Up IMail Server System Files (on page 126)
Backing Up User Mail (on page 127)
Restoring IMail Registry
There are two methods of restoring the IMail registry keys. Select one that is fits best.
Restoring using Windows Explorer
1 Go to Windows Explorer and double click on the exported .reg file
2 A prompt asking if you are sure that you want to add the information in "path name".reg file to the registry. Click "Yes" if the path name looks correct.
3 A prompt telling you it was successfully entered into the registry.
Restoring using "regedit"
1 Make sure a copy of the registry file is on the server.
2 Click on Start > Run > type "regedit" and click OK.
3 Click File > Import
4 Browse to the copy of the registry file on the server.
The current IMail registry keys will be overwritten with the selected file.
Related Topics
Back Up IMail Registry (on page 125)
Backing Up IMail Server System Files (on page 126)
Backing Up User Mail (on page 127)
Backing Up IMail Server System Files
IMail Server stores its system files in the \IMail directory, unless you have given it a different name. You can make a backup copy of the IMail Server directory tree.
Related Topics
Back Up IMail Registry (on page 125)
Restoring IMail Registry (on page 126)
Backing Up User Mail (on page 127)
126
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Backing Up User Mail
Users' mail is stored in directories below
\IMail
, usually under
IMail\users
, but each domain may have mail stored, under
\IMail\domain\users
, if default paths were selected.
Daily backups should include these directories.
Related Topics
Back Up IMail Registry (on page 125)
Restoring IMail Registry (on page 126)
Backing Up IMail Server System Files (on page 126)
127
CHAPTER 6
Domain Administration
In This Chapter
Commtouch Zero-Hour Virus Protection ................................................. 205
System Administrator
A System Administrator has full administrative control over all IMail permissions and options.
A System Administrator can create other System Administrator accounts, with full permissions. A System Administrator has full administration capabilities for all IMail permissions and options. System Administrators have Domain Admin and List Admin permissions.
System Administrator permissions is set at User Administration > User Properties.
Related Topics
Domain Management (on page 129)
User Administration (on page 143)
128
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Domain (Host) Administrator
A Domain Administrator can add, modify, or delete users or aliases (except program aliases) on the mail domain (host) he or she has domain administrator permissions to.
Domain Administrators cannot delete System Administrator accounts, permissions, or change other System Administrator settings. Domain Administrators will also not display
System Administrator rules or file directory information. Domain Administrators have List
Administrator permissions.
Domain Administrator permissions is set at User Administration > User Properties.
Related Topics
Domain Management (on page 129)
User Administration (on page 143)
Domains
How to get here
Domain Properties, add new mail domains, and delete existing mail domains.
Search box. Enter a domain name or part of a domain name that you want to search for in the list of available domains, then click Search.
Domain List
Name list. Click a domain name to modify the Domain Properties.
Top Directory. Displays top directory path of the associated domain.
IP Address. Displays the IP address of the associated domain. Will display "$virtualX" if there is no associated IP address.
Add. Click Add to create a new domain on IMail Server. For more information, see Adding a
New IMail Domain (on page 48).
Edit. Select a domain to modify, then click Edit.
Delete. Select a domain that you want to delete from the Domains list, then click Delete to delete the domain.
Related Topics
129
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Setting Domain Properties (on page 42)
User Administration (on page 143)
Alias Administration (on page 207)
List Administration (on page 216)
Attachment Blocking (on page 252)
Inbound / Outbound Rules (on page 244)
White List Administration (on page 267)
Domain Properties
How to get here
Use the Domain Properties to add a new mail domain, add or update a domain alias, enable virus scanning, and set other message and mailbox properties.
General Domain Settings
Domain Name (Official Host Name or OHN ). The current domain name used to address mail to the users on the mail domain is displayed. For example, company.com is the domain name in the address [email protected].
TCP /IP Address. Select "Select an IP Address" to use an IP address (domain) for the
mail domain or select Virtual (virtual IP address (on page 56)) to use a non-IP-ed
domain.
Changing the IP Address of a Host (on page 63) for more information.
Top Directory. Enter the name or Browse to the directory where users, lists, and web files for this mail domain are stored.
Domain Aliases. Specify alternate domain names for which you want the mail domain to accept mail. Multiple aliases are separated by a space. This field is limited to 255 characters.
Administration (on page 386) page in order for the change to take effect correctly.
130
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Example: If the mail domain name is mail.domain2.com , you can set an alias of domain2.com so that IMail Server accepts mail addressed to [email protected] and [email protected].
Note: Host Alias requires also that the proper updates to DNS must be made to work correctly.
Domain Options
Enable Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync®. (Enabled by default) Allows all enabled users for the specified domain to use ActiveSync® for synchronizing mobile devices with their web client information for e-mail, contacts, calendars, tasks and notes.
Outlook synchronization is also capable, but requires installing the IMail Collaboration
Client. Once installed Outlook will synchronize e-mail, contacts, calendars, tasks and notes with their mobile devices.
See the Mobile Synchronization Setup (on page 83) for more information.
Warning: Disabling ActiveSync® at the domain level will disable all ActiveSync® users on the specified domain, overriding the User Property setting.
Tip: For a single user to begin using Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® there are 3 levels that require Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® to be enabled: 1) System level, 2) Domain level
(see Domain Properties) and 3) the User level (See User Properties).
Enable Personal Information Management. Enables the use of Calendaring, Notes and Tasks for all Web Client users within the domain.
Important:
"iclient.config"
can control the access of the above tools on a system wide
basis only.
Example:
To enable Calendaring, and disable Notes and Tasks. The domain level or user level
Personal Information Management must be enabled, then modify the following keys in
"iclient.config"
:
<add value="true" Key="EnableAppointments"/>
<add value="true" Key="EnableMeetingRequests"/>
<add value="false" Key="EnableNotes"/>
<add value="false" Key="EnableTasks"/>
Enable Ipswitch Instant Messaging (selected by default if available in software version). Specify whether the current mail domain will allow access to the Ipswitch
Instant Messaging service.
131
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Note: If Enable Ipswitch Instant Messaging and/or Enable Personal Information
Management is selected at the mail domain level, it can be selected or cleared for each user
of the mail domain on the User Properties (on page 145) page.
Enable Virus Scanning (selected by default if available in software version).
If this option is selected, virus scanning is performed for:
the primary domain
any virtual domain (IP-less) that is bound to the primary domain
If this option is cleared, virus scanning is performed for:
any virtual domain (IP-less) that is bound to the primary domain and has the anti-virus option selected at the virtual domain level.
Enable image suppression for e-mail messages. Checked by default. This feature will suppress images for all messages. Once the link has been clicked, the images will always display when the message is selected.
Note: Once the link above the message is clicked, the images will always display when the message is selected.
Tip: When enabled at the Domain Property level, control is hidden from the users. Disabling at the Domain Property level gives user capability to control this option under their user settings.
Enable javascript removal for e-mail messages. Checked by default. This feature when checked will search all messages and disable any javascript encountered.
Tip: When enabled at the Domain Property level, control is hidden from the users. Disabling at the Domain Property level gives user capability to control this option under their user settings.
Enable Archiving. This check box allows the IMail Administrator the control of enabling/disabling specific domains for message archiving. Further user-level control can be made on the User Properties page.
Tip: The System Setting must be enabled for Mail-box Based Archiving, to allow domain-level Archiving to be enabled.
Tip: For existing domains with users requiring disabling/enabling for archiving use the
Console Administrator bulk-edit feature. Simply select necessary users on the Users page, and click edit. Any modifications made will update only selected users.
Note: Disabling Archiving at the domain-level will ignore all user-level settings.
132
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Message and Mailbox Options
Default Maximum Mailbox Size. (0 is default value). Enter the default maximum size
(in bytes, KB, MB, or GB) of all the mailboxes in each user account. Enter zero for an unlimited mailbox size for each user.
Max. Outbound Message Size. (0 is default value). Enter the maximum size (in bytes,
KB, MB, or GB) of an outbound message. Any message that is larger than the size entered will be bounced. Enter 0 for an unlimited maximum outbound message size.
For more information, see File Attachment Settings. (on page 28)
Single Message Maximum Size. (0 is default value). Enter the maximum size (in bytes, KB, MB, or GB) of a single message. Messages that exceed this size are returned to the sender. Enter 0 for an unlimited single message maximum size. For more
information, see File Attachment Settings. (on page 28)
Full Mailbox Notify (percentage). (0 is default value). Enter a percentage that users will be notified when their mailbox is within a specified percentage of being full.
Enter 0 for no full mailbox notification. Example (on page 73). See also customizing the
notification message (on page 73).
Full Mailbox Notify Address. Enter an additional address where an e-mail will be sent when a user's mailbox is almost full. For example, this could be the system administrator's address.
Default Maximum Messages. (0 is default value) Enter the default maximum number of messages allowed in each user’s mailbox. Enter 0 for an unlimited number of messages.
Maximum User Count. (0 is default value) Enter the maximum number of users that can be registered for this mail domain. Enter 0 for an unlimited number of users.
Designed as a control for Domain Administrators only.
Domain Administrators will not be able to add users once the Max User Count has been met. A message on the User Administration page will also display: "The User
Limit for the domain has been reached".
System Administrators will override the maximum user count. Only Domain
Administrators will be stopped from adding new users past the maximum allowed.
Current User Count. Displays the current number of users registered for this mail domain.
Sub- mailbox Creation. Select how to handle a message when it arrives for a user and is addressed to a sub-mailbox that does not exist. Select one of the following actions:
Create. (Default setting) Creates the sub-mailbox and delivers the message.
Send to Inbox. Does not create the sub-mailbox. Instead the message is delivered to the "main" mailbox.
Bounce. Bounces the mail back to the sender as an invalid e-mail address.
Minimum POP Frequency (minutes). Enter the number of minutes delay between
POP logins for each user. The default is 0 (or unlimited) logins.
133
IMail v12 Administrator Help
popping to one mailbox per user per domain. If you create more than one mailbox for a user, that mailbox will receive mail, but the user will be unable to access it unless the POP frequency is set at 0 (zero). An error message is sent to the client and logging in is denied,
Different e-mail clients may handle this error differently.
Example: Outlook and Outlook Express display the userid/password dialog box continuously. If you click Cancel, the error message the POP server returns is: "-ERR login frequency exceeded - try again later" User Database Setting.
User Login Settings
Tip: To reset a suspended account, go to User Properties page and uncheck "Account
Suspended" check box. This will reset the user's failed login attempts to zero.
Tip: A successful login will also reset failed login attempts to zero.
Allowed Login Attempts Before Account Lockout (Default Setting = 3). Allows the user "X" login attempts before displaying:
"You have exceeded the maximum number of allowed login attempts. Please try
again later." feature.
Allowed Lockouts Before Account Suspension. (Default Setting = 3). Allows the user "X" of the above message before being suspended and requiring an
Administrator intervention, with the message:
"Due to multiple failed login attempts, your account access has been suspended." feature.
Required Password Strength. (Default Setting = Weak).
Web Client login will check the user's current password against the required password strength, if the password does not meet the minimum requirements, the users will be redirected to a "Change Password" page before allowing mail access to the web client.
Drop down text box contains the following password complexity settings:
0 - Weak (Default Setting). Requires password to be:
Must be at least 3 characters in length
And not to exceed 30 characters
134
IMail v12 Administrator Help
White space characters are not allowed
1 - Simple. Requires password to be:
Must be at least 6 characters in length
And not to exceed 30 characters
Must contain at least 1 letter (regardless of case)
Must contain at least 1 number or special character
White space characters are not allowed
2 - Moderate. Requires password to be:
Must be at least 6 characters in length
And not to exceed 30 characters
Must contain at least 1 letter (lower case)
Must contain at least 1 number
Must contain at least 1 special character or 1 capital letter
White space characters are not allowed
3 - Strong. Requires password to be:
Must be at least 8 characters in length
And not to exceed 30 characters
Must contain at least 1 lower case letter
Must contain at least 1 capital letter
Must contain at least 1 number
Must contain at least 1 special character
White space characters are not allowed
4 - Extreme. Requires password to be:
Must be at least 8 characters in length
And not to exceed 30 characters
Must contain at least 2 lower case letters
Must contain at least 2 capital letters
Must contain at least 2 numbers
Must contain at least 2 special characters
White space characters are not allowed
Note: The following are valid special characters
[! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ + } { " : '
? / > . < ; , ]
135
IMail v12 Administrator Help
User Database Setting
User Database Type area, select one of the following:
Configure. Click to Configure your NT or Active Directory database (on page 55).
External Database (on page 70)
Configure. Click to Configure an external database (on page 70).
Save. Click Save to save changes.
Cancel. Click Cancel to exit without saving changes.
Related Topics
Adding a New IMail Domain (on page 48)
Adding a New IMail User (on page 166)
Creating an E-mail Alias (on page 209)
Changing the IP Address of a Host (on page 63)
Virtual mail domains with IP addresses (on page 142)
Virtual mail domains without IP addresses (on page 142)
Creating External User Database for a Mail Domain
IMail Server can use an external database to register and authenticate users on a particular mail domain. Users that you add to and delete from an IMail Server host are also added to and deleted from the external database.
Important: Remember to restart the IMail Services, after creating external database.
Before you use an external database for a mail domain, use the Windows Control Panel to make sure there is a System DSN (Data Source Name) that points to a valid database name.
See your Windows and database documentation for information on the System DSN.
Important: When you configure a DSN to an SQL data source in the Microsoft Windows
ODBC Data Source Administrator, it may default to Named Pipes network library. Make sure that you set the connection type to TCP/IP in order for the external database to work
correctly.
136
IMail v12 Administrator Help
After you have verified the System DSN that points to the database you want to use, you can configure an external database.
Note: The external database can reside locally with the IMail Server.
Configuring an External User Database
The connection between IMail Server and an external user database is accomplished via a dynamic link library (DLL file). IMail Server includes a sample .dll file (ODBCUSER.DLL). This
DLL uses the ODBC method, but can be modified to support other external database methods. The complete source code for this DLL is provided upon request from Ipswitch.
When you configure an external user database, IMail Server creates an ODBC database that holds tables configured with the correct fields. The fields are identified in the Table Name text box. After the database is created and the ODBC system data source name is established in the ODBC Source Administration tool (located in the Windows Control Panel), you can use the database to store user authentication information and user properties. This information can be managed through IMail Administrator, including adding and deleting users.
Important: When using an external database, any IMail service you run (except the Log
Server) must be set up from the Windows Control Panel Services application so the account that IMail Server runs under has access to the external database.
To create a mail domain that uses an external database:
1 In IMail Administrator, click Domain > Domain Properties.
2 In the User Database section, select External Database from the User Database type list box.
3 Click the Configure button. A domain options page appears.
External Database Implementation DLL. Enter the full path to the odbcuser.dll installed on your local server or the path of a .DLL that supports the functions:
GetUserEntry, SetUserEntry, DeleteUserEntry, AuthorizeUser, GetFirstUserEntry, and
GetNextUserEntry. (These are defined in the odbcuser.h file.)
ODBC System Data Source Name (DSN). Enter the source name for the database where the user information is stored. IMAILSECDB is the default name that the ODBC link uses.
Important: For users using SQL 7.0 or above, enter the following information after the ODBC
System Data Source Name box:
DSN_NAME;UID=<username>;PWD=<password>.
The user name and password need to be the User ID and password for the SQL database and not an
IMail Server account.
Table Name. Enter the table name within your ODBC database. Leaving "[default]" in this text box will use your domain name as the table name. All periods will be replaced with underscores.
137
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Example:
If you use the Data Source Name IMAILSECDB and the username AUGUSTA and password
GEORGIA, the correct format of the ODBC System Data Source Name box is:
IMAILSECDB;UID=AUGUSTA;PWD=GEORGIA
Table name. Enter the database table name. If the field is blank or contains [default], the host name is used with dots replaced by underscores. The Table name cannot begin with a number.
Enable Multiple Connections to allow multiple connections from the external database to IMail Server.
Maximum Number of Connections to set the maximum number of connections from the external database to IMail Server.
Save. Click this button to save your settings.
Cancel. Click Cancel to exit without saving changes.
Configuring an NT/AD database
Use this page to configure your NT or Active Directory database. See also Using the Windows
NT/AD Domain Name. Enter the name of your NT or Active Directory domain name.
NT Database.
Machine name of Domain Controller. Enter the machine name for your Domain
Controller.
Active Directory Database
Important: To hide Active Directory users from the IMail Server, under user properties, add
the word "built-in" in the front of the user description. Example. (on page 55)
Use Active Directory. Select the check box to use Active Directory.
Naming Context. If the Active Directory check box is selected, the naming context will be pulled from the Root DSE Directory Service Entry. If you choose to not use the default naming context, you can enter one of your choice.
Save. Click to save your settings.
Cancel. Click to cancel your settings and return to the Domain Properties page.
Related Topic
Example of Active Directory "built-in" (on page 55)
138
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Example of Active Directory "built-in"
The example below will hide User1 from the IMail Server as a valid user.
1 Go to Start > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Active Directory (AD) Users
and Computers.
2 Select AD container with users.
3 Right click specified user that you would like to hide from the IMail Server, and select
Properties.
4 Enter the word
"built-in"
into the Description field.
5 Click "OK"
Note:
"built-in"
must be at the front of the description text box. Trailing words are permitted.
Related Topics
Domain Properties (on page 42)
Configuring NT/AD Database (on page 55)
Deleting an IMail Domain
How to get here
Use the domain options to delete a mail domain.
Search box. Enter a domain name or part of a domain name that you want to search for in the list of available domains, then click Search.
139
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Clear. Click Clear to reset the domain search results list to display all available domains.
Name list. Click a domain name or multiple domain names to delete the domain(s).
Add. Click Add to create a new domain on IMail Server. For more information, see
Adding a New IMail Domain (on page 48).
Delete. Select a domain or multiple domains that you want to delete from the
Domains list, then click Delete to delete the domain(s).
Related Topics
Domain Properties (on page 42)
Adding a Virtual Host (adddomain.exe)
AddDomain.exe is a utility for adding virtual domains. It can be used to simply add a single domain, but is especially useful in a batch file to add multiple domains.
Basic Command Syntax and Example
Usage:
adddomain -h Hostname -i IPAddress -t TopDir
[-a Aliases -u IM | NT | External -x MaxMBXSize -s MaxMBXMsgs -r MaxUsers] adddomain -h Hostname -m
[-t TopDir -a Aliases -x MaxMBXSize -s MaxMBXMsgs -r MaxUsers] adddomain -h Hostname -i IPAddress -t TopDir -u External
[-e DLLFilename -o ODBC_DSN -n TableName] adddomain -h Hostname -delete adddomain -f Filename
Examples:
1 In the following example, since the -e, -o,or -n options are not specified, the external database relies on the default “values %“Imail_top dir”%odbcuser.dll , IMAILSECDB, and
[default] accordingly: adddomain -h newhost1 -i virtual -u external
2 The following command populates an external database with settings of C:\mydll.dll,
IMAILSECDB, and [default]: adddomain -h newhost2 -i virtual -u external -e C:\mydll.dll
3 The following example changes an existing host (notice the -m for modify) to use an
ODBC Data Source Name (DSN) of MyNewDSN. If the other fields of -e and -n were
140
IMail v12 Administrator Help
previously set, they will be preserved. If the other fields of -e and -n were not previously set, they will be set with the default values: adddomain -h ExistingHost -m -u external -o MyNewDSN
-n
-x
-s
-f
-a
-u
-e
-o
4 If you need to specify a DSN other than ‘IMailSecDB,’ or you need to specify a userID and password (required when setting up a DSN to connect to an SQL database), use the -o switch : adddomain -h ExistingHost -m -u external -o IMailSecDB;UID=MyUser;
PWD=MyPassword
5 The following example shows how to add a new virtual host (or virtual host with an IP ) using an external database: adddomain -u external -t C:\IMail\newdomain_com -i virtual
-o IMailSecDB;UID=sqluser;PWD=sqlpassword -n table_name
6 Adddomain.exe supports the following command line options:
Command Function
-h
-i
-t
Fully qualified host name; must match the IMail official host name
IP address or virtual IP address for an IP-less host
Path (full or relative) to the top directory for the domain
-m Command to modify existing settings instead of creating new ones
Alias list for a host
User data base to use (IMail, NT, or external)
Path to external database implementation DLL
External database ODBC system Data Source Name (DSN )
External database table name
Default max mailbox size (in kbytes).
Default max number of messages for mailbox.
Path to the file containing the settings to modify
-r Maximum number of users allowed on this host.
-delete Removes the virtual host.
141
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Note: AddDomain.exe does not warn when assigning already claimed IP addresses to new hosts. Assigning an already used IP address to another host will orphan the original host without warning.
Setting the IP Address for a Virtual Host
If you use a virtual IMail domain with an IP Address , all capabilities of regular IMail Server mail domains are available to virtual domains with IP addresses. The only limitations of virtual
IMail domains with IP addresses are:
Each virtual domain requires its own unique IP address.
In Microsoft Windows, this requires the extra step of adding an IP address in the Windows NT
TCP/IP configuration in the Control Panel (Network Connections > Local Area Connections
> Properties > TCP/IP Protocol > Advanced). proper DNS entries for your mail domain(s). If you use a virtual IP address, the MX record (in
DNS) for the mail domain must point to a real IP address.
Setting Up a Virtual Host Without an IP Address
If you use a virtual IMail domain without an IP Address, IMail Server assigns the virtual IP address. This method lets you have a virtual mail domain without an IP address. After you set up a virtual IMail domain, use an MX record in your DNS to point the virtual mail domain to a real IP address.
Important: Whether you use a real IP address or a virtual IP address, you need to make the proper DNS entries for your mail mail domain(s). If you use a virtual IP address, the MX record
(in DNS) for the mail domain must point to a real IP address.
There are several limitations to a virtual IMail domain without an IP address:
Users must log in to mail accounts on the mail domain by specifying their User ID as userid@virtualhost, where userid
is the User ID and virtualhost is the host name. This associates the IMail Server with the correct virtual IMail domain.
LDAP server does not work with virtual IMail domains that do not use an IP address.
When to use IP-less Virtual IMail Domains
Virtual IMail domains without IP addresses are recommended when you have a shortage of IP addresses or when you want to forward all mail for a domain to a user at another domain.
Example:
Your primary domain is called abracadabra.com. You want all mail that is sent to merlin.com to be forwarded to [email protected]. To accomplish this:
142
IMail v12 Administrator Help
1 Set up a virtual IMail domain without an IP address for merlin.com and do not create any users for merlin.com.
2 Set up a nobody alias (on page 211) for merlin.com pointing to a user ID on
abracadabra.com. All mail to any user at merlin.com is sent to the specified user at abracadabra.com (in this case, [email protected]).
User Administration
How to get here
Use the Users Administration properties to search for users in the selected domain, access and edit user properties, add new users, or delete existing users. Columns can be sorted allowing Admins, or Disabled Users to sort to the top. Two utilities have been added to this page to allow Renaming a Username and Resetting a users password without going to
User Properties.
Domain: Shows the current selected domain. From the drop down you can pick any of the domains available to this administrative user account.
Search Box. Requires entering a minimum of two characters, and the search will automatically begin narrowing the list of users. The search assumes a wildcard automatically after the characters entered. Search target includes both the "Username" and "Full Name" columns as criteria for search selection.
Note: Column Titles when clicked will sort the user list for the current session only.
Refreshing the page will reset to Username sorting. Example. Clicking on the "Disabled" column heading twice will sort all the disabled users to the top of the page.
User Image Icons.
Displays for users with System Administrator permissions.
Displays for users with Domain Administrator permissions.
Displays for users with List Administrator permissions.
Displays for all normal users, with no Administrative permissions.
Displays for disabled users.
User List
Username list. Click a username to modify the User Properties.
Full Name. Full name as entered in User Properties page.
System Admin. This column displays whether or not the specific user is set up as a
System Administrator on the User Properties page.
Domain Admin. This column displays whether or not the specific user is set up as a
Domain Administrator on the User Properties page. A domain administrator
143
IMail v12 Administrator Help
List Admin. This column displays whether or not the specific user is set up as a List
Administrator on the User Properties page.
Enabled. This column displays whether or not the user's account is active or disabled, as set up on the User Properties page.
Rename Username Utility. Utility link to allow renaming a Username.
Change Password Utility. Utility link to allow changing a users password.
Tip: The user count configured on the Domain Properties page DOES NOT include Root.
Add. Click Add to create a new user to the current domain. If the maximum number of users is reached, the button will be grayed out. For more information, see Adding a New IMail User
(on page 166). The maximum number of users is configured on the Domain Properties page.
Edit. Select and highlight a user, then click Edit to update an existing user.
Delete. Select a user that you want to delete from the current domain, then click Delete to delete the user.
Related Topics
Adding an IMail User (on page 166)
Deleting an IMail User
Adding Users Using Adduser.exe (on page 440)
Default User Settings (on page 117)
Creating Config_CommonAddrBook.cgi
Change Password
Domain Name (Official Host Name or OHN ). The current domain name used to address mail to the users on the mail domain is displayed.
User ID. Displays the selected user ID (user name) for the email account.
Password. Enter a new password. Passwords are limited in length to 3 to 30 alphanumeric characters and cannot include asterisks.
Confirm Password. Enter the user password a second time to confirm the password.
Save. Click to validate and save new password.
144
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Cancel. Click to not change password.
Related Topics
User Properties
How to get here
Use the User Properties to change a user's settings, such as: user password, user ID, maximum mailbox size and maximum number of mailbox messages, add user to Collaboration, and change other user mailbox properties.
Domain Name (Official Host Name or OHN). The current domain name used to address mail to the users on the mail domain is displayed. For example, company.com is the domain name in the address [email protected].
Domain Name(OHN). This clickable link displays only for existing users. This link will take you to the Domain Properties page.
Username. Enter a unique user ID (user name) for the e-mail account. User IDs are limited in length to 1 to 30 characters and must be created from alphanumeric characters. The User ID cannot include spaces and must be a unique name within the domain you are adding the user to.
Full Name. Enter the user’s First Name and Last Name.
Note: Updating the Full Name within the Web Client will create a Display Name within the users
"preferences.config"
file, and will not update the Web or Console Administration
Full Name. Once a Display Name has been created in the
"preferences.config"
file, updates from the Web or Console Administration will no longer update the Web Client Full
Name. See User Impersonation (on page 478) for updating a user's Web Client Full Name.
Reply To Address. Enter an e-mail address that you want to have IMail Server automatically use as your Reply To mail address. You can leave this text box empty to let recipients of this user’s messages reply to the User ID you entered. You can also enter an e-mail address that omits the domain name, if you are sure the rest of the address is a fully qualified domain name. For example, if the complete e-mail address is [email protected], you can enter [email protected].
Forwarding Address. Enter an e-mail address that you want to have IMail Server automatically forward a user's mail to. forwarding address as
145
IMail v12 Administrator Help
mailbox by preceding the e-mail address with
".,"
allowing no spaces in between.
Maximum Mailbox Size. (0 is default value) Enter the default maximum size (in bytes, KB, MB, or GB) of all the mailboxes in each user account. If the user's Maximum
Mailbox Size is zero, the defaults for the e-mail domain are applied to the user. If the domain's default is also zero, the Maximum Mailbox Size for the user is unlimited. If a new message will cause the total size of all mailboxes in a user's account to exceed the Maximum Mailbox Size value, the mail is returned to the sender.
When the Maximum Mailbox Size value is non-zero, it will override the e-mail domain's default settings. In this case, the 0 value is no longer unlimited for the domain default settings.
The following will occur when a users mailbox is over the Max Mailbox Size:
All new incoming mail will no longer be received, they will get bounced.
New messages can still be sent.
Other users sending messages to a users full mailbox will receive a postmaster message stating the user's mailbox is exceeding the allowed limit.
When users mailbox is below the Max Mailbox Size, it will begin receiving mail again.
Maximum Mailbox Messages. (0 is default value) Enter the default maximum number of messages allowed in each user account. If the user's Maximum Mailbox
Messages is zero, the defaults for the e-mail domain are applied to the user. If the domain's default is also zero, the Maximum Mailbox Messages for the user is unlimited.
When the Maximum Mailbox Messages value is non- zero, it will override the e-mail domain's default settings. In this case, the 0 value is no longer unlimited for the domain default settings.
Note: If the Max Mailbox Messages option is set to 5, and the user's main mailbox already has five messages stored, then the next message sent to the user's main mailbox is bounced.
However, if the next message is sent to a sub-mailbox instead, the message is delivered as long as there are less than five messages currently stored in the sub-mailbox.
Default Message Encoding. Default message encoding used for sending messages.
Default setting is Unicode (UTF-8).
Unicode (UTF-8). Choose this character set for multi-language mail. In IMail, this includes English, Chinese Simplified, Chinese Traditional, French, German, Italian,
Japanese, or Spanish.
English (US-ASCII). For composing e-mail for English-speaking readers, based on the
English alphabet.
Western European (ISO-8859-15). For composing e-mail in French, Italian, German, or Spanish.
146
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Chinese Traditional (BIG5). For composing e-mail in traditional Chinese.
Chinese Simplified (GB2312). For composing e-mail in simplified Chinese.
Japanese (ISO-2022-JP). For composing e-mail in Japanese.
Enable Password Change (selected by default). Select to let the user change his/her password in Web Messaging.
Account Enabled (selected by default). Select to let the user use the e-mail account remotely through POP3 or IMAP4. You can clear this option to disable the account without changing the user's password or removing him/her from the domain.
Require Password Change in Web Client (Not selected by default). This setting when set will require the user to change their password upon the next login.
Note: The system will automatically uncheck this feature, once the user has changed their password.
Access Information Services (selected by default). Select to make the user's LDAP information available in the LDAP database.
Caution: Clearing the Access Information Services check box permanently deletes the user's information from the LDAP database and prevents distribution of user information via the IMail LDAP service. There is currently no method available to hide information within an
OpenLDAP database, except to use this option to clear user information. If you want to show
LDAP information for this user after clearing this option, you must add the LDAP information back into the user information.
Access LDAP Attributes (selected by default). Select to let the user modify his/her
LDAP attributes (name, address, organization, etc.).
Enable Personal Information Management. Enables the use of Calendaring, Notes and Tasks for the specified user.
Important:
"iclient.config"
can control the access of the above tools on a system wide
basis only.
Example:
To enable Calendaring, and disable Notes and Tasks. The domain level or user level
Personal Information Management must be enabled, then modify the following keys in
"iclient.config"
:
<add value="true" Key="EnableAppointments"/>
<add value="true" Key="EnableMeetingRequests"/>
<add value="false" Key="EnableNotes"/>
<add value="false" Key="EnableTasks"/>
147
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Enable Ipswitch Instant Messaging. (Only present if Ipswitch Instant Messaging is installed). Select to let the user have access to Instant Messaging. Clear the check box to disable the user's access.
Enable Web Access. Select to let a user access his/her IMail Web Messaging client.
Enable Archiving. This check box allows the IMail Administrator the control to enable/disable specific users for message archiving.
Tip: The System Setting and Domain Archiving must be enabled for Mail-box Based
Archiving for user-level Archiving to be disabled/enabled.
Tip: For existing domains with users requiring disabling/enabling for archiving, use the
Console Administrator bulk-edit feature. Simply select necessary users on the Users page, and click edit. Any modifications made will update only the selected users.
Note: Disabling Archiving at the domain-level will override all user-level settings.
Web Account Suspended. Automatically becomes enabled if a user's web access becomes suspended from the settings set in the Domain Properties > User Login
Settings. To re-enable web access web access for the user Account Suspended must be manually unchecked.
Note:This feature is controlled on a per domain basis in Domain Properties (on page 42)
under User Login Settings.
Enable Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync. Checked by default. Setting allows a user with a mobile device to synchronize with their web client information for e-mail, contacts, calendars, tasks and notes.
Outlook synchronization is also capable, but requires installing the IMail Collaboration
Client. This enables synchronizing e-mail, contacts, calendars, tasks and notes with mobile devices.
See the Mobile Synchronization Setup (on page 83) for more client help.
Note: Disabling Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync at the User Property Level will disable synchronization for only the specified user.
Tip: For a single user to begin using Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® there are 3 levels that require Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® to be enabled: 1) System level, 2) Domain level
(see Domain Properties (on page 42)) and 3) the User level (See User Properties (on
148
IMail v12 Administrator Help
List Administrator Permissions (not checked default). Select to let a user add, modify, or delete any list server mailing list on the mail domain(s) he or she has List
Administrator permissions to.
Domain Administrator Permissions (not checked default). Select to let a user add, modify, or delete users and aliases (except program aliases) on the mail domain (host) he or she has domain administrator permission to.
System Administrator Permissions (not checked default). Select to let a user have full administration capabilities with all IMail features and options. System
Administrators have Domain Administrator and List Administrator permissions.
Lists and Groups Aliases
Lists. Select the available domain's list(s) from the list box to which the user wants to subscribe.
Group Aliases. Select the available domain's group alias(es) from the list box to which the user wants to belong.
(Add to). Select row and click to add.
(Remove from). Select row from user text box and click to remove.
(Add All). Click to add all rows to users text box.
(Remove All). Click to remove all rows from users text box.
Change Password
Depending on the Domain Setting for User Login Settings > Password Strength (on page 42)
which controls the complexity of user passwords. Dialog will display the password strength required when modifying.
Password. Enter a new password. Passwords are limited in length to 3 to 30 alphanumeric characters and cannot include asterisks.
Confirm Password. Enter the user password a second time to confirm the password.
Specify Corresponding Collaboration User
Specify Corresponding Collaboration User. To point a user to an alternate
Collaboration Login Name than the set default.
Note: Leaving the Corresponding Collaboration User blank will allow the default
Collaboration User to be used.
149
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Save. Click to save your settings.
Related Topics
Adding a IMail User (on page 166)
Adding Users Using Adduser.exe (on page 440)
Default User Settings (on page 117)
Domain Default User Settings
How to get here
The Domain Default User Settings are default user values used when creating new user accounts.
Note: Domain Default User Settings override the System Default User Settings.
Domain: Shows the current selected domain. From the drop down you can pick any of the domains available to this administrative user account.
Default Maximum Mailbox Size. (Unlimited is default value) In the list box, click select Specify size and enter the default maximum size (in bytes, KB, MB, or GB) of all the mailboxes in each user account or select Unlimited mailbox size for each user.
The following will occur when a users mailbox is over the Max Mailbox Size:
All new incoming mail will no longer be received, they will get bounced.
New messages can still be sent.
Other users sending messages to a users full mailbox will receive a postmaster message stating the user's mailbox is exceeding the allowed limit.
When users mailbox is below the Max Mailbox Size, it will begin receiving mail again. be displayed when users log into the Web client. To turn it off, see Managing the Client Disk
Space Indicator (on page 171).
150
IMail v12 Administrator Help
user settings, it will override the e-mail domain's default settings. In this case, the unlimited value is no longer unlimited for the domain default settings. For more information, see
Adding a New IMail User (on page 166).
Default Maximum Messages. (Unlimited is default value) Enter the default maximum number of messages allowed in each user's mailbox. the user settings, it will override the e-mail domain's default settings. In this case, the unlimited value is no longer unlimited for the domain default settings. For more information,
see Adding a New IMail User (on page 166).
Default Message Encoding. Default message encoding used for sending messages.
Default setting is Unicode (UTF-8).
Unicode (UTF-8). Choose this character set for multi-language mail. In IMail, this includes English, Chinese Simplified, Chinese Traditional, French, German, Italian,
Japanese, or Spanish.
English (US-ASCII). For composing e-mail for English-speaking readers, based on the
English alphabet.
Western European (ISO-8859-15). For composing e-mail in French, Italian, German, or Spanish.
Chinese Traditional (BIG5). For composing e-mail in traditional Chinese.
Chinese Simplified (GB2312). For composing e-mail in simplified Chinese.
Japanese (ISO-2022-JP). For composing e-mail in Japanese.
Enable Password Change (selected by default). Select to let the user change his/her password in Web Messaging.
Account Enabled (selected by default). Select to let the user use the e-mail account remotely through POP3 or IMAP4. You can clear this option to disable the account without changing the user's password or removing him/her from the domain.
Require Password Change in Web Client (Not selected by default). This setting when set will require the user to change their password upon the next login.
Note: The system will automatically uncheck this feature, once the user has changed their password.
Access Information Services (selected by default). Select to make the user's LDAP information available in the LDAP database.
151
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Caution: Clearing the Access Information Services check box permanently deletes the user's information from the LDAP database and prevents distribution of user information via the IMail LDAP service. There is currently no method available to hide information within an
OpenLDAP database, except to use this option to clear user information. If you want to show
LDAP information for this user after clearing this option, you must add the LDAP information back into the user information.
Access LDAP Attributes (selected by default). Select to let the user modify his/her
LDAP attributes (name, address, organization, etc.).
Enable Personal Information Management. Enables the use of Calendaring, Notes and Tasks for the specified user.
Important:
"iclient.config"
can control the access of the above tools on a system wide
basis only.
Example:
To enable Calendaring, and disable Notes and Tasks. The domain level or user level
Personal Information Management must be enabled, then modify the following keys in
"iclient.config"
:
<add value="true" Key="EnableAppointments"/>
<add value="true" Key="EnableMeetingRequests"/>
<add value="false" Key="EnableNotes"/>
<add value="false" Key="EnableTasks"/>
Enable Ipswitch Instant Messaging. (Only present if Ipswitch Instant Messaging is installed). Select to let the user have access to Instant Messaging. Clear the check box to disable the user's access.
Enable Web Access. Select to let a user access his/her IMail Web Messaging client.
Enable Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync®. (Enabled by default) Allows all enabled users for the specified domain to use ActiveSync® for synchronizing mobile devices with their web client information for e-mail, contacts, calendars, tasks and notes.
Outlook synchronization is also capable, but requires installing the IMail Collaboration
Client. Once installed Outlook will synchronize e-mail, contacts, calendars, tasks and notes with their mobile devices.
See the Mobile Synchronization Setup (on page 83) for more information.
Warning: Disabling ActiveSync® at the domain level will disable all ActiveSync® users on the specified domain, overriding the User Property setting.
Tip: For a single user to begin using Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® there are 3 levels that require Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® to be enabled: 1) System level, 2) Domain level
(see Domain Properties) and 3) the User level (See User Properties).
152
IMail v12 Administrator Help
List Administrator Permissions (not checked default). Select to let a user add, modify, or delete any list server mailing list on the mail domain(s) he or she has List
Administrator permissions to.
Domain Administrator Permissions (not checked default). Select to let a user add, modify, or delete users and aliases (except program aliases) on the mail domain (host) he or she has domain administrator permission to.
System Administrator Permissions (not checked default). Select to let a user have full administration capabilities with all IMail features and options. System
Administrators have Domain Administrator and List Administrator permissions.
Save. Click to save your settings.
Domain Default Web Client User Options
How to get here
The IMail Administrator has the capability to globally set default Web Client User Options for all new users, to include Viewing, Composing, and Forwarding, Replying & Deleting preferences.
Viewing Web Client User Options
General Options
Display compose shortcut on menu bar. Checked by default. Unchecking this option will remove the Compose New Message button from the main menu and place it under the Action menu dropdown.
Receiving Options
New Mail Check Frequency. Default setting is 10 minutes. Allows the user to define how often their mailbox's are checked for new messages.
Only check for new messages in the Inbox. Default setting is unchecked. For users with large mailboxes and only receive Inbox mail messages. This feature can save computer processing time, for user's that do not receive messages to other sub-folders.
Enable new messages notification pop-up. Default setting is checked. This feature controls the small brief notification pop-up when new messages arrive.
Make the browser tab text blink when new messages arrive. Checked by default.
This feature allows the user to control the number of blinks when a new message arrives.
153
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Number of times to blink the text. By default the browser tab will blink 5 times. This feature allows the user to control the number of blinks when a new message arrives.
Play a sound when new messages arrive. Set by default. This feature allows the user to turn the sound off when new messages arrive.
Viewing Options
Reading Pane Location: Default setting is "Below". This drop down box allows customizing how to display the message to the user.
Note: Beside and Below will split your message list window, and allow previewing of the selected message within the same tab.
None. Selection of a message will open a new tab for message preview.
Beside. Selection of message will open to the right of the message list, within the same tab for message preview.
Below. Selection of message will open below the message list for message preview.
Paging Style. Set to Next, Previous and Numeric Pages by Default. This option allows a multitude of paging options. Select one to best suit your need.
Paging Location. Set to Bottom by default. This option controls the display of the paging location on the message list.
Top
Bottom
Top and Bottom
Number of Items Per Page. Set to 10 by default. This controls the number of messages to display per page of your message list before paging. A scroll bar will appear when page overflows.
Paging Always Visible. Not checked by default. This option controls the paging display. Unchecked, the paging will not display when only one page of messages are present.
Display Text Alongside Paging Buttons. Not checked by default. This option controls the display for the total message count located to the right of the paging control.
Enable Selection Checkbox In Message List. Checked by default. This feature allows selection of a message by use of a check boxes. Unchecked this checkbox will revert to usage of message highlighting with usage of the shift+ key for blocks of messages, or the ctrl+ for multiple random messages on a page. will be turned off. For existing users that have never saved their preferences, they will be treated as a new user with the check box option turned on.
154
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Important: "Check All" will only apply to the currently displayed page for the standard web client.
Show Column Filtering Upon Load. Not checked by default. This will add search filtering capability to the mailbox being displayed. Click on the filter icon to fine tune and narrow your message search.
Display Embedded Images as Attachments. Not checked by default. Embedded images within a message take up a lot of your email storage space and take longer to load for viewing. Checking this option will make all embedded images as mail attachments.
Enable image suppression in messages. Checked by default. This feature will suppress images for all messages. Once the link has been clicked, the images will always display when the message is selected. A link will appear at the top of the message display.
Note: Once this link is clicked, the images will always display when the message is selected.
Enable Javascript suppression in messages. Checked by default. This feature when checked will search all messages and disable any javascript encountered.
Note: Your IMail Administrator may have made this setting a mandatory requirement for all your mail messages, in which the Enable image suppression and Enable Javascript suppression will not display as user options.
Composing Options
Send Messages As Plain Text By Default. Not checked by default. HTML is the default setting to compose your messages. Includes many features such as bold, italic, underlining, multiple fonts, multiple colors, bullets, numbering, etc. Checking this option will compose your message using no formating.
Show the CC Field By Default. Checked by default. Select this checkbox to always display the CC field when composing a new message.
Show the BCC Field By Default. Not checked by default. Select this checkbox to always display the BCC (Blind Copy) field when composing a new message.
Save a copy of the Message in the Sent Folder. Checked by default. Choose this option if you wish to keep copies of your messages in the Sent folder.
Automatically add recipients as contacts. Not checked by default. Choose this option if you wish to automatically add recipients to your Contacts when sending new messages.
155
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Enable Recipient Auto-Suggestion. Checked by default. Choose this option to automatically suggest message recipient names as you type them in the "To" text box when writing a new message. If the recipient exists in your contacts, a drop down containing the complete name appears.
Note: This feature is not available in the Lite Client, due to the large bandwidth requirement.
Include Recipient Groups in Auto-Suggestion. Checked by default. This option when selected will include contact groups for selection from the "To" text box when writing a new message.
Show a warning before sending messages with a blank subject. Checked by default. This option controls the warning pop-up when a message is sent without a subject.
Show a warning before sending messages that contain attachment words but
have no attachment. Checked by default. This option is designed to assist in reminding users when a document contains references of an attachment, when an attachment does not exist.
Auto-Save To Draft Frequency. Default is 10 minutes. This option controls the message auto-saving to drafts feature. This number is the amount of minutes between each save to drafts when composing a message.
Note: To turn Auto-Save off completely, set the Auto-Save To Draft Frequency to zero.
Forwarding Options
Include Original Message When Forwarding. Checked by default. This check box will include the original message when forwarded.
Include Original Attachments When Forwarding. Checked by default. This check box will include the original attachments when forwarded.
Include Signature When Forwarding. Checked by default. This option will insert the user's signature when forwarding.
Replying Options
Include Original Message When Replying. Checked by default. This check box will include the original message in your reply.
Include Original Attachment When Replying. Unchecked by default. This will include all original attachments when replying.
Include Signature When Replying. Checked by default. This option will insert the user's signature when replying.
Deleting Options
Show a Confirmation dialog before Deleting Messages. Set by default. Select this check box to have a request for confirmation before deleting the selected message(s).
Deleting. Radio button options.
Upon deletion, move messages to the Deleted folder. Set by default. Select this option to move deleted messages to the Deleted folder. These messages remain in
156
IMail v12 Administrator Help
the folder until you purge them by selecting one or more messages and clicking the
Delete button.
Upon deletion, purge messages from the system. Select this option to completely remove deleted messages. Purged messages are deleted from the server and cannot be recovered.
Reporting Options
The Spam Reporting tab is only available for email customers with IMail Premium Servers.
Customers with IMail Standard Servers will not display this tab option.
Show a confirmation dialog before reporting messages. Checked by default. This option ask for a confirmation before reporting the message as spam.
Spam Reporting Options (select one)
After reporting, do nothing to message. This option will report the message as spam and will be delivered to your Inbox as regular mail.
After reporting, delete message. Set by default. This option will report the message as spam and then delete the message.
After reporting, move message. Default is Spam. This option will report the message as spam and then move your message to another folder. If no folder is selected a default Spam folder will be created. Select from the drop down text box to move your spam messages to an alternate mail folder.
Note: When a mail folder is not selected from the drop down text box, then a Spam folder will be created after saving.
Contact Options
Default List Sort. Set to Display Name by default. This option controls the sort option for your contacts when initially displayed.
Calendaring Options
Show a confirmation dialog before deleting appointments and tasks. Set by default. Unchecking this option will suppress the confirmation prompt when deleting calendar appointments and tasks.
Enable Reminders. Set by default. Unchecking this option will suppress all calendar reminders.
Day Start Time. Set to 5am by default. This option controls the actual start time of the day to display on the Day Calendar.
Day End Time. Set to 10pm by default. This option controls the actual end time of the day to display on the Day Calendar.
157
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Note: Click Show 24 Hours to display (located at bottom of page of the Day Calendar) all hours of the day on the Day Calendar.
Workday Start Time. Set to 8am by default. This option controls the work day start time by setting a darker contrast on the Day Calendar.
Workday End Time. Set to 5pm by default. This option controls the work day end time by ending the darker contrast on the Day Calendar.
Minutes per Row. Set to 30 minutes by default. This option controls the number of minutes between each displayed row.
Number Of Days to Display in Multi-Day. Set to 3 by default. This option control the total number of days to display when using the Multi-Day function. An option found in the top right corner of the main Calendar page.
First Day of the Week. Default is Automatically Determined. This option controls which day of the week to display for the week. (e.g. United States uses Sunday as the first day of the week)
Initial View. Default is Day. This option controls the initial calendar view when tab is displayed. Options are Day, Week or Month.
Save. To save any changes made.
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync Users
How to get here
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® Users by Domain
To allow the IMail Administrator capability to enable / disable multiple ActiveSync® users at a time, this domain User List is sorted by users with enabled ActiveSync® users listed first, followed by the disabled users.
Name. The unique User ID (user name) of the users e-mail account.
ActiveSync® Enabled. (Yes / No) User properties check box for allowing usage of
ActiveSync® for a single user.
Tip: For a single user to begin using Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® there are 3 levels that require Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® to be enabled: 1) System level, 2) Domain level
(see Domain Properties) and 3) the User level (See User Properties).
Enable. Select a user(s) and click Enable to allow ActiveSync® usage for a user.
Disable. Select a user(s) and click Disable to turn off ActiveSync® usage for a user.
Related Topics
158
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® (on page 81)
User Utilities
How to get here
Domain: Shows the current selected domain. From the drop down you can pick any of the domains available to this administrative user account.
The User Utilities page gives you access to:
Use Domain User Changes (on page 159) to set global settings for all of the current
domains user accounts.
Import NT Users (on page 68) from the NT Database to add them to the IMail
Database, if a domain uses the IMail Database for user mail accounts.
Using Find Orphans (on page 162) to locate an orphan directory in the IMail Users
directory.
Set Default "Reply To" (on page 163) to set the domain portion of the Reply To address
to be the same for all users on the current domain.
Delete Messages by Date (on page 163) to delete messages for all users by a specified
date.
Mailbox Size Report (on page 164) displaying all user's mailbox sizes by domain.
Related Topics
Deleting Old Messages (immsgexp.exe) (on page 164)
Sending Mail to All Users (mailall.exe) (on page 165)
Exporting Users to File (on page 162)
Domain User Changes
How to get here
You can use Domain User Changes to set or unset specific settings for all user accounts for the current domain.
Domain: Shows the current selected domain. From the drop down you can pick any of the domains available to this administrative user account.
Maximum Mailbox Size. Choose from the following three options:
No change. Select this option to indicate no change from the settings indicated on the Standard User Settings page.
Use the default setting for the domain. Select this option to use the domain's default setting.
Specify size. If you select this option, enter the numerical amount in the text box and select either bytes, KB, MB, or GB from the list box.
159
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Maximum Mailbox Messages. Choose from the following three options:
No change. Select this option to indicate no change from the settings indicated on the Standard User Settings page.
Use the default setting for the domain. Select this option to use the domain's default setting.
Specify size. If you select this option, enter the numerical amount in the text box and select either bytes, KB, MB, or GB from the list box.
Encoding. Default message encoding used for sending messages. Default setting is
Unicode (UTF-8).
Unicode (UTF-8). Choose this character set for multi-language mail. In IMail, this includes English, Chinese Simplified, Chinese Traditional, French, German, Italian,
Japanese, or Spanish.
English (US-ASCII). For composing e-mail for English-speaking readers, based on the
English alphabet.
Western European (ISO-8859-15). For composing e-mail in French, Italian, German, or Spanish.
Chinese Traditional (BIG5). For composing e-mail in traditional Chinese.
Chinese Simplified (GB2312). For composing e-mail in simplified Chinese.
Japanese (ISO-2022-JP). For composing e-mail in Japanese.
Enable Password Change. Options are No Change, Yes, and No. Select No Change if you want the settings to remain the same as noted in the Allow Password Change option on the User Properties page. Select Yes to allow users to change passwords remotely. Select No to prevent all users from changing their passwords remotely.
Grant Account Access. Options are No Change, Yes, and No. No Change indicates users keep the existing settings as noted in the Grant Account Access option on the
Standard User Settings page. Select Yes to let users access their e-mail accounts remotely through POP3 or IMAP4 . Select No to prohibit users from accessing their accounts remotely through POP3. This allows you disable accounts without changing users' passwords or removing them from the system.
Access Information Services. Options are No Change, Yes, and No. Select No
Change if you want the settings to remain the same as noted in the Access
Information Services option on the Standard User Settings page. Select Yes if you want to globally provide user information provided in LDAP settings. Select No to prevent the distribution of any information about users through LDAP, if you have the LDAP server running.
Enable Web Access. Options are No Change, Yes, and No. Select No Change if you want the settings to remain the same as those specified in the Allow Web Access option on the Standard User Settings page. Select Yes to let users access their IMail
Web Messaging client and IMail Web Calendaring. Select No to prevent users access to their accounts remotely via the Web.
Enable Personal Information Management. Options are No Change, Yes, and No.
Select No Change if you want the settings to remain the same as those specified in the Allow Personal Information Management option on the Standard User Settings page. Select Yes to let users access their IMail Web Calendaring, Notes and Tasks through the Web Client. Select No to prevent users access.
160
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Save. Click Save to run utility.
Cancel. Click Cancel to exit without running utility.
Importing Windows NT Users
How to get here
If a host uses the IMail Database for user mail accounts, you can import users from the NT
Database and add them to the IMail database on the Import NT Users page.
Note: This differs from actually using the Windows NT Database, in that although the users keep their same user IDs, Administrators are required to set a default required password for importing these NT Users into the IMail database. Users can change the password after they have been imported.
Domain. Shows the current selected domain. From the drop down you can pick any of the domains available to this administrative user account.
Import NT User Options
Initial Password. Use this text box to enter an initial password setting for users being imported.
Note: The password must be between 3 and 15 characters.
Confirm password. Use this text box to confirm the password setting for users being imported.
Add as Collaboration User. Select this check box to enable a User or Users selected from the Username list to access the Collaboration tools.
Add as Ipswitch Instant Messaging User. Select this check box to enable a User or
Users selected from the Username list to access Ipswitch Instant Messaging.
Existing Users on the NT Database
Search Box. Requires entering a minimum of two characters, and the search will automatically begin narrowing the list of users. The search assumes a wildcard automatically after the characters entered.
Username. This column lists the usernames of all users imported from the NT database. You can click on the link under the username to access the user's User
Properties.
Full Name. This column lists the display names of the users.
161
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Import. To add a user and password, select a user from the list by selecting the check box next to the Username, enter the initial password and the confirm password, and click Import.
Cancel. Click the Cancel button to return to the Utility page.
Related Topics
Using the Windows NT Database (on page 67)
Exporting Domain Users to File
The "Export Users to File" utility can be accessed using the IMail Console Administration under Utilities.
Related Topics
Finding Orphan Mail Accounts
How to get here
Use this page to find and delete any mail account that has a directory in the IMail Users directory whose user has been deleted from the user list.
Domain. Shows the current selected domain. From the drop down you can pick any of the domains available to this administrative user account.
Orphan Mail Options
User Directory. Displays the directory in which the mail accounts reside.
Initial Password. Use this text box to enter an initial password setting for users being imported.
Note: The password must be between 3 and 15 characters.
Confirm password. Use this text box to confirm the password setting for users being imported.
Add as Collaboration User. Select this check box to enable a User or Users selected from the Username list to access the Collaboration tools.
Add as Ipswitch Instant Messaging User. Select this check box to enable a User or
Users selected from the Username list to access Ipswitch Instant Messaging.
Orphan mail accounts on the domain.
Search Box. Requires entering a minimum of two characters, and the search will automatically begin narrowing the list of users. The search assumes a wildcard automatically after the characters entered.
162
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Username. This column lists IMail User folders that no longer exist in User
Administration list.
Delete. Deletes selected Username(s) that still have existing user folders.
Import. Click this button to import orphaned accounts back into your user database.
Cancel. Click this button to return back to Utility page without running utility.
Set "Reply To" Address
How to get here
You can use this page to set the domain portion of the Reply To address to be the same for all users on the current domain.
Domain. Shows the current selected domain. From the drop down you can pick any of the domains available to this administrative user account.
Reply To Address. Use the text box to enter the domain portion of the Reply To address for all users on the current domain.
Warning: This utility will not only set the domain name, but will also reset the Username to its User Account name.
Save. Click this button to run the utility to change all "Reply To" addresses.
Cancel. Click this button to cancel and return to User Utility page.
Deleting Messages by Date
How to get here
Use this page to delete messages for all users by a specified date.
Domain. Shows the current selected domain. From the drop down you can pick any of the domains available to this administrative user account.
You can choose one of two options to choose the age of messages to delete:
Number of Days. Select this option and enter the number of days that a message can exist before being deleted. For example, if you enter 14, all messages that are more than 14 days old will be deleted.
Date. Select this option and enter a specific date (or choose the date from the calendar), after which all existing messages older than this date will be deleted.
Delete. Click this button to run utility and delete the selected messages.
163
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Cancel. Click this button to return to Utility page without running utility.
Caution: Deletion affects ALL user mailboxes not just the INBOX.
Mailbox Size Report
How to get here
Use this page to display mailbox sizes for individual users by domain. Click a user to display the selected user's file directory.
Domain: Shows the current selected domain. From the drop down you can pick any of the domains available to this administrative user account.
Mailbox Size Report
Username. Displays all users for the selected domain.
Mail Folder Size (MB). Displays total mailbox size for each user. Select this user to display the user's file directory.
Deleting Old Messages (immsgexp.exe)
"immsgexp.exe" is a utility that deletes messages older than a specified number of days.
Basic Command Syntax
immsgexp -t startdirectory
-d #of_days_to_save
-m specific_mailbox
-f fully_qualified_path_to_mailbox (cannot be used with -t and -m)
The
"startdirectory"
will be scanned search only
"specific_mailbox"
and any message older than
"#of_days_to_save"
will be deleted.
Option -f gives capability to delete
"#of_days_to_save"
from a
"fully_qualified_path_to_mailbox"
.
Warning: -t option cannot be used with the -f option.
Warning: -m option will be ignored if used with the -f option.
A log of exYYMMDD.log (or exYYMMDD.### if .log already exists) will be created and log which directories/mailboxes were scanned, how many messages were deleted, and the amount of disk space saved (by file and directory).
Examples:
164
IMail v12 Administrator Help
The following command deletes all messages in the
"C:\Program
Files\Ipswitch\IMail"
directory that are more than 60 days old. immsgexp -t"C:\Program Files\Ipswitch\IMail" -d60
The following command deletes all messages in the "spam" mailbox located in the c:imail directory that are more than 60 days old. immsgexp -t"C:\Program Files\Ipswitch\IMail" -mspam.mbx -d60
The following command deletes messages in the
"sent"
mailbox of the User "jdoe" that are more than 90 days old. immsgexp -d90 -f"C:\Program Files\Ipswitch\IMail\jdoe\sent.mbx"
immsgexp.exe command line options
Command Function
-t The directory containing the mailboxes from which messages will be deleted.
-d
-m
-f
The number of days that a message will remain on the server before it is deleted.
The name of the mailbox from which messages will be deleted.
Full path to the specific mailbox.
Warning - Cannot be used with the -t option.
Warning - The -m option will be ignored when using this option.
Sending Mail to All Users (mailall.exe)
Mailall.exe is a command line utility that sends mail to all users on a particular host or on all hosts on the IMail system.
Basic Command Syntax
mailall -h hostname|ALL> -f sender -d [-s Subject] <FullPathToMessageFile>
Examples: mailall -h myhost -f admin@myhost -s "Admin note" C:\mailnotes.txt
The above example sends the file mailnotes.txt to all users on myhost. The message is from admin@myhost; the Subject is Admin Note.
Alias1=|mailall -h myname -d
The preceding example creates a program alias that is used to send mail to all users on the myname host. Then, you can send a message to [email protected], and it will go to everyone on the myname host. When an e-mail is sent to the program alias, the executable program is invoked and the entire contents of the message is passed as the text for the
"mailall.exe" message.
165
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Command
-h hostname
-h ALL
-f sender
Function
The -h parameter is required. Use it to enter the hostname.
The -h parameter is required. Use this command to specify all hosts on the
IMail system.
Specifies what address appears in the From field. A value is required if you are using a text file that has no From header line.
This is an optional parameter that specifies the content of the Subject field. -s subject
-d Optional. Use -d to delete the source files when mailing is complete.
FullPathToMessageFile This parameter is required.
Adding an IMail User
How to get here
Use the User Properties to change a user's settings, such as: user password, user ID, maximum mailbox size and maximum number of mailbox messages, add user to Collaboration, and change other user mailbox properties.
Domain Name (Official Host Name or OHN). The current domain name used to address mail to the users on the mail domain is displayed. For example, company.com is the domain name in the address [email protected].
Domain Name(OHN). This clickable link displays only for existing users. This link will take you to the Domain Properties page.
Username. Enter a unique user ID (user name) for the email account. User IDs are limited in length to 1 to 30 characters and must be created from alphanumeric characters. The User ID cannot include spaces and must be a unique name within the domain to which you are adding the user.
Full Name. Enter the user’s First Name and Last Name.
Note: Updating the Full Name within the Web Client will create a Display Name within the users
"preferences.config"
file, and will not update the Web or Console Administration
Full Name. Once a Display Name has been created in the
"preferences.config"
file, updates from the Web or Console Administration will no longer update the Web Client Full
Name. See User Impersonation (on page 478) for updating a user's Web Client Full Name.
Password. Enter a new password. Passwords are limited in length to 3 to 30 alphanumeric characters and cannot include asterisks.
Confirm Password. Enter the user password a second time to confirm the password.
166
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Maximum Mailbox Size. (Unlimited is default value) Enter the default maximum size (in bytes, KB, MB, or GB) of all the mailboxes in each user account. If the user's
Maximum Mailbox Size is unlimited, the defaults for the e-mail domain are applied to the user. If the domain's default is also unlimited, the Maximum Mailbox Size for the user is unlimited. If a new message will cause the total size of all mailboxes in a user's account to exceed the Maximum Mailbox Size value, the mail is returned to the sender.
When the Maximum Mailbox Size value is a value other than Unlimited, it will override the e-mail domain's default settings. In this case, the unlimited value is no longer unlimited for the domain default settings.
Maximum Mailbox Messages. (Unlimited is default value) Enter the default maximum number of messages allowed in each user account. If the user's Maximum
Mailbox Messages is unlimited, the defaults for the e-mail domain are applied to the user. If the domain's default is also unlimited, the Maximum Mailbox Messages for the user is unlimited.
When the Maximum Mailbox Messages value is a value other than Unlimited, it will override the e-mail domain's default settings. In this case, the unlimited value is no longer unlimited for the domain default settings. has five messages stored, then the next message sent to the user's main mailbox is bounced.
However, if the next message is sent to a sub-mailbox instead, the message is delivered as long as there are less than five messages currently stored in the sub-mailbox.
Encoding. Default message encoding used for sending messages. Default setting is
Unicode (UTF-8).
Unicode (UTF-8). Choose this character set for multi-language mail. In IMail, this includes English, Chinese Simplified, Chinese Traditional, French, German, Italian,
Japanese, or Spanish.
English (US-ASCII). For composing e-mail for English-speaking readers, based on the
English alphabet.
Western European (ISO-8859-15). For composing e-mail in French, Italian, German, or Spanish.
Chinese Traditional (BIG5). For composing e-mail in traditional Chinese.
Chinese Simplified (GB2312). For composing e-mail in simplified Chinese.
Japanese (ISO-2022-JP). For composing e-mail in Japanese.
User Options
Enable Password Change (selected by default). Select to let the user change his/her password in Web Messaging.
Account Enabled (selected by default). Select to let the user use the e-mail account remotely through POP3 or IMAP4. You can clear this option to disable the account without changing the user's password or removing him/her from the domain.
Require Password Change in Web Client (Not selected by default). This setting when set will require the user to change their password upon the next login.
167
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Note: The system will automatically uncheck this feature, once the user has changed their password.
Access Information Services (selected by default). Select to make the user's LDAP information available in the LDAP database.
Caution: Clearing the Access Information Services check box permanently deletes the user's information from the LDAP database and prevents distribution of user information via the IMail LDAP service. There is currently no method available to hide information within an
OpenLDAP database, except to use this option to clear user information. If you want to show
LDAP information for this user after clearing this option, you must add the LDAP information back into the user information.
Access LDAP Attributes (selected by default). Select to let the user modify his/her
LDAP attributes (name, address, organization, etc.).
Enable Personal Information Management. Enables the use of Calendaring, Notes and Tasks for the specified user.
Important:
"iclient.config"
can control the access of the above tools on a system wide
basis only.
Example:
To enable Calendaring, and disable Notes and Tasks. The domain level or user level
Personal Information Management must be enabled, then modify the following keys in
"iclient.config"
:
<add value="true" Key="EnableAppointments"/>
<add value="true" Key="EnableMeetingRequests"/>
<add value="false" Key="EnableNotes"/>
<add value="false" Key="EnableTasks"/>
Enable Ipswitch Instant Messaging. (Only present if Ipswitch Instant Messaging is installed). Select to let the user have access to Instant Messaging. Clear the check box to disable the user's access.
Enable Web Access. Select to let a user access his/her IMail Web Messaging client.
Enable Archiving. This check box allows the IMail Administrator the control to enable/disable specific users for message archiving.
Tip: The System Setting and Domain Archiving must be enabled for Mail-box Based
Archiving for user-level Archiving to be disabled/enabled.
Tip: For existing domains with users requiring disabling/enabling for archiving, use the
Console Administrator bulk-edit feature. Simply select necessary users on the Users page, and click edit. Any modifications made will update only the selected users.
168
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Note: Disabling Archiving at the domain-level will override all user-level settings.
Enable Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync. Checked by default. Setting allows a user with a mobile device to synchronize with their web client information for e-mail, contacts, calendars, tasks and notes.
Outlook synchronization is also capable, but requires installing the IMail Collaboration
Client. This enables synchronizing e-mail, contacts, calendars, tasks and notes with mobile devices.
See the Mobile Synchronization Setup (on page 83) for more client help.
Note: Disabling Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync at the User Property Level will disable synchronization for only the specified user.
Tip: For a single user to begin using Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® there are 3 levels that require Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® to be enabled: 1) System level, 2) Domain level
(see Domain Properties (on page 42)) and 3) the User level (See User Properties (on
List Administrator Permissions (not checked default). Select to let a user add, modify, or delete any list server mailing list on the mail domain(s) he or she has List
Administrator permissions to.
Domain Administrator Permissions (not checked default). Select to let a user add, modify, or delete users and aliases (except program aliases) on the mail domain (host) he or she has domain administrator permission to.
System Administrator Permissions (not checked default). Select to let a user have full administration capabilities with all IMail features and options. System
Administrators have Domain Administrator and List Administrator permissions.
Adding to Lists and Groups
Subscribe to Lists. Select the domain's list(s) from the list box to which the user wants to subscribe.
Add to Group Aliases. Select the domain's group alias(es) from the list box to which the user wants to belong.
Save. Click to save your settings.
Cancel. Click Cancel to exit without saving changes.
Related Topics
169
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Creating Public Mailboxes (on page 394)
Managing Mailboxes (on page 394)
Adding Users Using Adduser.exe (on page 440)
Full Mailbox Notification (on page 73)
Customizing the Notification Message (on page 73)
Add User to Collaboration
How to get here
Add User to Collaboration. This link will only appear if there is no corresponding
Collaboration user.
Account Details. Enter the following information, to create an associated IMail Collaboration user.
Account Name. Enter the user's account name in the text box.
Account E-mail. Enter the user's E-mail account in the text box.
Login Name. Enter the name with which the user logs into the system.
Password. Enter a password for this collaboration user into the text box.
Confirm Password. Re-enter the password for collaboration this user into the text box.
Save. Click to save settings.
Cancel. Click to cancel any modifications.
Related Topics
Deleting an IMail User from Aliases/Lists
Use the Deletion Options page to remove a user from all related aliases and/or all related lists.
Remove corresponding user(s) from all related aliases. Select the check box to remove the user's aliases from IMail.
Remove corresponding user(s) from all related lists. Select the check box to remove the user from all related IMail lists.
Delete. Click to remove the user.
Cancel. Click to cancel your changes and return to the User Administration page.
170
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Managing the Client Disk Space Indicator
To turn the disk space indicator off for all users.
1 Locate the iClient.config file in the webclient root directory.
2 In that file, locate the sections that look as follows:
<add key="UsageBarOnOrOff" value="on" />
3 Change the word “on” to “off” and save the changes.
4 The disk space indicator will be hidden from all users.
To turn the disk space indicator off for specific users.
1 Locate the preferences.config file for the particular user for whom you wish to turn off the indicator. This file will be located in the IMail user's directory, along with his or her mailboxes.
New users will not have a preferences.config file until the user saves the preferences.
If this is a new user, the preferences.config node will initially appear as
<enable_usagebar/>. This will need to be replaced with
<enable_usagebar>false</enable_usagebar>
2 If the preferences.config file is not present,it is possible that it may not be there if the user has not updated their preferences since the latest version of the Web client was installed. If it is not there, simply add the following text. If it is there, then change that node so that it appears as follows:
<enable_usagebar>false</enable_usagebar>
Note: If the above node is not present, it must be added at any ending node: e.g. </node>, but do not add at the beginning or the end, as this will cause XML errors.
3 Save the changes to the file and the indicator will no longer appear for this particular user.
Setting Access to Personal Information Management
IMail Personal Information Management provides access to Calendaring, Notes and Tasks withing the Web Client. You can assign access to Personal Information Management for each individual mail account or globally for all users.
To set access to Personal Information Management for an individual user mail account:
1 Click the Domain tab.
2 In the Domains list, select a domain. The Domain Properties appear.
3 In the left navigation bar, click User Administration. The Username list appears.
4 Click a user in the Username list. The User Properties appear.
5 Check the Enable Personal Information Management option, then click Save.
To allow web access to all existing users within a domain:
1 Click the Domain tab.
2 In the Domains list, select a domain. The Domain Properties appear.
171
IMail v12 Administrator Help
3 In the left navigation bar, click User Administration > User Utilities > Domain User
Changes. The Domain User Changes page appears.
4 Select the Enable Web Access option to Yes, then click Save. domain User Setting (global setting), the change will override the domain setting.
Rename User ID
How to get here
Domain Name (Official Host Name or OHN ). The current domain name used to address mail to the users on the mail domain is displayed.
Current User ID. Displays the selected user ID (user name) for the e-mail account.
New User ID. Enter a New User ID in the box,
Rename Corresponding IIM User. Displays only if Instant Messaging ID exists for this user.
Rename Corresponding Collaboration User. Displays only if a collaboration user exists for the specified user.
Save. Click to validate and save new User ID.
Cancel. Click to not rename User ID.
Related Topics
LDAP Information
How to get here
Enter user information on the LDAP Information page. LDAP user information is published on the server and the information is made available to LDAP-enabled clients.
Domain Name (OHN). Displays the name of the specified user's domain.
Userid. Displays the ID of the specified user.
The following information can be updated to the LDAP database for the specified user:
Full name
Organization
Department
Address
City
State
Postal Code
172
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Country
Telephone
Related Topics
About LDAP Server (on page 395)
Setting IMail LDAP Options (on page 396)
Populating the LDAP Database Using Ldaper.exe (on page 400)
File Directory
How to get here
Use the User Administration properties to add a new user, user password, set maximum mailbox size and maximum number of mailbox messages, and set other mailbox user properties.
Domain Name (Official Host Name or OHN). The current domain name used to address mail to the users on the mail domain is displayed. For example, company.com is the domain name in the address [email protected].
User ID. The unique user ID (user name) for the e-mail account.
Full name. The user’s First Name and Last Name.
Maximum Mailbox Size. The default maximum size (in bytes, KB, MB, or GB) of all the mailboxes in each user account. If the user's Maximum Mailbox Size is zero, the defaults for the e-mail domain are applied to the user. If the domain's default is also zero, the Maximum Mailbox Size for the user is unlimited. If a new message will cause the total size of all mailboxes in a user's account to exceed the Maximum Mailbox Size value, the mail is returned to the sender.
When the Maximum Mailbox Size value is non-zero, it will override the e-mail domain's default settings. In this case, the 0 value is no longer unlimited for the domain default settings.
Maximum Mailbox Messages. The default maximum number of messages allowed in each user mailbox. If the user's Maximum Mailbox Messages is zero, the defaults for the e-mail domain are applied to the user. If the domain's default is also zero, the
Maximum Mailbox Messages for the user is unlimited.
When the Maximum Mailbox Messages value is non- zero, it will override the e-mail domain's default settings. In this case, the 0 value is no longer unlimited for the domain default settings.
Directory. Displays the directory where the selected user's mailbox files are saved.
173
IMail v12 Administrator Help
File Name list. Displays all mailboxes (.mbx) in the user's directory. Other files may also display in the list.
Size. Displays the current total size of the all mailboxes in the user's account.
Created. Displays the date the mailbox file was created.
Last Accessed. Displays the date the mailbox file was last accessed.
Last Modified. Displays the date the mailbox file was last modified.
Delete File. Select a filename(s) in the list, then click Delete to delete a mailbox file.
To rename a user's mailbox (.mbx), user ID (.uid), last login (.in) file, vacation (.ima), or other data file:
1 Click associated link of the file (.mbx), (.uid), (.in), (.ima), or other data file in the File
Name list, a pop-up window with the User file name appears.
2 Click Change. After changing the file name in the text box.
3 Click Cancel. To return to File Directory page.
To delete mailbox messages by date:
1 Click a mailbox (.mbx) file in the File Name list, the User File page appears.
2 Click Delete Messages by Date. The Delete Messages By Date page appears.
3 Set options to delete messages:
Number of Days box. Messages are deleted automatically when they reach the specified number of days old.
Date box. Messages are deleted automatically when they reach the specified date.
information, see Cleaning the Spool Directory (isplcln.exe) (on page 114) or Deleting Old
Messages (immsgexp.exe) (on page 164).
Deleting Messages by Date for User
How to get here
Use this page to delete messages for a selected user for all or a specific mailbox with a date parameter.
Domain Name (OHN). Displays the official host name (OHN) of the user's domain.
Username. Selected User.
Mailbox. Default is set for all Mailboxes. Drop down text box displaying all mailboxes for selected user.
You can choose one of two options, either by date or by number of days.
Number of Days. Select this option and enter the number of days that a message can exist before being deleted. For example, if you enter 14, all messages that are more than 14 days old will be deleted.
Date. Select this option and enter a specific date (or choose the date from the calendar), after which all existing messages older than this date will be deleted.
174
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Delete. Click this button to delete the selected messages.
Related Topics
Inbound Delivery Rules for Users
How to get here
Use Inbound delivery rules to sort incoming mail messages for each user.
Use the Inbound Rules page to add new inbound rules, edit and delete inbound rules, move inbound rule evaluation priority up or down, add rules, and set actions to take on a message that matches the rule criteria.
The Inbound Rules list displays information about each of the active inbound rules for the selected user. The inbound delivery rules for a user are stored in the
"rules.ima"
file, located in
"...\IMail\users\username".
Inbound Rules
Name list. Click a rule name to modify the Rule Settings.
Action. Displays the action to take on a message that matches the rule condition criteria.
Condition. Displays the inbound rule condition associated with a rule.
Destination. Displays the mailbox or forwarding e-mail address that matches the rule condition criteria. A Destination is only available when Move to Mailbox or Forward
are selected in the Action Type list (on page 249).
Add. Click Add to create a new user rule. For more information, see Adding Inbound Rule
Conditions for Users (on page 176).
Edit. Select a rule and click Edit to modify rule conditions.
Move Up. Select a rule and click Move Up to move the rule processing order to a higher priority for e-mail filtering. Rules are processed in the order in which they appear in the Rules list.
Move Down. Select a rule and click Move Down to move the rule processing order to a lower priority for e-mail filtering. Rules are processed in the order in which they appear in the Rules list.
Delete. Select a rule that you want to delete from the Inbound Rules list, then click Delete to delete the rule.
To Edit an Inbound Rule:
1 From the Rules list, select a rule and click Edit. The Rule Settings page appears.
2 Make the desired changes to the conditions, then click Save.
Related Topics
175
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Overview of Mail Delivery Rules (on page 244)
Adding an Inbound Rule Condition (on page 178)
Creating an Outbound Rule for a Domain (on page 247)
How Delivery Rules are stored and processed (on page 244)
Adding Multiple Conditions to Rules (on page 178)
Adding Rule for Users
How to get here
Use the Rule Settings page to add new rule conditions, edit rule conditions, delete conditions, move rule condition evaluation priority up or down, add rule conditions, and set actions to take on a message that matches the rule condition criteria.
After you create a rule condition, the new Rule is placed at the bottom of the Rules list. Rules are identified in the list by their sequence in the list, for example (Rule 1, Rule 2; etc.).
Rule Name
Domain Name (Official Host Name or OHN ). The current domain name used to address mail to the users on the mail domain is displayed. For example, company.com is the domain name in the address [email protected].
Rule Name. Enter the name for the rule.
Conditions
Field. Select the message field to be filtered: From Address, To, Subject, Sender,
Body, or Header.
Comparison. Displays Contains when the delivery rule filter messages contain the search text. Displays Does Not Contain when the delivery rule filter message does not contain the search text.
Search Text. Displays the search criteria that are used in the rule condition.
Match Case. Displays Yes or No to indicate whether the search text must match the text case used in the Search Text condition.
Add Condition... Click Adding a Rule Condition (on page 178).
To add more than one condition to a rule, create the first condition, then click:
Add AND/OR... to create the second condition as you did the first. For more
information, see Adding Multiple Conditions to Rules (on page 178).
Note: The Add Condition button will only display on a new rule with no conditions, and after an AND/OR has been created.
NOTE: Be aware, that a rule can not be saved when an AND/OR exists without a condition.
176
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Edit. Select a condition and click Edit or double click to modify a condition.
Delete. Select a condition that you want to delete from the Conditions list, then click
Delete to delete the condition.
Move Up. Select a condition and click Move Up to move the condition processing order to a higher priority for e-mail filtering. Conditions are processed in the order in which they appear in the Conditions list.
Move Down. Select a condition and click Move Down to move the condition processing order to a lower priority for e-mail filtering. Conditions are processed in the order in which they appear in the Conditions list.
Action
Action Type. Select an action to take if a rule traps a message that meets the rule criteria:
Move to Mailbox. Moves the message to the user’s mailbox specified in the Target box. If the mailbox does not exist, it is created. The default mailbox is "bulk". A POP3 user will see this mailbox only if he logs on to this mailbox using the format userid- mailbox
. By default, if nothing is entered into the text box, messages meeting the rule criteria will be sent to the user's Main mailbox.
Forward to Address. Forwards the message to an e-mail address. Enter an e-mail address to forward mail to in the Target box. You must enter the full e-mail address, such as [email protected].
Delete. Immediately deletes the message.
Copy. Delivers the message to its intended recipient as well as copies it to an additional address that you specify in the Target box.
Bounce. Sends the message back to the sender without being processed.
Target. Enter the name of the user's mailbox or e-mail address to forward the message to which matches the rule condition criteria. If you enter a mailbox that does not exist, one is created. A POP3 user will see this mailbox only if he logs on to this mailbox using the format userid-mailbox. By default, if nothing is entered in the text box, messages meeting the rule criteria are sent to the user's Main mailbox.
Add. Click Add to save changes.
Cancel. Click Cancel to exit without saving changes.
Related Topics
Overview of Mail Delivery Rules (on page 244)
Adding a Rule Condition (on page 178)
Creating an Outbound Rule for a Domain (on page 247)
How Delivery Rules are stored and processed (on page 244)
Delivery Rule Syntax (on page 257)
Adding Multiple Conditions to Rules (on page 178)
177
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Adding a Rule Condition
Use this pop-up dialog to create a rule condition.
Define Condition
Where. Select the message field that you want to filter: From, To, Subject, Sender,
Body, or Header.
Comparison.
Contains. Select to have the delivery rule filter messages that have this search text.
Does Not Contain. Select to have the delivery rule filter messages that do not have the search text.
Search Text. Enter search text that contains the text you want to search. Enter the search text by doing one or more of the following:
Enter the literal text that you want to search for. For example, if you want to find the word "jazz", enter: jazz
Type search expressions and quantifiers as shown in text patterns (on page 260).
Paste a portion of a mail message that meets your search criteria. For example, you could copy and paste text such as "XMSMailPriority(High)" from the header of a message; this would search for High priority messages.
Match Case. Select to search for text that matches the case of the search text. To ignore the text case, clear Match Case.
Save. Click Save to add condition.
Cancel. Click Cancel to exit without saving changes.
Related Topics
Inbound Rules for Domains (on page 246)
Overview of Mail Delivery Rules (on page 244)
Delivery Rule Syntax (on page 257)
How Delivery Rules are Stored and Processed (on page 244)
Adding Multiple Conditions for Users
You can create multiple conditions for both inbound and outbound rules. By using multiple conditions, you can often combine multiple rules into one, thus, saving time and creating a more compact rules file. Sometimes a rule with only one condition is adequate to fulfill rule filtering requirements. However, when you need to create more complex rules, you may want to use multiple conditions. For example, see Rule with Multiple Conditions Example (on
To add a rule with multiple conditions:
1 Follow the instructions to create a rule as described in Setting Inbound Rules for Users (on
page 175). After adding the first rule condition, select the new rule condition.
2 Click Add AND/OR... This will bring a pop-up window allowing either
178
IMail v12 Administrator Help
selection of the "AND" button, meaning "ALL" the rule conditions must be met for the message to be trapped.
or selection of the "OR" button, meaning "ANY" one of the conditions must be met for the message to be trapped.
3 Create the second condition as you did the first. Continue adding conditions until you are satisfied with the rule.
4 Follow the instructions to set the rule actions as described in the Actions section of
Setting Inbound Rules for Users (on page 175). When you are finished creating the rule,
click Add to save your changes.
Vacation Message
How to get here
Note: Vacation Message can handle all foreign characters for display in the Web Admin.
You can create a vacation message for each e-mail user account. When the vacation message is enabled, IMail Server sends an automated vacation message to each email address the user receives mail from. The vacation message is stored in the vacation.ima file in the user's IMail
Server home directory.
Note: Vacation Message can also be enabled and disabled within the user's Web Client.
Domain Name (OHN). The current domain name used to address mail to the users on the mail domain is displayed.
User ID. Displays the selected user ID (user name) for the e-mail account.
Enable Vacation. Check box to enable or disable the Vacation Message text box. Disabling the vacation message will clear the "vacation snt" file.
Vacation Message. Text box when enabled, allows a vacation message to respond to all new mail messages received. The vacation response will only be sent once to each unique e-mail address.
Save. Click this button to save your settings.
To create a vacation message:
1 Select Enable Vacation.
2 In the Vacation Message text box, enter the reply message you want to send while the user is away. The vacation message is sent one time to each e-mail address from whom the recipient receives mail. IMail Server saves the message sender's e-mail address in a file (vacation.snt). This file provides the user with a list of users that sent e-mail while away and also keeps track of the senders so the vacation message is only sent one time to each sender.
179
IMail v12 Administrator Help
3 Click Save.
Viewing Vacation Message Recipients
How to get here
The Vacation Recipients page provides a list of the e-mail addresses for those who have been sent a vacation message for the selected user. The addresses are tracked and listed under the
Email Addresses list. The messages are tracked to prevent the vacation message from being sent multiple times to the same recipient.
Clear all. Click to clear the "vacation.snt file for those who have been sent a vacation message.
Related Topics
Vacation Message for IMail User (on page 72)
Auto Responder
How to get here
Note: Previously called Information Manager, was changed to match the Web Client title of
Auto Responder for clarity.
The Auto Responder can automatically handle routine e-mail inquiries for common information about your company. For example, you might want to respond to general inquiries with an acknowledgment that the inquiry was received plus a promise to follow up.
Using the Auto Responder for a Single Automated Response
To use the Auto Responder, you first need to set up a special user account whose user ID is
Info. This mail account does not belong to a specific user, but accepts mail addressed to
. When someone sends mail to the Info account, she receives a prepared response such as:
"This is an automated response from General Sales. You will receive a personal response by e-mail from one of our staff within two business days."
Subdividing the Auto Responder Account
You can subdivide an Auto Responder account into more specific sub-areas that can automatically send more detailed information in response to inquiries.
180
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Example:
You can have an automated response that lists products, prices, and ordering information; another automated response that describes the classes you offer the general public; and a third automated response that sends out company news.
To divide the Auto Responder account into more specialized responses, you create sub-areas of account (such as Sales, Classes, or News) from which the sender can obtain more specific information. Then, when someone sends mail to the [email protected] account, IMail Server returns a prepared response that describes the Auto Responder account sub-areas such as:
"Thank you for contacting Ipswitch. For information about our products, please send email to
[email protected]. For information about our classes, send mail to
[email protected]. For the latest Ipswitch news, send email to
The sender could then send a message to [email protected] and receive a special message related to sales or the sender could send a message to [email protected] and receive a message about classes.
There is no limit to the number of sub-areas you can use with the Auto Responder. Sub-areas take up no disk space since messages addressed to them merely activate an automated response. In other words, mail addressed to sub-areas is not stored anywhere, unless you specify that it be saved.
Related Topics
Creating an Auto Responder Account (on page 181)
Creating Auto Responses to Sub-Mailboxes (on page 182)
Viewing Auto Responder Message Recipients (on page 183)
Auto Responder Variables (on page 183)
Sending Mail to All Users Using Mailall.exe (on page 165)
Add / Edit Auto Responder Account
How to get here
Before you define the automated response on the Auto Responder page, you need to first create an Auto Responder account.
To create an Auto Responder account:
1 Select a domain (on page 129) and user to associate the Auto Responder settings with.
2 On the User Auto Responder page, click Add or click link to Edit.
3 In the Mailbox text box, enter a mailbox (inbox, sent, or joe).
4 Check Enable Auto Responder.
181
IMail v12 Administrator Help
5 In the Forwarding Address text box, enter the e-mail address you want e-mail inquiries forwarded to after the automatic response is sent. Leave blank if forwarding is not required, this will leave all requests in the associated mailboxes.
Should you want the message to be deleted without any forwarding. Enter as follows:
Important: Virtual e-mail domains without IP addresses must enter the full address, as it will authenticate against the primary domain with the full domain address.
6 In the Auto Response Message box, enter the response message to send to mail addressed to this account. The first 80 characters entered in the Message box are used as the subject of the message, and are displayed in the subject field.
7 When mail is sent to an Auto Responder account, the sender’s mail address is listed in a file with the extension .snt in the user's File Directory. To view this file, click the
Recipients List link next to the Enable Auto Responder check box. of the user's account. If you want to set up the same Auto Responder information for multiple accounts, copy the .inf file from one account directory to the directories of other accounts.
Related Topic
Creating Responses for Sub-Mailboxes (on page 182)
Auto Responder Variables (on page 183)
Viewing Auto Responder Message Recipients (on page 183)
Add Auto Responder Sub-Mailbox Responses
How to get here
After creating an Auto Responder account, sub-mailbox folders can be created to define different automated responses as described in the automated response from the "main" response.
To create responses using sub-mailboxes:
1 Select the user to associate the sub-mailboxes with in Auto Responder.
2 On the User Auto Responder page, click Add.
3 In the Sub- area text box, enter a folder name ( e.g. prod1
).
Note: Enter only the sub-mailbox name, the sub-mail box will not work if the userid-submailbox ( e.g. "info-prod1") is used.
4 Click Enable Auto Responder. This will enable access to the other text boxes.
182
IMail v12 Administrator Help
In the Forwarding Address text box, enter the e-mail address you want e-mail inquiries forwarded to after the automatic response is sent. Leave blank if forwarding is not required, this will leave all requests in the associated mailboxes. Should you want the message to be deleted without any forwarding. Enter as follows:
Important: Virtual e-mail domains without IP addresses must enter the full address, as it will authenticate against the primary domain with the full domain address.
5 In the Auto Response Message box, enter the appropriate response message for the sub-mailbox on this account. The first 80 characters entered in the Message box are used as the subject of the message, and are displayed in the subject field.
6 When mail is sent to an Auto Responder account, the sender’s mail address is listed in a file with the extension .snt in the user's File Directory. To view this file, click the
Recipients List link next to the Enable Auto Responder check box. the user's account. If you want to set up the same Auto Response information for multiple accounts, copy the .inf file from one account directory to the directories of other accounts.
Viewing Auto Responder Message Recipients
How to get here
Use the Auto Responder Message Recipients page to view all the e-mail addresses that have been sent an automated response message.
The Auto Responder message is sent to each e-mail address that the recipient receives mail from. IMail Server saves the message sender's e-mail address in a file with the
".snt" extension in the account’s directory. This file provides the user with a list of users that received the automated response message.
Auto Responder Variables
The Auto-response message can include parts of the sender's message.
Note: Variables in the subject of your auto-response message cannot be substituted. The first line of the auto-response text is also the subject of auto-response message.
Variables are as follows:
%s "Subject" of the infobot file (first line)
%t Include "To:" from the header of the sender's message
183
IMail v12 Administrator Help
%m
%h
%b
Include sender's message
Include header of the sender's message
Include body of the sender's message
Note: If delivery rules are used to filter the body of messages, with usage of %m or %b in the auto-response message could create a mail loop.
DomainKeys / DKIM
How to get here
Domain Signing Options (Selectors) (on page 185)
DomainKeys/DKIM Verification Settings (on page 193)
Add Selector Wizard (on page 200)
DomainKeys and DomainKeys Identified Mail (DKIM) are e-mail authentication methodologies designed to verify digitally signed e-mail on a per-domain basis. Both methods were designed for protection of e-mail identity and have assisted in the control of
"spam" and "phishing". DomainKeys and DKIM use asymmetric key cryptography to sign messages with a private key and use DNS to distribute the public key for signature verification.
DomainKeys (RFC4870 (http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc4870)) is a precursor to DKIM (RFC4871
(http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc4871)), though both are currently in use, DomainKeys is considered deprecated by DKIM.
See the following PDF for help in Getting Started with DomainKeys / DKIM.
DomainKeys
DomainKeys is a domain-level e-mail authentication standard that uses public/private key encryption and DNS to prove the legitimacy and contents of an e-mail message, and also verifies that the domain used in the "from" or "sender" header of a message has not been modified while in transit.
Public Key / Private Key
A public key/private key-pair is created for the sending domain. The private key is stored securely on the mail server and is used to sign all outgoing messages. The public key is stored and published in DNS as a TXT record of the domain.
When an e-mail is sent, the mail server will use the private key to digitally sign it, which is part of the message header. When the e-mail message is received, the DomainKeys signature can be verified against the public key on the domain's DNS.
184
IMail v12 Administrator Help
For detail specifications on DomainKeys see RFC4870 (http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc4870).
DKIM
DKIM is very similar in functionality to DomainKeys, with an enhanced standard that provides more flexibility and security. Although DKIM does not filter or identify spam, widespread use of DKIM can prevent spammers from forging the source address of their messages. If spammers are forced to show a correct source domain, then the other spam filtering techniques will work more effectively.
Some of the improvements provided by DKIM are as follows:
Multiple hashing algorithms (as opposed to just one available with DomainKeys).
Capability for one DNS text record to handle multiple domains.
Improved option for canonicalization that validates header and body separately.
Capability to delegate signing to third parties.
Capability to self-sign additional headers.
More advanced options for customization using DKIM. (e.g. Hash Algorithms, Body
Settings, Expiration)
For detail specifications on DKIM see RFC4871 (http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc4871).
Related Topics
System Signing Options (Selectors) (on page 86)
Domain Selector List (Signatures)
How to get here
Selectors allow a domain to have one DomainKeys selector and one DKIM selector enabled at one time. Multiple selectors are allowed in a domain to give the IMail Administrator capability to easily change from one public-key in DNS to another.
Important: Only one DomainKey selector and one DKIM selector can be enabled at one
time for a domain. Example: A DKIM selector "selector1" is enabled for domain1.com. The
IMail Administrator decides to enable "selector2" for domain1.com. "selector1" will automatically be disabled for domain1.com.
Important: After updating or creating a selector be sure to restart your SMTP and Queue
Manager services.
185
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Domain Signatures (Selector)
Search Box. Typing will automatically begin narrowing the list. The search assumes a wildcard automatically after the characters entered.
Note: Column Titles when clicked will sort the list for the current session only. Refreshing the page will reset the original sort.
Default Selector. Hyperlink that allows the IMail Administrator to designate the default selector to be used for signing, should there be one selector set on a domain.
Note: Only one DomainKeys selector and one DKIM selector can be set as default at one time.
Selector List
Name. Name used to identify selector.
DNS Text Record. Name used to identify the selector in DNS. This text name allows any text string that is a legal DNS domain name.
Example: DNS Text Record set to MyDNSName will be named
"MyDNSName_domainkey.domainname.com"
Status. Selector status indicating active and on, or off.
Type. E-mail authentication type to verify the DNS domain of an E-mail sender and the message integrity.
DomainKeys. DomainKeys uses the Message Algorithm as the specified canonicalization method.
DKIM. (DomainKeys Identified Mail) is an enhanced protocol of DomainKeys, using public-key cryptography and key server technology to verify the source and contents of e-mail. DKIM uses the Header and Body Algorithm as the specified canonicalization method.
Enabled. Displays the selectors that are active for the selected domain. Click to
"activate / de-activate" the selector domain status.
Note: Only one DomainKey and one DKIM selector can be enabled per domain.
Add New (on page 187). Click to add a new selector. This will give the following two options
Wizard. Run this option for Administrators that are new to DomainKeys.
Advanced (on page 187). Click this option for Administrators that are familiar with all
DomainKey options.
Add Existing (on page 192). Click to add a System Selector to the domain.
186
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Remove. Click this after selecting item(s) from the list to remove from the Domain Selector
List.
Note: This will not delete from the System Selector List.
Related Topics
System Signing Options (Selectors) (on page 86)
Domain Selector Add / Edit (on page 187)
Domain Selector Add / Edit
How to get here
Important: After updating or creating a selector be sure to restart your SMTP and Queue
Manager services.
Selector Signing Properties
Type.
DomainKeys. Uses Message Algorithm for Preparation Signing.
DKIM. Uses Header and Body Algorithm for Preparation Signing.
Name. Value used to identify the selector in the IMail Administrator.
DNS Text Record. Name that will associate the selector in DNS. This text name allows any text string that is a legal DNS domain name.
Example: DNS Text Record set to MyDNSName will be named
"MyDNSName_domainkey.domainname.com"
Status. (On by default) Click "Off" to disable the selector.
Description. Free format text box limited to 1024 characters.
Header Algorithm (DKIM only). DKIM uses both the Header and Body Algorithm as the specified canonicalization method.
Simple. This algorithm is designed to be the least tolerant. Each header is unfolded per RFC2822 and is converted to lowercase.
Relaxed. (Set by default) This algorithm tolerates common modifications such as white-space replacement and header line re-wrapping.
Body Algorithm (DKIM only).
Simple. This algorithm is designed to be the least tolerant.
Relaxed. (Set by default) This algorithm tolerates common modifications such as white-space replacement and header line re-wrapping.
187
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Message Algorithm (DomainKeys only). DomainKeys uses the Message Algorithm as the specified canonicalization method.
Simple. Allows toleration of almost no modification.
No Folding Whitespace (nofws). (Set by Default) Allows common modifications such as white-space replacement and header line re-wrapping.
Public Key. The public key which is automatically generated is what must be stored and published in DNS as a TXT record of the associated domain.
Tip: Remember to check for the "p=" in front of the key
Advanced Properties
DomainKeys and DKIM Option
Private Key. Text box displaying text string of Private Key. The private key is stored securely on the mail server and is used to sign all outgoing messages.
Generate New Key. (Default is 1024 Kb) Clicking this button will generate a new
Private Key, with a pop-up option for the private key length (512, 768, 1024, 1536,
2048).
DKIM Advanced Options Only
Hash Algorithm. SHA (Secure Hash Algorithm) hash functions are a set of cryptographic hash functions designed by the NSA and published by the NIST as a US Federal Information
Processing Standard.
SHA-256. (Set by default) Is an improved hash function in the SHA-2 family, computed with 32-bit words.
SHA-1. The best established of the existing SHA hash functions, and is employed in several widely used security applications and protocols.
Body Settings. Options for body length limits when signing.
Sign Entire Body. (Set by default)
Sign Entire Body and Include Length Tag. Including the length tag allows message trailers to be better tolerated after the message is sent.
Specify Max Body Length for Signing. Textbox for max amount of bytes to sign.
Expiration. When both the Timestamp and Expiration Tag are set, then a validation check will be done to verify that the Expiration Tag is greater than the Timestamp when the signature is verified.
Include Timestamp. (Set by Default) This tag tells the verifying server when the signature was generated.
Include Expiration Tag. (Optional) When used, this tag tells the verifying server to ignore this signature after the time specified.
188
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Time in Which to Expire. Time is counted by minutes, hours or days. The expiration time will be calculated based on the time when the signature is generated.
Authoritative Domain.
Use the Domain's Auth Name. (Set by default) This option requires a DNS text record for each domain signature selector.
Use the Sending User's Domain Name. This option requires a DNS text record for each domain signature selector.
Use the Following Auth Name. (Set by default for DKIM Wizard) This option allows the administrator to create one DNS text record to handle many domains.
Assigning Domains
Domains can easily be assigned to a selector, allowing the domain to use as a signature.
Available Domains not Assigned
The left box displays all available domains that do not have the selector assigned.
Domain Name. Domain name that currently does not have the current selector assigned.
(Add Domain to Selector). Select an available domain and click to add to the current selector.
(Remove Domain from Selector). Select a domain from the domains currently assigned and click to remove the current selector.
(Add All Domains to Selector). Click to add all available domains to the current selector.
(Remove All Domains From Selector). Click to remove all domains from the current selector.
Assigned Domains for Current Selector
Domain Name. Domain name that has the current selected assigned.
Enabled. Check this box to activate and allow the domain to use the selector.
Enable All. Click this button to activate all the assigned selectors.
Disable All. Click this button to deactivate all the assigned selectors. The selector will be assigned to all the domains, but the selector will be disabled for use as a domain signature.
Test DNS Setup. Click this button to test the current selector against your current DNS setup.
The DNS Test button will display "successful" for each domain. A link to assist with DNS problems will display for domains that "failed".
See the following KB for DNS help -
http://kb.imailserver.com/cgi-bin/imail.cfg/php/enduser/std_adp.php?p_faqid=727
(http://kb.imailserver.com/cgi-bin/imail.cfg/php/enduser/std_adp.php?p_faqid=727)
189
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Headers List
Sign All Headers. (Not set by default) See all Headers.
Sign All Headers when setting Prevent Adding for a signature will be unchecked, unless the header list is specified otherwise.
Warning: Disabling the default set of headers to be signed opens the possibility of header modifications and spoofing depending on the headers that are being signed.
DomainKeys / DKIM Headers
By default (RFC minimum recommendation) the following headers are set for signing:
CC
Content-Description
Content-ID
Content-Transfer-Encoding
Content-Type, Date
From, In-Reply-To
List-Archive
List-Help
List-ID
List-Owner
List-Post
List-Subscribe
List-Unsubscribe
Message-ID
MIME-Version
References
Reply-To
Resent-CC
Resent-Date
Resent-From
Resent-Message-ID
Resent-Sender
Resent-To
Sender, Subject
To
190
IMail v12 Administrator Help
TIP: The default headers are recommended as the minimum headers necessary for maintaining secure header signing.
DomainKeys Header List
Name. Header name selected to be signed.
DKIM Header List
Name. Header name selected to be signed.
Maximum Number To Sign. (Default set to 1) Maximum number of same headers allowed to be signed.
Sign All. (True by Default) Signatures will sign all headers with the same headers for the domain. check box is set.
Prevent Adding. (False by Default) A signature will not tolerate headers with the same header name to be added.
Add Header. Click the Add button to create a custom header or select a header from the drop down for a list of all headers.
Edit Header. (DKIM functionality only) Select a header and click the Edit button to update the header options.
Delete Header. Select a header and click the Delete button to remove.
Note: To maintain a secure header signing, it is not recommended to remove a default header.
Add. Click Add to for a new Header.
Edit. Select a Header and click Edit to update.
Delete. Select a Header then click Delete to remove.
Related Topics
About DomainKeys / DKIM (on page 85)
System Selector List (Signatures) (on page 86)
Domain Selector List (Signatures) (on page 185)
191
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Existing System Selectors
How to get here
Existing System Signing Options (Selectors) will display all the current System Selectors that exist. This list can also be viewable in the IMail Administration at System > DomainKeys /
DKIM.
Important: After updating or creating a selector be sure to restart your SMTP and Queue
Manager services.
Search Box. Typing will automatically begin narrowing the list. The search assumes a wildcard automatically after the characters entered.
Note: Column Titles when clicked will sort the list for the current session only. Refreshing the page will reset the original sort.
Selector List
Name. Name used to identify selector.
DNS Text Record. Name used to identify the selector in DNS. This text name allows any text string that is a legal DNS domain name.
Example: DNS Text Record set to MyDNSName will be named
"MyDNSName_domainkey.domainname.com"
Domains. Domain names that are assigned to selector.
Type. E-mail authentication type to verify the DNS domain of an E-mail sender and the message integrity.
DomainKeys. DomainKeys uses the Message Algorithm as the specified canonicalization method.
DKIM. (DomainKeys Identified Mail) is an enhanced protocol of DomainKeys, using public-key cryptography and key server technology to verify the source and contents of e-mail. DKIM uses the Header and Body Algorithm as the specified canonicalization method.
Add. Select and click Add to copy the existing system selector to the domain.
Cancel. Click Cancel to exit without adding.
Related Topics
About DomainKeys / DKIM (on page 85)
192
IMail v12 Administrator Help
System Signing Options (Selectors) (on page 86)
Domain Selector List (Signatures) (on page 185)
DomainKeys / DKIM Verification Settings
How to get here
The DomainKeys Verification Settings page provides administrators increased capability to stop incoming e-mail identified as spam by signature errors. Use the DomainKeys Verification settings to configure how to process e-mail that is identified as spoofed e-mail. Settings on the DomainKeys Verification Settings page apply to the selected domain.
Important: DomainKeys / DKIM Signature Verification will not be processed when an
address exists in the "Relay Mail for Addresses (on page 413)".
Default actions are specified for each message. You can, however, change the defaults by clicking the hyperlink under Verification Category. A pop-up appears, with the options to change the Action To Be Taken.
Important: After updating verification settings be sure to restart your SMTP and Queue
Manager services.
Enable DKIM. Select this check box to enable the DKIM Verification Settings for the current host.
Enable DomainKeys. Select this check box to enable DomainKeys Verification for the current host.
Total Number of Signatures to Check Per Message. Default set to 5. This is a maximum number of signatures that will be checked and validated for a message. Examples (on
Verification Settings
Verification Category. This lists all possible verification categories for this domain.
Invalid Signature (on page 195)
DNS Unreachable (on page 196)
Invalid DNS Selector (on page 196)
Verification Failed (on page 197)
193
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Action to be taken. This column lists the action chosen for each corresponding query result.
Target. This column lists the mailbox or e-mail address for a Move to or Forward to action, respectively.
Prefix Subject. (Yes/No) This column lists whether or not the message will have a
DomainKeys Result prefix added to the message.
With. This column lists the actual prefix, if chosen, for the corresponding query result.
Save. Click the button to save your changes.
Related Topics
About DomainKeys / DKIM (on page 85)
Domain Selector List (Signatures) (on page 185)
System Signing Options (Selectors) (on page 86)
DomainKey Result - No Signature
The DomainKeys Verification Category of No Signature page allows you to choose an action when the DomainKeys Verification filter is enabled.
This action activates when the message does not have a signature (Selector).
Important: After updating verification settings be sure to restart your SMTP and Queue
Manager services.
The action to be taken when the query result is met
Action. Select one of the following actions:
None. No action is performed.
Delete Message. Message is deleted immediately after being accepted. If Archiving is enabled, message will archive.
Forward to Address. Forwards the message to a specified e-mail address. Enter an e-mail address in the text box to the right of this option.
Insert X- Header (default). Inserts an X-Header into the message indicating that the message was identified for the DomainKeys filter.
Move to Mailbox. Moves the message to the user’s mailbox specified in the text box to the right of this option. If the mailbox does not exist, it is created.
Reject Connection. Message is rejected at the MAIL FROM command and the sending mail server is returned a 550 error message.
194
IMail v12 Administrator Help
until you know that the DomainKeys options are setup to best suit your filtering requirements.
Prefix subject with. If you want to add a custom prefix subject to messages that are identified as DomainKeys failure, select the Prefix subject with check box (cleared by
default). The default subject prefix (on page 199) is entered in the text box to the right and is
based on the DomainKeys failure. You can also enter a custom message in this box.
DomainKey Result - Invalid Signature
The DomainKeys Verification Category of Invalid Signature page allows you to choose an action when the DomainKeys Verification filter is enabled.
This action activates when the message has an invalid signature (Selector).
Important: After updating verification settings be sure to restart your SMTP and Queue
Manager services.
The action to be taken when the query result is met
Action. Select one of the following actions:
None. No action is performed.
Delete Message. Message is deleted immediately after being accepted. If Archiving is enabled, message will archive.
Forward to Address. Forwards the message to a specified e-mail address. Enter an e-mail address in the text box to the right of this option.
Insert X- Header (default). Inserts an X-Header into the message indicating that the message was identified for the DomainKeys filter.
Move to Mailbox. Moves the message to the user’s mailbox specified in the text box to the right of this option. If the mailbox does not exist, it is created.
Reject Connection. Message is rejected at the MAIL FROM command and the sending mail server is returned a 550 error message. until you know that the DomainKeys options are setup to best suit your filtering requirements.
Prefix subject with. If you want to add a custom prefix subject to messages that are identified as DomainKeys failure, select the Prefix subject with check box (cleared by
default). The default subject prefix (on page 199) is entered in the text box to the right and is
based on the DomainKeys failure. You can also enter a custom message in this box.
195
IMail v12 Administrator Help
DomainKeys Result - DNS Unreachable
The DomainKeys Verification Category of DNS Unreachable page allows you to choose an action when the DomainKeys Verification filter is enabled.
This action activates when the message has an unreachable DNS.
Important: After updating verification settings be sure to restart your SMTP and Queue
Manager services.
The action to be taken when the query result is met
Action. Select one of the following actions:
None. No action is performed.
Delete Message. Message is deleted immediately after being accepted. If Archiving is enabled, message will archive.
Forward to Address. Forwards the message to a specified e-mail address. Enter an e-mail address in the text box to the right of this option.
Insert X- Header (default). Inserts an X-Header into the message indicating that the message was identified for the DomainKeys filter.
Move to Mailbox. Moves the message to the user’s mailbox specified in the text box to the right of this option. If the mailbox does not exist, it is created.
Reject Connection. Message is rejected at the MAIL FROM command and the sending mail server is returned a 550 error message. until you know that the DomainKeys options are setup to best suit your filtering requirements.
Prefix subject with. If you want to add a custom prefix subject to messages that are identified as DomainKeys failure, select the Prefix subject with check box (cleared by
default). The default subject prefix (on page 199) is entered in the text box to the right and is
based on the DomainKeys failure. You can also enter a custom message in this box.
DomainKey Result - Invalid DNS Selector
The DomainKeys Verification Category of Invalid DNS Selector page allows you to choose an action when the DomainKeys Verification filter is enabled.
This action activates when the message has an invalid DNS selector.
196
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Important: After updating verification settings be sure to restart your SMTP and Queue
Manager services.
The action to be taken when the query result is met
Action. Select one of the following actions:
None. No action is performed.
Delete Message. Message is deleted immediately after being accepted. If Archiving is enabled, message will archive.
Forward to Address. Forwards the message to a specified e-mail address. Enter an e-mail address in the text box to the right of this option.
Insert X- Header (default). Inserts an X-Header into the message indicating that the message was identified for the DomainKeys filter.
Move to Mailbox. Moves the message to the user’s mailbox specified in the text box to the right of this option. If the mailbox does not exist, it is created.
Reject Connection. Message is rejected at the MAIL FROM command and the sending mail server is returned a 550 error message. until you know that the DomainKeys options are setup to best suit your filtering requirements.
Prefix subject with. If you want to add a custom prefix subject to messages that are identified as DomainKeys failure, select the Prefix subject with check box (cleared by
default). The default subject prefix (on page 199) is entered in the text box to the right and is
based on the DomainKeys failure. You can also enter a custom message in this box.
DomainKey Result - Verification Failed
The DomainKeys Verification Category of Verification Failed page allows you to choose an action when the DomainKeys Verification filter is enabled.
This action activates when the message has a failed verification.
Important: After updating verification settings be sure to restart your SMTP and Queue
Manager services.
The action to be taken when the query result is met
Action. Select one of the following actions:
197
IMail v12 Administrator Help
None. No action is performed.
Delete Message. Message is deleted immediately after being accepted. If Archiving is enabled, message will archive.
Forward to Address. Forwards the message to a specified e-mail address. Enter an e-mail address in the text box to the right of this option.
Insert X- Header (default). Inserts an X-Header into the message indicating that the message was identified for the DomainKeys filter.
Move to Mailbox. Moves the message to the user’s mailbox specified in the text box to the right of this option. If the mailbox does not exist, it is created.
Reject Connection. Message is rejected at the MAIL FROM command and the sending mail server is returned a 550 error message. until you know that the DomainKeys options are setup to best suit your filtering requirements.
Prefix subject with. If you want to add a custom prefix subject to messages that are identified as DomainKeys failure, select the Prefix subject with check box (cleared by
default). The default subject prefix (on page 199) is entered in the text box to the right and is
based on the DomainKeys failure. You can also enter a custom message in this box.
DomainKey Result - Pass
The DomainKeys Verification Category of Pass page allows you to choose an action when the DomainKeys Verification filter is enabled.
This action activates when the message is passed.
Important: After updating verification settings be sure to restart your SMTP and Queue
Manager services.
The action to be taken when the query result is met
Action. Select one of the following actions:
None. No action is performed.
Delete Message. Message is deleted immediately after being accepted. If Archiving is enabled, message will archive.
Forward to Address. Forwards the message to a specified e-mail address. Enter an e-mail address in the text box to the right of this option.
Insert X- Header (default). Inserts an X-Header into the message indicating that the message was identified for the DomainKeys filter.
198
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Move to Mailbox. Moves the message to the user’s mailbox specified in the text box to the right of this option. If the mailbox does not exist, it is created.
Reject Connection. Message is rejected at the MAIL FROM command and the sending mail server is returned a 550 error message. until you know that the DomainKeys options are setup to best suit your filtering requirements.
Prefix subject with. If you want to add a custom prefix subject to messages that are identified as DomainKeys failure, select the Prefix subject with check box (cleared by
default). The default subject prefix (on page 199) is entered in the text box to the right and is
based on the DomainKeys failure. You can also enter a custom message in this box.
DomainKeys Default Subject Values
A prefix value, based on the DomainKeys / DKIM return code, is added to the message. The default values are when DomainKeys / DKIM Verification checkbox is enabled:
No Signature. Inserts X-Header with [X-IMail-DomainKeys-Fail] in subject.
Invalid Signature. Inserts X-Header with [X-IMail-DomainKeys-Softfail] in subject.
DNS Unreachable. Inserts X-Header with [X-IMail-DomainKeys-Error] in subject.
Invalid DNS Selector. By default no action taken.
Verification Failed. By default no action taken.
None. By default no action taken.
Pass. By default no action taken.
This subject field is also user configurable for each possible return code.
Example - Total Number Signatures / Message
An incoming message with 5 signatures:
Signature 1: DomainKeys Signature
Signature 2: DKIM Signature
Signature 3: DKIM Signature
Signature 4: DomainKeys Signature
Signature 5: DKIM Signature
Example 1:
Total Number of Signatures set to "5" and only DKIM enabled.
199
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Signature 2, 3 & 5 will be checked. Signature 1 & 4 will be ignored.
Example 2:
Total Number of Signatures set to "2" and only DomainKeys enabled.
Signature 1 & 4 will be checked. Signature 2, 3 & 5 will be ignored.
Example 3:
Total Number of Signatures set to "2" and both DomainKeys and DKIM are enabled.
Signature 1 & 2 will be checked. Signature 3, 4 & 5 will be ignored.
Example 4:
Total Number of Signatures set to "4" and both DomainKeys and DKIM are enabled.
Signature 1, 2, 3 & 4 will be checked. Signature 5 will be ignored.
Example 5:
Total Number of Signatures set to "5" and only DKIM enabled.
Signature 2, 3 & 5 will be checked. Signature 1 & 4 will be ignored.
DomainKeys / DKIM Wizard
How to get here
The DomainKeys / DKIM Wizard was designed to allow and IMail Administrator to quickly setup the necessary items for DomainKeys / DKIM.
Step 1
DomainKeys or DKIM
DomainKeys and DKIM allow messages to be cryptographically signed, which allows receiving servers to verify the source and contents of messages. Both specifications are similar, however, DKIM handles e-mail routing better than DomainKeys and is considered to be the preferred method of signing messages.
Choose the selector type:
DomainKeys. Uses Message Algorithm for Preparation Signing.
DKIM. Uses Header and Body Algorithm for Preparation Signing.
Requires a selector Name to allow identification within the IMail Administration.
Enter the DNS Text Record that will associate the selector in DNS. This text name allows any text string that is a legal DNS domain name.
Example: DNS Text Record set to MyDNSName will be named
"MyDNSName_domainkey.domainname.com"
Description is optional and is limited to 1024 characters.
Step 2
200
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Choosing your Algorithm:
The simple and relaxed header and body algorithms prepare the e-mail before signing occurs. This is known as canonicalization and does not affect the message that is actually sent in any way. These algorithms attempt to handle cases where normal transformations that occur to a message as it is sent will cause a signature to be verified incorrectly. The 'simple'
Canonicalization algorithm tolerates almost no modification of the message, while the
'relaxed' canonicalization algorithm allows some typical transformations to occur without breaking the signature (such as modifying whitespace and folding whitespace in the message and its headers). The relaxed canonicalization algorithm is recommended unless it is critical that a message not be modified in any way during transit to a receiving mail server.
Header Algorithm (DKIM only). DKIM uses both the Header and Body Algorithm as the specified canonicalization method.
Simple. This algorithm is designed to be the least tolerant. Each header is unfolded per RFC2822 and is converted to lowercase.
Relaxed. (Set by default) This algorithm tolerates common modifications such as white-space replacement and header line re-wrapping.
Body Algorithm (DKIM only).
Simple. This algorithm is designed to be the least tolerant.
Relaxed. (Set by default) This algorithm tolerates common modifications such as white-space replacement and header line re-wrapping.
Message Algorithm (DomainKeys only). DomainKeys uses the Message Algorithm as the specified canonicalization method.
Simple. Allows toleration of almost no modification.
No Folding Whitespace (nofws). (Set by Default) Allows common modifications such as white-space replacement and header line re-wrapping.
Step 3
Assigning Domains
Please choose which domains are allowed to use this selector for signing. Domains added to the list on the right are able to use this selector for its users.
By default, when run at the domain level, only the selected domain be selected, otherwise it will be up to the IMail Administrator to select which domains will be assigned.
This step gives you the capability to also add any existing domains to the selector.
Any domains that are in the "Available Domains" box can be assigned the new selector being created.
Note: The selector will not be enabled until the DNS Test is valid. Should the DNS Test fail, all domains set for this selector will be disabled. It will be up to the IMail Administrator to enable the selectors after the DNS has been corrected.
Step 4 (DKIM Selectors Only)
201
IMail v12 Administrator Help
One or Multiple DNS Text Records
This step will only appear when creating a DKIM selector and multiple domains have been assigned to the selector. DKIM has the capability to have all domains point to one specified domain for the DNS record. This is the simplest and recommended way of setting up DKIM. If you wish, however, you can choose to enter a DNS record for every domain by selecting the second option in the drop down list.
By default this feature is selected. Should you want to create a DNS record for each domain, select the second option "All domains use their own DNS records".
Note: DomainKeys is not as flexible as DKIM and requires a DNS text record for each domain, per the RFC.
Step 5
Private Key and DNS Text Record
This page has generated a private key that must be inserted into the DNS text record that is identified under the text box.
Example:
DnsTextRecord_domainkey.domain.name.com
Generate a matching DNS text record for each item listed on the wizard page.
If you do not have access to your DNS records, contact your DNS administrator to add these records. Please note, that it is recommended that you continue to the next screen and save this selector if the process of adding the DNS records will take more than a few minutes.
Tip: Remember to check for the "p=" in front of the key
Step 6
DNS Test and Selector Status
At this point the DNS text record must exist to be tested for validity. If the DNS record has not yet been created, it is recommended to click "Done" to save the selector.
Warning: Click "Done" now, as the IMail Server will eventually time out and your selector will be lost.
Also, if the DNS text record has not been created, it is recommended to disable the selector.
After the DNS text record has been created, it can be tested by editing the selector.
The DNS Test button is located under the Domains list using the new selector.
The DNS Test button will display "successful" for each domain. A link to assist with
DNS problems will display for domains that "failed".
202
IMail v12 Administrator Help
See the following KB for DNS help -
http://kb.imailserver.com/cgi-bin/imail.cfg/php/enduser/std_adp.php?p_faqid=72
(http://kb.imailserver.com/cgi-bin/imail.cfg/php/enduser/std_adp.php?p_faqid=727)
Important: After creating a selector be sure to restart your SMTP and Queue Manager
services.
Related Topics
About DomainKeys / DKIM (on page 85)
Domain Selector List (Signatures) (on page 185)
System Signing Options (Selectors) (on page 86)
Domain Trailer
How to get here
The Domain Trailer page allows the System Administrator to maintain separate trailer messages at the domain level. This will allow all outgoing messages to append a domain trailer message to outgoing message for a specific domain (This does not include locally sent messages within the server). By default when a domain is created it will be set to use the
System Trailer.
Tip: To access the System trailer, see System > System Trailer (on page 78).
Two text files will be created, one for plain text, and one for html. The text file names are
"DomainTrailer.txt"
and
"DomainTrailer.html"
located in the
"\IMail\DomainName"
directory.
Note: Messages sent locally within the IMail Server do NOT include the trailer.
Depending on the type message being sent, the IMail Server will append the trailer as follows:
A "Plain Text" message will append the
"DomainTrailer.txt"
text file.
An HTML message will append the
"DomainTrailer.html"
text file.
Domain: Shows the current selected domain. From the drop down you can pick any of the domains available to this administrative user account.
203
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Use. By default to Use System Trailer.
System Trailer. This option will use the system trailer for the specified domain.
Domain Trailer. This option will enable the textboxes to allow a unique trailer message for the specified domain.
No Trailer. This option will turn off trailer messages for specified domain only.
Encoding. Set by default to the Domain User Default Message Encoding. Message encoding used for sending message when the Domain Trailer is set.
Unicode (UTF-8). Choose this character set for multi-language mail. In IMail, this includes English, Chinese Simplified, Chinese Traditional, French, German, Italian,
Japanese, or Spanish.
English (US-ASCII). For composing e-mail for English-speaking readers, based on the
English alphabet.
Western European (ISO-8859-15). For composing e-mail in French, Italian, German, or Spanish.
Chinese Traditional (BIG5). For composing e-mail in traditional Chinese.
Chinese Simplified (GB2312). For composing e-mail in simplified Chinese.
Japanese (ISO-2022-JP). For composing e-mail in Japanese.
HTML Domain Trailer
Note: The online HTML WYSIWYG editor is the same editor used in the web client when creating new messages.
HTML Trailer Text. Displays the trailer message that will be appended to every HTML outgoing message that is not locally sent within the server.
Plain Text Domain Trailer
Text. Displays the trailer message that will be appended to every
"Plain Text" outgoing message that is not locally sent within the server.
Save. Click to save your settings.
Related Topics
TML Online Editor Help (on page 79)
204
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Commtouch Zero-Hour Virus Protection
How to get here
Server-side polymorphic malware has become impossible for traditional AV engines to block, since there are typically thousands of distinct variants, and malware distributors often release hundreds of new variants per hour.
Commtouch® Zero-Hour Virus Outbreak Protection provides a complementary shield to conventional AV technology, protecting in the earliest moments of malware outbreaks, and right through as each new variant emerges.
Signature-less
Signature-less protection is an essential complement to traditional AV technologies, security experts agree. By proactively scanning the Internet and identifying massive virus outbreaks as soon as they emerge, Commtouch's Zero-Hour Solution provides just that: proactive virus blocking that is effective and signature-independent.
Immediate
Commtouch provides proactive virus detection to close the early-hour vulnerability gap during which millions of users are infected. Commtouch's proactive virus detection capabilities ensure users' protection hours before signatures are released.
"Aimed at detecting mass outbreak indicators, Zero-Hour is differentiated from other proactive virus detection technologies by several advantages. First and foremost is the immediate and accurate detection of new outbreaks" - Dan Yachin, IDC.
Proven
Robust and inherently immune to emerging foiling attempts, Commtouch has a proven record of being the first and highest performing among proactive virus control solutions.
Commtouch's Zero-Hour Virus Outbreak Protection Solutions are based on RPD technology, which has a track record of protecting million of users globally.
Note: IMail Server was modified to handle the Commtouch scan at the SMTP level, allowing the new "Reject" classification type to occur, rejecting a message before being accepted.
Related Topics
Commtouch Zero-Hour Virus Protection Filter (on page 205)
Commtouch Zero-Hour Filter
How to get here
Domain: Shows the current selected domain. From the drop down you can pick any of the domains available to this administrative user account.
205
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Commtouch Zero Hour Filtering Classifications
Enable Virus Content Filter (Enabled by default if available) elect this check box to enable the Premium Anti-spam filter for the current mail domain. Default actions are specified to take for each classification. You can, however, change the defaults by clicking the hyperlink under the Classification. An Action to be Taken page appears, with the options for that action listed in a list box.
Note: Be sure the Commtouch Service (on page 389) is started.
Classification. This column lists all possible classifications with possible results for this domain.
Action to be taken. This column lists the action chosen for each corresponding classification type.
Delete Message. Message is deleted immediately after being accepted. If Archiving is enabled, message will archive.
Forward to Address. Forwards the message to an e-mail address. Enter an e-mail address in the Target text box to the right of this option.
Insert X-Header. Inserts an X-Header into the message indicating that the message was identified as a virus outbreak by the Commtouch® filter. For more information,
see X-Header Explanations (on page 351).
Move to Mailbox. Moves the message to the user’s mailbox specified in the text box to the right of this option. If the mailbox does not exist, it is created.
None (default). No action is performed on messages identified as spam.
Reject Connection. Message is rejected at the MAIL FROM command and the sending mail server is returned a 550 error message.
Target. This column lists the mailbox or e-mail address for a Move to or Forward to action, respectively.
Prefix Subject. (Yes/No) This column lists whether or not the message will have a classification prefix added to the message.
With. This column lists the actual prefix, if chosen, for the corresponding query result. know that the anti-spam options are setup to best suit your filtering requirements.
Related Topic
About Commtouch Zero Hour Anti-virus (on page 205)
Spam Filtering (Domain Level)
How to get here
206
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Use the Domain Level Anti-spam settings to enable, change, and disable various anti-spam filters for the selected domain.
Premium Filter. (Optional only with IMail Premium). Provides fully automated spam protection in addition to the Standard Anti-spam filter included with all IMail products.
Statistical Filter (on page 315). Examines each word in the body of an e-mail
message to determine if the e-mail is spam.
Phrase Filter (on page 303). Searches for spam phrases within the body of e-mail
messages and identifies the messages that are spam.
HTML Features Filter (on page 305). Searches HTML features in messages that are
subject to spam. Sets how many HTML features must be present in an .htm file in order for a message to be identified as spam and the spam action to take.
URL Domain Blacklist (on page 313). Searches for domain names that appear as
URL links in messages, and lets you set the action to take on such messages.
Broken MIME Headers (on page 320). Uses the Broken MIME Header Filter to
identify MIME Header characteristics that result in SPAM e-mail.
SPF (on page 321) (Sender Policy Framework). Enables stronger authentication of
e-mail senders using Sender Policy Framework (an extension to the DNS system).
Provides administrators increased capability to stop incoming e-mail from forged
(spoofed) e-mail addresses.
Connection Checks (on page 333). Verifies that the party connecting to your server
is not part of a blacklist.
Logging (on page 341). Controls where the standard anti-spam logs are written as
well as how much detail is provided in them.
Alias Administration
How to get here
An e-mail alias is an alternative for a user's e-mail address, a group of user's e-mail addresses, or an application that performs additional e-mail functions. An e-mail alias looks like an e-mail address, but it is a name defined within an e-mail domain to represent a logon name.
Therefore more than one e-mail alias may refer to a POP3 account. IMail Server supports the following alias types:
Standard alias (on page 210)
To comply with the Internet mail RFC specifications, you must have a postmaster alias so
Internet mail users can send mail to postmaster@your_domain_name. IMail Server
207
IMail v12 Administrator Help
automatically sets up the postmaster alias to point to the root
account. You can change the postmaster alias to point to a different mail account.
You can create aliases one at a time in the IMail Administrator or you can add a batch of aliases at one time. For more information about adding aliases with a batch file, see Adding an
Alias (addalias.exe) (on page 212). If you plan to add a group alias, you can prepare a text file
before you add the group alias. Enter all the mail addresses you want to include in the group into a text file; enter one address per line followed by a carriage return. Place the file in the host directory.
If you plan to create a program alias, copy the application to the IMail Server system. You can also use a
.bat
file to store the commands you want to use. (In this case, the program alias will point to the .bat file, making it easy to edit the
.bat
file at any time without having to change the program alias.)
A- Z, a-z, 0-9, - (hyphen), and _ (underscore). The name cannot contain spaces and must be unique for this mail host.
Aliases display as follows:
Domain: Shows the current selected domain. From the drop down you can pick any of the domains available to this administrative user account.
Search. Requires entering a minimum of two characters, and the search will automatically begin narrowing the list of users. The search assumes a wildcard automatically after the characters entered. Search target includes both the "Username" and "Full Name" columns as criteria for search selection.
Note: Column Titles when clicked will sort the user list for the current session only.
Refreshing the page will reset to Username sorting. Example. Clicking on the "Disabled" column heading twice will sort all the disabled users to the top of the page.
Search box. Enter an alias name that you want to search for in the list of available aliases, then click Search.
Alias List
Name list. Click an alias name to modify an alias. Click or to sort the list. a Group alias. If you want to use an existing alias name for another type of alias, delete the existing alias and create a new alias of the desired type. The exception to this rule is that a standard alias will automatically be converted to a Group alias if more than five users are added to it.
Type. This column lists the type of alias: program, group, standard, beeper, or pager.
208
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Enable Archiving. For Administrators using Mail-box Archiving (Must be enabled on System Settings and Domain Properties page), this feature gives capability to enable/disable archiving by alias.
Resolves To. This column lists the originating program, group, or standard, beeper, or pager for which the alias was created.
Add. Click Add to create a new alias name on IMail Server. For more information, see Adding
Edit. To edit an aliases, first select, then click Edit.
Delete. Select an alias that you want to delete from the Alias name list, then click Delete to delete the alias.
Related Topics
Adding an E-mail Alias (on page 209)
Creating "nobody" Alias (on page 211)
Add / Edit E-mail Alias
How to get hereStep 1: Enter Alias Name, select Alias Type, then click Save.
Type of Alias:
Alias Name. Displays the name of the new alias. Aliases are limited to 45 characters and must be created from the character set of A-Z, a-z, 0-9, - (hyphen) and _
(underscore). The name cannot contain spaces and must be unique for the mail domain .
Type. Drop down menu displaying the alias type.
Enable Archiving. For Administrators using Mail-box Archiving (Must be enabled on System Settings and Domain Properties page), this feature gives capability to enable/disable archiving by alias.
Resolves To. Place one complete mail address per line (no spaces). Enter an e-mail address on each line (for example, [email protected] ). group alias.
Alias Name. Displays the name for the new alias. Aliases are limited to 45 characters and must be created from the character set of A-Z, a-z, 0-9, - (hyphen) and _
(underscore). The name cannot contain spaces and must be unique for the mail domain.
Type. Drop down menu displaying the alias type.
209
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Enable Archiving. For Administrators using Mail-box Archiving (Must be enabled on System Settings and Domain Properties page), this feature gives capability to enable/disable archiving by alias.
Resolves To. Enter an e-mail address per line (no spaces). Enter an e-mail address on each line (for example, [email protected] ).
Alias Name. Displays the name for the new alias. Aliases are limited to 45 characters and must be created from the character set of A-Z, a-z, 0-9, - (hyphen) and _
(underscore). The name cannot contain spaces and must be unique for the mail domain.
Type. Drop down menu displaying the alias type.
Enable Archiving. For Administrators using Mail-box Archiving (Must be enabled on System Settings and Domain Properties page), this feature gives capability to enable/disable archiving by alias.
Resolves To. Enter the program path, filename, and other required command line parameters to be executed when the program alias receives mail. When an e-mail is sent to the program alias, the executable program is invoked and the entire contents of the message are passed to the program to take specified actions on the e-mail.
Tip: Beeper and Pager functionality have been removed from the Web Administration, but can still be accessed using the Console Administration.
Related Topics
Learning About Aliases (on page 207)
Creating "nobody" Alias (on page 211)
About Standard Aliases
A standard alias is a name that indicates a single user ID on the same mail server.
Mail is sent to:
Up to four user IDs on the same system.
Up to four remote mail addresses.
Another alias.
Any combination of the above alias is converted to a group alias.
Enable Archiving. For Administrators using Mail-box Archiving (Must be enabled on System Settings and Domain Properties page), this feature gives capability to enable/disable archiving by alias.
Related Topic
210
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Creating "nobody" Alias (on page 211)
About Domain Aliases
How to get here
A domain alias is another name for a mail host. It can be entered only in the Domain Aliases box located on the Domain Properties page.
About Group Aliases
A group alias is a user ID that causes any mail sent to it to go to all the valid mail addresses listed in the group.
If more than four addresses are added to a standard alias, IMail automatically changes the standard alias to a group alias. recommended that a list be set up instead.
Enable Archiving. For Administrators using Mail-box Archiving (Must be enabled on System Settings and Domain Properties page), this feature gives capability to enable/disable archiving by alias.
Creating "nobody" Alias
The "nobody" alias is a catch-all alias which receives messages from users that do not exist on your host, and forwards the message to the address specified in the "nobody" alias.
Note: "nobody" alias will prevent messages from bouncing back to the sender.
To create a "nobody" alias simply follow instructions for adding a standard alias (on
page 209), with the standard alias name being "nobody".
Example:
If I have a sta ndard "nobody" alias pointing to
and a message with an invalid address to
arrives, the message is forwarded to the [email protected]
mailbox.
This can be useful when a company wants to be sure that all messages are received and answered.
Related Topic
Creating an Email Alias (on page 209)
211
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Allow remote mail to local groups
How to get here
When selected, the SMTP server will accept mail addressed to private group aliases created only with the IMail Client application. affected. You must have "Allow remote mail to local groups" option enabled for a Group alias to work.
Related Topics
About Program Alias
A program alias is a user ID that causes any mail sent to it to start a program that can accept the mail message for further processing. The alias consists of a path and executable file name, plus any required command line parameters.
When e-mail is sent to the program alias, the executable program is invoked and the entire contents of the e-mail message is passed to the executable program (as a
.tmp
file).
Tip:
".tmp"
file after program execution to avoid excessive
".tmp"
files building up in the spool file.
Enable Archiving. For Administrators using Mail-box Archiving (Must be enabled on System Settings and Domain Properties page), this feature gives capability to enable/disable archiving by alias.
Adding Aliases using "addalias.exe" Utility
Addalias.exe is a utility for adding, modifying, and deleting batches of e-mail aliases stored in a text file. You can also import an existing Windows NT group into IMail and create a group alias. If you invoke Addalias.exe with no command line options (by entering only addalias
at the MS-DOS prompt), you can manually input command lines, then press Enter after each line. Make sure that you press CTRL-Z to exit the utility when you are done. Example (on
Basic Command Syntax
addalias [-h hostname] [-cX] [-{a|d|m}] alias [=destination]
212
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Command Function
-a aliasname Adds an alias if the alias does not exist. aliasname is the name of the alias you want to add. Only one alias may be added in a single command line.
-cX Specifies an alternate delimiting character, which replaces the default delimiter (the equal sign). Spaces are not allowed. (Using -c in a text file affects all lines in the file.)
-d aliasname Deletes an alias that already exists, where aliasname is the alias you want to delete.
Only one alias may be deleted in a single command line.
-f filename You can put multiple commands into a text file for one execution of Addalias. Use -f to specify the name of the text file containing the Addalias commands. (All the above commands are valid for the text file, but note that -h and -c persist across multiple lines of input.)
-h hostname Specifies the virtual domain for the alias. The primary domain is used if no e-mail domain is specified. (Using -h in a text file affects all lines in the file.)
-i groupname Imports an NT group as a group alias if the alias does not already exist. groupname is the group that you want to import. Only one alias can be added in a single command line.
-l Lists current aliases. This argument may not be used in a text file.
-m aliasname Modifies or adds an alias even if the alias exists. aliasname is the alias you want to modify. Only one alias may be modified in a single command line.
-? Displays a summary of argument options.
Addalias.exe Examples
Adding an Alias to the Default (primary) E-mail Domain (on page 214)
Adding an Alias to a Specific Domain (on page 213)
Deleting an Alias (on page 214)
Importing an NT Group as a Group Alias (on page 438)
Return codes
Addalias.exe returns 1 if it performed at least one of the requested operations; it returns 0 if it failed.
Using a Text File
Instead of entering commands at the MS-DOS prompt, you can use a text file to input multiple commands for one execution. You can use this technique to add aliases to IMail
Server from another mail system if the other mail server program can create a delimited text
file of aliases. Example (on page 215)
Adding Alias to a Domain Using "addalias.exe"
Adding an Alias to a Specific Domain Using the addaliase.exe Utility
213
IMail v12 Administrator Help
The following example adds an alias of newalias to the e-mail domain named secondhost.com and resolves to e-mail: addalias -h secondhost.com -a newalias e-mail
Adding Alias to Primary Domain Using "addalias.exe"
The following examples add an alias of newalias to the default (primary) e-mail domain which resolves to e-mail: addalias -c: -a newalias:email addalias -a newalias=email addalias -c: newalias:email addalias newalias=email addalias newalias email
Deleting an Alias using "addalias.exe" Utility
The following examples delete an alias: addalias -d oldalias addalias -h another.net -d alias1
Related Topics
Adding an Alias using Addalias.exe
Using a Text File (adduser.exe)
Instead of entering commands at the MS-DOS prompt, you can use a text file to input multiple commands for one execution of adduser.exe. You can use this technique to add users to your IMail system from another mail system if the other mail program can create a delimited text file of user ids, passwords, and user names.
Let’s suppose you want to add four user IDs (userid, smith, test1, and jones) to the wks013 server . Adduser.exe assumes that if there are no arguments in a text file, then the information on each line is userid, password, and full name – in that order.
For example, you could create a text file named addfour.txt that contains the following lines: userid,password,full name smith,whypass,Mrs Smith test1,,Mr Smith jones,okpass,Tom Jones
214
IMail v12 Administrator Help
At the MS-DOS prompt, you enter:
Adduser -h wks013.augusta.ipswitch.com -f addfour.txt
You then get the following messages: current host is wks013.augusta.ipswitch.com
OK: added userid to host wks013.augusta.ipswitch.com
OK: added smith to host wks013.augusta.ipswitch.com
OK: added test1 to host wks013.augusta.ipswitch.com
OK: added jones to host wks013.augusta.ipswitch.com
Note that the user named test1 will have "password" (the default) as his password.
Addalias Text File Example
Addalias.exe Text File Example
Create a text file named test.txt that contains the following lines. test1=me test2=test1 test3=test2
-h virtual001 test1=me test3=me
-m test2=him
-d test3
At the MS-DOS prompt, enter: addalias < test.txt
The < symbol tells addalias to use test.txt as output.
215
IMail v12 Administrator Help
You then get the following messages: current host is wks003.augusta.ipswitch.com
added [wks003.augusta.ipswitch.com ] test1 -> me added [wks003.augusta.ipswitch.com ] test2 -> test1 added [wks003.augusta.ipswitch.com ] test3 -> test2 current host is virtual001 alias exists [virtual001] test1 -> someone added [virtual001] test3 -> me modified [virtual001] test2 -> him deleted [virtual001] test3 -> me
List Administration
How to get here
List-server mailing lists or "automated" mailing lists, are used widely on the Internet as a means of sharing information about a topic. The IMail list server lets you set up list-server mailing lists that receive mail and resend mail to all the users on the mailing list.
The list server can also archive messages and send them periodically (on page 235) as a single
message or "digest."
Domain: Shows the current selected domain. From the drop down you can pick any of the domains available to this administrative user account.
Search Box. Typing will automatically begin narrowing the list. The search assumes a wildcard automatically after the characters entered.
Note: Column Titles when clicked will sort the list for the current session only. Refreshing the page will reset the original sort.
List Detail
List Name. Click a list name to modify a list. Click or to sort the list.
List Owner. Assigned list owner (on page 242).
216
IMail v12 Administrator Help
List Administrator. Assigned List Administrator (on page 241).
Add. Click Add to create a new list on IMail Server. For more information, see Adding an
Edit. Select and highlight a list, then click Edit to update an existing list.
Delete. Select a list that you want to delete, then click Delete to delete the list.
If the List Server has multiple pages, use the page navigation control which appears below the list names.
Default List Settings
List Owner's E-mail Address. Enter the full e-mail address of the list default list owner. This is the mail account that receives all messages (such as Subscribe and
Unsubscribe requests) to the list. It is also the account from which help messages are sent and to which error messages are sent.
Note: The List Owner e-mail address does not have access to the List Administration pages unless the e-mail address is same as the local list administrator or has List Administrator
permissions for the local domain. See the User Properties (on page 145) page.
Administrator's Local User ID. Enter the default list administrator user ID. Enter only a User ID (do not add the full e-mail address) that resides on the local domain for the
list administrator. This will allow local list administration (on page 241) permissions for
only the specified list.
Important: To allow permissions for all lists, the User ID can be given List Administrator
rights See the User Properties (on page 145) page.
account can be set up to be the list owner in order to hide the identity of the list administrator or to give the impression of more people being involved in the list management.
Maximum Message Size (bytes). Enter the maximum size of a message that can be sent to the list. Enter 0 if you want the size to be unlimited.
Number of Recipients Per Message. Enter the number of recipients each SMTP process will send to. To calculate this number, divide the expected number of subscribers by 25. The result is the number of recipients per message.
Example:
217
IMail v12 Administrator Help
You want to send an e-mail to a list of 5,000 subscribers. Divide 5,000 (number of subscribers) by 25 (number of processes) and the result is 200 (recipients per message). So you would have 25 processes that each handle 200 recipients.
If you increase this number, you may need to also increase the number of SMTP processes.
For more information about how to change the default number of SMTP processes for IMail
Server, see SMTP Settings Advanced Options (on page 413).
Related Topics
Adding an E-mail Alias (on page 209)
Defining a list-server mailing list (on page 220)
Requesting and Subscribing to List Information (on page 240)
Sending mail to a list-server mailing list (on page 240)
Learning About Aliases (on page 207)
Types of List Server Mailing Lists
There are three kinds of basic lists (determined by the setting of Allow Postings By on the
List Security page):
Anyone (on page 219) (open list). Anyone can post a message to the list; the individual
that posts to the list does not have to be a list subscriber.
Subscribers (on page 219). Only a list subscriber can post a message to the list.
Moderated (on page 219). Only a list owner (on page 242) can post a message to the
list. Moderator is used when you want the list owner to review all messages before they are posted to the list.
You can further restrict the message posts with:
A password requirement.
A posters' list.
Those who send mail to a list restricted by a password and/or posters' list will have their mail returned with a "Restricted Post" message. the moderator can give those few the appropriate password. However, if there are more than a few individuals who are permitted to post to the list, it may be more efficient to use a posters list.
Related Topics
218
IMail v12 Administrator Help
List Administration (on page 216)
Creating and Managing Lists (on page 220)
Moderated Lists
The characteristics of a moderated list are:
The moderator can post by addressing mail in the form of [email protected].
Only the moderator (list owner) can post a message to the list if Use Password and
Enable Posters List are cleared.
If Use Password is selected, the moderator must use a password in order to post to the list. This prevents others from "impersonating" the moderator by using the moderator’s mailing address.
If Enable Posters' List is selected, users in the posters' list (on page 238) can post
directly to the list and the moderator does not receive their mail. The moderator receives mail only from the addresses that are not in the posters' list.
If both Use Password and Enable Posters' List are selected, the moderator receives mail only from those not in the posters' list and the moderator must enter a password in order to post to the list.
Related Topics
List Administration (on page 216)
Creating and Managing Lists (on page 220)
Types of List Server Mailing Lists (on page 218)
Open Lists
The characteristics of an open list are:
Anyone can post to the list by addressing mail in the form of [email protected] .
If Use Password is turned on in the List Security page, all list posters must enter a password to post to the list.
The Enable Posters List option does not affect open lists. If this option is selected, anyone will still be able to post to the list whether they are in the posters list or not.
Related Topics
List Administration (on page 216)
Creating and Managing Lists (on page 220)
Types of List Server Mailing Lists (on page 218)
Subscriber Lists
The characteristics of a subscriber list are:
219
IMail v12 Administrator Help
The list is made up of subscribers. An individual becomes a subscriber by sending a message addressed to the IMail list server ( [email protected] where domain.com represents the mail domain). In the body of the message, the intended subscriber enters the subscribe command and list name.
Subscribers post a message by addressing mail in the form of [email protected] .
If Use Password is selected in the List Security page, users must enter a password to post a message.
If Enable Posters List is turned on, only subscribers and users in the posters list can post.
For a subscribers only list, users who are in the posters list can post messages to the list without being a subscriber. In this case, the user will not receive any list postings.
If both Use Password and Enable Posters List are turned on, a subscriber must enter a password to post. Users in the posters list must enter a password as well.
Related Topics
List Administration (on page 216)
Creating and Managing Lists (on page 220)
Types of List Server Mailing Lists (on page 218)
Creating and Managing Lists
How to get here
Use the Add /Edit List page to create or modify a list. See Types of List Server Mailing Lists (on
page 218) for information on lists.
Domain Name | List Name. The current domain name used for the list server followed by the
List Name.
Directory. Displays top directory path of specified list.
General Options
List Name. Enter a list name with no spaces. List Name cannot be updated once created.
Mail List Name (Title). Enter a descriptive title to help the list administrator identify the list. The name must be from 3 to 23 characters in length (spaces are OK).
List Owner's E-mail Address. Enter the fully qualified e-mail address of the account
list owner (on page 242) that the list runs under. This is the mail account that receives
all messages (such as Subscribe and Unsubscribe requests) to the list. It is also the account from which help messages are sent and to which error messages are sent.
This can be preset when creating new lists using the Default List Settings (on
220
IMail v12 Administrator Help
unless the e-mail address is same as the local list administrator or has List Administrator
permissions for the local domain. See the User Properties (on page 145) page.
Local List Admin (User ID). Enter only the User ID (do not add the full e-mail address) that resides on the local domain for the list administrator. This will allow local list
administration (on page 241) permissions for only the specified list.
Important: To allow permissions for all lists, the User ID can be given List Administrator
rights See the User Properties (on page 145) page.
Note: The list administrator and list owner is usually the same person, but a "dummy" user account can be set up to be the list owner in order to hide the identity of the list administrator or to give the impression of more people being involved in the list management.
Enable Subject Modification. Select this option and enter text in the text box to prepend a text string to the subject line of every message sent to the list. For example, if you enter [Discussion List] as the prepended text, a message with the subject, "Parrot," will appear on the list server with the subject line: Subject: re:[Discussion List] Parrot. The default text is the name of this list.
Maximum Message Size (bytes). Enter the maximum size of a message that can be sent to this list. Enter 0 to allow messages to be of unlimited size. This can be preset
when creating new lists using the Default List Settings (on page 216).
Number of Recipients per Message. Enter the number of recipients each SMTP process will send to. To calculate this number divide the expected number of subscribers by 25, and enter the result. This can be preset when creating new lists
using the Default List Settings (on page 216).
Reply-To list (vs. Sender). Select this option to have replies from a subscriber go to the list. Clear this option to have replies from a subscriber go to the sender of the original message.
Tip: It is recommended that no more than 25 processes be used by any list.
Enable Archiving. For Administrators using Mail-box Archiving (Mail-box Archiving must be enabled on System Settings and Domain Properties page), this feature gives capability to enable or disable archiving by list.
List Subscribers (on page 225). Click this link to search or update users e-mail addresses for a
selected list.
Inbound Rules (on page 228). Click this link to view the inbound delivery rules, which sort
incoming mail messages for each list server mailing list.
221
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Help Message (on page 232). Click this link to edit the help text that is sent to anyone who
requests help (by sending a list command to imailsrv@domain ) or sends an invalid command to this list. This link will become active after the list has been created.
Subscribe Message (on page 233). Click this link will edit the confirmation text (on page 233)
that will be sent to each person who submits a successful subscribe request to this list. This link will become active after the list has been created.
Security Options
Security Options will determine whether you want a list to be moderated or unmoderated as well as to determine who has access to the list.
Allowed Posters. Drop down list of select users that can post to the list.
Anyone. Select to let anyone with an e-mail account post mail to a list.
Subscribers. Select to let only the list subscribers post mail to a list.
Moderators. Select to let only the list owner post mail. Moderator is used when you want the list owner to review all messages before they are posted to the list.
Disallow Subscription (ie: Private List). Select to reject subscribe requests to a list.
List subscribers can only be added one of the following ways:
List administrator (on page 241) using IMail Administrator to edit the Users file (on
List administrator using IMail Web Messaging to change user list permissions.
Allow List Unsubscribe Based on Subject Line. Select this option if you want the list-server mailing list to also accept an Unsubscribe command specified in the message Subject line. When users want to unsubscribe from the list-server mailing list, most list servers expect the Unsubscribe command to be specified in the body of the mail message.
When selected, the list-server mailing list will accept the following commands in the
Subject line to unsubscribe to a list:
unsubscribe
remove
signoff no leading spaces after the password. See example below.
Example:
The following example assumes there is a list named beer that allows unsubscribes based on the Subject line on an e-mail domain named domain.com.
To unsubscribe from the list:
222
IMail v12 Administrator Help
TO: imailsrv@domain .com
Subject:Unsubscribe beer
Disable List Command. Select if you do not want users to receive a list of the subscribers to your list-server mailing list. If not selected, users can obtain a list of the users subscribed to a list by addressing a message to the list server (for example, [email protected]
) and issuing the list [listname] command (on page 240) in
the body of the message.
List Command option is selected and regardless of the list type.
Enable Posters List. Select to let any user with an e-mail address in the posters' list post to any type of list. If the Use Password option is enabled, users in the posters' list must enter a password.
The posters' list is stored in a file named POSTERS.LST located in IMail Top
Directory\Lists\listname.
Use Password. Select to require a person to use a password before posting to the list.
The password must be the first entry in the message Subject field. The password must be enclosed in brackets and colons. For example,
Subject:[:password:]Unsubscribe beer
The Use Password setting affects different list types as follows:
If Use Password is selected for anyone list (open) (on page 218), all posters are required
to enter a password to post to the list.
If Use Password is selected for a subscriber list (on page 218), the subscribers are
required to enter a password to post the list.
If Use Password is selected for a moderated list (on page 218), the moderator is
required to enter a password to post to the list.
Posters File (on page 233). Click this link to view, modify, or enter an e-mail address for users
that can post messages to the selected list.
Kill File (on page 234). Click this link to view, modify, or enter an e-mail address for users that
are no allowed to post messages to the selected list.
Digest Settings
To set up a list-server mail digest (on page 235), first enable digest mode, then set the digest
options.
Enable Digest Settings. Select this option to allow users to group the messages sent to this list into a digest.
Strip Non-Text Attachments before Posting. Check box to enable the option to strip non-text attachments, such as graphic files, from messages when the digest posting is sent.
223
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Digest Mailbox. Enter the e-mail address where list postings are stored before the digest mailing is sent out. A copy of all postings will be sent to [email protected]. This mailbox has the following characteristics:
After a posting is sent to the digest list, the Digest Mailbox is emptied and a copy is made in the format: digestmailboxMMDD.mbx where digestmailbox is the name of the Digest Mailbox, MM is the month, and DD is the day of the posting.
The list administrator (on page 241) can view the mailbox from the Web Messaging
client and can delete or add messages before the posting is sent. The list administrator can also view posted digests by the MMDD format described in the previous paragraph.
Subject Line for Digest Postings. Enter the text that you want to appear in the digest posting subject line.
Include Headers and Trailers When Posting to Digest Mailbox. Select this option to have the posted digest messages include the header and or trailer messages. We recommend turning off this option because it will make the digest larger and the digest includes its own header and trailer.
Enable Digest Header. Select this option to include a header message at the beginning of the posted digest. For example, you can enter the subscribe/unsubscribe information for the digest and have it appear at the beginning of every message.
Digest Header Message. Enabled, enter the header message you want to be included at beginning of every message. This information is saved in the
"digest_header.txt"
file.
Enable Digest Trailer. Select this option to include a trailer message at the end of the posted digest. For example, you can enter the subscribe/unsubscribe information for the digest and have it appear at the end of every message.
After this option is selected, the message text box is enabled. Enter the trailer message you want to include with the digest messages. This information is saved in the digest_trailer.txt file.
Digest Trailer Message. Enabled, enter the trailer message you want to be included at the end of every message. This information is saved in the
"digest_trailer.txt"
file.
Enable Message Separators. Select this option to specify lines or characters that will automatically separate messages in the digest posting.
Digest Message Separators. Enabled, enter the lines or characters that you want to use as a separator between every digest message. This information is saved in the
"digest_separator.txt"
file.
Subscribers. Click this link to search, add and delete digest subscribers. See Subscribing to a
Scheduling. Click this link to configure the scheduling of processing messages for Digest subscribers.
Save. Click to save your settings.
Cancel. Click Cancel to exit without saving changes.
224
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Related Topics
Testing the List (on page 239)
List Administration (on page 216)
Types of List Server Mailing Lists (on page 218)
Searching Lists for a User (on page 237)
List Subscribers
How to get here
Use the List Subscribers page to add, view, edit and remove users' e-mail address and name for the selected list. You can also search for users associated with the selected list.
Domain Name | List Name. The current domain name used for the list server followed by the
List Name.
Search Box. Requires entering at least one character, and the search will automatically begin narrowing the address of names. The search assumes a wildcard automatically after each character are entered.
E-mail Address list. This column displays the list user's e-mail address. Click to modify the e-mail address.
Full Name list. This column displays the user names that are included in the selected list.
Add. Click Add to add a new user to the selected list.
Remove. Select an E-mail Address or multiple E-mail Addresses that you want to delete from the list, then click Remove to delete the addresses.
Save. Click the save button at the bottom of the screen. A message at the top "Your changes have been saved" will confirm.
Cancel. Click Cancel to exit without saving changes.
Related Topic
Adding Users to a List (on page 225)
Adding Users to a List
How to get here
Use the Add List User page to add a new to a selected e-mail list.
Domain Name (Official Host Name or OHN). The current domain name used for the list server.
List Name. The name of the e-mail list.
Email Address list. Enter the new list user's e-mail address.
Full name. Enter the user’s First Name and Last Name.
225
IMail v12 Administrator Help
View "Users" File
The purpose of this file, USERS.TXT, is to provide a list of subscribers to anyone who sends a
"list" command (on page 240) to the list- server mailing list. This file is a list of the user names
and e-mail addresses that is updated automatically when someone subscribes or unsubscribes to the list-server mailing list. (You can disable the "list" command on the
Security tab.)
Note: This is not the list that is used by the list server to actually send mail to the list.
If you use a text editor to add or delete addresses from the Addresses file, you should also
edit this file the same way if you want people who use the "list" command (on page 240) to
see an updated list of subscribers.
Save. Click to save changes.
Cancel. Click Cancel to exit without saving changes.
View "Addresses" File
USERS.LST is the list of e-mail addresses that the list-server mailing list uses to address the mail it sends to this list. This file is updated automatically when someone subscribes or unsubscribes to this list. It is a text file with one address per line ending in a carriage return/line feed.
You can edit this file using a text editor to add or delete addresses that will receive mail from
this list. However, you must also edit the "Users" file (USERS.TXT) (on page 226) if you want
people who use the "list" command (on page 240) to see an updated list of subscribers.
Note: This list will ignore any invalid addresses in this file (for example, a typing error while editing this file).
Save. Click to save changes.
Cancel. Click Cancel to exit without saving changes.
List Header
How to get here
List Headers are messages displaying at the beginning of every message sent to the specified list. Both Headers and Trailers can handle both plain text and HTML messages.
Headers are saved in the
"header.txt"
file for plain text message headers and
"header.html"
for html message headers.
Note: Both plain text and HTML textboxes must be updated to work for both encodings.
226
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Important: Header and Trailer Messages share the Encoding Type. Updating the Header
Encoding will also automatically update the Trailer Encoding.
Enable Header. Select this option to display text at the beginning every message sent to the list. This text is saved in the
"header.txt"
file.
Encoding. Message encoding used for sending Header. Default setting is Unicode
(UTF-8).
Unicode (UTF-8). Choose this character set for multi-language mail. In IMail, this includes English, Chinese Simplified, Chinese Traditional, French, German, Italian,
Japanese, or Spanish.
English (US-ASCII). For composing e-mail for English-speaking readers, based on the
English alphabet.
Western European (ISO-8859-15). For composing e-mail in French, Italian, German, or Spanish.
Chinese Traditional (BIG5). For composing e-mail in traditional Chinese.
Chinese Simplified (GB2312). For composing e-mail in simplified Chinese.
Japanese (ISO-2022-JP). For composing e-mail in Japanese.
HTML Header. When the Enable Header option is selected above, you can enter a header message to display at the beginning of every the list message when sent with
HTML. This information is saved in the
"header.html"
file.
Plain Text Header. When the Enable Header option is selected above, you can enter a header message to display at the beginning of every list message when sent in plain text. This information is saved in the
"header.txt"
file.
Save. Click to save your settings.
Related Topics
Add / Edit Lists (on page 220)
List Trailer
How to get here
List Trailers are messages displaying at the end of every message sent to the specified list.
Both Headers and Trailers can handle both plain text and HTML messages. Trailers are saved in the
"trailer.txt"
file for plain text message headers and
"trailer.htm"
for html message headers.
Note: Both plain text and HTML textboxes must be updated to work for both encodings.
Important: Header and Trailer Messages share the Encoding Type. Updating the Header
Encoding will also automatically update the Trailer Encoding.
227
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Header and Trailer Messages share the Encoding Type. Updating the Header
Encoding will also automatically update the Trailer Encoding.Enable Header. Select this option to display text at the beginning every message sent to the list. This text is saved in the
"header.txt"
file.
Encoding. Message encoding used for sending Header. Default setting is Unicode
(UTF-8).
Unicode (UTF-8). Choose this character set for multi-language mail. In IMail, this includes English, Chinese Simplified, Chinese Traditional, French, German, Italian,
Japanese, or Spanish.
English (US-ASCII). For composing e-mail for English-speaking readers, based on the
English alphabet.
Western European (ISO-8859-15). For composing e-mail in French, Italian, German, or Spanish.
Chinese Traditional (BIG5). For composing e-mail in traditional Chinese.
Chinese Simplified (GB2312). For composing e-mail in simplified Chinese.
Japanese (ISO-2022-JP). For composing e-mail in Japanese.
HTML Trailer. When the Enable Trailer option is selected above, you can enter a trailer message to display at the end of the every list message. This information is saved in the
"trailer.html"
file.
Plain Text Trailer. When the Enable Trailer option is selected above, you can enter a trailer message to display at the end of the every list message when sent in plain text.
This information is saved in the
"trailer.txt"
file.
Save. Click to save your settings.
Related Topics
Add / Edit Lists (on page 220)
Inbound Delivery Rules for Lists
How to get here
Use inbound delivery rules to sort incoming mail messages for each list server mailing list.
Use the Inbound Rules page to add new inbound rules, edit and delete inbound rules, move inbound rule evaluation priority up or down, add rules, and set actions to take on a message that matches the rule criteria.
The Inbound Rules list displays information about each of the active inbound rules for the selected mailing list. The inbound delivery rules for lists are stored in the
"rules.ima"
file, located in
...\IMail\ListName
domain top directory for the primary domain, and under
...\IMail\DomainName\ListName
for all non-primary domains.
228
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Note: Rules are processed in the order in which they appear in the Rules list.
Inbound Rules
Domain: Shows the current selected domain. From the drop down you can pick any of the domains available to this administrative user account.
Rules List
Name list. Click a rule name to select and update the conditions and settings.
Action. Displays the action to take on a message that matches the rule condition criteria.
Conditions. Displays the conditions selected for each rule.
Filename. Displays the name of the external rule condition file if it is used. See Storing
Search Text in an External Text File (on page 255).
Destination. Displays the mailbox or e-mail address to forward messages to that match the rule condition criteria. A Destination is only available when Move to
Mailbox or Forward are selected in the Action Type list (on page 249).
Add. Click Add to create a new mail domain rule. For more information, see Adding Inbound
Delivery Rules for Domains (on page 249).
Edit. Select a rule and click Edit, or double click a rule, to modify a rule.
Move Up. Select a rule and click Move Up to move the rule processing order to a higher priority for e-mail filtering. Rules are processed in the order in which they appear in the Rules list.
Move Down. Select a rule and click Move Down to move the rule processing order to a lower priority for e-mail filtering.
Delete. Select a rule that you want to delete from the Inbound Rules list, then click Delete to delete the rule.
Related Topics
Overview of Mail Delivery Rules (on page 244)
Creating an Outbound Rule for a Host (on page 247)
How Delivery Rules are stored and processed (on page 244)
Adding Multiple Conditions to Rules (on page 178)
229
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Adding Rule for Lists
How to get here
Use the Rule Settings page to add new rule conditions, edit rule conditions, delete conditions, move rule condition evaluation priority up or down, add rule conditions, and set actions to take on a message that matches the rule condition criteria.
After you create a rule condition, the new Rule is placed at the bottom of the Rules list. Rules are identified in the list by their sequence in the list, for example (Rule 1, Rule 2; etc.).
Rule Name
Domain Name (Official Host Name or OHN ). The current domain name used to address mail to the users on the mail domain is displayed. For example, company.com is the domain name in the address [email protected].
List Name. The current list the new rule is being set under.
Rule Name. Enter the name for the rule.
Conditions
Use conditions from an external file. Select to use an external file that includes rule conditions. For more information, see Storing Search String in an External Text File (on
Use conditions from this table. Select to use rule conditions set from the options on the
Rule Settings page.
Field. Displays the message field that is filtered: From Address, To, Subject, Sender,
Body, or Header.
Comparison. Displays Contains when the delivery rule filter messages contain the search text. Displays Does Not Contain when the delivery rule filter message does not contain the search text.
Search Text. Displays the search text that is used in the rule condition.
Match Case. Displays Yes or No to indicate whether the search text must match the text case used in the Search Text condition.
Add Condition... Click Add to create a new rule condition (on page 178).
To add more than one condition to a rule, create the first condition, then click:
Add AND/OR... to create the second condition as you did the first. For more
information, see Adding Multiple Conditions to Rules (on page 178).
Note: The Add Condition button will only display on a new rule with no conditions, and after an AND/OR has been created.
Note: Be aware, that a rule cannot be saved when an AND/OR exists without a condition.
Edit. Select a condition and click Edit or double click to modify a condition.
Delete. Select a condition that you want to delete from the Conditions list, then click
Delete to delete the condition.
230
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Move Up. Select a condition and click Move Up to move the condition processing order to a higher priority for e-mail filtering. Conditions are processed in the order in which they appear in the Conditions list.
Move Down. Select a condition and click Move Down to move the condition processing order to a lower priority for e-mail filtering. Conditions are processed in the order in which they appear in the Conditions list.
Action
Action Type. Select an action to take if a rule traps a message that meets the rule criteria:
Move to Mailbox. Moves the message to the user’s mailbox specified in the Target box. If the mailbox does not exist, it is created. The default mailbox is "bulk". A POP3 user will see this mailbox only if he logs on to this mailbox using the format userid-mailbox
. By default, if nothing is entered into the text box, messages meeting the rule criteria will be sent to the user's Main mailbox.
Forward to Address. Forwards the message to an e-mail address. Enter an e-mail address to forward mail to in the Target box. You must enter the full e-mail address, such as [email protected] .
Delete. Immediately deletes the message.
Copy. Delivers the message to its intended recipient as well as copies it to an additional address that you specify in the Target box.
Bounce. Sends the message back to the sender without being processed.
Target. Enter the name of the user's mailbox or e-mail address to forward the message to that matches the rule condition criteria. If you enter a mailbox that does not exist, one is created. A POP3 user will see this mailbox only if he logs on to this mailbox using the format userid-mailbox. By default, if nothing is entered in the text box, messages meeting the rule criteria are sent to the user's Main mailbox.
Save. Click Add to save changes.
Cancel. Click Cancel to exit without saving changes.
Related Topics
Inbound Rules for Lists (on page 228)
Overview of Mail Delivery Rules (on page 244)
Adding a Rule Condition (on page 178)
Creating an Outbound Rule for a Host (on page 247)
How Delivery Rules are stored and processed (on page 244)
Delivery Rule Syntax (on page 257)
Storing Search String in an External Text File (on page 255)
Adding Multiple Conditions to Rules (on page 178)
231
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Adding a Rule Condition
Use this pop-up dialog to create a rule condition.
Define Condition
Where. Select the message field that you want to filter: From, To, Subject, Sender,
Body, or Header.
Comparison.
Contains. Select to have the delivery rule filter messages that have this search text.
Does Not Contain. Select to have the delivery rule filter messages that do not have the search text.
Search Text. Enter search text that contains the text you want to search. Enter the search text by doing one or more of the following:
Enter the literal text that you want to search for. For example, if you want to find the word "jazz", enter: jazz
Type search expressions and quantifiers as shown in text patterns (on page 260).
Paste a portion of a mail message that meets your search criteria. For example, you could copy and paste text such as "XMSMailPriority(High)" from the header of a message; this would search for High priority messages.
Match Case. Select to search for text that matches the case of the search text. To ignore the text case, clear Match Case.
Save. Click Save to add condition.
Cancel. Click Cancel to exit without saving changes.
Related Topics
Inbound Rules for Domains (on page 246)
Overview of Mail Delivery Rules (on page 244)
Delivery Rule Syntax (on page 257)
How Delivery Rules are Stored and Processed (on page 244)
Using Delivery Rules for a List-Server Mailing List
You can use delivery rules (on page 244) to reject incoming mail to a list-server mailing list
based on the contents of To, From, Sender, Subject, the entire message Header (everything but the body of the message), or the Body of the message. See Setting Inbound Delivery Rules
for IMail Lists (on page 228).
Note: Delivery rules can also be applied to all mail for a mail host (on page 246) or to mail for
individual users (on page 175).
The "Help" File
How to get here
232
IMail v12 Administrator Help
This file, "
Help.txt"
, should contain the command syntax for all valid commands for a list-server mailing list; it should be similar to the Help topic on List-Server Command Syntax (on
page 240). The contents of this file are e-mailed to anyone who requests help or who sends
an invalid command to the list.
Each list has its own
"Help.txt"
file located in top directory
"IMail\domain
\lists\listname"
(where listname is the directory name for the particular list) and applies only to the specified list.
Save. Click to save your settings.
Cancel. Click Cancel to exit without saving changes.
The "Subscribe" File
How to get here
The contents of this file,
"Subscrib.txt"
, are sent to each person who submits a successful subscribe request to the list-server mailing list.
Each list has its own
"Subscrib.txt"
file located in top directory
"IMail\domain
\lists\listname"
(where listname is the directory name for the particular list) and applies only to the specified list.
Save. Click to save your settings.
Cancel. Click Cancel to exit without saving changes.
Poster File for a List
How to get here
The List Server uses the
"posters.lst"
file to allow only specified e-mail addresses in the file to be allowed to post to the list.
Each list has its own " posters.lst"
file located in top directory
"IMail\domain
\lists\listname"
(where listname is the directory for the particular list) and applies only to the specified list.
Adding Entries
Enter one entry per line in either of the following formats: userid@host [email protected]
Save. Click to save changes.
Cancel. Click Cancel to exit without saving changes.
233
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Kill File for a List
How to get here
The
"kill.lst"
file is used by the List-Server to deny access to local mailing lists. It lets you to specify mail addresses or mail hosts that you do not want to post to the list.
Each list has its own
"kill.lst"
file located in top directory
"IMail\domain
\lists\listname"
(where listname is the directory for the particular list) and applies only to the specified list.
Adding Entries
In the KILL.LST file, enter one entry per line in either of the following formats: userid@host
For example, to deny access from a user mail account, you would enter: [email protected]
@host
For example, to deny access to all users from the mail host widget.com , you would enter:
@widget.com
@*partialhost
For example, to deny mail from any mail host ending in widget.com , enter: @*widget.com .
This will reject all mail from widget.com, bluewidget.com, nifty.widget.com, etc.
Save. Click to save changes.
Cancel. Click Cancel to exit without saving changes.
List Digest Subscribers
How to get here
Use the List Server Mail Digest Subscribers page to search for digest subscribers, add new digest subscribers, and delete existing digest subscribers.
Domain Name (Official Host Name or OHN). The current domain name used to address mail to the mail digest list is displayed.
234
IMail v12 Administrator Help
List Name. The name of the mail digest list.
Search box. Enter an e-mail address or part of an e-mail address that you want to search for in the list of available mail digest list subscribers, then click Search.
List Digest Subscribers
E-mail Address list. Displays a list of subscriber's e-mail addresses that are subscribed to the mail digest list.
Add. Click Add to add a new subscriber to the mail digest list.
Delete. Select a digest subscriber's e-mail address that you want to delete from the
E-mail Address list, then click Delete to delete the subscriber.
Save. Click to save changes.
Cancel. Click Cancel to exit without saving changes.
Adding to the List Subscriber
To subscribe someone to the List Digest
1 Click add
2 Enter their valid "E-Mail Address" to subscribe to the mail digest list.
3 Click OK to save your changes.
-or-
Cancel to exit without saving changes.
Related Topics
Setting Digest Schedule (on page 236)
Subscribing to a Digest
The digest is written to a special mailbox that you define. List users can choose between receiving a digest and receiving all messages as they are sent. To receive the digest, list users must send mail to the list server (imailsrv@your_IMail_server_hostname) and enter the following command in the body of the message: set mode digest listname where listname is the mailing list name. A confirmation message will be sent to the user.
To cancel digest mode, users can enter the following command in the body of the message:
set mode standard listname where listname is the mailing list name.
Overview of Mail Digests
How to get here
235
IMail v12 Administrator Help
You can offer subscribers a digest of messages sent to the list-server mailing list. The list server will "archive" messages sent to the list to a digest mailbox. The accumulated messages are then sent periodically to digest subscribers as a single message.
You schedule the digest to be sent on a time-basis (for example daily or weekly) or when the digest reaches a certain size. When subscribers receive a digest, it contains all the messages sent to the list since the last digest was sent.
Digest Scheduling
How to get here
Domain Name (Official Host Name or OHN ). The current domain name used for the list server.
List Name. The name of the digest list.
Last Processing Date/Time. Displays the last date and time the list digest was sent.
Frequency. Select how often you want to distribute the list digest.
Daily. Sends the list digest on a daily basis.
Weekly. Sends the list digest on a weekly basis.
Bi- Weekly. Sends the list digest on a bi-weekly basis.
Monthly. Sends the list digest on a monthly basis.
User- defined. Sends the list digest on a user-defined basis.
Size- exceeds. Sends the list digest when the list digest exceeds a specified amount of memory space.
Manual. Sends the list digest only when the administrator sends it.
Next Processing Time. Select a time (from the hour, minute, and AM/PM list options) to process the list digest.
Next Processing Date. Select a date, on the calendar, to process the list digest. The date populates the text box.
Process/Send Now. Click to send the list digest immediately.
Save. Click to save changes.
Cancel. Click Cancel to exit without saving changes.
Example:
If you select Daily and set the Next Processing Date/Time to 07/18/2008 3:00 AM, then the digest will initially be posted on July 10th 2008, and then every day thereafter at the same time.
Managing Lists
236
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Searching Lists for a User (on page 237)
Syntax Message
How to get here
The syntax message tells subscribers how to send a message that will allow them to subscribe, unsubscribe, review a list of supported lists, receive a list of users, help, request digest mode, or change back to standard mode.
Domain: Shows the current selected domain. From the drop down you can pick any of the domains available to this administrative user account.
Syntax Message
Current Message. You can use the default message that appears in the text box as your syntax message, or modify it to meet your needs.
Save. Click to save your settings. An "Update Successful" message and the time of the update appear.
Searching Lists for a User
How to get here
You can use the List Search page to search for a list and its members on one or all domains.
You can also delete individual or all members from a list.
Domain. Shows the current selected domain. From the drop down you can pick any of the domains available to this administrative user account.
All domains. Select this from the domain drop down to search all available domains.
Search. Enter the name of the list you are searching for in the text box, then click the Search button.
Email Address. This column displays the Email Address of the list member.
User Name. This column displays the User Name of the list member.
Domain. This column displays the associated domain name of the listed User Name.
List Name. This column displays the List Name of the list member.
List File. Displays the list member's file name.
Remove. Select a list member, then click Delete to remove them from the list.
237
IMail v12 Administrator Help
No List Message
How to get here
The "No List" message is returned when someone tries to perform an action for a list that does not exist.
The contents of this file, NOLIST.TXT, are sent to each person who attempts to subscribe to a non-existent list on this mail host.
Domain: Shows the current selected domain. From the drop down you can pick any of the domains available to this administrative user account.
No List Message
Current Message. You can use the default message that appears in the text box as your no list message, or modify it to meet your needs.
Save. Click to save your settings. An "Update Successful" message and the time of the update appear.
You can expand on the standard error message, perhaps giving valid names of list-server mailing lists that exist on this mail host.
Poster's List (Subscribed List)
For a subscribers only list, users who are in the posters list can post messages to the list without being a subscriber. In this case, the user will not receive any list postings.
Posters List (Moderated Lists)
For a moderated list, a user posts messages directly to the list. The messages are not sent to the moderator first.
List Owner Shortcuts for Subscribing and Unsubscribing
The list owner can "subscribe" someone by forwarding a message from that person to the list server.
The list owner can unsubscribe a user by sending a message to the list server with a message in the form: unsubscribe listname [email protected].
For example:
Subject: unsubscribe beer [email protected]
238
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Testing a List-Server Mailing List
To test a list-server mailing list:
From a system other than the IMail Server system, send a test mail message to imailsrv@your_IMail_server_hostname. In the body of the message, place the lines: subscribe listname your_full_name help help listname list list listname
You should get five messages back from the IMail Server system.
See the List-Server Commands (on page 240) for a description of the commands accepted by
the list server.
Adding a Subscriber by Forwarding
You can add a subscriber by forwarding a message. in order for this to work; otherwise you will end up adding or removing yourself from the list.
First, you set up a program alias:
1 Expand a mail host folder and select the Aliases folder.
2 Click the Add Alias button.
3 In the "New Alias " dialog box, enter an alias name. (For example, if the list name is
Parrots, you might set up an alias named Parrots_add.
4 Select the Program alias type.
5 Click OK.
6 In the Resolves to box, enter the alias properties using the following format: imailsrv -add domain listname
For example: imailsrv -add exotic.birds.com Parrots
Then, to subscribe a user by forwarding:
Forward a message from the user to the alias (Parrots_add), and the original sender of the message will be subscribed.
239
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Sending Mail to a List
List subscribers can send a message to the list by addressing it to the name of the list-server mailing list. For example, to send a message to the "beer" list on domain.com:
Subject: India Pale Ale
... body of message ...
When the list receives a message it is re-sent to all subscribers or it is archived to the digest and resent to the list in the digest.
Related Topics
Requesting and Subscribing to List Information (on page 240)
Requesting and Subscribing to List Information
In order for users to get information about lists on a particular mail host or to subscribe to lists on a particular mail host, users must send a request addressed to [email protected]
(where domain.com is the name of the mail host) and (when appropriate) include a list name in the body of the message. This e-mail address is a built-in IMail alias that lets users:
Get general help about the list server for a particular mail host
Get specific help about a particular list
Get a list of all the list-server mailing lists available on a particular mail host
Get a list of all the subscribers to a particular list
Subscribe to a subscriber list
Unsubscribe from a subscriber list
Get a digest of messages sent to the list
The following example request commands assume there is a list named "beer" on a mail domain named domain.com.
Requesting List Information
The commands for requesting list information are as follows:
1
Help.
To get general help from the list server:
Subject: help
2
Help [listname. To get help for a specific list:
240
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Subject: help beer
3
List.
To get the names of the list-server mailing lists on the IMail Server:
Subject: list
4 List [listname]. To get a list of users subscribed to a specific list:
Subject: list beer
Subscribing and Unsubscribing to a List or Digest
The commands for subscribing and unsubscribing to lists or list digests are as follows:
1
Subscribe.
To subscribe to a specific list:
Subject:
Subscribe beer Fred Farkle
2
Unsubscribe.
To unsubscribe to a specific list:
TO: imailsrv@ domain.com
Subject:
Unsubscribe beer Fred Farkle
3
Set mode digest listname.
To receive a digest of messages sent to the list:
Subject: set mode digest beer
4
Set mode standard listname.
To cancel digest mode and receive messages as they are sent to the list:
Subject: set mode standard beer
Local List Administrator
How to get here
The list administrator can modify list properties, add and delete list users, and edit all related files, such as the Syntax Message, No List Message, Help Message, and the Subscribe
Message.
241
IMail v12 Administrator Help
On a moderated list, if the list administrator is also the list owner (on page 242) (a.k.a. List
Owner's Email Address), then the list administrator will also be the list moderator.
If a list is moderated, the list owner is known as a "moderator."
The moderator is the only one who can post to a moderated list. (The moderator receives all messages to the list, before they are posted; the moderator can then review the content of the message and then decide to post it or not.)
The list administrator can be a local list administrator, which is set in the Standard List
Settings section of the List Administration page in the Administrator's Local Username box. A list administrator can also be a Domain Administrator, who can administer any
list-server mailing list on the mail domain (see User Properties (on page 145) page).
account can be set up to be the list owner in order to hide the identity of the list administrator or to give the impression of more people being involved in the list management.
List Owner
This is the full e-mail address of the mail account that receives all messages (such as
Subscribe and Unsubscribe requests) to the list. It is also the account from which help messages are sent and to which error messages are sent.
On a moderated list, the list owner is also known as the moderator.
If a list is moderated, the list owner is known as a "moderator."
The moderator is the only one who can post to a moderated list. (The moderator receives all messages to the list, before they are posted; the moderator can then review the content of the message and then decide to post it or not.)
The list owner and list administrator (on page 216) are usually the same person, but a
"dummy" user account can be set up to be the list owner in order to hide the identity of the list administrator. There can be only one list owner per list.
List Moderator
If a list is moderated, the list owner is known as a "moderator."
The moderator is the only one who can post to a moderated list. (The moderator receives all messages to the list, before they are posted; the moderator can then review the content of the message and then decide to post it or not.)
LDAP Settings
How to get here
242
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Use the LDAP Settings page to configure host options for OpenLDAP. This information is necessary for an LDAP client to edit the LDAP database. It is not necessary to enter an ID or password if you only want to view the OpenLDAP data.
Domain: Shows the current selected domain. From the drop down you can pick any of the domains available to this administrative user account.
LDAP Settings
LDAP Admin ID. Displays the LDAP administrator ID for the e-mail domain. This information is auto-populated. The administrator ID cannot be an IMail user ID.
Password. Enter the LDAP administrator password.
Confirm Password. Enter the password a second time to confirm the original password. The two password entries must match in order for the value to be saved. user IDs only that are stored in the Windows registry. First try synchronizing the LDAP database to resolve any problems. importation, we highly recommend that you change it as soon as possible after completing setting up LDAP.
Important: You can also use the iLDAP.exe utility (on page 401) to Init or Sync a specified
LDAP domain or all the LDAP domains. This utility can be used in the case when the Web
Administrator does not properly Init or Sync all the LDAP domains on a server. This issue sometimes occurs on servers running Microsoft Windows 2003 machines with over 30 domains.
LDAP Actions
Init LDAP (Initialize the LDAP database). Click to Initialize the LDAP database
created for the current e-mail domain by the LDAP server (on page 395).
Sync LDAP (Synchronize the LDAP database). Click to synchronize the LDAP database. Synchronizing removes multiple database entries, deletes old accounts, and adds new accounts.
Save. Click to save settings. An "Update Successful" message and the time of the update appear.
Related Topics
About LDAP Server (on page 395)
LDAP Service Settings (on page 396)
LDAP User Information (on page 172)
243
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Populating the LDAP Database Using Ldaper.exe (on page 400)
Init & Sync LDAP DB - iLDAP.exe utility (on page 401)
Inbound / Outbound Rules
Delivery rules are used to direct mail based on the contents of the To, From, Sender,
Subject, message Header, or the message Body fields.
Rules are helpful in filtering out spam and emails that contain certain types of attached files.
You can also use rules to direct mail, such as a newsletter, into a specific mailbox.
IMail Administrator supports the following two types of delivery rules:
Inbound Delivery Rules (on page 246). Inbound Delivery Rules apply to incoming
mail that is sent by a non-local user. These rules can be created at three levels: e-mail domains, individual users, and list-server mailing lists.
Outbound Delivery Rules (on page 247). Outbound delivery rules filter messages
that are sent out by local users through IMail Server and can be created only at the domain level.
Both Inbound and Outbound rules support multiple rule conditions. Delivery rules can also be used in conjunction with forwarding or the Auto Responder to re-route mail from one user to another. For example, a system administrator could route messages containing particular words to a reviewer.
Related Topics
How Delivery Rules are stored and processed (on page 244)
Delivery Rule Syntax (on page 257)
Setting Inbound Delivery Rules for IMail Domains (on page 246)
Setting Outbound Delivery Rules for IMail Domains (on page 247)
Setting Inbound Delivery Rules for IMail Users (on page 175)
Setting Inbound Delivery Rules for IMail Lists (on page 228)
Storing Search String in an External Text File (on page 255)
Examples of Delivery Rules (on page 262)
How Rules are Stored and Processed
All inbound rules are stored in the rules.ima file. Since inbound rules can be created for mail domains, users, and mailing lists, there can be multiple rules.ima files on your IMail
Server. The location of the rules.ima
file differs depending on whether the rule is for a mail domain, a user, or a list server mailing list.
244
IMail v12 Administrator Help
For a mail domain, the rules.ima
file is located in the mail domain's top folder.
For a user, the rules.ima
file is located in the user's folder.
For a list server mailing list, the rules.ima
file is stored in the list's folder.
Outbound delivery rules are stored in the orules.ima file. Since outbound rules can only be created for mail domains, the orules.ima
file is located in the mail domain's folder. If you have more than one mail domain on your IMail Server, you may have multiple orules.ima
files, one file for each host.
IMail Server reads the rules.ima
and orules.ima
files during the delivery process. The rule files for the virtual domain are evaluated first, then the rules for users and lists. For more
information, see IMail Processing Order (on page 28).
Any rules.ima or orules.ima
file can be copied to other directories. For example, if you create inbound delivery rules for one user, you can copy the rules.ima file to the directories of other users to apply the same rules to them.
Related Topics
Overview of Mail Delivery Rules (on page 244)
Storing Search Strings in an External Text File (on page 255)
Using IMail Rules to Filter Spam
Delivery rules are powerful for filtering spam because they offer more options for processing messages than the anti-spam components. When using the anti-spam components, if a message is identified as spam, you can delete it, forward it to an e-mail address, or insert an
X-Header. When using delivery rules to process a message, you can choose to Delete,
Forward, Move to Mailbox, Copy, or Bounce messages. Delivery rules can be set up at the e-mail domain and user levels.
If a message matches entries in the blacklists or fails a verification check, an X-Header is inserted into the message header. Additionally, phrase filtering and statistical filtering can be configured to insert X-Headers. If you want to filter a message with an X-Header, you can set up a rule to search for one of the X-Headers. If a message is trapped by a rule, it is immediately processed according to the action specified in the rule. spam, so that you can evaluate the messages that are trapped to ensure that no legitimate mail gets caught by mistake.
Example 1: Bouncing spam messages (on page 58)
245
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Example 2: Filtering messages listed in a blacklist for a specific reason (on page 98)
Example 3: Sending spam to a specific folder in a user's account (on page 264)
Example 4: Receiving Mailing Lists and Newsletters that are identified as spam (on page 265)
Related Topics
Delivery Rules Overview (on page 244)
Adding a Rule Condition (on page 178)
Spam X-Header Explanations (on page 351)
Inbound Delivery Rules for Domains
How to get here
Use the Inbound delivery rules page to sort incoming mail messages for the mail domain by adding new inbound rules, editing, deleting, moving inbound rule evaluation priority up or down, and setting actions to take on a message that matches the rule criteria.
The Inbound Rules list displays information about each of the active inbound rules for the selected mail domain. The inbound delivery rules for a mail domain are stored in the rules.ima
file, located in
...\IMail
domain top directory, for the primary domain, and under
...\IMail\DomainName
for all non-primary domains.
Note: Rules are processed in the order in which they appear in the Rules list.
Inbound Rules
Domain: Shows the current selected domain. From the drop down you can pick any of the domains available to this administrative user account.
Rules List
Name list. Click a rule name to select and update the conditions and settings.
Action. Displays the action to take on a message that matches the rule condition criteria.
Conditions. Displays the conditions selected for each rule.
Filename. Displays the name of the external rule condition file if it is used. See Storing
Search Text in an External Text File (on page 255).
Destination. Displays the mailbox or e-mail address to forward messages to that match the rule condition criteria. A Destination is only available when Move to
Mailbox or Forward are selected in the Action Type list (on page 249).
Add. Click Add to create a new mail domain rule. For more information, see Adding Inbound
Delivery Rules for Domains (on page 249).
246
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Edit. Select a rule and click Edit, or double click a rule, to modify a rule.
Move Up. Select a rule and click Move Up to move the rule processing order to a higher priority for e-mail filtering. Rules are processed in the order in which they appear in the Rules list.
Move Down. Select a rule and click Move Down to move the rule processing order to a lower priority for e-mail filtering.
Delete. Select a rule that you want to delete from the Inbound Rules list, then click Delete to delete the rule.
Related Topics
Overview of Mail Delivery Rules (on page 244)
Adding an Inbound Rule Condition (on page 178)
Creating an Outbound Rule for a Domain (on page 247)
How Delivery Rules are stored and processed (on page 244)
Storing Search Strings in an External Text File (on page 255)
Adding Multiple Conditions to Rules (on page 178)
Bouncing spam messages (on page 58)
Outbound Delivery Rules for Domains
How to get here
Use Outbound delivery rules to filter messages that are being sent through IMail Server to a non-local address. Outbound delivery rules can only be created for IP domains.
Note: Outbound rules cannot be created for virtual domains. Virtual domains will follow the outbound rules of the IP address that it is bound to.
Use the Outbound Rules page to add new outbound rules, edit outbound rules, delete outbound rules, move outbound rule evaluation priority up or down, and add and set actions to take on a message that matches the rule criteria.
247
IMail v12 Administrator Help
The Outbound Rules list displays information about each of the active outbound rules for the selected mail domain. The outbound delivery rules for a mail domain are stored in the o rules.ima
file, located in ...\IMail domain top directory, for the primary domain, and under ...\IMail\DomainName for all non-primary domains.
Note: Rules are processed in the order in which they appear in the Rules list.
Outbound Rules
Domain: Shows the current selected domain. From the drop down you can pick any of the domains available to this administrative user account.
Rules List
Name list. Click a rule name to select and update the conditions and settings.
Action. Displays the action to take on a message that matches the rule condition criteria.
Conditions. Displays the conditions selected for each rule.
Filename. Displays the name of the external rule condition file if it is used. See Storing
Search Text in an External Text File (on page 255).
Destination. Displays the mailbox or e-mail address to forward messages to that match the rule condition criteria. A Destination is only available when Move to
Mailbox or Forward are selected in the Action Type list (on page 249).
Add. Click Add to create a new mail domain rule. For more information, see Adding Inbound
Delivery Rules for Domains (on page 249).
Edit. Select a rule and click Edit, or double click a rule, to modify a rule.
Move Up. Select a rule and click Move Up to move the rule processing order to a higher priority for e-mail filtering. Rules are processed in the order in which they appear in the Rules list.
Move Down. Select a rule and click Move Down to move the rule processing order to a lower priority for e-mail filtering.
Delete. Select a rule that you want to delete from the Inbound Rules list, then click Delete to delete the rule.
Related Topics
Storing Search Text in an External Text File (on page 255)
Delivery Rule Syntax (on page 257)
Adding Multiple Conditions to Rules (on page 178)
248
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Adding Rule for Domains
How to get here
Use the Rule Settings page to add new rule conditions, edit rule conditions, delete conditions, move rule condition evaluation priority up or down, add rule conditions, and set actions to take on a message that matches the rule condition criteria.
After you create a rule condition, the new Rule is placed at the bottom of the Rules list. Rules are identified in the list by their sequence in the list, for example (Rule 1, Rule 2; etc.).
Rule Name
Domain Name (Official Host Name or OHN). The current domain name used to address mail to the users on the mail domain is displayed. For example, company.com is the domain name in the address [email protected].
Rule Name. Enter the name for the rule.
Conditions
Use conditions from an external file. Select to use an external file that includes rule conditions. For more information, see Storing Search String in an External Text File (on
Use conditions from this table. Select to use rule conditions set from the options on the
Rule Settings page.
Field. Select the message field to be filtered: From Address, To, Subject, Sender,
Body, or Header.
Comparison. Displays Contains when the delivery rule filter messages contain the search text. Displays Does Not Contain when the delivery rule filter message does not contain the search text.
Search Text. Displays the search criterion that is used in the rule condition.
Match Case. Displays Yes or No to indicate whether the search text must match the text case used in the Search Text condition.
Add Condition... Click Add to create a new rule condition (on page 178).
To add more than one condition to a rule, create the first condition, then click:
Add AND/OR... to create the second condition as you did the first. For more
information, see Adding Multiple Conditions to Rules (on page 178).
Note: The Add Condition button will only display on a new rule with no conditions, and after an AND/OR has been created.
Note: Be aware, that a rule cannot be saved when an AND/OR exists without a condition.
Edit. Select a condition and click Edit or double click to modify a condition.
Delete. Select a condition that you want to delete from the Conditions list, then click
Delete to delete the condition.
249
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Move Up. Select a condition and click Move Up to move the condition processing order to a higher priority for e-mail filtering. Conditions are processed in the order in which they appear in the Conditions list.
Move Down. Select a condition and click Move Down to move the condition processing order to a lower priority for e-mail filtering. Conditions are processed in the order in which they appear in the Conditions list.
Action
Action Type. Select an action to take if a rule traps a message that meets the rule criteria:
Move to Mailbox. Moves the message to the user’s mailbox specified in the Target box. If the mailbox does not exist, it is created. The default mailbox is "bulk". A POP3 user will see this mailbox only if he logs on to this mailbox using the format userid- mailbox
. By default, if nothing is entered into the text box, messages meeting the rule criteria will be sent to the user's Main mailbox.
Forward to Address. Forwards the message to an e-mail address. Enter an e-mail address to forward mail to in the Target box. You must enter the full e-mail address, such as [email protected].
Delete. Immediately deletes the message.
Copy. Delivers the message to its intended recipient as well as copies it to an additional address that you specify in the Target box.
Bounce. Sends the message back to the sender without being processed.
Target. Enter the name of the user's mailbox or e-mail address to forward the message to which matches the rule condition criteria. If you enter a mailbox that does not exist, one is created. A POP3 user will see this mailbox only if he logs on to this mailbox using the format userid-mailbox. By default, if nothing is entered in the text box, messages meeting the rule criteria are sent to the user's Main mailbox.
Save. Click Add to save changes.
Cancel. Click Cancel to exit without saving changes.
Related Topics
Overview of Mail Delivery Rules (on page 244)
Adding a Rule Condition (on page 178)
Creating an Outbound Rule for a Host (on page 247)
How Delivery Rules are stored and processed (on page 244)
Delivery Rule Syntax (on page 257)
Storing Search String in an External Text File (on page 255)
Adding Multiple Conditions to Rules (on page 178)
250
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Adding a Rule Condition
Use this pop-up dialog to create a rule condition.
Define Condition
Where. Select the message field that you want to filter: From, To, Subject, Sender,
Body, or Header.
Comparison.
Contains. Select to have the delivery rule filter messages that have this search text.
Does Not Contain. Select to have the delivery rule filter messages that do not have the search text.
Search Text. Enter search text that contains the text you want to search. Enter the search text by doing one or more of the following:
Enter the literal text that you want to search for. For example, if you want to find the word "jazz", enter: jazz
Type search expressions and quantifiers as shown in text patterns (on page 260).
Paste a portion of a mail message that meets your search criteria. For example, you could copy and paste text such as "XMSMailPriority(High)" from the header of a message; this would search for High priority messages.
Match Case. Select to search for text that matches the case of the search text. To ignore the text case, clear Match Case.
Save. Click Save to add condition.
Cancel. Click Cancel to exit without saving changes.
Related Topics
Inbound Rules for Domains (on page 246)
Overview of Mail Delivery Rules (on page 244)
Delivery Rule Syntax (on page 257)
How Delivery Rules are Stored and Processed (on page 244)
Adding Multiple Conditions for Domains
You can create multiple conditions for both inbound and outbound rules. By using multiple conditions, you can often combine multiple rules into one, thus, saving time and creating a more compact rules file. Sometimes a rule with only one condition is adequate to fulfill rule filtering requirements. However, when you need to create more complex rules, you may want to use multiple conditions. For example, see Rule with Multiple Conditions Example (on
To add a rule with multiple conditions:
1 Follow the instructions to create a rule as described in Setting Inbound Rules for Domains
(on page 246) or Setting Outbound Rules for Domains (on page 247). After adding the first
rule condition, select the new rule condition.
2 Click Add AND/OR... This will bring a pop-up window allowing either
251
IMail v12 Administrator Help
selection of the "AND" button, meaning "ALL" the rule conditions must be met for the message to be trapped.
or selection of the "OR" button, meaning "ANY" one of the conditions must be met for the message to be trapped.
3 Create the second condition as you did the first. Continue adding conditions until you are satisfied with the rule.
4 Follow the instructions to set the rule actions as described in the Actions section of
Adding Inbound Rules for Domains (on page 249) or Adding Outbound Rules for Domains
5 When you are finished creating the rule, click Add to save your changes.
Rule with Multiple Conditions Example
If you want all e-mails from your supervisor containing information about "project updates" to be sent to a specific mailbox in your account, you would set a rule with two conditions:
1 The message must be from your supervisor; and
2 The message must contain the words "project updates" in the subject or message body of the e-mail.
The rules.ima format:
<BOSS>[email protected]!AND!B~project updates:BOSS
Where:
<BOSS>
!AND!
B~project updates
:BOSS
Rule Name
From Address must contain "[email protected]"
AND means all conditions must be true to be selected
Body of message must contain "project updates"
Mailbox name, that message will be forwarded to of user's account.
Attachment Blocking
How to get here
Use the Attachment Blocking page to specify types of attachments to block from incoming and outgoing e-mail messages and actions to take on blocked messages. Attachments are blocked based on message MIME types and filename types. In addition to selecting the types of message attachments to block, you can define actions to take on blocked messages.
An attachment blocking folder exists for each e-mail domain and the attachment blocking options can be based on the current e-mail domain or the primary e-mail domain settings.
Use the Users Attachment Blocking page to search for attachment blocking types in the selected domain, access and edit attachment blocking types, add new attachment blocking types, or delete attachment blocking types.
252
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Important: Remember to restart Queue Manager after making Attachment Blocking or
Blocking Message modifications.
Domain: Shows the current selected domain. From the drop down you can pick any of the domains available to this administrative user account. (Primary and non-primary IP'd domains only)
Use. Drop down menu.
No Filter. Select this option to disable all Attachment Blocking for this domain.
Current Domain. Set by Default. Only option when only a primary domain exists. For non-primary domains use this option if you would like the attachment blocking settings to be different than the primary domain.
Primary Domain. Select this option to allow the current non-primary domain to use the same attachment blocking settings as the primary domain.
Content. Attachment blocking types. See Adding Attachment Blocking Types (on
Type. Select from File name or MIME type.
Action. Select the action to take on a attachment blocking type match:
Replace Attachment to replace the attachment with a message that provides information about the blocked attachment.
Strip Attachment to remove the attachment without a message that provides information about the blocked attachment.
Enabled. Select to enable or disable rules that you have added to the attachment blocking settings, without having to remove the setting.
Add. Select to create a new attachment blocking type. For more information, see Adding
Attachment Blocking Rules (on page 254).
Edit. Select an attachment blocking type that you want to modify, then click Edit to modify an existing attachment type.
Delete. Select an attachment blocking type that you want to delete from the current domain, then click Delete to delete the type.
Attachment Blocking Message
The message box includes a default message that provides information about the attachment that has been removed. You can also create a custom message that replaces attachment body content that has been blocked.
When an attachment is blocked and the Replace Attachment option is selected in the
Action for match list (on the Add Blocker page (on page 254) accessed by clicking Add on the
Attachment Blocking page), a custom message is sent in the place of the attachment to the message recipient.
Use:
253
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Current Domain. Select this option to define attachment blocking messages specific to the current e-mail domain.
Primary Domain (default). Select this option to define attachment blocking messages based on the primary e-mail domain's message settings.
This message will replace the body of a blocked e-mail attachment:
Use the default message that is included in the message box or enter a custom message to send e-mail recipients when an attachment is blocked. You can include variables in the custom message:
%t to indicate the message type (MIME or filename)
%c to indicate the filename of the blocked attachment (if applicable)
The contents of the message box are saved in a file named ab-message.txt located in the appropriate e-mail domain's top directory. The message box text should only be edited from the Attachment Blocking Message tab and is limited to 924 characters.
Verbose Logging is selected on the SMTP Settings (on page 413) Page.
Related Topics
Adding Attachment Blocking Types (on page 254)
Blocking Message (on page 255)
Adding Attachment Blocking types
Use the Add Blocker page to set options for new attachment blocking types.
Type of Blocker list. Select the type of attachment to block: Filename or MIME .
Content to Search for. Select from the default file or MIME types or enter a custom file or MIME type that is not included in the list.
Filename. Default file types are: *.chm, *.cmd, *.com , *.cpl, *.crt, *.csh, *.exe, *.fxp,
*.hlp, *.hta, *.inf, *.ins, *.isp, *.js, *.jse, *.ksh, *.lnk, *.mda, *.mdb, *.mde, *.mdt, *.mdw,
*.mdz, *.msc, *.msi, *.msp, *.mst, *.ops, *.pcd, *.pif, *.prf, *.prg, *.reg, *.scf, *.scr, *.sct,
*.shb, *.shs, *.url , *.vb, *.vbe, *.vbs, *.wsc, *.wsf, and *.wsh.
MIME. Default MIME types are: application and image/jpeg.
Action for match list. Select the action to take on a attachment blocking type match:
Replace to replace the attachment with a message that provides information about the blocked attachment.
Strip to remove the attachment without a message that provides information about the blocked attachment.
Enable Blocker Now (selected by default). Select to enable or disable rules that you have added to the attachment blocking settings.
Add. Click Add to save changes.
254
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Cancel. Click Cancel to exit without saving changes.
The attachment blocking rule settings are saved in a file named
"ab.txt"
located in the appropriate e-mail domain 's top directory. In addition to adding attachment blocking rules from the Attachment Blocking page, you can edit the settings in the " ab.txt" file
.
Related Topics
Setting Attachment Blocking Options (on page 252)
Blocking Message
How to get here
The blocking message that a recipient will receive when a message of attachment has been blocked.
Domain: Shows the current selected domain. From this drop down you can switch to any of the domains available to this administrative user account.
Use. Drop down menu.
Current Domain. Set by Default. Only option when only a primary domain exists. For non-primary domains use this option if you would like the blocking message to be different than the primary domain.
Primary Domain. Select this option to allow the current non-primary domain to use the same blocking message as the primary domain.
Message. Text that will appear in the body of a blocked attachment.
Save. Click to save your settings.
Storing Search Strings in an External Text (.rul) File
If you need to frequently update and distribute the delivery rules search text, you can use external text files to store the search text. External files were designed to allow frequent updating of rules without creating a new rule.
Important: The following rules are required for external rules:
1. The External Rule file must exist in the same directory as the
"rules.ima"
or
"orules.ima"
file.
2. The External Rule file when referenced in the rule must not include the
".rul"
file extension.
3. The External Rule file must have a file extension of
".rul"
255
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Example:
(mortgage|loans|credit offer), where the pipes mean "or" and separate the conditions. Usage of the "and" condition is not permitted in a
".rul"
file. Also, the
".rul"
file must be located in the same directory as the
"rules.ima"
or
"orules.ima"
file.
To illustrate this, the administrator can use this method to catch mail from known spammers.
The administrator might create a text file named "spam1.rul". Each time a new spammer address is discovered, the administrator can add it to the " spam1.rul"
file. The
"rules.ima"
or
"orules.ima"
file can reference the text file named
"spam.rul"
. The procedure for storing search text in an external file is the same for Inbound and Outbound
rules. For more information, see External Text File Example (on page 256) and Rule Syntax (on
To create a delivery rule that references an external text file:
1 Select a mail domain, or the list that you want to create an external rule for.
2 Click either Inbound Rules or Outbound Rules, then click Add to create a new mail domain rule. The Rule Settings page appears. For more information, see Adding Inbound
Rule Conditions for Domains (on page 249) or Adding Outbound Rule Conditions for
Click Use conditions from an external file, then do one of the following:
Enter the name of the file in the second Search text box without the
".rul" extension.
Example: Select
"rulefilename"
where
"rulefilename"
is the name of the
".rul"
file you want to reference.
If the external text file does not exist, enter a new, unique name for the
".rul"
file.
Do not enter the file extension .rul because IMail will append it to the filename you enter.
1 Click Edit to open and edit the rule file in Windows Notepad (or your default text editor).
If the rules file does not exist, one will be automatically created. For information about
creating the search text, see Rule Syntax (on page 257).
2 Click Save to save the rule.
Related Topics
External Text File Example (on page 256)
Overview of Mail Delivery Rules (on page 244)
Delivery Rule Syntax (on page 257)
External Text File Example
To search all new message Headers with conditions from external file
"spam.rul"
and to send to mailbox
"spambox"
:
256
IMail v12 Administrator Help
<Rule 1>H~:spam:spambox
Note: The reference to
:spam
is referring to an external file
"spam.rul"
that must exist in the same directory as the "rules.ima" file.
The external file "spam.rul" contains the following conditions word1|word2|word3|word4|word5
Where word1 or word2 or word3 or word4 or word5 would return a true condition and the message would be moved to the
"spambox"
mailbox.
Important:
.rul
file name (in this example, spambox). The IMail
Server reads the rules.ima
file and looks for the referenced spam.rul file at the same location as the rules.ima file.
Related Topics
Storing Search Text in an External Text File (on page 255)
Add/Edit Rule Condition (on page 178)
Rules Syntax
Related Topic:
Condition and Quantifier Syntax (on page 259)
When you create a inbound or outbound rules, the rule is entered in the rules.ima (inbound) or orules.ima (outbound) file. Following are examples of the rule syntax for both a single condition and multiple condition rule and explanations of each rule element.
Note: The following characters: {} () | * + , . : \ []^$ require an escape "\" to allow being used in a search string in a rule. If you want to use one of these characters in a search string, precede it with the escape.
Example: To search for a plus sign, enter \+ in the search string.
Single Condition Rule
Syntax:
257
IMail v12 Administrator Help
quantifier (on page 259) : mailbox name
Example:
The following represents the syntax for a single condition rule as it appears in the rules.ima file.
Explanation of Rule:
H
~ free quote
: deleted items
If the Header of the message (From, To, Sender, Subject, Cc ) contains the words "free quote" send to the mailbox named deleted items
Multiple Condition Rule
Syntax:
!AND!/!OR!
quantifier (on page 259) : mailbox name
Example:
258
IMail v12 Administrator Help
The following represents the syntax for a multiple condition rule as it appears in the rules.ima file.
Explanation of Rule:
S
~
B
~ weight loss
!OR! weight loss
:
Trash
If the Subject of the message contains the words "weight loss" or the Body of the message contains the words "weight loss" send to the mailbox named Trash
Condition and Quantifier Syntax
Condition contains does not contain equals does not equal
Quantifier
Zero or more
One or more
Exactly 100
Expression
~
!~
=
!=
Expression
*
+
{100}
259
IMail v12 Administrator Help
At least n1, but not more than n2 (where n1 and n2 are number)
Related Topic:
{n1,n2}
Text Patterns
Text Pattern Expression
Any character . (period)
Any of the values separated by vertical bars within parentheses: the vertical bar represents "or"
(this\that\other)
Any word character {a-z,A-Z, 0-9}
Any non-word character
Any digit {0-9}
Any non-digit
\w
\W
\d
\D
Any white space {spaces and/or tabs and/or carriage returns} \s
Any non-white space
Any punctuation character
Any non-punctuation character
\S
\p
\P
Note: The following characters have special meaning in a rule:
{} () | * + , . : \ [ ] ^ $
If you want to use one of these characters in a search string, precede it with a backslash. For example, to search for a plus sign, enter \+ in the search string
260
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Related Topic:
Condition and Quantifier Syntax (on page 259)
Message Area
Message Area
From
Subject
Sender
To
Entire header (everything preceding the body)
Entire body of message
Related Topic:
Condition and Quantifier Syntax (on page 259)
T
H
B
S
N
Representation
F
Example for Entering Rules in the Rules.ima File
In This Section
Examples of Delivery Rules (on page 262)
Sending to Specific Folder for User (on page 264)
Receiving Mailing Lists and Newsletters that are Identified as Spam (on page 265)
Determining Which Rule Trapped a Message (on page 266)
261
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Examples of Delivery Rules
Inbound delivery rule for a host. A school administrator can set up an inbound delivery rule that scans for offensive language in mail messages and deliver such messages to a special user account that can be reviewed by a faculty member. Example
Outbound delivery rule for a host. A school administrator can set up an outbound delivery rule that will scan for offensive language or content in mail messages that are being sent out
through IMail Server by a local user. Example (on page 264)
Inbound delivery rule for a list-server mailing list. A system administrator can set up an inbound delivery rule for a list-server mailing list to scan the body of all messages addressed to the list and scan for language that indicates that the e-mail came from a spammer or bulk mailer. If such messages are found, they can be deleted. For example, the rule can search for one of the following text strings:
to be removed from any future mailings
please respond with the word "remove" in the subject line
advertise with bulk e-mail
bulk friendly
An inbound delivery rule for an individual user. You could set up an inbound delivery rule for a sporting goods salesman to have all messages with baseball, softball, bat, base, homerun, or cap in the Subject line be automatically placed in his mailbox named Baseball. Example
An Inbound delivery rule combined with the Info Manager. You could set up an inbound delivery rule to forward all mail containing the phrase "send info" to a particular mailbox named Requests in a user account named Sales. Then, you could set up the Info Manager to
3
Enter the following rule into the e-mail domain 's rules.ima file:H~(word1|word2|word3)!OR!
B~(word1|word2|word3):spamboxH~(word1|word2|word3)!OR!
B~(word1|word2|word3):spamboxNote: Replace word 1, word 2, and word 3 with the offensive words you want to search for. The vertical bar represents "or", therefore, this rule will search for word 1, or word 2, or word 3.If you do not want the user to access spambox because you want to monitor the mail yourself (as the mail administrator), put a forward ...
4
Example for entering rules in the rules.ima fileThe following rule will search the Subject field for baseball or base or bat or cap or homerun or softball and upon a match will send the message to the user's "baseball" mailbox.S!(baseball|base|bat|cap|homerun|softball):baseball
262
IMail v12 Administrator Help
send out a generic response and also forward the mail to your company’s Sales Manager.
Example
Related Topics
Example for Entering Inbound Rules in the Rules.ima file
Enter the following rule into the e-mail domain 's rules.ima
file:
H~(word1|word2|word3)!OR! B~(word1|word2|word3):spambox
H~(word1|word2|word3)!OR! B~(word1|word2|word3):spambox
The vertical bar represents "or", therefore, this rule will search for word 1, or word 2, or word
3.
If you do not want the user to access spambox because you want to monitor the mail yourself
(as the mail administrator), put a forward file in EACH user's folder. This file can be created in
Windows Notepad and must match the name of the sub-mailbox you define in your rule. For example, spambox.fwd.
In the spambox.fwd file, only include the e-mail account that you want the filtered message to go to. For example, if you forward the messages to an "abuse" account, your spambox.fwd file will contain the following: [email protected].
you name the text file with the .fwd suffix instead of the .txt suffix.
Example 4 for Entering Inbound Rules in the Rules.ima file
Enter the following rule or rules in the list's rules.ima
file:
B~to be removed from future mailings:NUL
B~respond with the word "remove" in the subject line:NUL
B~advertise with bulk email:NUL
B~bulk friendly:NUL
5
Enter the following rule into the e-mail domain 's rules.ima file:H~(word1|word2|word3)!OR!
B~(word1|word2|word3):spamboxH~(word1|word2|word3)!OR!
B~(word1|word2|word3):spamboxNote: Replace word 1, word 2, and word 3 with the offensive words you want to search for. The vertical bar represents "or", therefore, this rule will search for word 1, or word 2, or word 3.If you do not want the user to access spambox because you want to monitor the mail yourself (as the mail administrator), put a forward ...
263
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Example for Entering Rules in the Rules.ima File
Example for entering rules in the rules.ima file
The following rule will search the Subject field for baseball or base or bat or cap or homerun or softball and upon a match will send the message to the user's "baseball" mailbox.
S!(baseball|base|bat|cap|homerun|softball):baseball
Example for Entering Outbound Rules in the Orules.ima file
Enter the following rule in the mail domain's orules.ima
file:
H~(word 1|word 2)!OR!B~(word 1|word 2):[email protected]
Replace word 1 and word 2 with the offensive language you want to search for. This rule sends any outgoing message that contains word 1 or word 2 to an account named [email protected]
.
Sending spam to a specific folder in a user account
You can allow your users to manage their own spam by directing all messages that are identified as spam into a folder for the user account. The user can then delete the ones that are spam, notify you of any false positives, or set up a forward file that will move specific messages into their Inbox.
To create a rule that moves spam into a specific sub mailbox:
1 Make sure that all of the anti-spam features are setup with the Insert X-Header action to be taken when e-mail is determined to be spam. For more information, see Setting
Inbound Delivery Rules for IMail Domains (on page 228).
2 Click on an e-mail domain's Inbound Rules page, then click Add. Enter the following rule parameters:
Field: Header
Comparison: Contains
Search Text: X-IMAIL-SPAM
1 Click Add. The new rule is added to the list of rules.
Select the rule you just added.
1 On the Action Type list, select Move to Mailbox.
2 In the Target (address) box, enter the mailbox name that you want to send the message to. For example, "Spam".
3 Click Save.
264
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Receiving Mailing Lists and Newsletters that are identified as spam
Sometimes, mailing lists and newsletters are identified as spam because they are sent from bulk mailers. If you do not want to place the domain from which a mailing list/newsletter is sent into the trusted addresses list, you can set up a rule to deliver the message anyway.
If there is already a rule setup to direct spam into a specific user’s mailbox (for example,
Spam), you can have the user create a rule as described below:
Look at the header of one of your mailing list/newsletter messages that was identified as spam. Find the X-IMAIL-SPAM line. Copy and paste this entire line into the text area for a rule.
For more information, see Setting Inbound Delivery Rules for IMail lists.
Create a Host Rule to Place Spam in a Specific Mailbox for Users
To set up a host rule to place all messages identified as spam in a specific mailbox, click here
Creating a User Rule to Place Spam in the Main Mailbox
1 Look at the header of one of your mailing list/newsletter messages that was identified as spam. Find the X-IMAIL- SPAM line. Copy and paste this entire line into the text area for a rule. For example, if a mailing list/newsletter contains the following X-Header :
X-IMAIL-SPAM-DNSBL: (fiveten,7799652 ,127.0.0.4), place the entire line into a rule as follows:
2 Make sure that all of the anti-spam features are setup with the Insert X-Header action to be taken when e-mail is determined to be spam. For more information, see Getting to
IMail Inbound Rules Options.
3 Click on an e-mail domain's Inbound Rules page, then click Add. Enter the following rule parameters:
Field: Header
Comparison: Contains
4 Search Text: [paste the X-Header from the message]
Click Add. The new rule is added to the list of rules.
5 Select the rule you just added.
6 On the Action Type list, select Move to Mailbox.
7 In the Target (address) box, enter "Inbox". The mailing list/newsletter will be redirected from the "spam" mailbox to the "Inbox" mailbox. it matches a blacklist, this does not mean that the mailing list/newsletter will not be caught by another anti-spam component. It is possible that occasionally the list will be identified as spam by content filtering because the content is similar to spam. If this happens create another rule with the new X-Header.
8 Click Save.
265
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Determining which Rule Trapped a Message
If a message is trapped by a rule, an X-IMail-Rule line is placed in the message header to allow you to know which rule caught the message. If multiple rules trap a message, only the first rule will be placed in the X line in the header. The X-IMail-Rule line will also contain up to 30 characters of the message data that caused the message to be trapped. Message data will not be included in the X-IMail- Rule line when a message is trapped by a negative rule (does not contain or does not equal).
If a domain rule traps the message, the X-IMail-Rule header will be added to all local deliveries. If a message is trapped by a user's rule, the X-IMail-Rule header will only be added to deliveries to the user. When a message that is destined for local delivery is trapped by an outbound rule, a line with the rule causing the trap will be written to the Queue file. When this message is delivered, and that line exists in the Queue file, it will be written as an
X-IMail-Rule line in the message header. Outbound messages that are not delivered locally will not have an X-IMail-Rule line in the header.
Example X-IMail-Rule line:
X-IMail-Rule: S~ Company Newsletter: Newsletter-Monthly Company Newsletter
Rule Section
S
~
Company Newsletter
Explanation
If the Subject of the message
Contains
Rule Text
:
Newsletter
- Monthly Company
Newsletter send to
Name of the mailbox to send the message to
Message text that caused the message to be trapped.
Disabling the X-IMail-Rule Header
If you want to disable the X-IMail-Rule header, so that it does not appear in the message header, you must add an entry to the registry. In the registry, go to
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail\Global and add the entry BlockRuleHdr with a non-zero value. This is a server wide setting and affects all domain and user rules on the server. If BlockRuleHdr is not present or is set to zero, then the X-IMail-Rule header is enabled and will be displayed in the message header. the X-IMail-Rule line is 199.
266
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Tip: The maximum number of characters that will be displayed in the message data section of the X-IMail-Rule line is 30. The Maximum length of any X- IMail-Rule line is 250 characters.
Because IMail Server inserts the rule and 30 characters of the message in the header, special care should be taken if a trapped message is then forwarded to another recipient. Some e-mail clients will include the header in the forwarded message. If this occurs and you have a rule set up to search the body of the message for the same text, then the message will be trapped again.
White List Administration
How to get here
Use White List Administration to create a list of IP, domain, and e-mail addresses that can be trusted and upon which no spam tests are performed.
Domain: Shows the current selected domain. From the drop down you can pick any of the domains available to this administrative user account.
Apply to Anti-spam. Select the check box to compare messages that are identified by content filters to the trusted addresses in the IP Addresses and/or Address
Ranges to Trust list. Messages received from these trusted addresses will not be processed as spam.
Apply Domains/E-mail Addresses to Content Filtering Only. This option is available only when Apply to Anti-spam is selected. Select the check box to allow messages from addresses in the Domains/E-mail Addresses to Trust list to only bypass content filtering. If this option is cleared, messages from addresses in the
Domains/E-mail Addresses list will bypass both content and connection filtering.
Apply to Attachment Blocking. Select the check box to compare messages with attachment blocking settings to the trusted addresses in the IP Addresses and/or
Address Ranges to Trust list. Messages received from these trusted addresses will not have file attachments blocked.
IP Addresses and/or Address Ranges to Trust
IP Addresses. This column lists the IP Addresses to trust.
Net Mask. This column lists the Address Ranges to trust for the corresponding IP
Address /
Add. To add a new IP address to the white list.
Edit. Select address to modify, and click the Edit button.
Delete. To delete an existing address from the white list, select the address and click the Delete button.
267
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Examples for Trusted Addresses (on page 268).
Domains and/or E-mail Addresses to Trust
Domain or E-mail. This column lists the Domain or E-mail addresses to trust.
Add. To add a new domain or e-mail address to the white list.
Edit. Select address to modify, and click the Edit button.
Delete. To delete an existing domain or e-mail address from the white list, select the the address and click the Delete button.
Save. Click to to save your settings. An "Update Successful" message and the time of the update appear.
Related Topics
Expressing an IP Address Range with a Mask
(http://technet2.microsoft.com/windowsserver/en/library/ed02cb9b-0637-4b0f-9dc2-8d9571b89
60c1033.mspx?mfr=true)
Wild Card Examples for Trusted Addresses (on page 268)
Wild Card Examples for Trusted Addresses
The Wild Card capability for trusted domain addresses has been added to minimize multiple domain names that are within the same group. For security purposes this wild card capability requires a minimum of 2 levels to work correctly.
Example 1:
mail2.domain.com
mail3.domain.com
mail4.domain.com
Example 2:
work1.mail.domain.com work2.mail.domain.com work3.mail.domain.com
Replace with: *.mail.domain.com
268
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Examples that will NOT work:
*.com Requires a minimum of two levels
*h.domain.com Not designed with capability to split words
Realtime Domain Whitelists
How to get here
Domain: Shows the current selected domain. From the drop down you can pick any of the domains available to this administrative user account.
Whitelists. Name that the IMail Administrator assigns for his/her own identification.
This column displays all existing whitelists for the current domain. Click a whitelist to modify the whitelist options.
Type. This column displays the type of lookup that the whitelist performs.
Server. This column displays the domain name or IP address of the DNS server to contact for the corresponding whitelist's queries.
Tip: Leave the Server setting as an "*" unless otherwise specified by the whitelist instructions.
Query Domain. This column displays the domain that is queried for the corresponding whitelist.
Trusted. (Set by Default) This check box will allow the selected matched message to bypass the following validations.
DomainKeys
IP Reputation
Realtime Blacklists
Anti-spam Content Filtering and Premium Anti-spam (if installed)
Attachment Blocking (Optional Setting)
Note: Anti-virus products installed with your IMail Server will always check all messages.
Skip Content Filtering. (Set by Default when Trusted) This check box will allow the selected matched message to bypass Anti-spam Content Filtering and Premium
Content Filtering validations.
Skip Attachment Blocking. (Set by Default when Trusted) This check box will allow the selected matched message to bypass Attachment Blocking checks.
269
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Note: This check box can be unchecked when Trusted to give the IMail Administrators the flexibility to still check attachments from Trusted users.
Note: Matches made to a Realtime Domain Whitelist (using default settings) are assumed trusted and will bypass validation checks as specified.
Add. Click Add to create a new whitelist (on page 270) for the current domain. For
more information, see Adding a Realtime Whitelist (on page 100).
Delete. To delete a blacklist, select its corresponding check box, then click the Delete button.
Save. Click to save your settings.
Related Topics
Adding to Realtime Domain WhiteList (on page 270)
Setting Server Level Realtime Whitelists (on page 98)
Understanding Realtime Whitelists (on page 102)
Adding to Realtime Domain Whitelist
How to get here
Before adding to the Realtime Whitelist for a domain, be sure that it has been added to the
system level Realtime Whitelist, found at System > Realtime Whitelists (on page 98).
Realtime Whitelist selection will only display items that are enabled. This option is set in the
System > RealTime Whitelist. By default all items added to the System > Realtime
Whitelist are enabled.
Note: Disabling an item in the System > Realtime Whitelist will automatically remove it from the Domain Realtime Whitelist. Should the item be enabled at a later date it will automatically re-enable the list in Domain Realtime Whitelist.
Caution: A match made to the Trusted Realtime Whitelist will automatically be deleted.
Creating a Realtime Whitelist
1 Click "Add" on the Domain Realtime Whitelists page, and a pop-up will display all enabled system level realtime whitelist that are currently available for the specified domain.
2 Select a Realtime Whitelist and click "OK". The selected Realtime Whitelist will appear on the Domain Realtime Whitelist page.
270
IMail v12 Administrator Help
3 The "Trusted" check box is checked by default.
4 Click "Save" to save the Realtime Whitelist to this domain.
Tip: To easily see all Realtime Whitelists that are Trusted, sort the "Trusted" column (click the column title).
Realtime Whitelist (Pop-up)
Realtime Whitelists. Select a Realtime Whitelist you want to add. This list is
maintained under System > Realtime Whitelists (on page 98).
Type. Displays the type of lookup that the whitelist will performs. This can be modified at the System > Realtime Whitelist page (ADDR, DNS, HELO, RHS).
Server. This column displays the domain name or IP address of the DNS server to contact for whitelist queries. This field contains an asterisk (*) by default, which indicates that the default IMail Server DNS is used for whitelist queries, where it relays the DNS query to the DNS server for the whitelist. Using the asterisk eliminates the need to enter the IP address or domain.
Query Domain. This column displays the domain to query in the zone file. This name usually matches the server domain name. However, sometimes a whitelist will contain multiple zones to query on the same server. When this happens, the server name and the query domain will be different. The only way to know this is to read the documentation for the whitelist being used.
OK. Click this button after you have made your selection.
Cancel. Click this button to cancel adding a trusted Realtime Whitelist.
Related Topics
Understanding Realtime Whitelists (on page 102)
Realtime Whitelists (Server Level) (on page 98)
Realtime Domain Whitelists (on page 269)
Peer List
How to get here
IMail Server lets you set up "peer" servers to allow users for a specific domain to be spread across multiple physical systems. This can be used when the mail traffic on your IMail Server becomes heavy enough to slow down mail processing. How much traffic your mail server can handle will depend on your system’s hardware configuration. See also How Peering Works (on
271
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Peer List displays all IP Addresses of other IMail Servers.
Domain. Shows the current selected domain. From the drop down you can pick any of the domains available to this administrative user account.
IP Address. Displays all IP addresses of other mail servers.
Note: Before you create the peer list, you need to set up the peer servers (on page 271). Once
set, then see Creating the Peer List (on page 272)
Do not enter IP addresses in the Domain Aliases box.
System Settings tab is empty when using peer lists.
Add. Click Add to create a new Peer List (on page 272).
Edit. To edit a Peer List, first select, then click Edit.
Delete. Select a Peer that you want to delete then click Delete.
Related Topics
How Peering Works (on page 273)
Example of Peering (on page 274)
Creating the Peer List (on page 272)
Creating Peer List
How to get here
Before you create the peer list, you need to set up the peer servers (on page 271). Once you
have done that, you set up the peer list as follows:
1 Enter the IP Address (not a virtual address) of an IMail Server that you want to peer with the current mail server into the text box at the bottom of the Peer List, then click Add.
2 Repeat above step until you have added all of the peer servers you want to include.
3 Repeat steps 1, and 2 on each mail domain server that will be used as a peer server.
need to enter only the other peers. Example (on page 274).
272
IMail v12 Administrator Help
4 On each peer mail server, make sure the primary domain (for example, ipswitch.net) is
the only entry in the Domain Aliases box on the Domain Properties page (on page 48).
This alias names the primary domain used to send and receive mail.
Do not enter IP addresses in the Domain Aliases box.
System Settings tab is empty when using peer lists.
Related Topics
How Peering Works (on page 273)
Setting Up Peer Servers (on page 271)
Example of Peering (on page 274)
Setting Up Peering
To add one or more peer servers for an IMail Server domain:
1 Install a licensed copy of IMail Server Version 8.1 or later on each computer that will function as a peer mail server.
2 In your Domain Name System (DNS) zone file, add MX records for the peer servers.
3 In the hosts file on each of the mail servers, make entries for all the other mail servers.
4 On each mail server, use IMail Administrator to set up the Peer List (on page 272).
Related Topics
How Peering Works (on page 273)
Creating the Peer List (on page 272)
Example of Peering (on page 274)
How Peering Works
Suppose you have two systems with IMail installed on each system and you set up the two systems as peer servers. Each system has a portion of the user database for a single mail host.
When mail is sent to an e-mail address, the sending server does a DNS lookup to get the mail domain name and address associated with the e-mail address. If the IMail Server that is handling mail for the message is configured for peering, mail comes in for a user on the mail domain and the mail is directed to one of the peer mail servers.
If the user is found on the peer server, the mail is delivered. If not, the peer server does an
"SMTP Verify" to see if the user exists on the other mail server. If the user is found in the user
273
IMail v12 Administrator Help
database, it forwards the mail. If either peer server is down, the other peer server receives and holds mail until the first server comes back up.
Note: When using peer servers, do not select the Disable SMTP "VRFY"Command on the
Services > SMTP tab. Peer servers need to use this command to verify a user that is on the other peer.
Related Topics
Setting Up Peer Servers (on page 271)
Creating the Peer List (on page 272)
Example of Peering (on page 274)
Example of Peering
Suppose you have one domain (called ipswitch.net) and three servers. All three servers accept incoming mail on the same priority and all have a portion of the user database. You would make the following entries in your DNS:
DNS entries: ipswitch.net
IN MX 10 mail1.ipswitch.net
IN MX 10 mail2.ipswitch.net
IN MX 10 mail3.ipswitch.net
Mail1 IN A 1.1.1.1
Mail2 IN A 2.2.2.2
Mail3 IN A 3.3.3.3
You create the following peer lists in the IMail Server software on the three servers:
Peer list on mail1:
2.2.2.2
3.3.3.3
274
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Peer list on mail2:
1.1.1.1
3.3.3.3
Peer list on mail3:
1.1.1.1
2.2.2.2
In the hosts file on each of the three servers, make the three entries:
1.1.1.1 mail1.ipswitch.net
2.2.2.2 mail2.ipswitch.net
3.3.3.3 mail3.ipswitch.net
On each of the three machines, make sure the domain (for example, ipswitch.net) is the only
entry in the Domain Aliases box on the Domain Properties page (on page 48). This alias
names the primary domain used to send and receive mail.
Do not enter IP addresses in the Domain Aliases box.
System Settings tab is empty when using peer lists.
275
CHAPTER 7
Anti-virus
In This Chapter
IMail Antivirus powered by BitDefender - Settings .............................. 276
IMail Anti-virus powered by Symantec - Settings ................................. 279
IMail Anti-virus powered by Commtouch - Settings ........................... 284
The IMail Administrator Help covers both versions of the IMail Anti-virus.
Please select the Anti-virus solution that is installed on your system.
Related Topic
Commtouch® Zero-Hour Virus Protection Filter (on page 205)
IMail Antivirus powered by BitDefender - Settings
How to get here
IMail Anti-virus powered by BitDefender®
Important for Upgraders. New automated features for virus definition updates have been added and enabled. Be aware that any manual schedule that has been previously setup will continue run.
Tip: It is up to the IMail Administrator to disable any manual schedules that were previously set.
"AVUpdate.exe"
is no longer required to update your virus definitions with IMail Server v11.01 or later. Queue Manager has been enhanced to handle all the virus definition updates without requiring a service restart.
BitDefender® Settings
276
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Enable Virus Scanning. Select this option to have the IMail Anti-virus Server scan messages for viruses.
Repair Infected Files. Select this option to attempt to repair a mail message that is infected. The infected portion is removed and a new file is created containing the repaired message. The initial infected file is deleted.
Enable Automatic Updates (On by default). New installs and upgrades this option is enabled. This setting controls the automatic scheduling for downloading virus definition updates.
Important: It is recommended to keep your Automatic Updates enabled to keep your virus definitions up to date.
Run Update Every 4 Hours (Set to 4 by default). Select how often you would like to check for BitDefender® definition updates.
Subscription Days Remaining. Number of days left before your license expires.
Last Updated. Date/Time of last BitDefender® virus definition update.
Note: This is the date/time of the last virus definition update that was available for download from BitDefender®. See the following registry key to see the last date/time an update was checked:
HKLM\Software\Ipswitch\IMail\Global\BitDefLastCheck
Update Now. This button will manually check for a virus definition update.
Infected File Actions that occur if IMail Anti-virus Server is unable to repair an infected file. The action also occurs if the Repair Infected Files option is cleared.
Delete File. Does not deliver the message and deletes it from the spool directory.
Bounce Message. Sends a bounce message back to the sender informing him/her that the message was not delivered.
Redirect Message. The infected message is redirected to the address entered into the Redirect Address box.
Enable either of the following notifications that will be sent for infected messages:
Alert Administrator. Select this option to send one e-mail (per infected message) to the e-mail address entered in the Alert Address box. The e-mail that is sent to the administrator contains the following information: sender, intended recipient, message ID, subject, virus detected, and the action taken.
Alert Recipients. Select this option to send an e-mail to the intended recipients informing them that the message was redirected or deleted.
Other Options
Definition Path. Directory name where BitDefender definitions are located. This folder is under the IMail directory by default.
277
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Update URL. The URL for BitDefender updates. AVupdate.exe will run automatically per the set schedule above.
Redirect Address. If you set the Infected File Action option to Redirect Message, enter the address where you want the infected messages to be sent.
Alert Address. If the Alert Administrator option is selected, enter an address in which you want to receive e-mail messages with details about infected files.
Save. Click Save to save your settings. An "Update Successful" message and the time of the update appear.
Related Topics
Overview of IMail Anti-virus powered by BitDefender® (on page 278)
Logging for IMail Anti-virus powered by BitDefender® (on page 279)
Overview of IMail Anti-virus powered by Bitdefender®
IMail Anti-virus powered by BitDefender® is equipped with cutting-edge proactive B-HAVE technology that represents the last minute alternative for advanced protection against malware. B-HAVE relies on a dynamic heuristic scanner especially engineered and designed to improve and enhance the current security technology, while also overcoming the architectural limitations inherent in many other dynamic solutions.
B-HAVE creates a virtual, isolated and self-contained computer, mimicking your system configuration. This environment represents the ideal location for applications’ and files’ threats investigation, because it ensures your computer is exposed to absolutely zero risk.
BitDefender® is one of the most comprehensive virus scanners available, and with its integration into IMail Server, you can be sure that your mail server will not be compromised.
IMail Anti-virus powered by BitDefender® works with IMail Server to find and repair infected messages before they get to your mail customers. IMail Anti-virus powered by BitDefender® searches all incoming and outgoing mail for viruses, worms, Trojan horses, and other destructive code. It does this by comparing all mail messages with a list of known virus definitions.
If IMail Anti-virus powered by BitDefender® for IMail Server detects a virus, it can attempt to repair the infected file, delete the message, or bounce the message back to the sender.
Related Topics
IMail Anti-virus powered by BitDefender® - Settings (on page 276)
Logging for IMail Anti-virus powered by BitDefender® (on page 279)
278
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Logging for IMail Anti-virus powered by BitDefender
IMail Anti-virus log for BitDefender® is named
"AVUpdate.log"
located in (default setup): c:\Program Files\Ipswitch\IMail\
"AVUpdate.log" sample log:
Logs Date / Time when
"AVUpdate.exe"
is started
Time Stamp - Checking for Updates
Time Stamp - Updates found, stopping Queue Manager and SMTPD32
Time Stamp - Installing updates
Time Stamp - Starting Queue Manager and SMTPD32
Time Stamp - Update complete
Note:
is a single file that constantly appends to itself. It is up to the IMail
Administrator to move it to a backup folder, and clear the current log.
Related Topics
Overview of IMail Anti-virus powered by BitDefender® (on page 278)
IMail Anti-virus powered by BitDefender® - Settings (on page 276)
IMail Anti-virus powered by Symantec - Settings
How to get here
IMail Anti-virus powered by Symantec™
Select the following options to configure the anti-virus server.
Enable Virus Scanning. Select this option to have your IMail Anti-virus powered by
Symantec™ Server scan messages for viruses.
Repair Infected Files. Select this option to attempt to repair a mail message that is infected. The infected portion is removed and a new file is created containing the repaired message. The initial infected file is deleted.
Pass File by Name. If IMail Anti-virus is installed on the same computer as IMail, select this option to increase performance. If IMail Anti-virus is installed on a remote server, do not select this option.
279
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Select one of the following Infected File Actions that occur if your IMail Anti-virus powered by Symantec™ Server is unable to repair an infected file. The action also occurs if the Repair Infected Files option is cleared.
Redirect Message. The infected message is redirected to the address entered into the Redirect Address box.
Bounce Message. Sends a bounce message back to the sender informing him/her that the message was not delivered.
Delete File. Does not deliver the message and deletes it from the spool directory.
Enable either of the following notifications that will be sent for infected messages:
Alert Administrator. (on page 282) Select this option to send one e-mail (per
infected message) to the e-mail address entered in the Alert Address box.
Alert Recipients. Select this option to send an e-mail to the intended recipients informing them that the message was redirected or deleted.
Other Options
Server IP Address. Enter the IP address of the computer that IMail Anti-Virus Server is installed on.
Server Port. Enter the port that you want IMail Anti-virus Server to run on. The default port is 7777. in the configuration file ( symcscan.cfg).
Redirect Address. If you set the Infected File Action option to Redirect Message, enter the address where you want the infected messages to be sent.
Alert Address. If the Alert Administrator option is selected, enter an address in which you want to receive e-mail messages with details about infected files.
Save. Click Save to save your settings. An "Update Successful" message and the time of the update appear.
Related Topics
Overview of IMail Anti-virus powered by Symantec™ (on page 280)
Overview of IMail Anti-virus powered by Symantec
IMail Server is equipped with state of the art anti-virus technology to provide increased security for your mail system. Symantec's ScanEngine is one of the most comprehensive virus scanners available, and with its integration into IMail Server, you can be sure that your mail server will not be compromised.
280
IMail v12 Administrator Help
IMail Anti-virus powered by Symantec™ searches all incoming and outgoing mail for viruses, worms, Trojan horses, and other destructive code. It does this by comparing all mail messages with a list of file extensions and known virus definitions.
It also uses heuristic technology to discover new viruses by searching for general characteristics of existing viruses. If it detects a virus, IMail Anti-virus powered by Symantec™ can attempt to repair the infected file, delete the message, or send a bounce message back to the sender. A log file entry is generated and an e-mail is sent to alert the administrator of the problem. In addition, the System Administrator can set a "Redirect Address" to which infected e-mail messages are sent. Optionally, the administrator can send a message to the intended recipients informing them that the message could not be delivered.
Anti-Virus Administration (Symantec)
You can administer IMail Anti-virus powered by Symantec™ from:
IMail Administrator. Click the IMail Administrator Anti-Virus tab. The Anti-Virus
Settings page opens. Use this page to enable virus scanning, set actions on infected files, configure the anti-virus server IP address and port (Symantec™ AV only), and redirect infected messages/files and alert e-mail addresses.
Symantec™ Anti-Virus Scan Engine Web Administrator. You can access
Symantec’s Scan Engine protocols and administration settings through Symantec™
Anti-Virus Scan Engine Web Administrator. You can access the Scan Engine Web
Administrator at the address entered in the Server IP Address on the IMail Anti-virus
powered by Symantec™ - Settings (on page 279) followed by :8004 (the default port for
the Scan Engine Web Administrator). For example, http://123.100.100.80:8004
-OR- by clicking the Symantec™ icon on the Anti-Virus Settings page. The default password for the Scan Engine Web Administrator is
"admin"
.
You can customize a number of anti-virus settings in the Anti-Virus Scan Engine Web
Administrator such as:
HTTP bind address for the IMail Anti-Virus powered by Symantec™ Server
HTTP port number that the IMail Anti-Virus powered by Symantec™ Server runs on
Scan Engine Web Administrator password
Type of information to log
For more information, click Help in the Symantec™ Anti-Virus Scan Engine Web
Administrator.
Related Topics
Updating Symantec™ Virus Definitions (on page 282)
Enabling Anti-Virus Logging (on page 282)
281
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Alert Administrator Email
The e-mail that is sent to the administrator contains the following information: sender, intended recipient, message ID, subject, virus detected, and the action taken.
Updating Symantec Virus Definitions
By default, Symantec™ LiveUpdate connects to the Symantec Web site to update the virus definitions every 2 hours. You can also use the Symantec™ Anti-Virus Scan Engine Web
) to manually update virus definition updates or schedule virus
definition updates to a specified time interval.
Scan Engine Web Administrator (on page
Enabling Symantec Anti-virus Logging
IMail Anti-virus Server logs error messages and files to the Windows Application Event Log.
However, logging is not enabled by default. If you want IMail Anti-Virus Server to log error messages, you must enable logging in Symantec™ Anti-virus Scan Engine Web Administrator
(on page
To log events to the Windows Application Event Log:
1 On the Symantec™ Anti-Virus Scan Engine administrative interface, in the left pane, click
Monitors.
2 On the Windows Logging list, select the appropriate logging level. The default logging level for the Windows Application Event Log is None.
3 To save your settings click on the save image located at the top left of the page:
4 For your changes to take effect be sure the service is restarted.
Related Topics
Viewing Log Files (on page 282)
Viewing Anti-virus Log Files
IMail Anti-virus Server logs to the Windows Event Viewer.
To view the Windows Log:
1 Open the Event Viewer (located in the Windows Control Panel, under Administrative
Tools).
282
IMail v12 Administrator Help
2 Under Log, click Application.
3 Click any CarrierScan Server event listed in the Application Log to view that log entry.
Error Codes in the SMTP Log
The table below contains possible error codes that will be used to identify failures in the IMail
Anti-virus scanning process. These error codes appear in log lines contained in the IMail SMTP
Log.
6
7
4
5
2
3
Error Codes
1 Failed to connect to IMail Anti-virus server.
A problem was encountered reading the file to be scanned.
The scan was aborted abnormally.
9
15
Function was called with an abnormal parameter.
Error occurred when attempting to receive repaired file
Memory allocation occurred.
Server could not access the file to be scanned.
Note: This error usually occurs for local scans when file permissions are set incorrectly or when the file is not in the path specified in the LocalFileScanDir parameter on the server.
The attempted repair failed. The message will be treated as an infected file.
You do not have a valid license for IMail Anti-virus. Scanning will abort.
Example Log Lines with Error Codes
08:23 10:39 SMTP-(00000164) Failed to initialize Virus Scanner, code=1
08:23 16:28 SMTP-(0000012E) Error From Virus Scanner, code=1
Understanding Anti-virus Entries in the Mail Queue
An anti-virus entry type has been added to the queue file for SMTP32. This entry line helps to identify the status of the virus scan for a particular message. The line will have a V in the first column, followed by a 1 or a 0. The following chart displays the possible queue entries regarding the anti-virus.
V1 Message has already been scanned.
V0
No entry
Message needs to be scanned.
Message needs to be scanned.
List Server Interaction
Since IMail Anti-virus scans all incoming and outgoing mail messages, special provisions apply concerning the list server. Normally, IMail Anti-virus would unnecessarily scan a list
283
IMail v12 Administrator Help
server message twice, once when the message comes in, and another time when the list server sends the message to the list. This would slow down the processing time.
Therefore, all messages destined for a list are marked as scanned (V1) before they are handed over to the list server. If you look in the queue at a list server message, it will always be labeled V1 (see chart above), no matter what stage the message is in. This tells IMail Server to skip the second scan since the file cannot be infected.
IMail Anti-virus powered by Commtouch - Settings
How to get here
IMail Anti-virus powered by Commtouch®
Enable Virus Scanning. Select this option to have the IMail Anti-virus Commtouch®
Server scan messages for viruses.
Updates and Licensing
Enable Automatic Updates (On by default). This option is enabled for new installs and upgrades . This setting controls the automatic scheduling for downloading virus definition updates.
Important: It is recommended to keep your Automatic Updates enabled to keep your virus definitions up to date.
Run Update Every 4 Hours (Set to 4 by default). Select how often you would like to check for Commtouch® definition updates.
Update Now. This button will manually check for a virus definition update.
Tip: Definition update logging is written to
"CommtouchAV YYYYMMDD.log"
located under the Log Directory path at System > System Settings > Log Directory. All other Commtouch
AV logging is written to the syslogs.
Subscription Days Remaining. Number of days left before your license expires.
Last Updated. Date/Time of last Commtouch® virus definition update.
Note: This is the date/time of the last virus definition update that was available for download from Commtouch®. See the following registry key to see the last date/time an update was checked:
HKLM\Software\Ipswitch\IMail\Global\CTAV\CTVirusDefsLastUpdated
284
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Tip: The Last Updated timestamp is the GMT date/time of the the last virus definition update from Commtouch®.
Action File Settings
Infected File Actions that occur if IMail Anti-virus Server is unable to repair an infected file.
Reject Message. Message is rejected and the sending message is returned a 550 error.
Maximum Message Size for In-Line Processing. (Default = 25MB) Available only with Rejecting Message. Messages under the Maximum Message Size with a detected virus will be rejected with a 550 error. Messages equal to or over the
Maximum Message Size will initially be sent a 250 message ok. At this point the message will be scanned and if a virus is detected the message will be deleted from the spool directory and redirected (if set).
Delete Message. Does not deliver the message and deletes it from the spool directory.
Redirect Message. The infected message is redirected to the address entered into the Redirect Address box.
Redirect Address. This e-mail address is required only with the selection of
Redirect Message.
Enable either of the following notifications that will be sent for infected messages
(not required):
Alert Administrator. Select this option to send one e-mail (per infected message) to the e-mail address entered in the Alert Address box. The e-mail message sent to the
Alert Address will contain the following information: sender, intended recipient, message ID, subject, virus detected, and the action taken.
Alert Address. This e-mail address is required when Alert Administrator is checked.
Alert Recipients. Select this option to send an e-mail to the intended recipients informing them that the message was redirected or deleted.
Other Settings
Definition Path. Directory name where Commtouch® definitions are located. This folder is under the IMail directory by default.
Update URL. The URL for Commtouch® updates.
Save. Click to save your settings.
Related Topics
Overview of IMail Anti-virus powered by Commtouch® (on page 286)
Logging for IMail Anti-virus powered by Commtouch® (on page 286)
285
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Overview of IMail Anti-virus powered by Commtouch
IMail Anti-virus powered by Commtouch® has integrated Commtouch's Command
Anti-virus SDK and is available for your IMail Server. With Commtouch's acquisition of
Command anti-virus a division of Authentium, IMail Server now offers Command Anti-virus as another optional possibility against the constant battle against spam. The Command
Anti-virus engine blocks malware of all types, including worms, Trojans and spyware.
Command Anti-virus has a proven track history for defending against malware for over 20 years.
Highest accuracy & Zero-Hour detection
Multi-layered, multi-engined platform using heuristics, emulation, and signatures for maximum protection.
Zero-Hour detection: architecture geared for fast reaction to new threat types.
Award-winning technology: VB100, West Coast Labs and ICSA awards for superior detection rates .
Maximum Performance
Industry’s fastest performance, especially on clean files which are the majority of files scanned by any AV engine. Proven deployments requiring up to half the servers compared to the other leading competitors.
Superior detection
Low false positives
Unparalleled Scalability
Lowest resource consumption
Proven deployments requiring up to half the servers compared to the other leading anti-virus competitors.
Small SDK footprint
Related Topics
IMail Anti-virus powered by Commtouch® - Settings (on page 284)
Logging for IMail Anti-virus powered by Commtouch® (on page 286)
Logging for IMail Anti-virus powered by Commtouch
IMail Anti-virus logging for Commtouch® are written to the syslogs, definition updates are written to
"CommtouchAV YYYYMMDD.log"
located under the Log Directory path at System
> System Settings > Log Directory. default path is
"c:\Program Files\Ipswitch\IMail\logs"
286
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Sample Commtouch logging
02:09 12:31 SMTPD(bda4000000020002) CommtouchAV: Message deleted.
02:09 12:55 SMTPD(7f17000000010002) CommtouchAV: Virus detected, rejecting message.
02:09 12:55 SMTPD(7f17000000010002) >>> 550 Virus detected, message rejected.
02:09 12:56 SMTPD(7c3e000000020003) CommtouchAV: No viruses detected.
02:09 12:31 SMTPD(bda4000000020002) CommtouchAV: Message deleted.
02:09 13:03 SMTPD(0b90000000050009) CommtouchAV: Virus detected, message will be deleted.
02:09 13:05 SMTPD(ae0e00000007000e) CommtouchAV: Virus detected, message will be redirected to: {[email protected]}
02:09 13:12 SMTPD(2058000000100018) CommtouchAV: Message over size limit to be scanned before being accepted.
02:09 13:13 SMTPD(c2e400000011001a) CommtouchAV: Virus Scan failed.
Message will be delivered.
02:09 13:20 SMTPD(6070000000180021) CommtouchAV: Virus Scan failed.
Returning 451 to connecting MTA.
02:09 13:25 SMTPD(7f640000001e0027) CommtouchAV: Init failed.
Returning 451 to connecting MTA. {0}
Note:
is a single file that constantly appends to itself, generating a new file every night at 00:00. It is up to the IMail Administrator to move and store it to a backup folder.
Sample Definition Log Updates
Definition Updates written to "CommtouchAV_YYYYMMDD.log"
Commtouch AV: Definition Update Started
Commtouch AV: Downloading incremental virus definitions
Commtouch AV: Downloading Update antivir-z-YYYYMMDDXX.cab
Commtouch AV: Applying update antivir-z-YYYYMMDDXX.cab
Commtouch AV: Virus Update Complete. YYYYMMDDXXXX
Commtouch AV: Definition Update Completed
Commtouch AV: Definition Update Started
Commtouch AV: Virus Definitions are current
Related Topics
Overview of IMail Anti-virus powered by Commtouch® (on page 286)
287
IMail v12 Administrator Help
IMail Anti-virus powered by Commtouch® - Settings (on page 284)
288
CHAPTER 8
Anti-spam
In This Chapter
Anti-spam Overview
IMail standard edition includes standard anti-spam technology; IMail Premium includes
Premium Anti-spam as well as Standard Anti-spam technology.
Premium Anti-spam
Commtouch Advanced Security Daemon (a.k.a. ctasd™) a plug-and-play email-borne spam and malware outbreak detection daemon that combines your current core messaging network infrastructure with advanced detection and classification capabilities. The daemon adds a layer of e-mail filtering to your mail delivery system in order to provide real-time classification, already in the first minutes after a new outbreak is launched.
Commtouch's GlobalView™ Mail Reputation Service fights unwanted mail at the perimeter, reducing more than 85% of incoming messages at the entry-point, before these messages enter the network. Additionally, GlobalView can optimize traffic flow so that legitimate sources gain optimal access, while unauthorized sources attempting to abuse the network are blocked.
Standard Anti-spam
All IMail products include standard anti-spam features. These features are custom configured by the administrator to identify spam and prevent it from clogging your Inbox. Mail messages are passed through several layers of filters and tests to assure that maximum spam detection is achieved.
What You Can Do with the Anti-spam Features
Use the Premium Anti-spam filter (optional only with IMail Premium) to automatically manage spam protection. Premium Anti-spam filter settings are applied before
Standard Anti-spam filter settings.
289
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Enable statistical filtering (on page 316) (content filtering) to analyze each message
and determine if it is spam.
Use phrase filtering (on page 303) (content filtering) to configure a phrase list that
searches for specific spam phrases within the subject and body of e-mail messages.
Enable HTML feature filtering (on page 305) to search messages for HTML tags that
could be used to disguise spam.
Create a URL Domain Blacklist (on page 313) that searches for domain names (URLs)
contained within HREF and IMG SRC HTML tags and in plain text messages.
Enable broken MIME header (on page 320) filtering to treat e-mails with malformed
MIME headers as spam.
Use the Sender Policy Framework (SPF) (on page 321) feature to increase the ability to
stop incoming e-mail from forged e-mail addresses (spoofed e-mail).
Use connection filtering (on page 333) to compare e-mail messages against
configurable realtime blacklists to determine if they are from IP addresses that are known to send spam.
Create a white list (trusted addresses) (on page 267) of e-mail addresses, domains, and
subnet masks that bypass content filtering.
Enable verification checks (on page 333) (connection filtering) to verify the "Mail
FROM" address, HELO/EHLO domain information, and perform a reverse DNS lookup on incoming e-mail messages.
Configure delivery rules (on page 245) to trap messages based on spam X-Headers
that are inserted when a mail message fails a spam test.
Which Anti-spam Settings are Used to Check a Message?
The anti-spam filters used to scan a message are determined by the IMail domain settings of the IP address that the message is received on. If the message is received on an IP address that is not configured for IMail, the primary domain's anti-spam filter settings are used.
Spam Actions
If a message is identified as spam, you can set IMail Server to delete it, send it to an e-mail address, or insert an X-header in the message to identify which spam test it failed. You can also create delivery rules to search for the spam X-Headers and process the message accordingly.
Accessing the Anti-spam Features
The Anti-spam options are accessed from two levels: the server level (on page 92) and domain
Related Topics
Anti-spam Configuration Overview (on page 292)
290
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Types of Anti-spam Filters
Sender Policy Framework (SPF) Filtering
SPF extends the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) and Domain Name System (DNS) so mail servers do not accept e-mail unless the sending computer is designated as a legitimate e-mail sender. This feature enables administrators increased capability to stop incoming e-mail from forged e-mail addresses.
Premium Anti-Spam
The optional Premium Anti-spam filter provides automated spam protection in addition to the Standard Anti-spam filter included in IMail. You can select actions to take if a message is determined to be spam.
HTML Filtering (on page 305) (Content Filtering)
HTML filtering examines only the HTML portions of an e-mail message, and is comprised of 3
components: an HTML parser (on page 307), HTML Feature filtering (on page 305), and a URL
Domain Blacklist. The HTML parser is part of the anti-spam engine that examines the HTML sections of a message. It extracts the text from HTML tags, and passes the text on to the phrase and statistical filters for examination. The HTML Feature filter allows you to specify which HTML tags you want to consider spam indicators. The URL Domain Blacklist searches for domain names that occur in the URLs of HTML messages.
Phrase Filtering (on page 303) (Content Filtering)
Phrase filtering searches for common spam phrases within the body and/or subject of an e-mail message and identifies the message as spam. Phrase filtering can be enabled/disabled per domain, and works independently of statistical filtering. For more information see Phrase
Statistical Filtering (on page 315) (Content Filtering)
Statistical filtering examines each word in the body of an e-mail and evaluates whether the word is a statistical indicator of spam. The entire message is then evaluated based on the
combined word counts (on page 368) to determine whether it is likely to be spam. You can
create a host specific exclude list, specify what action to take when a message is identified as spam, and specify whether to use the primary domain's word counts or create new ones. For
more information see Statistical Filtering (on page 315).
A list of words that are not included to determine whether a message is spam. The words in the exclude list are words that have an equal chance of being non-spam as spam. For example, "Mortgage" is a term frequently used in spam. However, if you work in the financial industry, this term may appear frequently as non-spam. In such a case, you can enter the word "mortgage" into the exclude list. The exclude list should also include common words like proper names. The exclude list is stored in the exclude-list.txt
file located in the mail domain 's directory.
291
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Attachment Blocking Filtering (on page 252)
Attachment blocking filtering lets administrators specify types of file attachments to block from e-mail messages and actions to take on blocked messages. Attachments can be blocked based on message MIME types and filename types. In addition to selecting the types of message attachments to block, you can define actions to take on blocked messages.
Broken MIME Header Filtering (on page 320)
The Broken MIME Header filter identifies Broken MIME header characteristics that result in
SPAM e-mail. You can also define actions to take when Broken MIME headers are identified as
SPAM e-mail.
Delivery Rules (on page 245)
You can use domain and user delivery rules to process messages based on the spam
X-Headers which are inserted when a message fails a spam test. For more information see
Using Delivery Rules to Filter Mail (on page 245).
Anti-spam Configuration Overview
The following topics explain the basic tasks you must complete to configure the IMail Server anti-spam features. Completing each of these steps establishes your unique spam signature, which determines how IMail Server handles spam. After these tasks are completed, your server will be protected from spam. Also, after you complete the basic setup tasks, you may want to read the Advanced Statistical Filtering topic to learn about other ways to configure the anti-spam features.
Basic Setup Tasks
To set up the basic anti-spam configuration, complete the following steps:
Server Configuration:
Configure Realtime Blacklists for the Server (on page 336)
Configure Logging Options (on page 343)
IMail Server Domain Configuration:
Configure Connection Checks (on page 333)
Configure SPF Filtering (on page 321)
Configure Premium Anti-spam (optional)
Configure Content Filtering
Configure HTML Filtering (on page 305)
Configure Broken MIME Header Filtering (on page 320)
292
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Enter White List (Trusted Addresses) (on page 267)
About Your Spam Signature
All of the anti-spam features that you have configured for IMail Server are collectively referred to as your spam signature. It consists of your specific configurations for:
White lists (trusted IP, domain, and e-mail addresses)
Realtime blacklists
Verification checks
Sender Policy Framework (SPF)
Premium Anti-spam
Phrase filtering
Statistical filtering
HTML feature filtering
URL domain blacklist filtering
Broken MIME header configuration
If you have too many false positives or are not catching enough spam, you may need to adjust your spam signature.
IMail Anti-spam Processing Order
The following steps indicate the order in which each anti-spam component performs, assuming that all default options and settings are not altered after installation. This order can change when enabling/disabling "Apply Domains/E-Mail Addresses to content filtering only" options, otherwise messages are processed as follows:
1 White List (on page 267) (Trusted Addresses). IMail checks the Apply to Anti-spam
option. If this option is enabled, then the IP address (and address present in the MAIL
FROM command) for an incoming message is compared against the white list to see if there is a match. If there is a match, all other anti-spam checks are skipped. However, if the IP address (or MAIL FROM address) does not match, the message is compared
against the Realtime Blacklists (on page 129).
(on the White List page), then Realtime Blacklists, Verification Tests, and SPF (on page 321)
checks are performed against the message; even if the address in the MAIL FROM command is present on the White List page.
2 Connection Checks (on page 333). IMail Server initiates connection filtering to
compare a message’s sender information against configured Realtime blacklists. If the message matches a blacklist, it is processed according to whether the blacklist is a
“trusted” or standard blacklist. If the message does not match a blacklist, verification checks are performed.
293
IMail v12 Administrator Help
3 Verification checks (on page 333). If enabled, verification tests are performed to verify
the "Mail FROM" address, the HELO/EHLO domain, and a reverse DNS lookup is performed. If a message passes all the checks, content filtering is performed. If a message does not pass all checks, an X-Header is inserted into the message or the message may be deleted. SPF checks are performed next.
4 SPF Filtering (on page 321). The SPF feature provides increased capability to stop
incoming e-mail from forged e-mail addresses. Using a sender authentication scheme, a domain owner requires that legitimate messages from a domain must meet certain SPF criteria. Messages that do not meet the criteria are not accepted as a legitimate e-mail messages and are processed according to the SPF options selected on the SPF tab.
5 Trusted Domains/Email Addresses (on page 267) (on the White List page). If the
Apply to Domain/EMail Addresses to Content Filtering Only option is selected, IMail
Server checks whether the connecting SMTP server’s Domain/EMail address is listed in the Domain/EMail Addresses list. If it is listed, the content is not scanned further with content filtering.
6 Premium Filter. The Premium Anti-spam filter (optional in IMail Premium only) provides automated spam protection in addition to the Standard Anti-spam filter included in
IMail. If a message does not pass the Premium Anti-spam filtering, actions selected are applied before Standard Anti-spam filter settings.
7 Broken MIME Header (on page 320). If enabled, the filter identifies broken MIME
header characteristics that may be present in SPAM e-mail. You can define actions to take when broken MIME headers are identified in SPAM e-mail. If it is not filtered as a broken MIME header, the message is passed on to either HTML filtering or phrase filtering, depending on whether it contains HTML code.
8 HTML Feature Filtering (on page 305). The HTML content filtering occurs during the
Phrase Filtering and Statistical Filtering process. If HTML filtering is enabled, the message is examined to determine if it contains HTML code. If it does, the message
undergoes HTML Content Filtering (on page 305). If the message does not contain
HTML components, Phrase Filtering and Statistical Filtering continue to evaluate the message.
Feature Filtering. When a message with HTML code is evaluated, it is compared
against the Feature Filtering (on page 305) options to detect certain HTML code
components that may be present in the message. If the selected HTML code components are present, selected actions are taken on the message.
URL Domain Blacklist. When a message with HTML code is evaluated, it is also
compared against the URL Domain Blacklist (on page 313) to search for domain
names that may be present in the message URL links. If a URL that is identified in a message matches a domain name included in the URL Domain Blacklist, selected actions are taken on the message.
9 Phrase Filtering (on page 303). If phrase filtering is enabled, the message is checked to
determine if it contains phrases that are in the phrase list. If the message passes, it is processed according to the settings for phrase filtering. If the message does not pass, it is processed by statistical filtering.
10 Statistical Filtering (on page 316). If statistical filtering is enabled, the message is
compared against the spam and non-spam word counts to determine if it is statistically likely to be spam. If it is identified as spam, it is processed according to the settings for statistical filtering. If the message is not identified as spam, it is delivered.
For information on how these anti-spam components integrate into IMail Server mail
processing, see IMail Server Processing Order (on page 28).
294
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Installing Updated Anti-spam Files
Ipswitch maintains several files that are available for download from our website, including an antispam-table.txt file, phrase-list.txt file, and a spamblkm.txt file. These files provide you with updated spam information and are also useful for reverting back to the default configurations. You can download these files from the following locations:
ftp://ftp.ipswitch.com
/Ipswitch/Product_support/IMail/antispam.zip ftp://ftp.ipswitch.com/Ipswitch/Product_s
upport/IMail/antispam.zip
The IMail Ipswitch Support Center at the following location: http://www.imailserver.com/Support.
Explanations of Files
Spam and Non-Spam Word List (antispam-table.txt)
Ipswitch continuously updates the antispam-table.txt file in order to keep up with spammers. As we collect new spam statistics, it is integrated into the existing antispam-table.txt file, and the file is then made available to users.
List of Default Blacklists (spamblkm.txt)
This is a list of the default blacklists used in IMail Server.
Sample Phrase List (phrase-list.txt)
The sample phrase list is provided to assist you in setting up phrase filtering. You may want to examine this file before enabling it in to assure that all of the phrases are suitable for your needs.
Sample URL Domain Blacklist (url-domain- bl.txt)
The sample URL Domain Blacklist is provided to let you enable and run the URL Domain
Blacklist feature with minimal effort. The URLs contained in this list are ones that we have collected from spam e-mail. You may want to examine this file before enabling it, to assure that you agree with the domain names that it contains.
Forwarding Spam to Commtouch
The Premium Spam Filter performance can be improved when users forward spam e-mail to
Ipswitch. Ipswitch provides the spam mail to Commtouch Advanced Security Daemon
(ctasd™) editors to review the spam submission and add spam signature information to it.
Then the signature is published to the global database to help other users eliminate spam.
For maximum protection, this global database is updated on your IMail Server every few minutes.
Reporting e-mail that is spam to Commtouch:
1 Obtain the message as it was originally received.
2 Send the message as an attachment to [email protected]
(mailto:[email protected]) with the following subject line:
[FN Report][Messaging Architects][Date]
295
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Note: Only the Date tag should be modified. Example:
[FN
Report][Ipswitch][mm/dd/yyyy]
Reporting False Positives (Legitimate mail flagged as spam)
1 Submissions must contain the Commtouch
"RefID"
from the header of the message.
You can forward the original message as an attachment (
"RefID"
header line included) or retrieve the
"RefID"
and put it in the body of your submission. It is ok to send more than one
"RefID"
per message.
Header line example:
X-CTCH-RefID: str=0001.0A010208.492285A9.0064,ss=4,pt=62280,fgs=12
2 Send the message to [email protected] (mailto:[email protected]) with the following subject line:
[FP Report][Ipswitch][Date]
Note: Only the Date tag should be modified. Ex: [FP Report][Ipswitch][mm/dd/yyyy]
Important: This process is only intended for messages that were improperly flagged by
Commtouch Premium Anti-spam. If the message was flagged by other IMail spam filters you must manually adjust the filter to prevent further false positives.
Forwarding Spam Messages (Example)
To forward spam messages, enter an e-mail address in the form of [email protected] . If the address is located on the same domain, you can omit the domain and only enter the User ID.
Mailbox Size limit set in the Domain Properties (on page 42). If you receive a large quantity of
spam, this limit could be exceeded for the mailbox that stores spam. Make sure that you delete messages from this mailbox on a regular basis. You may also want to set up a Full
Mailbox Notify Address for e-mail to be sent to when a mailbox is almost full. For more
information, see Setting Domain Properties (on page 42).
If you want the spam to be sent to a mailbox, place a hyphen between the user and sub-mailbox name, such as root- [email protected]. If the account is located on the same mail domain, you can omit the domain and enter root-spam. created only if Create is selected in the Sub-Mailbox Creation options of the Domain
Properties. For more information, see Setting Domain Properties (on page 42).
296
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Anti-spam FAQs
Will the anti-spam features slow down mail processing?
Under normal circumstances, the anti-spam features will not impact mail delivery. However, the verification options may slow down the server, as they are resource intensive.
How does the anti-spam engine interact with IMail Anti-Virus?
IMail Anti-virus complements the anti-spam features of IMail Server. Connection filtering and verification for anti-spam are completed first, followed by the Anti-Virus scan. Then, the other anti-spam processes are initiated, beginning with content filtering. See also IMail Processing
What can I do if legitimate mail is identified as spam?
You can place the e-mail address or domain name, from which the message was sent, in the
white list (trusted addresses) (on page 267) to always let messages from the e-mail address or
domain name to be delivered.
If a small number of messages are being misidentified, you can use the antispamseeder.exe
(on page 354) utility to add the messages to the antispam-table.txt file. This will increase the
likelihood that similar messages will be correctly identified in the future.
If a large number of legitimate mail is being identified as spam, modify the Advanced Options on the Statistical Filter page. Begin by increasing An e-mail is spam when it's calculated probability exceeds option to 95%. If that has no effect, decrease The Probability a new word is spam option to 10%. See Also Advanced Statistical Filtering.
How do I know if the blacklists are accurate?
The blacklists used are not maintained by Ipswitch, therefore we cannot verify their accuracy.
Some blacklists are updated more frequently than others, and contain more accurate information. You should be aware of this especially if you decide to configure your own blacklists. For your convenience, IMail Server allows you to identify trusted blacklists. These are blacklists that you have tried and found to be accurate.
Where does Spam go?
By default, messages that are identified as spam are forwarded to a mailbox called "bulk" within the root account. If you have changed the "Forward To" setting, on any of the anti-spam filter pages, then spam goes to the address that is entered in this field.
How do I access the Anti-spam features?
Only system and domain administrators can access the anti-spam tabs. System administrators have access to the server level realtime blacklists and logging tabs. Domain administrators have access to the domain level realtime blacklists, connection filtering, statistical filtering, phrase filtering, and trusted realtime blacklists.
297
IMail v12 Administrator Help
The anti-spam tabs can be accessed from two places: the server level and host level. To access the server Realtime Blacklists page, click the IMail Administrator System tab, then click
Realtime Blacklists. The Realtime Blacklists page opens.
To access domain (host) level settings, click the IMail Administrator Anti-Spam tab. The
Anti-Spam Settings page opens. The domain level anti-spam options are displayed on the
Domain Level Spam Filtering page.
Will the anti-spam features affect mailing list subscriptions?
Most mailing list subscriptions will not be identified as spam. However, to ensure that mailing list messages are not identified as spam, place the domain name from which the mailing list is sent in the Trusted Addresses list. For more information, see Creating Trusted Realtime
If you do not trust the domain, you can create a host rule to send the message to a folder for the user (for example, spam), and the user can create a user rule that puts the message in
his/her Inbox. For more information, see Using Delivery Rules to Filter Spam (on page 245).
Do the anti-spam features work with Web Messaging?
Yes. IMail Server processes mail from IMail Web Messaging in the same way it processes all other mail.
Do I need to use the Antispamseeder.exe utility to alter my word counts?
The file, that ships with the product, is appropriate for most users. However, you may need to alter this file if we have identified words as spam that you do not consider to be spam, or vice versa. For example, the word "mortgage" is identified as spam because in our tests, it occurred 364 times in non-spam, and 7516 times in spam. However, at financial institutions, the word "mortgage" is a non-spam word that occurs frequently. In this case, you need to alter the antispam-table.txt file so that statistical filtering recognizes the word "mortgage" as non-spam. For more information, see Customizing a Host's Antispam-table.txt file (on
Will the anti-spam features prevent my users from sending spam?
The anti-spam engine automatically filters mail from all users who are not authenticated. An authenticated users e-mail will then bypass all anti-spam filtering.
Authenticated users are users who have SMTP Authentication enabled on their e-mail client or users who send mail from IMail Web Messaging. By default, IMail Server forces users to authenticate, unless you select another option such as Relay Mail for Anyone or Relay Mail
for Addresses in the Mail Relay Settings located under Services tab > SMTP. This means that every time a user connects to the IMail Server, he/she must enter his/her user ID and password.
298
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Should I place a domain name in the phrase list or in the URL Domain
Blacklist?
Each location serves a different purpose. The phrase list filters the domain name as it appears in normal text in the body of an e-mail message. The URL Domain Blacklist will filter the domain name if it appears as a link in HTML code within a message, specifically within HREF and IMG SRC tags.
Spam Filtering (Domain Level)
How to get here
Use the Domain Level Anti-spam settings to enable, change, and disable various anti-spam filters for the selected domain.
Premium Filter. (Optional only with IMail Premium). Provides fully automated spam protection in addition to the Standard Anti-spam filter included with all IMail products.
Statistical Filter (on page 315). Examines each word in the body of an e-mail
message to determine if the e-mail is spam.
Phrase Filter (on page 303). Searches for spam phrases within the body of e-mail
messages and identifies the messages that are spam.
HTML Features Filter (on page 305). Searches HTML features in messages that are
subject to spam. Sets how many HTML features must be present in an .htm file in order for a message to be identified as spam and the spam action to take.
URL Domain Blacklist (on page 313). Searches for domain names that appear as
URL links in messages, and lets you set the action to take on such messages.
Broken MIME Headers (on page 320). Uses the Broken MIME Header Filter to
identify MIME Header characteristics that result in SPAM e-mail.
SPF (on page 321) (Sender Policy Framework). Enables stronger authentication of
e-mail senders using Sender Policy Framework (an extension to the DNS system).
Provides administrators increased capability to stop incoming e-mail from forged
(spoofed) e-mail addresses.
Connection Checks (on page 333). Verifies that the party connecting to your server
is not part of a blacklist.
Logging (on page 341). Controls where the standard anti-spam logs are written as
well as how much detail is provided in them.
Commtouch Premium Filter (Only Premium Versions)
How to get here
299
IMail v12 Administrator Help
In addition to the standard anti-spam filter included with IMail Server, the optional Premium
Filter provides fully automated spam protection. The Premium Filter, provided in partnership with Commtouch Advanced Security Daemon (a.k.a. ctasd™) is a plug-and-play e-mail-borne spam and malware outbreak detection daemon that combines your current core messaging network infrastructure with advanced detection and classification capabilities. The daemon adds a layer of e-mail filtering to your mail delivery system in order to provide real-time classification, already in the first minutes after a new outbreak is launched.
The Premium Spam Filter performance can be improved when users forward spam e-mail to
Commtouch (on page 295). Commtouchs' editors review the spam submission and add spam
signature information to it; then the signature is published to the global database to help other users eliminate spam.
When an incoming message is filtered the Commtouch Premium Filter settings are applied before Content Filtering anti-spam settings but after the Connection Checks.
Domain: Shows the current selected domain. From the drop down you can pick any of the domains available to this administrative user account.
The Commtouch Premium Filter provides the following classifications for administrators to create, remove, and manage spam.
Enable Premium Content Filter (selected by default if available). Select this check box to enable the Premium Anti-spam filter for the current mail domain. Default actions are specified to take for each classification. You can, however, change the defaults by clicking the hyperlink under the Classification. The Action to be Taken page appears, with the options for that action listed in a list box.
Note: Be sure the Commtouch Service (on page 389) is started.
Classification. This column lists all possible classifications with possible results for this domain.
Confirmed. Spam messages from known spam sources.
Bulk. Spam messages from sources that are not confirmed spammers.
Suspected. Legitimate messages that are sent to slightly larger than average distribution or are unidentified spam messages in the first few seconds of a massive spam outbreak.
Unknown. Messages for which ctasd does not have any incriminating information, and are therefore assumed to represent legitimate correspondence.
NonSpam. Messages that are from a known good source.
Action to be taken. This column lists the action chosen for each corresponding classification type.
None (default). No action is performed on messages identified as spam.
Delete Message. Message is deleted immediately after being accepted. If Archiving is enabled, message will archive.
300
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Forward to Address. Forwards the message to an e-mail address. Enter an e-mail address in the text box to the right of this option. By default, messages are sent to the
root address and stored in a mailbox called "root-bulk". Example (on page 296, on
Insert X-Header. Inserts an X-Header into the message indicating that the message was identified as spam by the premium filter. For more information, see X-Header
Move to Mailbox. Moves the message to the user’s mailbox specified in the text box to the right of this option. If the mailbox does not exist, it is created. The default mailbox is "bulk".
Reject Connection. Message is rejected at the MAIL FROM command and the sending mail server is returned a 550 error message.
Target. This column lists the mailbox or e-mail address for a Move to or Forward to action, respectively.
Prefix Subject. (Yes/No) This column lists whether or not the message will have a classification prefix added to the message.
With. This column lists the actual prefix, if chosen, for the corresponding query result. until you know that the anti-spam options are setup to best suit your filtering requirements.
Premium Connection Checks (IP Reputation)
Commtouch's GlobalView™ Mail Reputation services are used primarily to weed out spam messages and email-borne malware at the entry point before these messages enter the customer’s messaging network, thereby relieving the need for resource-consuming downstream filtering. This is accomplished by applying the most up-to-date IP reputation data to the sender IP, before the SMTP connection is accepted.
By applying GlobalView Mail Reputation services to the senders’ IP addresses before or during the SMTP session and before their messages enter the messaging network, ctIPd delivers cost-effective benefits such as the following:
Reduce IT resources such as server count, CPU load, storage, etc.
Eliminating multiple security risks
Reducing the level of false positives
Minimizing the cost of downstream filtering
Lowering the overall bandwidth consumption
Optimizing IT labor required to manage the overall messaging process
Additionally, Commtouch GlobalView Mail Reputation services are used as part of an overall strategy to optimize network accessibility so that the network’s messaging processes are efficient and focused on allowing legitimate sources full and uninterrupted access. At the same time, the Commtouch GlobalView Mail Reputation services also make access for
301
IMail v12 Administrator Help
unauthorized sources with bad reputations attempting to abuse the network more difficult to achieve.
The following actions for Commtouch IP Reputation are:
Log Only (Set by default). This setting will take no action on any messages, except to log. Connection checks will be made but all messages will be delivered as usual after logging.
Disabled. This will disable logging and all connection checks.
Log With Action. This setting will allow the following connection checks.
Throttle connections identified as suspected, yet unconfirmed, spam sources.
Reject connections identified as confirmed spam sources.
Reject and throttle connections on the MAIL FROM command. (Set by default)
With IP Reputation enabled, messages will be validated for rejection at the MAIL
FROM command and return a 550 error to the sending mail server.
Reject and throttle connections on the DATA command. With IP Reputation enabled, messages will be validated for rejection at the DATA command.
Warning. Setting IP Reputation to validate on the DATA command allows malicious IP's to harvest valid e-mail addresses; since the RCPT TO command occurs before the DATA command.
Related Topic
Default X-Header Classifications (on page 302)
Services for Premium Anti-spam (on page 389)
Default X-Headers for Premium Filter Classifications
The default values for Premium Filter Classifications when the Premium Filter is enabled:
Confirmed. Inserts X-Header [X-IMAIL-SPAM-CONFIRMED] with subject prefixed with [SPAM].
Bulk. Inserts X-Header [X-IMAIL-SPAM-BULK] with subject prefixed with [BULK].
Suspected. By default no action taken.
Unknown. By default no action taken.
False Positive Example
Many blacklists used for connection filtering return hits for domains such as yahoo.com, hotmail.com, and msn.com, among others. If you use these blacklists, non-spam e-mail from
302
IMail v12 Administrator Help
these domains may be identified as spam and processed according to the specified spam action.
Phrase Filtering
Phrase Filtering searches for common spam phrases within the body of e-mail messages. If a message contains one of the phrases in the phrase list, it is identified as spam and you can configure how to handle it. Phrases are stored in the phrase-list.txt file, which is located in the
IMail top directory. You create this list by adding phrases located at Antispam > [Select a domain ] > Spam Filtering > Phrase Filtering.
Related Topics
Configuring Content Filtering
Statistical Filtering (on page 315)
Obtaining a phrase.txt File (on page 295)
Phrase Filter Options (Content Filtering)
How to get here
Use Phrase Filtering to enable/disable phrase searches for the current mail domain, create and maintain the phrase list, and specify an action to take when an e-mail contains one of the phrases.
Phrase Filtering searches for common spam phrases within selected areas of e-mail messages.
If a message contains one of the phrases in the phrase list, it is identified as spam and you can configure actions to take on the message. Phrases are stored in the phrase-list.txt
file, which is located in the IMail top directory.
Domain: Shows the current selected domain. From the drop down you can pick any of the domains available to this administrative user account.
Use: Set the following options to configure phrase filtering.
No Filtering. Disables phrase filtering.
Current Domain (selected by default). Select this option to define phrase filtering settings specific to the current mail domain.
Primary Domain (default for non-primary domains; not available for primary domains). Select this option to use the primary mail domain's phrase filtering settings instead of creating new settings for the current mail domain.
Scan: Select which part of a message phrase filtering will examine for phrase matches.
Subject
Body (default).
Subject and Body
Action taken on e-mail determined to be spam:
303
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Action:
Delete. Immediately deletes the message.
Forward to Address. Forwards the message to an e-mail address entered in the text box to the right of this option. By default, messages are sent to the root address and
stored in a mailbox called "bulk". Example (on page 296, on page 295)
Insert X- Header (default). Inserts an X- Header into the message indicating that the message contained a phrase that is in the phrase list. For more information, see Spam
X-Header Explanations (on page 351).
Move to Mailbox. Moves the message to the user’s mailbox specified in the text box to the right of this option. If the mailbox does not exist, it is created.
None. No action is performed on messages identified as spam by the phrase filter. know that the antispam options are setup correctly.
Prefix subject with. If selected, the subject of a message that is identified as spam by the phrase filter will be modified to begin with X-IMail-Spam-Phrase.
Normalize Words. If this option is selected, IMail strips out all non-alphabetic characters (on
page 305) from words before comparing them to the phrase list.
To Edit an Antispam Phrase Filter:
1 From the Phrase Filtering page, click Edit Phrases. The Phrase Filter Text Editor page appears. The File information displays the file directory where the phrase-list.txt
file is saved.
2 Enter text phrases that you want the phrase filter to search for within selected parts of e-mail messages. Press Enter after each phrase is entered in the text editor.
3 Click Save.
Related Topics
What should be in the Phrase List? (on page 304)
Installing Updated phrase.txt File (on page 295)
Creating Separate antispam-table.txt Files for Multiple Email Domains (on page 360)
Setting Premium Filter Antispam Options
What should be in the phrase list?
The phrase list should contain phrases that occur frequently in spam. The best way to obtain this information is to look at your current rules to see which phrases you filter out. You can also download a sample phrase-list.txt
file from the Ipswitch web site.
304
IMail v12 Administrator Help
A Note about Entering Domain Names
When you enter a domain name into the phrase list, IMail Server will filter the domain name if it appears in the normal text in the body of an e-mail message. It will not filter domain names found in URLs or links. To accomplish this, you must enter the domain name into the URL
Domain Blacklist. The URL Domain Blacklist filters the domain name if it appears as a link in
HTML code within a message, specifically within HREF and IMG SRC tags.
Normalizing Words
When the Normalize Words option is selected, all words in a message are normalized before they are added or compared to the phrase list or antispam-table.txt file. Normalizing consists of stripping out all non-alphabetic characters (any character other than A-Z, a-z).
Example:
F1rst becomes frst s*e*x*y becomes sexy mail messages, such as a company name, we recommended that you do not enable the
Normalize Words option.
HTML Features Filter
How to get here
Use HTML Features Filter to select which HTML features to search for in messages, how many of the selected features must appear in order for a message to be identified as spam, and what action to take when a message is identified as spam.
Domain: Shows the current selected domain. From the drop down you can pick any of the domains available to this administrative user account.
Use: Set the following options to configure HTML features filtering.
No Filtering. Disables HTML features filtering for the selected mail domain.
Current Domain (selected by default). Select this option to define HTML features filtering settings specific to the current mail domain.
Primary Domain (default for non-primary domains; not available for primary domains). Select this option to use the primary mail domain's HTML features filtering instead of creating new settings for the current mail domain.
Select the HTML features to detect:
Nested Table (on page 307) Invalid Tag (on page 308)
Embedded Comment (on
305
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Mailto: Hyperlink (on
Number of options detected for an e-mail to be considered spam. Enter the number of the above selected types of HTML features that must appear in an e-mail message before it is identified as spam.
Action taken on e-mail determined to be spam. Specify one of the following actions to take on a message that contains selected HTML features:
Action:
Delete. Immediately deletes the message.
Forward to Address. Forwards the message to the e-mail address specified in the text box to the right of this option. By default, messages are sent to the root
address and stored in a mailbox called "root-bulk". Example (on page 296, on
Insert X- Header (default). Inserts an X- Header into the message indicating that it was identified as spam and includes the selected HTML features. See also X-Header
Move to Mailbox. Moves the message to the user’s mailbox specified in the text box to the right of this option. If the mailbox does not exist, it is created. The default mailbox is "bulk".
None. No action is taken on the message.
Prefix Subject With. If selected, the subject of a message that is identified as spam by the HTML filter will be modified to begin with the text entered in the text box.
Save. Click this button to save your settings.
For more information, see example configuration for HTML feature filtering (on page 311).
To Edit an Antispam HTML Features Filter:
1 From the Antispam HTML Features Filter list, select an HTML features filter that you want to edit. The HTML Features Filter Settings page appears.
2 Make the desired changes to the options, then click Save.
Related Topics
Using Delivery Rules to Filter Spam (on page 245)
Example Configuration for HTML feature filtering (on page 311)
X-Header Example 1 (on page 311)
X-Header Example 2 (on page 312)
HTML Filtering E-mail Scanning Example (on page 312)
306
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Overview of HTML Filtering
For each HTML section of an e-mail, the HTML filter processes the text outside the angle brackets of an HTML tag as before. The HTML filter processes the text within the angle brackets of an HTML tag as follows. The HTML filter first checks to see if the tag is one of the features the filter has been configured to search for. If it is, the HTML Filter counter counts the number of features found. The e-mail is considered spam if the number of HTML features found equals the number configured for the feature's found count.
HTML filtering is part of content filtering, but is used only on HTML portions of a message.
The individual components of HTML filtering are discussed below.
Types of HTML Filtering:
HTML Parser
The HTML parser is always used on HTML messages. The parser decodes the HTML code and tags until the text appears as it would when the message is opened. The parser then sends the text on to be processed by statistical and phrase filtering to determine if it is spam.
HTML Feature Filtering
HTML feature filtering lets you define certain HTML tags that will be spam indicators. The
HTML features include Nested Table (on page 307), Hyperlink (on page 308), Script Tag (on
page 309), Invalid Tag (on page 308), Image Tag (on page 308), Mailto Hyperlink (on page 309),
Deceptive URL (on page 309), Embedded Comment (on page 310). If a message contains a
configurable number of these HTML features, it is identified as spam.
URL Domain Blacklist
The URL Domain Blacklist is a configurable list of domain names that are known to send spam. IMail Server extracts the primary domain from an http link to determine if the domain name is in the URL Domain Blacklist. It does this by looking for domains that are used in HREF and IMG SRC tags in the HTML code. If the primary domain matches any of the domain names in the URL Domain Blacklist, the e-mail is considered spam and the appropriate spam action is taken.
Why do I need HTML Filtering? Why doesn’t the Phrase and
Statistical Filter Work?
Spammers use a variety of techniques to get around anti-spam programs that filter on words.
The primary way they do this is by disguising the message text in HTML e-mail so that is does not look like text. Unfortunately, if a word does not look like a word, the phrase and statistical filter will not be able to determine if it is spam. The HTML filter component solves this problem by decoding the HTML code to reveal the text, which is then passed on to the statistical filter for word analysis.
Related Topics
Example E-mail as it is scanned with and without HTML Filtering (on page 312)
Nested Tables
Nested Table
307
IMail v12 Administrator Help
A nested table is a table within a table in HTML code, it is displayed as a table tag (<TABLE>) within a table tag. The following is an example of the HTML code for a nested table.
<table>
<tr>
<td>
<table>
<tr>
<td>
Get Paid $1000 A Week To Work From Home.
</td>
</tr>
</table>
</td>
<tr>
</table>
Hyperlinks
Spammers often include links in their messages as a way to get you to visit a website. An
HTML link in a message looks like the following:
<a href="http ://www.ipswitch.com /sla/index"</a>
This may or may not be accompanied by a tag calling an image or graphic. You should be careful when selecting this feature to filter on. Many legitimate HTML e-mail messages contain links in them, and as such would be identified as spam.
Image Tags
Spammers often put images into messages to hide the text from the content filter. Images are characterized by the following HTML code: <IMG src=filename>
Since there are no words outside the HTML tag in the above example, you would only see a graphic when you open the message. The statistical filter alone would not decipher this
HTML code, because all words are included within the HTML tag. But the HTML parser will decode the HTML to see if it contains any Image tags.
If you want all messages containing IMG SRC tags to be considered spam, select this option under HTML Feature Filtering.
If you want the domain name in such a tag to be considered a spam indicator, place the domain name in the URL Domain Blacklist.
Invalid Tags
Spammers sometimes insert the message text inside invalid HTML tags in an attempt to confuse statistical word filters. This is because the text, in the invalid tag, is treated as non-spam words and they balance out the spam words. Some examples are shown below:
Examples:
308
IMail v12 Administrator Help
<comment>Get Rich Quick</comment>
IMail Server treats all non-standard comment formats as invalid tags.
<Get paid to work from home. Respond now for information on this fantastic offer.
There are a limited number of available positions, so don’t miss out. Respond Now!>
In the example above, text e-mail clients hide the message because it appears within an invalid HTML tag.
If you select the Invalid Tag option in HTML Feature Filtering, messages containing this type of spam trick will be identified as spam.
Script tag
Spammers sometimes create an entire message composed of nothing but script, such as
Javascript. Before the message is loaded, there are no words that the statistical filter would be able to identify. When the message is loaded, the text is displayed as normal, instead of the script.
The HTML parser ignores the script tag in messages. Therefore, if you want messages with scripting to be identified as spam, select Script Tag under HTML Feature Filtering. IMail will identify all messages containing such a tag as spam.
Mailto: Hyperlink
A Mailto hyperlink allows you to send e-mail directly from a web page, or in this case, an e-mail by clicking a link. The link opens up a new message window in your e-mail client with the recipients e-mail address filled in. Spammers use mailto hyperlinks as a way to get feedback from you.
Example:
<a href="mailto:[email protected]">Email Us</a>
Deceptive URLs
Spammers sometimes encode URLs to conceal the hostname or IP addresses from a content filter. Select this option to identify messages with deceptive URLs.
When IMail checks for deceptive URLs, the domain component of the URL is decoded first, then it is checked against the URL Domain Blacklist. If the domain component of the URL is found in the URL Domain Blacklist, the e-mail is treated as spam. The following are examples of deceptive URLs:
Plain text examples:
309
IMail v12 Administrator Help
http ://7763631671/domainname.htm
http://0xCeBF9e37/domainname.htm
http://0316.0277.0236.067/domainname.htm
http://3468664375@3468664375/o%62s%63ur%65%2e%68t%6d
Embedded Comment
Sometimes spammers place a comment in the middle of a word, as shown in the example below:
VIA<!--text here-->GRA
This causes a single word, in this case VIAGRA, to be viewed as two words (VIA and GRA) by the e-mail client. Often, the comments themselves contain neutral words that spammers intentionally use to throw off statistical filters. The statistical filter would not catch this, because it cannot distinguish that there are HTML tags in the text. It would look for the words
VIA and GRA when comparing the message to the
antispam-table.txt
file. Now, the
HTML parser will extract the comments from the text, so that it can be examined by statistical filtering.
However, if you want embedded comments to be considered spam indicators regardless of the text, select this option under HTML Feature Filtering.
Deceptive Text
When the text of an html message is encoded. For example, text outside an html tag is considered encoded when it is in the format of &#ddd where ddd is a decimal number in the range: 48-57, 65-90, or 97-122.
Example
In an effort to get around antispam tests, the following encoding:
<i><strong>There is no
consultation
fees and
absolutely no
obligation.
You will
be amazed at
the rates we
can
310
IMail v12 Administrator Help
provide.</strong></i>
Displays the following message:
There is no consultation fees and absolutely no obligation. You will be amazed at the rates we can provide.
Example HTML Feature Configuration
You should be aware that some of the HTML features available for filter selection are common to all HTML messages, not just spam (i.e. hyperlinks). Selecting one of these features may cause false positives. As you gain experience with the HTML feature filtering options, you will be able to modify the settings based on your preferences. However, below you will find a suggested initial configuration that will enable you to use the HTML feature filter with success.
1 Select Embedded Comment and Deceptive URL. Both of these elements, especially when they occur together, are strong indicators of spam. Make sure that all other HTML features are cleared.
2 Select 2 from Number of options detected for an e-mail to be considered spam. This requires that both an embedded comment and a deceptive URL be present in a message for it to be considered spam.
3 For the option labeled Action taken on e-mail determined to be spam, select Insert
X-Header.
By selecting the Insert X-Header option, your messages are still delivered. You may want to create a delivery rule that moves such messages to a specific mailbox. For more information,
see Using Delivery Rules to Filter Spam (on page 245).
X-Header Example 1
The above X-Header indicates that the IP address of the message’s sender was found in the
FIVETEN blacklist, which suggests that it is spam.
311
IMail v12 Administrator Help
X-Header Example 2
The above X-Header indicates that the same message also failed the MAIL FROM verification check.
HTML Filtering Example of Scanning E-mail
To better understand how HTML filtering will increase your ability to identify spam, below is an example of an HTML spam message that was filtered first only through statistical and phrase filtering, and then through HTML filtering. In this message the spammer used bogus
HTML tags to try to hide the words from spam filters. From the statistical filtering log entries below you can see that IMail Server didn't recognize many words in the e-mail. When this same message was run through HTML filtering, the log entries below show that more words were recognized:
Original Message
Date: Tue, 8 Apr 2003 16:04:09 -0400
Message-Id: <[email protected]>
Mime-Version: 1.0
Content-Type: text/html; charset=us-ascii
From: "Test User" <[email protected]>
Reply-To: <[email protected]>
Subject: hello there
X-Mailer: <IMail v8.00>
<!W>VIA<!Z>GRA<!E> N<!l>o<!k>w<!g> a<!y>v<!b>a<!Z>I<!Y>l<!X>a<!N>b<!Q>l<!V>e<!H> f<!J>o<!I>r<!D> a<!S> l<!O>o<!I>w <!A>c<!Z>o<!X>s<!S>t<!J> t<!N>h<!X>e<!U> e<!L>ff<!V>ec<!W>tiv<!Z>ene<!E>ss<!I>
<!K>o<!G>f<!Y><!F>V<!I>I<!F>AGRA<!C> has<!U> be<!D>en<!L> p<!Z>r<!B>o<!W>ven<!V> t<!Z>i<!I>m<!M>e a<!H>nd<!E> tim<!U>e a<!H>g<!G>a<!B>in <!W>in
<!I>cl<!O>i<!D>ni<!O>c<!F>a<!K>l<!I> s<!Y>t<!K>udies <!C>w<!F>i<!F>th t<!F>h<!M>ous<!K>and<!J>s o<!J>f<!B> p<!H>ati<!J>ent<!N>s<!J>.<!Y><!C>
Results When E-Mail is Scanned only with Statistical Filtering
05:23 10:18 SMTP (02940000) word = agra, probability = 0.990000
05:23 10:18 SMTP(02940000) word = udies, probability = 0.400000
312
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Results when E-Mail is scanned through statistical and HTML Filtering
05:23 10:24 SMTP(09380000) word = viagra, probability = 0.911599
05:23 10:24 SMTP(09380000) word = thousands, probability = 0.796194
05:23 10:24 SMTP(09380000) word = proven, probability = 0.748141
05:23 10:24 SMTP(09380000) word = patients, probability = 0.718994
05:23 10:24 SMTP(09380000) word = been, probability = 0.285162
05:23 10:24 SMTP(09380000) word = again, probability = 0.309129
URL Domain Blacklist
How to get here
Use URL Domain Blacklist to search for domain names that appear as URL links in messages and set the action to take on such messages. Secondary mail domains can choose to use the primary domain’s URL Domain Blacklist instead of maintaining their own.
The URL domain blacklists for the current mail domain is stored in the url-domain-bl.txt
file, which is located in the IMail top directory.
Domain: Shows the current selected domain. From the drop down you can pick any of the domains available to this administrative user account.
Use: Set the following options to configure HTML features filtering.
No Filtering. Disables URL domain blacklist filtering for the selected mail domain.
Current Domain (selected by default). Select this option to define URL domain blacklist filtering settings specific to the current mail domain. The primary mail domain selects this option to use the primary URL Domain Blacklist. The secondary mail domains select this option to use the secondary mail domain's URL Domain
Blacklist.
Primary Domain (default for non- primary domains; not available for primary domains). Select this option to use the primary mail domain's URL domain blacklist filtering instead of creating new settings for the current mail domain. domain's URL domain blacklist, if you are setting URL domain blacklists for a secondary mail domain, the Add and Delete buttons are disabled for the selected secondary mail domain and the URL domain blacklist cannot be edited.
Scan. Set the following option to configure the type of text that domain blacklist filtering scans for hyperlinks (URLs):
HTML text. Select this option to scan HTML text for hyperlinks embedded in e-mail
messages. Example (on page 315)
HTML and Plain Text. Select this option to scan both HTML and plain text for
hyperlinks embedded in e-mail messages. Example (on page 315)
Action taken on e-mail determined to be spam. Specify one of the following actions to take on a message that matches a URL Domain Blacklist:
313
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Action:
Delete. Immediately deletes the message.
Forward to Address. Forwards the message to the e-mail address specified in the text box to the right of this option. By default, messages are sent to the root address
and stored in a mailbox called "root- bulk". Example (on page 296, on page 295)
Insert X-Header (default). Inserts an X-Header into the message indicating that it was identified as spam and includes a matching blacklist. See also X-Header Explanations
Move to Mailbox. Moves the message to the user’s mailbox specified in the text box to the right of this option. If the mailbox does not exist, it is created. The default mailbox is "bulk".
None. No action is taken on the message.
Prefix Subject With. If selected, the subject of a message that is identified as spam by the URL domain blacklist filter will be modified to begin with the text entered in the text box.
Save. Click to save your settings.
To Edit a URL Domain Blacklist:
1 From the URL Domain Blacklist page, click Edit Phrases URL Entries. The URL Domain
Blacklist Text Editor page appears. The File information displays the file directory where the url-domain-bl.txt
file is saved.
2 Enter the name of the domain or IP address that you want to add to the blacklist. See below for acceptable entry guidelines. Press Enter after each phrase is entered in the text editor.
3 Click Save.
Acceptable Entries
If you enter the domain name in the format of www.domain.com , a URL must contain the entire entry (including www.) in order for the message to be identified as spam. Messages
with only domain.com in the URL will not be identified as spam. Example (on page 314)
If you enter a domain name in the format of domain.com, IMail Server looks for all URLs that contain domain.com, whether or not it is preceded by anything. For example, the URLs www.domain.com and www.mail.domain.com would both be identified as spam, because they both contain the entry domain.com.
Related Topics
HTML or Plain Text Scan Example (on page 315)
HTML Scan Example (on page 315)
URL Domain Blacklist Entry (Example) (on page 314)
URL Domain Blacklist Entry (Example)
If you enter www.ipswitch.com into the URL Domain Blacklist,
314
IMail v12 Administrator Help
the following will be identified as spam:
Messages containing URLs containing exactly www.ipswitch.com.
The following will not be identified as spam:
Messages containing URLs containing www.mail.ipswitch.com or other variations.
HTML Scan Example
HTML content is scanned for hypertext links within an e-mail message. If the URL domain exampleblacklist.com is included in the URL Domain Blacklist and User friendly Web site is found in the e-mail scan, then the message is processed as spam.
HTML or Plain Text Scan Example
HTML content and plain text is scanned for hypertext links within an e-mail message.
HTML examples:
If the URL domain exampleblacklist.com is included in the URL Domain Blacklist and
<a href="http ://exampleblacklist.com/example1.htm">User friendly Web site 1 is found in the e-mail scan, then the message is processed as spam.
If the URL domain exampleblacklist.com is included in the URL Domain Blacklist and
<a href="www.exampleblacklist.com/example2.htm">User friendly Web site 2</a> is found in the e-mail scan, then the message is processed as spam.
Plain text examples:
If the URL domain exampleblacklist.com is included in the URL Domain Blacklist and
<a href=http://exampleblacklist.com/example3.htm>User friendly Web site 3</a> is found in the e-mail scan, then the message is processed as spam.
If the URL domain exampleblacklist.com is included in the URL Domain Blacklist and
<a href="www.exampleblacklist.com/example4.htm">User friendly Web site 4</a> is found in the e-mail scan, then the message is processed as SPAM.
Related Topic
HTML feature filtering (on page 305)
Statistical Filtering
Statistical filtering uses the Bayesian spam filtering technique to calculate the probability of a message being spam based by its contents. Unlike simple content-based filters, Bayesian spam filtering learns from spam and from good mail by examining each word in the body of an e-mail message to determine if it is spam. Each word within a message is compared against known spam and non-spam word counts, and assigned a value based on whether the word is likely to be spam. Then, the entire message is assigned a probability based on the assessment of all combined word counts. If a message is identified as spam, you can choose to delete it, forward it to an e-mail address, or insert an X-Header into it. Words that contain non-alphabetic characters, such as numbers, are treated differently from other words. For
more information, see Identifying Wildcards in E-mail (on page 366).
315
IMail v12 Administrator Help
To increase the chances of legitimate messages not be identified as spam, you can create a host-specific exclude list. The exclude list contains words that you do not want to be included in the statistical analysis, because they are just as likely to appear in non-spam messages as they are in spam messages. The exclude list is stored in the exclude-list.txt file, which is located in the domain’s directory.
A list of words that are not included to determine whether a message is spam. The words in the exclude list are words that have an equal chance of being non-spam as spam. For example, "Mortgage" is a term frequently used in spam. However, if you work in the financial industry, this term may appear frequently as non-spam. In such a case, you can enter the word "mortgage" into the exclude list. The exclude list should also include common words like proper names. The exclude list is stored in the exclude-list.txt
file located in the mail domain 's directory.
Advanced Statistical Filtering
The advanced statistical filtering options control the underlying functionality of the statistical filtering component. These options are useful for experienced administrators who want to further refine the anti-spam filtering ability.
Related Topics
Anti-spam Statistical Filter Options (Content Filtering) (on page 316)
Statistical Filter Options (Content Filtering)
How to get here
Use Statistical Filtering to create and maintain the mail domain specific exclude list, specify the action to take when spam is identified, and specify whether to use the primary mail domain's word counts or create new ones.
A list of words that are not included to determine whether a message is spam. The words in the exclude list are words that have an equal chance of being non-spam as spam. For example, "Mortgage" is a term frequently used in spam. However, if you work in the financial industry, this term may appear frequently as non-spam. In such a case, you can enter the word "mortgage" into the exclude list. The exclude list should also include common words like proper names. The exclude list is stored in the exclude-list.txt
file located in the mail domain 's directory.
Statistical Filtering uses the Bayesian spam filtering technique to calculate the probability of a message being spam based by its contents. Each word in an e-mail message is examined and evaluated depending on how often the word appears in spam and non-spam e-mail. The entire message is then evaluated based on all of the word values to determine whether it is likely to be spam.
Domain: Shows the current selected domain. From the drop down you can pick any of the domains available to this administrative user account.
316
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Anti-spam Table To Use: Set the following options to configure statistical filtering.
No Filtering. Disables statistical filtering for the domain.
Current Domain (selected by default). Select this option to define statistical filtering settings specific to the current mail domain.
Primary Domain (default for non-primary domains; not available for primary domains). Select this option to use the primary mail domain's statistical filtering settings instead of creating new settings for the current mail domain.
Note: The exclude table is not included as part of the use drop down.
Exclude the following words from Statistical Analysis:
Add. Click Add to create a new word to filter for the current domain.
Edit. Click a word or phrase, then click Edit to modify.
Delete. Select a phrase that you want to delete from the domain, then click Delete to delete the phrase.
Click or to sort the word list.
If the Word list has multiple pages, you can use the page navigation control which appears below the list.
Action taken on e-mail determined to be spam:
Action:
Delete. Immediately deletes the message.
Forward to Address. Forwards the message to an e-mail address entered in the text box to the right of this option. By default, messages are sent to the root address and
stored in a mailbox called "bulk". Example (on page 296, on page 295)
Insert X-Header (default). Inserts an X-Header into the message indicating that the message was identified as spam by statistical filtering. For more information, see
Spam X-Header Explanations (on page 351).
Move to Mailbox. Moves the message to the user’s mailbox specified in the text box to the right of this option. If the mailbox does not exist, it is created.
None. No action is performed on messages identified as spam by the statistical filter. you know that the anti-spam options are setup correctly.
Prefix subject with. If selected, the subject of a message that is identified as spam by the statistical filter will be modified to begin with X-IMail-Spam-Statistical.
317
IMail v12 Administrator Help
These options control the underlying functionality of the statistical filtering feature and are dependent upon each other to effectively identify spam. If you have a significant number of legitimate messages that are being identified as spam (false positives) or vice versa, you may need to adjust these options. experienced administrators modify these settings. Setting these options too high or too low could hinder IMail Server's ability to identify spam.
Advanced Options
The probability a new word is spam (default value is 40%). The percentage assigned to new words to determine if they are spam. Enter a value between 0 and
100%.
The higher the value, the more likely a new word will be treated as if it had previously appeared in spam e-mail messages. The lower the value, the more likely a new word will be treated as if it had previously appeared in non- spam e-mail messages. For example, if you enter 0, every new word will be treated as if it were non-spam. If you enter 100%, every word will be identified as spam.
We recommend that this value not be set higher than 40%. The idea behind setting this option at 40% or less is to bias the statistical analysis in favor of being legitimate e-mail, thereby reducing the likelihood of a false positive.
Example: If this option is set to 20%, a new word will be treated as having appeared in spam emails 20% of the time and as having appeared in non-spam emails 80% of the time.
An e-mail is spam when its calculated probability exceeds (default value is
90%). The closer the value is to 100%, the less likely that spam will be caught. The closer the value is to 0, the greater the probability that you will have false positives.
Enter a value between 0 and 100%.
This option sets the minimum probability percentage at which a message will be identified as spam. Messages with probability values below the value entered are identified as non-spam. Messages with probability values above this value are identified as spam.
Example: Suppose this option is set to 80%. If an e-mail message is processed and the combined probability for all of the word values within it is 60%, then this message is identified as non-spam because it does not meet the probability benchmark of
80%.
Example: If the word "Stop" appears in an e-mail for the first time, it is considered a new word and assigned a probability of 40% (probability a new word is spam). If you have the "spam calculated probability exceeds" set to 90%, then "stop" is not considered to be spam. In order for "stop" to be considered spam, its probability will have to increase from 40% to 90%.
318
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Maximum number of words used when calculating probability (default value is
15). The number of individual word values, within each e-mail, used to calculate the probability that an e-mail is spam. You can enter any value in this text box; however, entering anything above 25 may have unpredictable results.
Each word within an e-mail is assigned two word counts: the number of times the word has occurred in spam, and the number of times that a word has occurred in non-spam. From these values, a spam probability is computed for the word. This setting examines the words whose probabilities deviate most from an average word.
These words are both spam and non-spam words.
Example: Suppose this option is set to 15. Since most words have an average spam probability of 50% (50% likely to be spam, 50% likely to be non-spam), then the fifteen words that are farthest away from 50% are used. So if a word has a spam probability of 5% it will most likely be used. Likewise, if a word has a spam probability of 90%, it will most likely be used. A word that has a 45% probability will most likely not be used.
A list of words that are not included to determine whether a message is spam. The words in the exclude list are words that have an equal chance of being non-spam as spam. For example, "Mortgage" is a term frequently used in spam. However, if you work in the financial industry, this term may appear frequently as non-spam. In such a case, you can enter the word "mortgage" into the exclude list. The exclude list should also include common words like proper names. The exclude list is stored in the exclude-list.txt
file located in the mail domain 's directory. can greatly affect the performance of statistical filtering. The greater the value, the more time is spent determining which words to evaluate within a message. Thus, statistical filtering takes longer to calculate the e-mail probability and mail processing takes longer.
Related Topics
About Statistical Filtering (on page 315)
Creating Separate antispam-table.txt Files for Multiple Email Domains (on page 360)
Installing Updated phrase.txt File (on page 295)
Setting Premium Filter Anti-spam Options
Word Value (definition)
Each word within an e-mail is assigned two word counts:
the number of times the word has occurred in spam
the number of times that a word has occurred in non-spam
319
IMail v12 Administrator Help
From these values, a spam probability is computed for the word. This setting examines the words whose probabilities deviate most from an average word. These words are both spam and non-spam words.
Example: Suppose this option is set to 15. Since most words have an average spam probability of 50% (50% likely to be spam, 50% likely to be non-spam), then the fifteen words that are furthest away from 50% are used. So if a word has a spam probability of 5% it will most likely be used. Likewise, if a word has a spam probability of 90%, it will most likely be used. A word that has a 45% probability will most likely not be used.
Exclude List (definition)
A list of words that are not included to determine whether a message is spam. The words in the exclude list are words that have an equal chance of being non-spam as spam. For example, "Mortgage" is a term frequently used in spam. However, if you work in the financial industry, this term may appear frequently as non-spam. In such a case, you can enter the word "mortgage" into the exclude list. The exclude list should also include common words like proper names. The exclude list is stored in the exclude-list.txt
file located in the mail domain 's directory.
Broken MIME Headers
How to get here
The Broken MIME Headers filter identifies Broken MIME header characteristics that result in
SPAM e-mail. Broken MIME headers occur when:
A message opening boundary delimiter is hidden by making it part of the message part header.
E-mail boundary parameter values exceed 70 characters.
No e-mail boundary parameters exist.
MIME type parameters are on a line with no leading white spaces.
Options on this page let you select actions to take when Broken MIME headers are identified as SPAM e-mail.
Domain. Shows the current selected domain. From the drop down you can pick any of the domains available to this administrative user account.
Set the following options to configure Broken MIME Headers filtering:
Enable Broken MIME Headers (selected by default). Select this check box to enable the Broken MIME Headers filter for the current host.
Action to be taken on e-mail determined to be spam. Specify an action to take if a message is identified as spam:
Delete. Immediately deletes the message.
320
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Forward to Address. Forwards the message to an e-mail address. Enter an e-mail address in the text box to the right of this option. By default, messages are sent to the
root address and stored in a mailbox called "root-bulk". Example (on page 296, on
Insert X-Header (default). Inserts an X-Header into the message indicating that the message was identified as spam by the Broken MIME headers filter. The default value is Insert X-Header.
Move to Mailbox. Moves the message to the user’s mailbox specified in the text box to the right of this option. If the mailbox does not exist, it is created. The default mailbox is "bulk".
None. No action is performed on messages identified as spam.
Prefix subject with (cleared by default). If selected, messages identified as spam are
modified to begin the message subject with the text (on page 321) entered in the text
box to the right of this option. you know that the Broken MIME header options are setup to best suit your filtering requirements.
Save. Click this button to save your settings.
Related Topic
Modifying Subject for Broken MIME Headers (on page 321)
Modifying the Subject for Broken MIME Headers
By default, the text that is added to the message subject is:
X-IMail-Broken-MIME-Header
This subject field is also user configurable.
SPF Filtering
How to get here
IMail uses Sender Policy Framework (SPF) to extend the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP ) and Domain Name System (DNS) so IMail Server does not accept e-mail unless the sending computer is designated as a legitimate e-mail sender. This feature provides administrators increased capability to stop incoming e-mail from forged (spoofed) e-mail addresses.
To accomplish this e-mail security measure, SPF establishes a policy framework and a sender authentication scheme that verifies the identity of e-mail servers (domains) for incoming messages. SMTP receivers (such as IMail Server) use this information to evaluate whether the message is from an e-mail server that is authorized to send e-mail from the message sender.
321
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Messages that do not meet the SPF criteria are not accepted as a legitimate e-mail message
and are processed according to the SPF settings selected on the SPF page. (on page 322)
How does SPF work?
SPF policy data is published on a DNS server in a .TXT record. DNS resolvers typically cache
SPF data to reduce lookup traffic. Sender domains do not have to run new servers to advertise SPF information; instead, SPF uses the connecting client 's IP address and information from the SMTP envelope to evaluate the SPF policy document published via DNS.
After the policy is evaluated, the message is classified and handled accordingly. For additional information about SPF, go to the SPF community at http://spf.pobox.com http://spf.pobox.com/.
Example:
If a spammer forges mail from the mail server imaspammer.com and uses a different domain in the From address, such as [email protected], the receiving e-mail server checks the SPF record for notaspammer.com. If it finds that [email protected] is not listed as a legitimate e-mail sender on notaspammer.com, the message fails and is processed by the SPF settings on the SPF tab.
Related Topics
Setting Sender Policy Framework (SPF) Options (on page 322)
Setting up an SPF record (on page 323)
Configuring Sender Policy Framework (SPF)
How to get here
The Sender Policy Framework (SPF) page provides IMail Administrators increased capability to stop incoming e-mail from forged (spoofed) e-mail addresses. Use the SPF settings to configure how to process e-mail that is identified as forged e-mail. Settings on the SPF page apply to the selected domain.
Domain: Shows the current selected domain. From the drop down you can pick any of the domains available to this administrative user account.
Enable SPF. Select this checkbox to enable the SPF filter for the current host. Default actions are specified to take for each SPF query result. You can, however, change the defaults by clicking the hyperlink under the SPF result. An
Action to be Taken page appears, with the options for that action listed in a list box.
SPF Result. This column lists all possible SPF results possible for this domain.
322
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Action to be taken. This column lists the action chosen for each corresponding query result.
Tip: The option to Reject Connection will result in SPF running during the MAIL FROM command.
Target. This column lists the mailbox or e-mail address for a Move to or Forward to action, respectively.
Prefix Subject. (Yes/No) This column lists whether or not the message will have an
SPF Result prefix added to the message.
With. This column lists the actual prefix, if chosen, for the corresponding query result.
Advanced Options:
DNS Timeout (in seconds). Sets the total amount of time between DNS record checks
(lookups).
Maximum number of redirects. Sets the maximum number of redirects allowed when an SPF policy is queried and evaluated.
Save. Click to save your settings.
Related Topics
Sender Policy Framework (SPF Filtering) (on page 321)
Setting up an SPF record (on page 323)
SPF community at http://spf.pobox.com http://spf.pobox.com/
Setting up an SPF record
Although you do not need an SPF record on your DNS server to evaluate incoming e-mail against SPF policies published on other DNS servers, the best practice is to set up an SPF record on your DNS server. Setting up an SPF record lets other e-mail servers use SPF filtering
(if the feature is available on the mail server) to protect against incoming e-mail from forged
(spoofed) e-mail addresses that may be associated with your mail server. As SPF records are implemented more widely, SPF filtering will become more effective at identifying spoofed e-mail messages.
About SPF records
SPF records, like MX, A, and PTR records, are included at the DNS domain tree level. These records identify authorized SMTP servers for each domain.
323
IMail v12 Administrator Help
An SPF record consists of the SPF version number followed by strings comprised of mechanisms, prefixes, and modifiers. SPF clients ignore TXT records that do not start with the version string v=spf1.
SPF records are evaluated in a two pass process. First, all mechanisms and prefixes are evaluated, then all modifiers are evaluated. Mechanisms are evaluated from left to right.
Modifiers are evaluated on the second pass and can occur anywhere in the record. A generic
SPF record takes the format of: version ([prefix] mechanisms) (modifiers)
SPF Parameters Description v=spf1 SPF version number all, include, a, mx, ptr, ip4, and exists Mechanisms. Use one or more in a record string.
"+", "-", "~", and "?" exp
Prefixes. Precede mechanisms. If a prefix is not included, "+" is implied.
Modifiers. Use 0 - 2 in a record string.
An example SPF record is: v=spf1 +a:mail.domain.com /16 +mx +ptr include:anotherdomain.com redirect=exampleredirect.com exp=spf-error -all
This SPF record includes three directives made up of prefixes and mechanisms:
+a:mail.domain.com/16
+mx
+ptr
-all and two modifiers: include:anotherdomain.com
exp=spf-error
Mechanisms identify IP addresses that are authorized to send e-mail from a specified domain.
You can use zero or more mechanisms in an SPF record string. Mechanisms usually contain ":" or "/" characters and are case-sensitive. Directives that do not contain "=", ":", or "/" are also mechanisms. Following are mechanism descriptions:
324
IMail v12 Administrator Help
SPF Mechanisms Description
all Matches all local and remote IPs and goes to the end of the SPF record. Example: v=spf1 +all include a mx
Specifies other domains that are authorized domains. Example: v=spf1 include:domain.com -all
Specifies all IPs in the DNS A record. Example: v=spf1 a:domain.com -all
Specifies all A records for each host's MX record. Example: v=spf1 mx mx:domain.com -all ptr ip4 exists
Specifies all A records for each host's PTR record. Example: v=spf1 ptr:domain.com - all
Specifies a single IP or an acceptable IP address range. /32 is assumed if no prefix-length is included. Example: v=spf1 ip4:192.168.0.1/16 -all
Specifies one or more domains normally singled out as exceptions to the SPF definitions. An A query is performed on the provided domain, if a result is found a match occurs. Example: v=spf1 exists:domain.com -all
Prefixes designate whether IP addresses pass or fail the SPF lookup test:
SPF Prefixes
+
-
Description
Pass. The address passed the test. Example: v=spf1 +all
~
?
Fail. The address failed the test. Example: v=spf1 -all
Softfail. The address failed the test, but the result is not definitive. Example: v=spf1 ~all
Neutral. The address did not pass or fail the test. Example: v=spf1 ?all
Modifiers provide additional SPF query information and can branch SPF processing. They always contain an "=" character and are case-sensitive. SPF includes two possible modifiers; each can be used once:
SPF Modifiers
redirect
Description
Sends inquiry to another domain. Example: redirect=exampleredirect.com
325
IMail v12 Administrator Help
exp Sets up an explanation in the SPF record. If an SPF query produces a FAIL result, the explanation is queried and the explanation string provides more information to the nonconforming user. The explanation is typically placed in an SPF log. Example: exp=spf-error
For more information about SPF, go to the SPF community at
http://spf.pobox.com http://spf.pobox.com/.
Related Topics
Setting Sender Policy Framework (SPF) Options (on page 322)
Sender Policy Framework (SPF Filtering) (on page 321)
SPF community at http://spf.pobox.com http://spf.pobox.com/
SPF Result - Fail
How to get here
The SPF - Fail page allows you to choose an action when the SPF filter is enabled and the result is "Fail." This action activates when the message does not meet the publishing domain's definition of legitimacy.
The action to be taken when the query result is Fail
Action. Select one of the following actions:
None. No action is performed on messages identified as a forged message by the SPF filter.
Delete Message. Message is deleted immediately after being accepted. If Archiving is enabled, message will archive.
Forward to Address. Forwards the message to a specified e-mail address. Enter an e-mail address in the text box to the right of this option. By default, messages are sent
to the root address and stored in a mailbox called "root-bulk". Example (on page 296,
Insert X-Header (default). Inserts an X-Header into the message indicating that the message was identified as a forged message by the SPF filter.
Move to Mailbox. Moves the message to the user’s mailbox specified in the text box to the right of this option. If the mailbox does not exist, it is created. The default mailbox is "bulk".
Reject Connection. Message is rejected at the MAIL FROM command and the sending mail server is returned a 550 error message.
326
IMail v12 Administrator Help
until you know that the options are setup to best suit your filtering requirements.
Prefix subject with. If you want to add a custom prefix subject to messages that are identified as forged, select the Prefix subject with check box (cleared by default). The default
subject prefix (on page 331) is entered in the text box to the right and is based on the SPF
query result. You can also enter a custom message in this box.
SPF Result - Soft Fail
How to get here
The SPF - Soft Fail page allows you to choose an action when the SPF filter is enabled and the result is "Soft Fail." This action activates when the message does not meet a domain 's strict definition of legitimacy, but the domain cannot classify the message as a forgery for certain.
The action to be taken when the query result is Soft Fail
Action. Select one of the following actions:
None. No action is performed on messages identified as a forged message by the SPF filter.
Delete Message. Message is deleted immediately after being accepted. If Archiving is enabled, message will archive.
Forward to Address. Forwards the message to a specified e-mail address. Enter an e-mail address in the text box to the right of this option. By default, messages are sent
to the root address and stored in a mailbox called "root-bulk". Example (on page 296,
Insert X-Header (default). Inserts an X-Header into the message indicating that the message was identified as a forged message by the SPF filter.
Move to Mailbox. Moves the message to the user’s mailbox specified in the text box to the right of this option. If the mailbox does not exist, it is created. The default mailbox is "bulk".
Reject Connection. Message is rejected at the MAIL FROM command and the sending mail server is returned a 550 error message. until you know that the options are setup to best suit your filtering requirements.
Prefix subject with. If you want to add a custom prefix subject to messages that are identified as forged, select the Prefix subject with check box (cleared by default). The default
subject prefix (on page 331) is entered in the text box to the right and is based on the SPF
query result. You can also enter a custom message in this box.
327
IMail v12 Administrator Help
SPF Result - Error
How to get here
The SPF - Error page allows you to choose an action when the SPF filter is enabled and the result is "Soft Error." This action activates when an error occurred during lookup. The domain
's published records could not be correctly interpreted.
The action to be taken when the query result is Error
Action. Select one of the following actions:
None. No action is performed on messages identified as a forged message by the SPF filter.
Delete Message. Message is deleted immediately after being accepted. If Archiving is enabled, message will archive.
Forward to Address. Forwards the message to a specified e-mail address. Enter an e-mail address in the text box to the right of this option. By default, messages are sent
to the root address and stored in a mailbox called "root-bulk". Example (on page 296,
Insert X-Header (default). Inserts an X-Header into the message indicating that the message was identified as a forged message by the SPF filter.
Move to Mailbox. Moves the message to the user’s mailbox specified in the text box to the right of this option. If the mailbox does not exist, it is created. The default mailbox is "bulk".
Reject Connection. Message is rejected at the MAIL FROM command and the sending mail server is returned a 550 error message. until you know that the options are setup to best suit your filtering requirements.
Prefix subject with. If you want to add a custom prefix subject to messages that are identified as forged, select the Prefix subject with check box (cleared by default). The default
subject prefix (on page 331) is entered in the text box to the right and is based on the SPF
query result. You can also enter a custom message in this box.
SPF Result - Temp Error
How to get here
The SPF - Temp Error page allows you to choose an action when the SPF filter is enabled and the result is "Temp Error." This action activates when a temporary error occurred during lookup. This is a transient error.
The action to be taken when the query result is Temp Error
Action. Select one of the following actions:
328
IMail v12 Administrator Help
None. No action is performed on messages identified as a forged message by the SPF filter.
Delete Message. Message is deleted immediately after being accepted. If Archiving is enabled, message will archive.
Forward to Address. Forwards the message to a specified e-mail address. Enter an e-mail address in the text box to the right of this option. By default, messages are sent
to the root address and stored in a mailbox called "root-bulk". Example (on page 296,
Insert X-Header (default). Inserts an X-Header into the message indicating that the message was identified as a forged message by the SPF filter.
Move to Mailbox. Moves the message to the user’s mailbox specified in the text box to the right of this option. If the mailbox does not exist, it is created. The default mailbox is "bulk".
Reject Connection. Message is rejected at the MAIL FROM command and the sending mail server is returned a 550 error message. until you know that the options are setup to best suit your filtering requirements.
Prefix subject with. If you want to add a custom prefix subject to messages that are identified as forged, select the Prefix subject with check box (cleared by default). The default
subject prefix (on page 331) is entered in the text box to the right and is based on the SPF
query result. You can also enter a custom message in this box.
SPF Result - Neutral
How to get here
The SPF - Neutral page allows you to choose an action when the SPF filter is enabled and the result is "Neutral." This action activates when a temporary error occurs during lookup. This is a transient error.
The action to be taken when the query result is Neutral
Action. Select one of the following actions:
None. No action is performed on messages identified as a forged message by the SPF filter.
Delete Message. Message is deleted immediately after being accepted. If Archiving is enabled, message will archive.
Forward to Address. Forwards the message to a specified e-mail address. Enter an e-mail address in the text box to the right of this option. By default, messages are sent
to the root address and stored in a mailbox called "root-bulk". Example (on page 296,
Insert X-Header (default). Inserts an X-Header into the message indicating that the message was identified as a forged message by the SPF filter.
329
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Move to Mailbox. Moves the message to the user’s mailbox specified in the text box to the right of this option. If the mailbox does not exist, it is created. The default mailbox is "bulk".
Reject Connection. Message is rejected at the MAIL FROM command and the sending mail server is returned a 550 error message. until you know that the options are setup to best suit your filtering requirements.
Prefix subject with. If you want to add a custom prefix subject to messages that are identified as forged, select the Prefix subject with check box (cleared by default). The default
subject prefix (on page 331) is entered in the text box to the right and is based on the SPF
query result. You can also enter a custom message in this box.
SPF Result - None
How to get here
The SPF - None page allows you to choose an action when the SPF filter is enabled and the result is "None." This action activates when the queried domain does not publish SPF data.
The action to be taken when the query result is None
Action. Select one of the following actions:
None. No action is performed on messages identified as a forged message by the SPF filter.
Delete Message. Message is deleted immediately after being accepted. If Archiving is enabled, message will archive.
Forward to Address. Forwards the message to a specified e-mail address. Enter an e-mail address in the text box to the right of this option. By default, messages are sent
to the root address and stored in a mailbox called "root-bulk". Example (on page 296,
Insert X-Header (default). Inserts an X-Header into the message indicating that the message was identified as a forged message by the SPF filter.
Move to Mailbox. Moves the message to the user’s mailbox specified in the text box to the right of this option. If the mailbox does not exist, it is created. The default mailbox is "bulk".
Reject Connection. Message is rejected at the MAIL FROM command and the sending mail server is returned a 550 error message. until you know that the options are setup to best suit your filtering requirements.
Prefix subject with. If you want to add a custom prefix subject to messages that are identified as forged, select the Prefix subject with check box (cleared by default). The default
330
IMail v12 Administrator Help
subject prefix (on page 331) is entered in the text box to the right and is based on the SPF
query result. You can also enter a custom message in this box.
SPF Result - Pass
How to get here
The SPF - Pass page allows you to choose an action when the SPF filter is enabled and the result is "Pass." This action activates when the message meets the publishing domain's definition of legitimacy.
The action to be taken when the query result is Pass
Action. Select one of the following actions:
None. No action is performed on messages identified as a forged message by the SPF filter.
Delete Message. Message is deleted immediately after being accepted. If Archiving is enabled, message will archive.
Forward to Address. Forwards the message to a specified e-mail address. Enter an e-mail address in the text box to the right of this option. By default, messages are sent
to the root address and stored in a mailbox called "root-bulk". Example (on page 296,
Insert X-Header (default). Inserts an X-Header into the message indicating that the message was identified as a forged message by the SPF filter.
Move to Mailbox. Moves the message to the user’s mailbox specified in the text box to the right of this option. If the mailbox does not exist, it is created. The default mailbox is "bulk".
Reject Connection. Message is rejected at the MAIL FROM command and the sending mail server is returned a 550 error message. until you know that the options are setup to best suit your filtering requirements.
Prefix subject with. If you want to add a custom prefix subject to messages that are identified as forged, select the Prefix subject with check box (cleared by default). The default
subject prefix (on page 331) is entered in the text box to the right and is based on the SPF
query result. You can also enter a custom message in this box.
Default Subject Values for SPF
A prefix value, based on the SPF return code, is added to the message. The default values are if SPF checkbox is enabled:
331
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Fail. Inserts X-Header with [X-IMail-SPAM-SPF-Fail] in subject.
Softfail. Inserts X-Header with [X-IMail-SPAM-SPF- Softfail] in subject.
Error. Inserts X-Header with [X-IMail-SPAM-SPF-Error] in subject.
Temp Error. By default no action taken.
Neutral. By default no action taken.
None. By default no action taken.
Pass. By default no action taken.
This subject field is also user configurable for each possible return code.
Connection Checks Overview
Realtime Domain Blacklists
Once the Realtime Domain Whitelist has been checked, Connection Checks will then continue validation checks for Realtime Domain Blacklists and Verification Checks (if enabled).
Realtime Domain Blacklists compare the sender information from incoming messages against the listed spam databases identified as spam.
Verification Checks
MAIL FROM address validation
Reverse DNS lookup for the connecting server
HELO / EHLO domain validation
The Administrator also controls whether the message should be deleted, dropped or only add an X-Header.
The action "Only Add X-Header" allows Administrators to test and review messages that have matches from the Realtime Domain Blacklists or failed Verification Checks that were set.
An X-Header is inserted in the message for every match made to a realtime domain blacklist or failed verification check. The e-mail is then passed on to content filtering for further examination. The message is delivered if no other rules processing takes place.
For the action "Reject Connection" and "Delete Message" each spam database listed in the
Realtime Domain Blacklist that identifies the sender as spam counts as a match and each validation check failure counts as a match. The Administrator must decide at what point the
total match count necessitates action to be taken. See Examples (on page 338).
Note: Realtime Domain Blacklists are not enabled by default.
Important: Realtime Domain Blacklists can only be added after the Realtime Blacklist at
the system level is setup.
Caution: A match made for a Trusted blacklist will immediately either delete or reject the message (includes action Only Add X-Header) depending on the Verification Checks setting for Blacklists.
332
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Related Topics
Updating Connection Checks (on page 333)
Connection Check - Examples (on page 338)
Adding to Domain Blacklist (on page 336)
Understanding Realtime Blacklists (on page 95)
How Blacklists Work (on page 96)
Adding to Domain Realtime Blacklists (on page 336)
Connection Checks
How to get here
Connection Checks has the capability for the following two types of validation checks once enabled, Realtime Domain Blacklists and Verification Checks. The Administrator also controls whether the message should be deleted, dropped or only add an X-Header.
The action "Only Add X-Header" allows Administrators to test and review messages that have matches from the Realtime Domain Blacklists or failed Verification Checks that were set.
An X-Header is inserted in the message for every match made to a realtime domain blacklist or failed verification check. The e-mail is then passed on to content filtering for further examination. The message is delivered if no other rules processing takes place.
For the action "Reject Connection" and "Delete Message" each spam database listed in the
Realtime Domain Blacklist that identifies the sender as spam counts as a match and each validation check failure counts as a match. The Administrator must decide at what point the
total match count necessitates action to be taken. See Examples (on page 338).
Note. Realtime Domain Blacklists are not enabled by default.
Important. Realtime Domain Blacklists can only be added after the Realtime Blacklist at
the system level is setup.
Caution. A match made for a Trusted blacklist will immediately either delete or reject the message (includes action Only Add X-Header) depending on the Verification Checks setting for Blacklists.
Domain: Shows the current selected domain. From the drop down you can pick any of the domains available to this administrative user account.
333
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Realtime Domain Blacklist
Blacklists. Name that the IMail Administrator assigns for his/her own identification.
This column displays all existing blacklists for the current domain. Click a blacklist to modify the blacklist options.
Type. This column displays the type of lookup that the blacklist performs.
Server. This column displays the domain name or IP address of the DNS server to contact for the corresponding blacklist's queries.
Tip: Leave the Server setting as an "*" unless otherwise specified by the blacklist instructions.
Query Domain. This column displays the domain that is queried for the corresponding blacklist.
Trusted. (By default no set) This check box will enable the selected blacklist to be handled as Trusted.
Note: Matches made to connections for a Trusted Blacklist are automatically rejected or deleted depending on the Verification Check setting for Untrusted Blacklists.
Add. Click Add to create a new blacklist (on page 336) for the current domain. For
more information, see Adding a Realtime Blacklist (on page 94).
Delete. To delete a blacklist, select its corresponding check box, then click the Delete button.
Verification Checks:
Select any of the following verification tests to perform on incoming e-mail messages. If Only
Add X-header is selected for action and a message fails for any of the checks, an X-Header is inserted into the message (Message will be deleted for trusted blacklists).
Verify MAIL FROM Address. Select this check box to have the "From" address of the connecting server verified for each message to ensure that the user is a valid user on the mail server. If the user or server does not exist, the message is identified as spam.
Note: Be aware that the MAIL FROM verification check may blacklist your domain by certain mail servers (Yahoo and Hotmail), for possible phishing of e-mail addresses.
334
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Perform Reverse DNS Lookup for Connecting Server. Select this check box to create a test in which the IP address of the connecting server is used to perform a reverse DNS lookup to determine the domain name. If a domain has a valid PTR record, the message is accepted. If a reverse lookup fails, it means there is no reverse record for that IP address and the message is marked as spam. An IP address with no
PTR record is usually either from a dial-up connection or spoofed message, both of which are indicators of spam. However, keep in mind that a significant number of legitimate mail servers do not have a reverse DNS entry. This may cause legitimate mail to be marked as spam (false positive
).
Verify HELO / EHLO domain. Select this check box to create a test in which the domain passed during the HELO/EHLO is used to perform a DNS query to verify that the domain specified has an A record or an MX record. If this test fails, an X-Header is inserted into the message. conversation with "HELO" or "EHLO".
Settings for Verification Checks and Blacklists
Action on Match
Reject Connection. Upon reaching the matched count the connection will be rejected with a 550 error returned to the email server.
Note: Administrators should be aware that the connection will not be rejected during the connecting IP or EHLO/HELO conversation. Connection will be rejected after the MAIL FROM, to avoid authenticating clients from receiving errors while sending mail.
Tip: This may cause delays in the SMTP conversation.
Delete Message. Upon reaching the matched count the message will be deleted.
Only Add X-Header. Selecting this option will add an X-Header for each Untrusted
Blacklist match, and for each failed Verification Check that is selected.
Important: Selecting the Only Add X-Header action, and a match is made for a Trusted
Blacklist the message will be deleted.
Perform action after this many matches. (Default is 1) This option works only with the Reject Connection and Delete Message. Only Add X-Header ignores this setting. The action will occur immediately after X number of matches. (Blacklist matches plus failed verification check options.)
6
Many blacklists used for connection filtering return hits for domains such as yahoo.com, hotmail.com, and msn.com, among others. If you use these blacklists, non-spam e-mail from these domains may be identified as spam and processed according to the specified spam action.
335
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Tip: Be sure the value entered is not greater than the total number of blacklists plus the number of verification check options selected.
Prefix Subject with. Select this option to work with Only Add X-Header to create a test in which, if selected, the subject of a message identified as spam by connection filtering is modified by inserting the text box.
Prefix Subject With will still apply for Reject Connection and Delete Message if a match has been made for a blacklist and/or verification check that is below the match criteria set for the action.
Note For Archiving Customers: Deleted Messages are archived, but Rejected Connections are not archived.
Save. Click to save your settings.
Related Topics
About Connection Checks (on page 332)
Adding to BlackList (on page 336)
Server Level Anti-spam Options (Blacklists) (on page 97)
Understanding Realtime Blacklists (on page 95)
How Blacklists Work (on page 96)
Setting Realtime Blacklists Options (on page 336)
Setting White List Administration Options (on page 267)
IMail SMTP Settings - Control Access (on page 421)
Adding to Domain Blacklist
How to get here
Before adding to the Realtime Blacklist for a domain, be sure that it has been added to the
system level Realtime Blacklist, found at System > Realtime Blacklists (on page 92).
Realtime Blacklist selection will only display items that are enabled. This option is set in the
System > RealTime Blacklist. By default all items added to the System > Realtime Blacklist are enabled.
Note: Disabling an item in the System > Realtime Blacklist will automatically remove it
from the Connection Checks or Trusted Realtime Blacklist (on page 332). Should the item
be enabled at a later date it will automatically re-enable the list in Connection Checks or
Trusted Realtime Blacklist.
336
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Caution: A match made to the Trusted Realtime Blacklist will automatically be deleted.
Creating a Trusted Realtime Blacklist
1 Click "Add" on the Connection Checks page, and a pop-up will display all available domains that can be selected for the blacklist.
2 Select a domain and click "OK". The selected domain will appear on the Connection
Checks list.
3 The "Trusted" check box must be checked.
4 Click "Save" to save this domain to the Standard Realtime Blacklist.
Note: To easily see all domains that are in the Trusted Realtime Blacklist, sort the "Trusted" column (click the column title).
Creating a Standard Realtime Blacklist
1 Click "Add" at the Connection Check page, and the following list will display all domains available to be added to the realtime blacklist.
2 Select a domain and click "OK". The selected domain will appear in the Connection
Checks list. The "Trusted" check box by default is unchecked.
3 Click "Save" to save this domain to the Standard Realtime Blacklist.
Realtime Blacklist (Pop-up)
Realtime Blacklists. Select a Realtime Blacklist you want to add. This list is
maintained under System > Realtime Blacklists (on page 92).
Type. Displays the type of lookup that the blacklist performs from the list box (ADDR,
DNS, HELO, RHS).
Server. This column displays the domain name or IP address of the DNS server to contact for blacklist queries. This field contains an asterisk (*) by default, which indicates that the default IMail Server DNS is used for blacklist queries, where it relays the DNS query to the DNS server for the blacklist. Using the asterisk eliminates the need to enter the IP address or domain.
Query Domain. This column displays the domain to query in the zone file. This name usually matches the server domain name. However, sometimes a blacklist will contain multiple zones to query on the same server. When this happens, the server name and the query domain will be different. The only way to know this is to read the documentation for the blacklist being used.
TCP/IP First. This shows if TCP/IP First check box has been enabled. This check box allows the administrator to flag a list as one of these types.
OK. Click this button after you have made your selection.
Cancel. Click this button to cancel adding a trusted Realtime Blacklist.
337
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Untrusted Blacklist Examples
Untrusted Blacklists
Example 1:
With the example settings shown below, the connection will be dropped after the message is received under the following conditions:
Note: If less than three matches are made, the message will be accepted and delivered.
1 Match is made with two blacklist databases, and one of the verification checks fails.
Upon the third match, verification checks will stop and the connection will drop.
2 Match is made with three blacklist databases. Upon the third match the connection will drop.
3 Match is made with one blacklist database, and both verification checks fail. Upon the third match the connection will drop.
Blacklists Type Server Query Domain Trusted
spamcop DNS bl.spamcop.net helospam HELO ex.helospam.ex spamhaus DNS * zen.spamhaus.org
Verification Checks:
Verify MAIL FROM address
Perform reverse DNS lookup for connecting server
Verify HELO / EHLO domain
Settings for Verification Checks and Untrusted Blacklists:
Action on Match:
Drop Connection
Delete Message
Only Add X-Header
Perform action after this many matches: 3
Prefix Subject with
Example 2:
For Administrators that are archiving, be aware that all incoming e-mail, even when the message is deleted will still be archived. With the example settings shown below, the message will be deleted under the following conditions:
338
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Note: If less than two matches are made, the message will be accepted and delivered.
1 Match is made with two blacklist databases. Blacklist checking will stop, and the message will be immediately deleted.
2 Match is made with one blacklist database, and one of the verification checks fails.
Verification checks will stop after the first verification failure, and the message will be immediately deleted.
3 No match is made against the blacklist databases, but two of the verification checks fails. Verification checks will stop after the second verification failure, and the message will be immediately deleted.
Blacklists Type Server Query Domain Trusted
spamcop DNS bl.spamcop.net helospam HELO ex.helospam.ex spamhaus DNS * zen.spamhaus.org
Verification Checks:
Verify MAIL FROM address
Perform reverse DNS lookup for connecting server
Verify HELO / EHLO domain
Settings for Verification Checks and Untrusted Blacklists:
Action on Match:
Drop Connection
Delete Message
Only Add X-Header
Perform action after this many matches: 2
Prefix Subject with
Example 3:
For Administrators that use archiving, be aware that all incoming e-mail, even when the message is deleted will still be archived. With the example settings shown below, the message will be deleted under the following conditions:
Note: If less than four matches are made, the message will be accepted and delivered with the Prefix Subject inserted to the subject of the message.
1 Match is made with one blacklist database, but all three verification checks fail. The message will be immediately deleted.
339
IMail v12 Administrator Help
2 Match is made with two blacklist databases, and two verification checks fail. Verification checks will stop and the message will be immediately deleted.
3 Matches are made with all three blacklist databases, and one of the verification checks fails. Verification checks will stop after the first verification failure, and the message will be immediately deleted.
Blacklists Type Server Query Domain Trusted
spamcop DNS bl.spamcop.net helospam HELO ex.helospam.ex spamhaus DNS * zen.spamhaus.org
Verification Checks:
Verify MAIL FROM address
Perform reverse DNS lookup for connecting server
Verify HELO / EHLO domain
Settings for Verification Checks and Untrusted Blacklists:
Action on Match:
Drop Connection
Delete Message
Only Add X-Header
Perform action after this many matches: 4
Prefix Subject with
Example 4:
Action setting for Only Add X-Header allows Administrators to test and review messages that have matches from the Domain Blacklists or set Verification Checks that fail validations.
The following are a sample of the possible X-Headers that will be added to message along with the Prefix Subject inserted to the subject of the message.
Note: The Perform action after this many matches is disabled.
1 Match is made with one blacklist database, and two verification checks fail. The message will have three X-Headers, each explaining in detail the blacklist database or the verification failure.
2 Match is made with two blacklist databases, and three verification checks fail. The message will have five X-Headers, each explaining in detail the blacklist database or the verification failure.
340
IMail v12 Administrator Help
3 Matches are made with all three blacklist databases, and all three verification checks fail.
The message will have six X-Headers, each explaining in detail the blacklist database or the verification failure.
Blacklists Type Server Query Domain Trusted
spamcop DNS bl.spamcop.net helospam HELO ex.helospam.ex spamhaus DNS * zen.spamhaus.org
Verification Checks:
Verify MAIL FROM address
Perform reverse DNS lookup for connecting server
Verify HELO / EHLO domain
Settings for Verification Checks and Untrusted Blacklists:
Action on Match:
Drop Connection
Delete Message
Only Add X-Header
Perform action after this many matches:
Prefix Subject with
Anti-spam Logging
How to get here
Save Logs To list. Lets you configure the logging options for the anti-spam components. Select from four logging options:
No Log. Select this option to turn off event logging.
spamMMDD.log. Select to send event information to a file of this name, where MM is the month and DD is the day the log was written. This file is stored in the Spool directory.
Log Server. Select to send event information to the Log file indicated on the Logging tab.
Verbose Logging. Select this option to record more information than standard logging, such as changes to anti-spam settings and entries in the trusted addresses list or exclude list. This option can create a very large file and may be resource intensive, however, it is especially helpful in troubleshooting issues.
Save. Click this button to save your settings.
341
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Using Anti-spam Log Entries
IMail Server logs all anti-spam events, such as error messages, to a separate log file. These events are stored in the log file that is selected in the Save Logs To list box in the Setting the
Anti-spam Logging Options (on page 343). The log files also contain text that is returned by a
blacklist if a message’s IP address is listed. Other anti-spam events included in the log file are:
Enabling/disabling phrase filtering or content filtering
Initialization of phrase filtering and content filtering for each message
Verification checks performed on a message and the results
Connections to realtime blacklists and the results of the connection
File Format
The file format for anti-spam log lines is similar to that of the IMail Server logs, except that anti-spam log messages also contain an anti-spam message ID. The generic format of a log file entry is:
Date - Time - Anti-Spam Message ID -Thread or Process ID - Host name – Entry
Type - Message
Example:
File Format for Premium Anti-spam Log Entries
10:17 11:24 SMTP(f593012a00000001) e-mail determined to be spam by Premium filter, Tag =
5AE906968DC04881B0626ADBF612D86F, where Tag is the signature ID of the e-mail that caused the spam.
Thread ID
The thread ID allows you to identify all log entries for specific messages. For example, if you want to identify all log entries for the above example, you would look for every entry that contains the thread ID of (00001316). The thread ID persists across log files so you can find a thread ID in the anti-spam log and trace the same message in the SMTP log. This is also the same ID that is used to create the Q and D filenames when a message is being processed.
342
IMail v12 Administrator Help
In addition, the thread ID is inserted into the message's X-Header when it is identified as spam.
Setting the Anti-spam Logging Options (on page 343)
Example Log File (Log_Files_Example.htm)
Anti-spam Log Messages (on page 343)
Setting the Anti-spam Logging Options
How to get here
The Save Logs To list lets you configure the logging options for the anti-spam components.
Select from four logging options:
No Log. Select this option to turn off the logging of events.
spamMMDD.log (selected by default). Select this option to send event information to a file of this name where MM is the month and DD is the day the log was written.
This file is stored in the Spool directory.
Log Server. Select this option to send event information to the Log Server file indicated on the Log Files tab.
Verbose Logging. This option records more information than standard logging, such as changes to anti-spam settings, and entries in the trusted addresses list or exclude list. This option can create a very large file and may be resource intensive; however, it is especially helpful in troubleshooting issues.
Add. To add a new blacklist, or edit an existing one, click this button to navigate to
the Add Blacklist (on page 94) page.
Delete. To delete an existing blacklist from the list, select the check box next to the list and click the Delete button.
Save. Click to save your settings. An "Update Successful" message and the time of the update appear.
Related Topics
Using Anti-spam Logs (on page 342)
Anti-spam X-Header Explanations (on page 351)
Anti-spam Log Messages
To view a list of all anti-spam log messages and their explanations, click the following links:
Connection Filtering Log Messages (on page 344)
Content Filtering Log Messages (on page 349)
343
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Log Message Components
Anti-spam log lines contain all or some of the following components.
All log messages are proceeded by the following line: month:day hour:minute app_name(connection_ID)
Most log messages also have the following line:
[message_id] <domain >
Many blacklist log messages refer to the configured blacklist as a service and identify the blacklist by the following line:
(name:server :query_domain)
Connect Filtering Log Messages
Normal Log Messages Explanation
BLACKLIST:message_source was found on list
(name:server:query_domain) -> returned text
The connecting agent sending the message has been found on the specified blacklist. message_source: This information was sent to the blacklist server as the source of the message. returned_text: Sometimes the blacklist server will return text explaining why a message source is blacklisted.
BLACKLIST:failed to connect to service (name:server:query_domain)
If the blacklist is configured to use UDP, this means that the initial UDP query sent to the blacklist server and all retries timed out. If the blacklist is configured to use TCP, this means that the connection to the server failed.
VALIDATION: (HELO) domain FAILED to receive response from DNS server for HELO domain helo_argument
HELO validation searches for an MX or an A record for the domain passed in the HELO command by the connecting SMTP agent. The queried DNS server failed to respond to the query. helo_argument: The domain passed as the argument to the
HELO command by the connecting SMTP agent.
VALIDATION: (HELO) no HELO sent The connecting SMTP agent failed to send the HELO or EHLO command.
344
IMail v12 Administrator Help
VALIDATION: (HELO) helo_argument domain failed active validation
No MX or A record exists for the domain passed in the HELO or
EHLO command. helo_argument: The domain passed in the
HELO command by the connecting SMTP agent.
VALIDATION: (MAIL FROM) domain
FAILED to resolve MX/A record for mail server mail_from_argument
An MX or an A record could not be found for the sender’s mail server. This is a failure since we need the IP address to connect to the mail server and validate the user. mail_from_argument: The e-mail address passed in the MAIL
FROM command.
VALIDATION: (MAIL FROM) domain
FAILED to connect to remote_mail_server
A connection to the SMTP server for the user passed in the MAIL
FROM command was attempted, but failed. The server name was successfully converted to an IP address, but no server exists at the address or it is not running. remote_mail_server: The sender’s mail server according to the MAIL FROM command.
VALIDATION: (MAIL FROM) domain
FAILED to communicate with server remote_mail server
A connection was made to the remote SMTP server to validate the user, but the connection was terminated or failed. remote_mail_server: The sender’s mail server, according to the
MAIL FROM command.
VALIDATION (MAIL FROM) no MAIL
FROM sent
No MAIL FROM command was sent by the connecting SMTP agent.
VALIDATION:(MAIL FROM)
<remote_user> user does not exist on remote system
The user passed in the MAIL FROM command does not exist on the remote server. This is only logged if a successful conversation has taken place and the user is not a valid user on the remote SMTP server. remote_user: The user passed in the MAIL FROM command.
345
IMail v12 Administrator Help
VALIDATION: (MAIL FROM) domain
FAILED SMTP server error:mail_server_error
The SMTP server connected to, returned an error prior to validation of the user. The SMTP error is included in the log message. mail_server_error: The SMTP server error returned by the remote
SMTP server.
VALIDATION: (REVDNS) connecting_agent address does not have a valid MX or A record, message rejected
The connecting SMTP agent does not have a valid MX or A record. connecting_agent: The IP address of the connecting
SMTP agent.
VALIDATION: (REVDNS) domain
FAILED to receive reply from DNS server
A query was made to the DNS server for the mail server and no response was returned. This does not mean that no MX or A record exists for the connecting SMTP agent, just that the DNS server did not respond to queries.
VALIDATION: (REVDNS) domain
FAILED reverse DNS validation for address (connecting_agent) message failed check<check_name> which was marked as trusted, deleting
The mail server’s DNS server returned a reply to the query for an
MX or an A record for the connecting SMTP agent. However, there was no MX or A record.
Connecting_agent: The IP address of the connecting SMTP agent.
A trusted blacklist entry failed its check. The message is immediately deleted. check_name: The display name of the blacklist. message failed failed_checks of total_checks checks, deleting
Connection filtering is set to delete messages after a specific number of checks have failed (including active validation checks). This number has been reached and the message will be deleted. failed_checks: The number of checks the message failed. total_checks: The total number of checks configured for the host.
346
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Verbose Log Messages
BLACKLIST:connecting to service
(name:server:query_domain)
Explanation
This is logged just prior to querying a blacklist server.
BLACKLIST:retrying service
(name:server:query_domain)
This blacklist uses UDP, so it may not respond in a timely manner. This is logged if a query times out and must be retried.
BLACKLIST:message_source was not found on list
(name:server:query_domain)
The connecting agent is not on the specified blacklist. message_source: This is the information that was sent to the blacklist server as the source of the message.
BLACKLIST:received a reply from service (name:server:query_domain)
The queried blacklist returned a reply. This does not mean that the message source was blacklisted, just that the query was successful.
VALIDATION: (HELO) domain performing DNS lookup for HELO domain helo_argument
This message is logged prior to performing HELO validation. helo_argument:The domain passed by the connecting SMTP agent.
VALIDATION: (HELO) domain received reply from DNS server for
HELO domain helo_argument
HELO validation found an MX or an A record for the domain passed in the HELO command by the connecting SMTP agent.
This does not mean that the domain has an MX or an A record, just that the DNS server sent a response to the query. helo_argument: The domain passed in the HELO command by the connecting SMTP agent.
347
IMail v12 Administrator Help
VALIDATION: (MAIL FROM) domain validating MAIL FROM address mail_from_argument
This message is logged prior to performing MAIL FROM validation. mail_from_argument: The e-mail address passed in the MAIL FROM command.
Validation: (mail from) domain succeeded for user mail_from_argument.
The user passed in the MAIL FROM command exists on the remote SMTP server. mail_from_argument: The e-mail address passed in the MAIL FROM command.
VALIDATION: (REVDNS) domain performing reverse dns lookup on address connecting_agent
This message is logged prior to performing a reverse DNS validation. connecting_agent: The IP address of the connecting
SMTP agent.
VALIDATION: (REVDNS) domain reverse DNS validation SUCCEEDED for address (connecting agent)
The DNS server for the mail server returned an MX or A record for the connecting SMTP agent. connecting_agent: The IP address of the connecting SMTP agent.
ADMIN: reloading connection filtering settings for domain:DOMAIN
Connection filtering settings for the specified domain have changed. Only changes in IAdmin or web messaging cause a reload. Hand editing of files is ignored until SMTPD is restarted.
ADMIN: finished reloading connection filtering settings for domain: domain
Connection filtering settings for the specified domain have changed. Only changes in IAdmin or web messaging cause a reload. Hand editing of files is ignored until SMTPD is restarted.
Related Topics
Anti-spam Log Messages (on page 343)
348
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Anti-spam Logging (on page 429)
Content Filtering Log Messages
Normal Log Messages Explanation
No good/spam e-mail in Anti-spam Table for host<host>. Statistical Filtering
Disabled
The host’s antispam-table.txt does not contain any words from good or spam e-mail. Statistical filtering is therefore disabled.
No Content Filtering Host Information for the Phrase Filter
There is no content filtering host information for the phrase filter. As a result, no phrase filtering was done.
No Content Filtering Host information for the HTML Filter
There is no host information for the HTML filter. As a result, no HTML filtering was done. matched phrase[<matched phrase>] matched HTML features [<matched features>]
The specified phrase was found in the e-mail.
The specified HTML features were found in the e-mail. matched URL domain[<matched URL domain>]
Probability e-mail is spam<e-mail probability>:e-mail is spam
The specified URL domain was found in the e-mail.
The e-mail has been identified as spam. Also includes its calculated probability.
Probability e-mail is spam<e-mail probability>: e-mail is good
An e-mail has been identified as good. Also includes the calculated probability.
The body file indicated cannot be opened. Error:unable to open body file<body file name>
Unable to find Anti-Spam Host
Information for <host>
[<e-mail address/domain>] in trusted addresses
Verbose Log Messages
Phrase Filtering enabled for<host>
The specified host’s content filtering settings were not found.
The sender’s address or domain was entered as a trusted address. As a result, no content filtering was done.
Explanation
Phrase filtering is enabled for the host.
Phrase Filtering disabled for <host>
Phrase Filtering initialized for <host>
Phrase filtering is disabled for the host.
Phrase filtering was successfully initialized for the host.
Statistical Filtering disabled for <host> Statistical filtering is disabled for the host.
Statistical Filtering enabled for <host> Statistical filtering is enabled for the host.
Phrase filtering is disabled or there are no phrases to match
Either phrase filtering is disabled or the phrase list is empty.
HTML filtering is disabled for [<host>] HTML filtering is disabled for the specified host.
Scanning subject for phrases Phrase filtering is scanning the subject of a message to check for phrases contained in the phrase list.
349
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Scanning body for phrases Phrase filtering is scanning the body of a message to check for phrases contained in the phrase list. statistical filtering disabled Either statistical filtering is disabled, or there is no content filtering host information.
An e-mail is being statistically analyzed. performing statistical analysis
The following words were used to compute the probability e-mail is spam word=<word>, probability=<word hash> An interesting word and its corresponding probability. It is possible for an e-mail not to have any interesting words. In which case, the calculated probability is 0.5.
[<excluded word>] in exclude list
The statistical analysis of an e-mail is done. The most interesting words used (if any) in the analysis follows.
The specified word was found in the exclude list and will be excluded from statistical analysis.
Added Trusted Address, Content
Filtering, and HTML Filtering for <host>
Notified <host> about updating the
HTML Filter.
Notified <host> about updated trusted addresses
Notified <host> about updating the
Content Filter.
The trusted address, content filtering, and HTML filtering for the host have been added to the anti-spam engine.
The anti-spam engine has been notified about the specified host’s HTML Filtering changes.
The anti-spam engine has been notified about the host’s content filtering changes.
The anti-spam engine has been notified of the specified host’s Content Filtering changes.
Got updated Trusted Addresses, Content
Filtering, and HTML Filtering for <host>
The anti-spam engine successfully updated the trusted addresses, content filtering, and HTML filtering for the host.
Got updated Content Filtering for <host> The anti-spam engine successfully updated the content filtering for the host.
Got Trusted Address, Content Filtering, and HTML Filtering for <host>
Created and Initialized Content Filtering for <host>
The anti-spam engine successfully updated the trusted addresses and content filtering for the host.
The anti-spam engine successfully created and initialized content filtering for the host.
Created and Initialized Trusted Addresses for <host>.
The anti-spam engine successfully created and initialized the trusted addresses for the host.
Added Anti-Spam Host Information for
<Hostname>
Matched Invalid Tag feature [<invalid tag>]
The anti-spam engine successfully added anti-spam host information for the specified host.
The e-mail contained the following invalid tag.
Matched Nested Table feature [<table tag>]
Matched Image Tag feature [<image tag>]
Matched Deceptive URL feature
[<deceptive URL>]
Matched Hyperlink feature [<anchor tag>]
The e-mail contained a Nested Table with the specified table tag.
The e-mail contained the following image tag.
The e-mail contained the following deceptive URL.
The e-mail contained a Hyperlink with the following anchor tag.
350
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Matched Script Tag feature [<script tag>] The e-mail contained the following script tag.
Matched Embedded Comment feature
[<embedded comment>]
The e-mail contained the following embedded comment.
Only 255 characters of the comment are displayed.
Matched Deceptive Text feature [<text>} The text in the HTML encoded e-mail contained deceptive text.
Updated Phrase List for <domain> The phrase list for the specified domain has been updated.
Got updated <primary> Phrase list for
<domain>
The domain, which is configured to use the primary host's phrase list, has gotten the updated phrase list.
Updated HTML features doe <domain> The HTML features for the domain have been updated.
Got updated <primary> HTML features for <domain>
The specified domain, which is configured to use the primary's HTML features, has gotten the updated HTML feature settings from the primary domain.
Related Topics
Anti-spam Log Messages (on page 343)
Anti-spam Logging (on page 429)
Spam X-Header Explanations
When an e-mail message matches a realtime blacklist, included on the Connection Checks page under the Antispam > [select a domain ] > Spam Filtering > Connections Checks, an
X-Header line is automatically inserted into the message header to indicate the blacklist that the message matched.
X-Headers are also inserted when a message fails one of the verification checks set in the
Verification Checks options on the Connection Checks page.
All other spam features can be configured to insert X-Headers. These X-Headers indicate the spam filter that trapped the message and information about why the message was trapped.
Additionally, the message ID is inserted into the message's X-Header when it is identified as spam. See the examples and a table of all anti-spam X-Headers below.
X-Header Example 1 (on page 311)
X-Header Example 2 (on page 312)
X-Header
X-IMAIL-SPAM- ADDRBL:(service >,< message id>,< IP address
/reason>)
Explanation
The message matched an ADDR blacklist.
X-IMAIL-SPAM- DNSBL:(<name of service>,< message ID>, <IP The message matched a realtime
351
IMail v12 Administrator Help
address/reason>)
X-IMAIL-SPAM- HELOBL:(<name of service>,< message ID>,< IP address/reason>) blacklist.
The message matched a HELO/EHLO blacklist.
X-IMAIL-SPAM- HELODOMAIN:(<message ID>,< domain name>) The message failed the HELO/EHLO domain verification.
X-IMAIL-SPAM- INVALIDFROM: (<message ID>, <from address>) The message contained an invalid
"from" address.
X-IMAIL-SPAM-IP4R: (<message ID>, <name of service>) The message matched an IP4R (PTR) blacklist.
X-IMAIL-SPAM- STATISTICS:(<message ID>,<spam probability>) The message has been identified as spam by the statistical filter.
X-IMAIL-SPAM-RHSBL: (<name of service>, <message ID>,
<address/reason>)
X-IMAIL-SPAM- PHRASE: (<message ID>, <phrase>)
The message matched an RHS blacklist.
A phrase in the message matched the phrase list.
X-IMAIL-SPAM- VALFROM:(<message ID>) The message failed the "MAIL FROM" address verification.
X-IMAIL-SPAM- VALREVDNS:(<message ID>)
X-IMAIL-SPAM- VALHELO
X-IMAIL-SPAM-HTML- FEATURES:(<message ID>,<found features)
X-IMAIL-SPAM-URL- DBL:(<message ID>,<domain>)
X-IMail-SPAM-Premium
The message failed the reverse DNS lookup verification.
The message failed the HELO/EHLO domain verification.
The message contained the specified HTML tags.
The message contained HREF or IMG
SRC tags with links to a domain in the URL Domain Blacklist.
The message contained spam content.
X-IMail-SPAM-SPF- None
X-IMail-SPAM-SPF- Neutral
X-IMail-SPAM-SPF- Pass
X-IMail-SPAM-SPF-Fail
X-IMail-SPAM-SPF- Softfail
The domain did not publish SPF data.
The domain published SPF data and returned a "?" value.
The domain published SPF data and the message met the publishing domain's definition of legitimacy.
The domain published SPF data and the message did not meet a domain's definition of legitimacy.
The message was identified as a forged message by the SPF filter.
The domain published SPF data and the message did not meet a domain's strict definition of legitimacy, but the domain cannot confidently state the message is
352
IMail v12 Administrator Help
X-IMail-SPAM-SPF- Error
X-IMail-SPAM-SPF- TempError
X-IMail-Broken-Mime- Header forged. The message was identified as a forged message by the SPF filter.
There was an error during the SPF record lookup and could not correctly interpret the error.
There was an error during SPF record lookup. For example, the server was up, but it gave an error.
The message included a broken
MIME header.
X-IMAIL-Attachment- Blocked
X-IMAIL-ThreadID: (<message ID>)
X-CTCH-SPAM: (Message-ID) Confirmed
X-CTCH-SPAM: (Message-ID) Bulk
The message included a file attachment type or MIME type that was selected to be blocked.
Message written to a mailbox includes a ThreadID to simplify tracing the message path through the logs. The ThreadID corresponds to the ID number placed in the syslogs and the number given to corresponding Q and D files.
Premium Anti-spam Confirmed
X-Header for spam messages from known spam sources
Premium Anti-spam Bulk X-Header for spam messages from sources that are not confirmed spammers.
X-CTCH-SPAM: (Message-ID) Suspected
X-CTCH-SPAM: (Message-ID) Unknown
Premium Anti-spam Suspected
X-Header for legitimate messages that are sent to slightly larger than average distribution or are unidentified spam messages in the first few seconds of a massive spam outbreak.
Premium Anti-spam Unknown
X-Header for messages which
Commtouch does not have any incriminating information, and are therefore assumed to represent legitimate correspondence.
X-CTCH-RefID: str=0001.0A01020A.48c14898.006B:SCFSTAT211622a,ss=1,fgs=0
A transaction reference record is added by the IMail Server to the header of every message scanned by Commtouch for technical support purposes.
Related Topics
Using Anti-spam Logs (on page 342)
353
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Setting Anti-spam Logging Options (on page 343)
Using IMail Delivery Rules to Filter Spam (on page 245)
Anti-spam Log Messages (on page 343)
How Blacklists Work (on page 96)
Antispamseeder Utility
Overview (antispamseeder.exe)
The antispamseeder.exe utility, located in the IMail top directory, is used to manage the spam and non-spam word counts contained in the antispam-table.txt file. You can use this utility to modify the antispam-table.txt file in the following ways:
Re-assign the word counts contained in the antispam-table.txt
file, when e-mail is incorrectly identified as spam (false positive), or vice versa. This increases the likelihood that such messages will be correctly identified in the future.
Create a new antispam-table.txt file that applies only to a specific host.
Add new words to the antispam-table.txt
file.
Delete words from the antispam-table.txt
file that do not occur very often to decrease the size of the file.
Enter wildcards (i.e. g* *d) into the antispam-table.txt
file so that statistical filtering will identify such words as spam. either need to copy antispamseeder.exe to the secondary host’s directory, or access antispamseeder.exe from the primary IMail domain's directory.
Procedures:
Resolving incorrectly identified e-mail (on page 359)
Creating a host's antispam-table.txt file (on page 360)
Customizing a host's antispam-table.txt file (on page 362)
Adding new words to the antispam-table.txt file (on page 357)
Modifying the word counts in the antispam-table.txt file (on page 363)
Deleting infrequent words from the antispam-table.txt file (on page 358)
Merging Antispam-table.txt files (on page 356)
Creating URL Domain Blacklists (on page 364)
354
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Simultaneously Merge Domain Links List and Antispam-Table.txt Files
(Simultaneously_Merge_Domain_Links_List_and_Antispam_Table_txt_Files.htm)
Identifying wildcards in e-mail (on page 366)
Related Topics
Antispamseeder Parameters (on page 355)
Understanding the Antispam-table.txt file (on page 447)
Preparing Mailboxes for use with antispamseeder.exe
Before a mailbox can be used by antispamseeder to create or alter the antispam-table.exe
file, several precautions should be taken.
Mailboxes Messages should be Alike
Make sure that each mailbox contains the same type of e-mail messages. For example, one mailbox should contain only spam messages, and another mailbox should contain only non-spam messages.
Mailboxes should be the Same Size
Make sure that all mailboxes contain relatively the same number of e-mail messages. If one mailbox contains substantially more e-mail messages than the other, the word counts will be skewed and content filtering may not function correctly.
Remove Extra Text
You need to clean up all forwarded e-mail messages. Sometimes, a mailbox contains messages that were forwarded by a user (for example, the message was misidentified as spam or should have been identified as spam and the user wants it added to the good word counts). If this is the case, you will need to examine each forwarded e-mail and remove any information that was not included in the original e-mail, before using the mailbox with antispamseeder.exe. Information that needs to be removed is anything that was inserted by the user’s e-mail client when the message was forwarded, such as the following:
Message headers (i.e. To, From, CC , Date, Subject)
Original message indicators ">"
Anything that the user inserted into the e-mail including signatures, business cards and comments (for example, "This message was incorrectly identified as spam").
Failure to remove the above items may result in a inaccurate antispam-table.txt file, which will cause statistical filtering to incorrectly identify spam.
Antispamseeder Parameters
The following parameters can be placed in any order within a command.
355
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Command
-c<word count>
-e<exclude.txt>
-good
-h<hostname>
-l
-lo
-m
-spam
-t<antispam-table.txt>
-w<word>
Function
Represents the spam count or non-spam count of a word. This can also represent the total number of times the word has occurred in all e-mail messages.
Prevents a domain from being added to the URL Domain lack List. Used when you are importing a mailbox into the URL Domain Blacklist that contains domain names that are not spam.
Identifies the word or mailbox entered as non-spam.
Represents the name of the host.
Adds a mailbox or domain to the URL Domain Blacklist, and updates the antispam-table.txt file. -l can only be used with the spam parameter, not the good.
Use this parameter to update only the URL Domain Blacklist.
The mailbox name or path.
Identifies the word or mailbox entered as spam.
Identifies the antispam-table.txt file that will be merged with the specified host's antispam-table.txt file. Words that exist in the specified anti-spam table, but not in the specified host's anti-spam table, are added to the specified host's anti-spam table.
Represents a word. This is used in conjunction with -c to set the spam or non- spam count of a word within the antispam-table.txt file. It is also used in conjunction with -x to delete a word from the antispam-table.txt file.
-x Deletes the word specified by the -w parameter from the antispam-table.txt file.
Identifying spam with double byte characters
Some spam contains multi-byte character sets that are not read by IMail. One way to treat all these multi-byte words as spam is to add words of all dashes to the word file. The word file contains words ranging from 4 to 15 characters in length, so you can add a word of each length like this: antispamseeder -spam –w- - - - -c100 -hdomain.com
antispamseeder -spam –w- - - - - -c100 -hdomain.com antispamseeder -spam –w- - - - - - -c100 -hdomain.com
Merging Antispam-table.txt files
You can use the antispamseeder.exe utility to merge two antispam-table.txt
files. This is useful when you have modified your antispam-table.txt
file, but you want to download the latest updated file from the Ipswitch Web site. It is also useful for combining the antispam-table.txt
files of several domains. Using the procedure below, you can retain your customizations while gaining new statistical information from more recent spam.
356
IMail v12 Administrator Help
To merge two antispam-table.txt files:
1 Identify which antispam-table.txt files you want to merge.
2 Merge the two files by entering the following command in the command prompt substituting the hostname with the name of your mail host, and substituting antispam-table.txt
with the name of the anti-spam table that you want to merge with that of the specified host: antispamseeder.exe –t<antispam-table.txt> - h<hostname>
Note:
antispam-table2.txt
). This is only necessary if you want both files to reside in the same directory. The antispam-table.txt
files should be placed in the same directory as antispamseeder.exe. If they are in separate directories, you must enter the full path name for the files.
Example:
C:\Program Files\Ipswitch\Collaboration Suite\IMail\Host2\antispam-table.txt.
What happens when you run this command?
First, antispamseeder reads the specified antispam-table.txt file, and compares it to the antispam-table.txt
file for the specified host. Then, words that are not listed in the host’s file are added to it. Since the spam and non-spam word counts for each antispam-table.txt
file are different, the antispamseeder utility will recalculate the counts for each word that is added to preserve accurate statistics for the word. Therefore, new words are added with the existing word counts, and existing words are recalculated to balance the two files word counts.
Related Topics
Antispamseeder Parameters (on page 355)
Installing Updated Anti-spam Files (on page 295)
Adding a New Word to the antispam-table.txt File
You can use antispamseeder.exe to enter a new word into the antispam-table.txt
file and to assign a word count to the word.
To enter a new word into the antispam-table.txt file and assign a word count to it:
1 From the command prompt, enter the following command:
antispamseeder.exe -w<word (on page 367)> -c<word count (on page 368)>
[-spam|-good] -h<hostname>
Note:
–spam
nor
–good
parameters are entered, antispamseeder.exe will default to
–spam.
357
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Enter a word that does not exist. For the word count, enter a value between 1 and 5.
2 When this is done, the queue manager is notified and the word values contained in the antispam-table.txt
file are automatically reloaded to include the word that you entered in the above command.
Parameter
-c<word count>
- h<hostname>
-w<word>
-spam
-good
- m<mailbox>
Related Topics
Function
Represents the spam or non-spam count of a word. This can also represent the total number of times the word has occurred in all e-mail.
Represents the name of the host.
Represents a word/ This is used in conjunction with -c to set the spam or non-spam count of a word within the antispam- table.txt file.
Identifies the word as spam.
Identifies the word as non-spam.
The name of the mailbox or mailbox path.
Antispamseeder Parameters (on page 355)
Understanding the antispam-table.txt File (on page 447)
Deleting Words from Antispam-table.txt
You can use antispamseeder.exe to delete words, from a host’s antispam-table.txt
file, that occur infrequently. You may want to delete these words to save space and improve content filtering processing efficiency. This command works by eliminating all words that have occurred less than the number of times specified. For more information, see
Understanding the antispam-table.txt File (on page 447) to determine whether words should
be deleted from the Antispam-table.txt file.
To Delete Words from Antispam-table.txt File:
1 Open the antispam-table.txt file, located in the host’s directory.
2 From the command prompt, enter the following command: antispamseeder.exe -x –c<total word count> - h<hostname>
3 The words that have occurred fewer times than the total word count entered in the command are removed from the antispam-table.txt file.
Example
If you want to remove all words from the antispam-table.txt file that have occurred fewer than five times in all e-mail messages, enter the following command, where "Host1" is the name of the host:
358
IMail v12 Administrator Help
antispamseeder.exe –x –c5 -hHost1
After running the above command, and reopening the antispam-table.txt file, notice that all words that had previously occurred less than five times are gone.
Parameter
- c<word count>
Function
Represents the spam count or non-spam count of the word. This can also represent the total number of times the word has occurred in all e-mail messages.
- h<hostname> Represents the name of the host.
-x Deletes a word from the antispam- table.txt file.
Related Topics
Antispamseeder Parameters (on page 355)
Understanding the Antispam-table.txt File (on page 447)
Resolving Incorrectly Identified E-mail
When IMail Server incorrectly identifies a mail message (false positive), you can use antispamseeder.exe to add statistical information about the e-mail into the antispam-table.txt file to rebalance the spam and non-spam word counts. This will increase the likelihood that similar e-mail messages will be correctly identified in the future.
To change the word tables to recognize messages that are incorrectly identified as spam (or vice versa):
If you have a significant number of messages that are incorrectly identified as spam, you can place the messages in a mailbox and add the entire contents of the mailbox to the antispam-table.txt file at once. The following procedure explains what to do when legitimate messages have been identified as spam:
1 Place all of the incorrectly identified e-mail (non-spam) in a single mailbox. Make sure that this mailbox contains only non-spam.
2 Create the non-spam word counts within the file by entering the following command in the command prompt substituting the hostname and mailbox with your host name and mailbox name that contains the incorrectly identified (non-spam) messages:
antispamseeder.exe –good –h<hostname> –m<mailbox (on page 367)>
3 The antispam-table.txt in the host’s directory is now updated with the new word counts.
359
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Parameter
- h<hostname>
-spam
-good
- m<mailbox>
Function
Represents the name of the host.
Identifies the word as spam.
Identifies the word as non- spam.
The name of the mailbox or mailbox path.
Related Topics
Antispamseeder Parameters (on page 355)
Understanding the Antispam-table.txt File (on page 447)
Modifying the Word Count of Existing Words (on page 363)
Creating Separate antispam-table.txt Files for Multiple E-mail
Domains
There may be occasions where a current e-mail domain (IP-ed domain) does not want to use the primary e-mail domain's (IP-ed domain) antispam- table.txt
file because administrators for each domain do not agree on the words to use for spam. Or perhaps, the administrator for the primary domain is not satisfied with the
antispam-table.txt
file that
ships with the product (Example (on page 368)). In these cases, the antispam-table.txt file can
be altered.
To create spam and non-spam word counts for an e-mail domain:
Use the contents of the antispam-table-ini.txt
file. This file includes word counts that are created during installation. This file contains the initial word counts; however, it does not contain changes that were made by the primary e-mail domain.
Use the antispamseeder.exe utility to create new word counts in the antispam-table.txt file for the e-mail domain. This option is used to take the above option a step further to customize the word counts specific to the secondary (current) e-mail domain.
To create a new antispam-table.txt file:
antispam-table.txt
file, you must delete it before selecting the Current Domain option as shown in the following instructions. If you do not delete it, the antispam-table.txt file will not be copied to the directory and the word counts will not be updated. You can also backup this file to another location in case you decide to revert to it later.
1 Click the Domain tab.
2 In the Domains list, select a domain. The Domain Properties appear.
3 In the left navigation bar, click Spam Filtering. The Domain Level Anti-spam settings appear.
360
IMail v12 Administrator Help
4 Click Statistical Filter. The Statistical Filter properties appear.
5 In the Use list, click Current Domain.
Click Save.
Note:
antispam-table-ini.txt
are placed in the current e-mail domain's directory when the next mail delivery occurs. You can also stop and restart the
Queue Manager to speed the creation of this file. The antispam-table-ini.txt is a copy of the primary e-mail domain's antispam-table.txt file that was created during the installation process.
Note:
file from the current e-mail domain directory each time that content filtering is performed on a message. This file appears in the current e-mail domain's directory.
Tip: To modify the word counts within the antispam-table.txt
file, use the antispamseeder.exe. For information on how to use this utility see Customizing an e-mail
domain's antispam-table.txt file (on page 362).
To use the Primary E-mail Domain antispam-table.txt File for a Virtual IP-ed E-mail
Domain:
Note: This option is enabled by default upon installation.
1 Click the Domain tab.
2 In the Domains list, select a domain. The Domain Properties appear.
3 In the left navigation bar, click Spam Filtering. The Domain Level Antispam settings appear.
4 Click Statistical Filter. The Statistical Filter properties appear.
5 In the Use list, click Primary Domain.
6 Click Save.
Note:
antispam-table.txt
file from the primary e-mail domain directory each time that content filtering is performed on a message. Therefore, this file will not appear in the current e-mail domain's directory.
Related Topics
Antispamseeder Parameters (on page 355)
Understanding the Antispam-table.txt file (on page 447)
361
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Customizing an E-Mail Domain's antispam-table.txt File
To create new word counts specific to the host (e-mail domain), instead of using the antispam-table.txt
file for the primary host, you must create the antispam-table.txt
file using known spam and non-spam e-mail.
To create new word counts specific to the host (e-mail domain):
1 Identify the mailboxes you want to use to create the antispam-table.txt
file. You need at least two mailboxes, one that contains only spam messages and one that contains only non-spam messages. Make sure that each mailbox contains relatively the same number of e-mails. counts will be skewed and content filtering may not function correctly.
2 Create the spam word counts within the file. Enter the following command in the command prompt substituting the hostname and mailbox with your host name and the name of the mailbox that contains spam messages:
antispamseeder.exe -spam –h<hostname> –m<mailbox> (on page 367)
mailboxes are in a separate directory, you must enter the full mailbox path.
3 Create the non-spam word counts within the file. Do this by entering the following command in the command prompt substituting the hostname and mailbox
with your host name and the name of the mailbox that contains non- spam messages:
antispamseeder.exe -good –h<hostname> –m<mailbox> (on page 367)
4 The antispam-table.txt in the host’s directory is now updated with the new word counts.
Parameter Command
- h<hostname> Represents the name of the host.
-spam
-good
- m<mailbox>
Identifies the word as spam.
Identifies the word as non-spam.
The name of the mailbox or mailbox path.
Related Topics
Antispamseeder Parameters (on page 355)
Understanding the Antispam-table.txt File (on page 447)
362
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Example - Spam Word Counts
Creating Spam Word Counts using "antispamseeder.exe"
If your host's name is "Host1", and your mailbox name is "spam", you would enter the following command:
antispamseeder.exe -spam -hHost1 -mC:IMail\Host1\users\root\spam.mbx
Example - Non-Spam Word Counts
Antispamseeder.exe Example (creating the non-spam word counts).
If you have a host named "Host1" and a mailbox named "good", you would enter the following command: a ntispamseeder.exe -good –hHost1 -mC:\Program Files\Ipswitch\Collaboration
Suite\IMail\Host1\users\root\good.mbx.
Modifying Word Counts of Existing Words
You can use antispamseeder.exe to reassign a word’s count in the antispam-table.txt
file.
You may need to do this if words are being misidentified. This will alter the word counts to increase the likelihood that the word will be identified correctly in the future. For more
information, see an example of why you may need to alter the word count values (on page 368).
To change the word count of words that are incorrectly identified as spam (or vice versa):
From the command prompt, enter the following command: antispamseeder.exe –w<word> –c<word count> [- spam|-good] –h<hostname>
When this is done, the queue manager is notified and the word values contained in the antispam-table.txt file are automatically reloaded.
Related Topics
Antispamseeder Parameters (on page 355)
Ensuring Mailing List and Newsletter Delivery
To ensure that mailing list messages and newsletters are not identified as spam, place the domain name from which the mailing list/newsletter is sent in White List (trusted addresses)
If you do not trust the domain from which the message is sent, you can create a domain rule
to send the message to a folder for the user (on page 264) (i.e. spam), then the user can create a
rule that puts the message in his/her Inbox.
363
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Related Topics
Using Delivery Rules to Filter Spam (on page 245)
Creating URL Domain Blacklist with antispamseeder.exe
The easiest method to create a URL Domain Blacklist is to use the antispamseeder.exe utility.
Antispamseeder will extract the domain names from the HTML code of collected spam messages. The procedure for doing this is described below.
Creating/Updating the URL Domain Blacklist Using Antispamseeder
Enter the following command:
Antispamseeder.exe –lo -e<exclude> –h<hostname> - m<mailbox (on page 367)>
Where:
Exclude represents the Exclude file.
Hostname is the hostname of the host for which you are updating the antispam-table.txt file and the URL Domain Blacklist.
Mailbox is the mailbox that contains the spam messages that you want to use to create the URL Domain links list, and the word counts for the antispam-table.txt file.
Note that the mailbox must contain only spam messages, because all domain names in the URL Domain Blacklist are considered spam domains.
Example:
Suppose you have a host named "Host1", and want to update the URL Domain Blacklist using the messages in a mailbox called "spam". You have also created an exclude file called excludedomains.txt. Enter the following command: antispamseeder.exe –lo -eexcludedomains.txt –hHost1 –mC:\Program
Files\Ipswitch\Collaboration Suite\IMail\Host1\Users\root\spam.mbx
What happens when I run this command?
Antispamseeder examines each message in the "spam" mailbox for HTML code, specifically
HREF and IMG SRC tags. When one of these tags is found, the primary domain name is extracted from it and added to the URL Domain Blacklist. The new URL domain names will appear under the Realtime Blacklists on the Anti-spam tab > Connection Checks.
364
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Notes:
If a domain name is preceded by www, this section is dropped when the domain name is added to the URL Domain Link list by antispamseeder.
We recommend that you add your domain name to the exclude file. Unless you are certain that a domain name does not exist in the mailbox you are using with antispamseeder, you should include the –e<exclude> parameter every time you run a mailbox through antispamseeder with the –l or –lo parameter.
A list of words that are not included to determine whether a message is spam. The words in the exclude list are words that have an equal chance of being non-spam as spam. For example, "Mortgage" is a term frequently used in spam. However, if you work in the financial industry, this term may appear frequently as non-spam. In such a case, you can enter the word "mortgage" into the exclude list. The exclude list should also include common words like proper names. The exclude list is stored in the exclude-list.txt
file located in the mail domain 's directory.
How do I know which domains to enter?
You should begin collecting spam in a mailbox or use a spam mailbox that you already have.
Since most spam contains URL links, you can use these messages to update the URL Domain
Blacklist with antispamseeder.
Related Topics
Simultaneously Merging URL Domain Links and the Antispam-table.txt files (on page 365)
Antispamseeder Parameters (on page 355)
Preparing mailboxes to use with antispamseeder (on page 355)
Creating an Exclude File
A list of words that are not included to determine whether a message is spam. The words in the exclude list are words that have an equal chance of being non-spam as spam. For example, "Mortgage" is a term frequently used in spam. However, if you work in the financial industry, this term may appear frequently as non-spam. In such a case, you can enter the word "mortgage" into the exclude list. The exclude list should also include common words like proper names. The exclude list is stored in the exclude-list.txt
file located in the mail domain 's directory.
Creating URL Domain Blacklist and Antispam-Table.txt Files
To save time, you can merge a domain’s antispam-table.txt file and URL Domain Blacklist, with those of another domain, at the same time. This is especially convenient if you are using the same mailbox to accomplish both tasks. The procedure is described below.
365
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Enter the following command:
antispamseeder.exe –l [e<exclude.txt>] –h<hostname> - m<mailbox (on
Related Topics
Installing Updated Anti-spam Files (on page 295)
Antispamseeder Parameters (on page 355)
Using Antispamseeder.exe to identify wildcards
When IMail Server scans an e-mail, it breaks the e-mail down into the individual words. Each character in each word is then checked to make sure it is a valid character. By default, IMail
Server does not recognize non-alphabetic characters (except hyphens) or numbers. When comparing words to the antispam-table.txt file, non-alphabetic characters and numbers in a word are treated as the "-" character. So if the word "2Sexy" is found in an e-mail, it is treated as "–sexy" when it is compared to the antispam- table.txt file.
If you want IMail Server to identify such words as spam or non-spam, you must enter them into the antispam-table.txt file using antispamseeder.exe.
To identify words with non-alphabetic characters or numbers as spam or non-spam:
1 From the command prompt, enter the following command:
antispamseeder.exe –w<word (on page 367)> –c<word count (on page 368)> [-
spam|-good] -h<hostname>
2 The word that you entered in the above command will be identified as either spam or non-spam, depending on which parameter you entered.
Examples:
Parameters
Parameter
-c<word count>
- h<hostname>
- w<word>
-spam
Function
Represents the spam count or non-spam count of a word. This can also represent the total number of times the word has occurred in all e-mail messages.
Represents the name of a host.
Represents a word. This is used in conjunction with -c to set the spam or non- spam count of a word within the antispam-table.txt file.
Identifies the word entered as spam.
366
IMail v12 Administrator Help
-good
Related Topics
Identifies the word entered as non-spam.
Antispamseeder Parameters (on page 355)
Understanding the Antispam-table.txt File (on page 447)
Using the antispam-table.txt File
The antispam-table.txt
file is the file that contains the spam and non-spam word counts for use with the content filtering feature in IMail Server. When new versions of IMail Server are released, this file is updated to reflect better word statistics.
This installation wizard dialog lets you decide whether to overwrite this file:
Merge. Adds new words to the current antispam-table.txt
file.
Overwrite. Replaces the current antispam-table.txt
file with the updated file.
Ignore. Does not install the updated word counts.
Note:
antispam-table-ini.txt
file into your current antispam-table.txt file after installation, using the antispamseeder.exe
utility. For more information, see the Antispamseeder.exe Overview (on
Modify Subject for URL Domain Blacklist
By default, the text that is added to the message subject is:
X-IMail-Spam-URL-DBL
Mailbox Path
If the mailbox resides in the same directory as antispamseeder.exe, enter the name of the mailbox (.mbx) that contains the messages that you want to add to the antispam-table.txt
file. If the mailbox does not reside in the same directory as antispamseeder.exe, enter the full path of the mailbox.
Word (defined for the antispam-table.txt file)
Any word you want to add to the antispam-table.txt file must comply with the following rules:
It must be between 3 and 32 characters.
It cannot contain any non-alphabetic characters except a hyphen.
367
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Do I need to alter the word tables in the antispam-table.txt file?
The antispam-table.txt file that ships with the product, is appropriate for most users.
However, you may need to alter this file if we have identified words as spam that you do not consider to be spam, or vice versa. For example, the word "mortgage" is identified as spam because in our tests, it occurred 370 times in non-spam, and 714 times in spam. However, at financial institutions, the word "mortgage" is a non-spam word that occurs frequently. In this case, you need to alter the antispam-table.txt file so that the antispam engine recognizes the word "mortgage" as non-spam.
Changing the Word Count for a Word (Example)
If you want to alter the entry for the word "graciously" in the antispam-table.txt file so it is treated as spam , enter the following command (where 10 is the word count that you want to assign to the word "graciously", "Host1" is the hostname, and "graciously" is the word).
In essence, you are altering the entry for the word "graciously" in the antispam-table.txt file, therefore increasing the likelihood that this word will be identified as spam in future e-mails.
Before running the above command, the entry for this word looked like this in the antispam-table.txt file: graciously,583326,14,2
After running the above command, the entry looks like this in the antispam-table.t
xt
file: graciously,583326,14,10
Word count
The word count you want to assign to a word. For example, suppose you enter the following command:
-wstart -c10 -spam -hHost1
The word "start" is now treated as if it has appeared in 10 spam messages.
368
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Anti-spam
Spam is not being redirected to the mailbox entered in the "Forward
To" field
By default, spam is sent to "root-bulk". Root-bulk is a sub-mailbox that did not previously exist on your system. If the host has the Sub-mailbox Creation option set to Bounce or Send to
Inbox, then the spam is redirected. See Setting Domain Properties (on page 42) for
information on how to change the sub-mailbox option.
My Max Mailbox size has been exceeded
If you choose to forward spam messages to a mailbox and receive a large quantity of spam, it is possible that the max mailbox size defined for the mail domain (host) has been exceeded.
To remedy this, either delete some of the spam from the mailbox or increase the max mailbox size. To ensure that you are notified of this situation in the future, you may want to set up a
Full Mailbox Notify Address, so that you will receive an e-mail when the mailbox is near
capacity. For more information, see Setting Domain Properties (on page 42).
I am still getting spam
It is not possible for IMail Server to eliminate all spam. It is inevitable that a small percentage will still get through to your mailbox. However, you can adjust the Advanced Statistical filtering options to increase the performance of IMail Server’s antispam component.
There are no blacklists available for the host
If there are no blacklists displayed on a host’s Add Realtime Blacklist list, that means no blacklists are enabled at the server level. See Setting Connection Checks Options (Domain Level
Options) (on page 333) for information on how to enable realtime blacklists for the server.
IMail Server is running extremely slow
If you have enabled any of the verification options, this could cause a slowdown. See Setting
Connection Checks Options (on page 333) for more information on the verification options.
Spam is not being sent to the correct mailbox
Make sure that the mailbox you want spam sent to is entered in the Forward to Address
field on the Phrase Filter Options page (on page 303) and the Statistical Filter Options page (on
page 316). If the correct mailbox is displayed, check to see if the host has an inbound delivery
rule (on page 246) that may be trapping the message and sending it to a different mailbox.
Legitimate e-mail is being identified as spam (false positives)
There are several reasons why a legitimate message may be identified as spam. First, make sure that the IP address is not listed in a blacklist. Do this by examining the message header for the "X-IMAIL-SPAM:" line. Second, see if the message failed any verification checks.
369
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Sometimes, even legitimate SMTP servers have wrong DNS records. If the message is identified as spam by content filtering, you need to use the antispamseeder.exe utility to alter
the antispam- table.txt file (on page 354).
Some of my users cannot send outgoing mail
To assume your users' mail is delivered, enter your mail server’s domain name into the trusted addresses list.
I have setup a "Spam" mailbox that all spam messages are sent to, but some of my users cannot see this mailbox. Why?
The "spam" sub-mailbox is not created until the user account receives spam, so it is possible that the account has not received any spam. If the users are POP3 users, they will not see the
"spam" mailbox unless they login using the format userid-spam.
Minimizing False Positives
What is a False Positive?
As with any spam product, there is a chance that IMail Server may identify non-spam messages as spam. Such mistakes are called false positives. False positives can occur in both
connection and content filtering. Example (on page 302)
Why Do False Positives Occur?
False positives resulting from content filtering may include newsletters and other various types of e-mail that people subscribe to. Many of these get caught by the content filters because they may contain ads that look like spam.
How to Prevent False Positives
The following methods are effective in minimizing false positives:
White List (trusted addresses) (on page 267). Add the IP address (or range of addresses),
domain names, and e-mail addresses for your network to the trusted address list. Any e-mail received from an IP address in this list will not have connection or content filtering performed on it.
Delivery Rules. Set up delivery rules (on page 245) to send spam to a sub-mailbox in
each user's directory. To do this, configure connection filtering (on page 333) and
content filtering (Phrase Filter (on page 303) and the Statistical Filter (on page 316)) to
place X-headers in the message. Then, create a domain rule that searches for a header that contains X- IMAIL-SPAM to place the message in a sub-mailbox (i.e.
H~X-IMAIL-SPAM:spam). Users can then make individual rules that move messages back into the main mailbox.
370
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Identifying spam with double byte characters
Some spam contains multi-byte character sets that are not read by IMail. One way to treat all these multi-byte words as spam is to add words of all dashes to the word file. The word file contains words ranging from 4 to 15 characters in length, so you can add a word of each length like this: antispamseeder -spam –w- - - - -c100 -hdomain.com
antispamseeder -spam –w- - - - - -c100 -hdomain.com antispamseeder -spam –w- - - - - - -c100 -hdomain.com
Pager Problems
Most problems with pager communications seem to be caused by modem initialization strings. The modem must have the "interface to modem" and "modem to distant end" set to the same baud rate, either 300 or 1200 baud. The modem must have "echo" disabled,
"command textual responses" enabled, must return standard Hayes compatible responses, and must accept Hayes compatible commands. The system must be tested at 300 baud.
Once, you've established that the pager works, you can change the baud rate. Modems that return connection information other than "Connect ..." must have the extra connect information turned off. Modems that lock interface speeds must have that option disabled or locked to the desired connect speed (300 baud).
371
CHAPTER 9
Collaboration
In This Chapter
Managing Collaboration Groups ................................................................ 375
Collaboration Users
How to get here
You can add, edit, or delete collaboration users, or search for collaboration user account details from the Collaboration Users page.
Search Box. This search will automatically begin narrowing the list of users. The search assumes a wildcard automatically after the characters entered. Search target includes both the "Name" and "Login Name" columns as criteria for search selection.
Collaboration User List
Name. This column displays the user's account name. This is automatically populated
when a new user is added via the Add IMail User (on page 166) page. If you click the
link under the User's Name, the Collaboration User Account Details (on page 373) page
appears.
Login Name. This column displays the name the user logs in with. This is automatically populated when a new user is added via the Add IMail User (on
Email. Displays the associated e-mail address. This is automatically generated when a
new user is added through the Add IMail User (on page 166) page.
Add. Click "Add" to manually create a new collaboration user.
Delete. Click this button after selecting a user from the list to delete.
Related Topic
Add Collaboration User (on page 373)
372
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Add Collaboration User
How to get here
Clicking the Add button on the Collaboration Users page will bring up a pop-up to allow adding a new Collaboration user.
Name. Enter the user's account name in the text box.
E-mail. Enter the user's E-mail address in the text box.
Login Name. Enter the name with which the user logs into the system.
Password. Enter a password for this user into the text box.
Confirm Password. Re-enter password to verify correct spelling.
Save. Click this button to save your changes.
Cancel. Click this button to exit without saving changes.
Collaboration User Account Details
How to get here
Clicking the Add button on the Collaboration Users page will bring up a pop-up to allow adding a new Collaboration user.
Name. Enter the user's account name in the text box.
E-mail. Enter the user's E-mail address in the text box.
Login Name. Enter the name with which the user logs into the system.
Password. Enter a password for this user into the text box.
Confirm Password. Re-enter password to verify correct spelling.
Save. Click this button to save your changes.
Cancel. Click this button to exit without saving changes.
Related Topics
Collaboration Users (on page 372)
Collaboration User Folders & Access (on page 373)
Granting Access to a User's Personal Folders (on page 374)
Collaboration User Folders and Access
How to get here
This page displays a specified Collaboration User's personal folders that are available for sharing, as well as other folders that are accessible to this user. The page appears when you
click the user name link on the Collaboration Users (on page 372) page.
373
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Account Name. This is populated by selecting a specific Name on the Collaboration
Users page.
Account E-mail. This is populated by the corresponding user's e-mail address on the
Collaboration Users page.
This user's personal folders that are available for sharing. This area displays this user's folders available for sharing. Clicking on a folder will display in box below all
Users / Groups with access.
Users or Groups with access to the selected folder. Selecting a personal folder will display all users with permissions to this folder.
Other folders accessible to this user. This area displays other public folders accessible to this user, and allows you to:
Grant this user rights to a public folder. Click this link to navigate to Public Folders.
You can then select any of the folders in the list and provide access for the specified user.
Granting Access to a User's Personal Folders
You can either grant or change access to a user’s personal folders (made available for sharing by the user) via the Collaboration Users page.
To grant access to a user’s personal folders:
1 From the Collaboration tab, select Manage Collaboration Users. The Collaboration
Users page appears.
2 Click the User Name to be modified. The Collaboration User Folders and Access page appears.
3 There are two views available:
This user’s personal folders that are available for sharing
Other folders accessible to this user
4 Click the personal folder under This user's personal folders to view all Users and
Groups with access to the selected folder. The Folder Properties page appears.
5 Click Edit Access Permissions hyperlink to add or edit access permissions. The Folder
Properties page appears displaying all users with access permissions.
6 Click the Add button. The Access Level page appears with all collaboration users and groups available for access setting.
7 From the Collaboration Users/Groups check boxes, you can select all (selects only the current page), or select individual users and groups.
8 From the Access Level list box, select one of the following access levels you wish to assign to those users/groups.
read
read, create
read, create, edit
read, create, edit, delete
9 Click Save. The selected users and groups are displayed on the Folder Properties page.
10 If you are satisfied with the users and groups, click Save.
374
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Managing Collaboration Groups
How to get here
Use the Collaboration Groups page to create, edit, delete, or search for collaboration groups. Creating Collaboration Groups is a convenient way of organizing certain users with common attributes. For example, you might create a group that contains all the human resources staff. Once you have created a group, you can use it when specifying access (read, create, edit, or delete) to a particular folder or subfolders. For example, you can grant access for a group to a particular folder, or alternatively, you can grant access for a user to a particular group. The latter method will grant the specified user access to every folder belonging to every member of the specified group.
Search Box. This search will automatically begin narrowing the list of users. The search assumes a wildcard automatically after the characters entered. Search target includes both the "Name" and "Login Name" columns as criteria for search selection.
Name. Displays all current collaboration groups.
Add. Click this button to add a new group (on page 375).
Delete. Click this button to delete a group (on page 376).
Related Topics
Adding a New Collaboration Group (on page 375)
Deleting a New Collaboration Group (on page 376)
Adding a New Collaboration Group
You can only navigate to this page by clicking the Add button on the Collaboration Groups
To add a new collaboration group:
1 Enter the Name for the new group, and click Save. This will create the new group and allow new users to be added.
2 Click the Add button and the Add Group Members page appears.
3 Choose the members for this new group from the list by selecting the check box to the left of each name. You can either Select All by selecting the check box, or you may select one or more individual Collaboration Users from the list.
4 Click Save at the bottom of the page. The Group Properties page displays the new users listed.
5 Click Save to save your group name change or click Return To All Groups to return to
the Collaboration Groups (on page 375) page displays your new group.
Note: Changing the group name will not apply unless Save is clicked. Adding and deleting from a group is saved immediately after adding.
375
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Granting Access to Group
You can either grant or change access to a group or user (made available for sharing by the user) via the Collaboration Group page.
To grant access to a group:
1 From the Collaboration tab, select Manage Collaboration Groups. The Collaboration
Group page appears.
2 Click the Group Name to be modified. The Group Properties page appears.
3 There are two views available:
Group Properties - Members of the group
Access Permissions - User's with access to group
4 Click Access Permissions to display all Users and Groups with access to this item.
5 Click Add or click the existing User/Group to Edit. The Access Level page appears.
6 From the Access Level drop down, select one of the following access levels:
Read
Read, Create
Read, Create, Edit
Read, Create, Edit, Delete
7 From the displayed User/Group you can select all (selects only the current page), or select individual users and groups check boxes.
8 Click Save. The selected users and groups are displayed on the Access Permissions page.
Deleting a Collaboration Group
You can only navigate to this page by clicking the Delete button on the Collaboration Groups
To delete a collaboration group:
1 Select a group on the Collaboration Groups (on page 375) page. Click the Delete button
at the bottom of the page.
2 The following message appears: Are you sure you want to permanently Delete the
following Group(s): <name(s) of groups>.
3 Click Delete at the bottom of the page.
4 The Collaboration Groups (on page 375) page no longer displays the group in the list.
376
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Public Folders
How to get here
The Public Folders page allows you to manage public access and sharing in Calendar,
Contacts, Mail, Notes, and Tasks. It allows you to add (create), update, delete, or view public folders. Public folders are folders that are made available to selected users and groups, and are an effective way to collect, organize, and share information with other people. You can use them to store items, such as calendars, contacts, tasks, etc., which are shared by two or more people.
Note: Web client will only display shared contacts and calendars.
A useful example of a public folder is a public contacts folder, where all specified staff will have access to the organization- wide list of contacts. Another example is a public calendar, which lets all staff know when a meeting room is available or in use. When you create a public folder and give, minimally, read access to a user, the folder will appear in the user's calendaring tool the next time they synchronize.
Folder Name. This column displays existing public folders.
Type. This column displays the type of public folder corresponding to the folder name -- either Calendar, Contacts, Mail, Notes, or Tasks.
boxes and saved, the new folder information appears on the Public Folders page.
Delete. Select a check box next to a folder you want to delete, then click this button to delete the folder.
Related Topics
Select Users and Groups Folder Access (on page 378)
Granting Access to Public Folders (on page 383)
Public Folder Properties
How to get here
The Folder Properties Page allows you to add, update, delete, or view the details of public folders for the specified domain.
Folder Name. This column displays existing public folders.
Type. This column displays the type of public folder corresponding to the folder name -- either Calendar, Contacts, Mail, Notes, or Tasks.
[ Edit Contacts ] (on page 379). Displays only for public folders set as Contacts. Click
this link to easily add and remove contacts and groups.
377
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Parent. Selection is not required, and will become a parent folder. Select the Parent folder from the list box. The list box contains a list of all existing Public Folders.
Inherit Access from Parent. Select this check box if you want this new public folder to allow the newly created folder to inherit the same access rights as the selected parent folder.
Users and Groups Access Rights List
User/Group. This column lists the users and groups that have access rights to the specified folder.
Access. This column lists the level(s) of access the user or group has to the specified folder, i.e. Read, Create, Edit, Delete, or combinations of those levels.
Add. Click Add to be taken to Allow Access to Users and Groups for this item (on
Delete. Click Delete after selecting the check box next to the User/Group to remove access from the specified folder.
Save. Click this button to save your settings.
Cancel. Click to cancel changes and return to the Public Folders page.
Related Topics
Public Contacts Folder [ Edit Contacts ] (on page 379)
Allow Access to Users and Groups
How to get here
Item. Displays the specific folder to which you are giving access.
Access Level. Select the appropriate access level from the list box. The levels are:
Read. Users/Groups with Read Access can only read shared information.
Read, Create. Users/Groups with Read, Create access can read and create new information. However, they cannot edit or delete it.
Read, Create, Edit. Users with this level of access can read, create, and edit information, but cannot delete it.
Read, Create, Edit, Delete. Users with this level of access can read, create, edit, and delete information.
Select All. Click this check box if you want to select all of the users displayed in the list.
User / Group. Select the check box next to the specific name(s) for which you want to allow folder access.
Save. Click to save your settings.
Cancel. Click to cancel your settings.
378
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Public Contacts Management
How to get here
The Public Contacts Page allows full administration of the public contacts folder for the selected domain. You can easily add and remove existing IMail Users, Collaboration Groups, and New Contacts.
Public Contacts List
Search Box. Typing will automatically begin narrowing the list. The search assumes a wildcard automatically after the characters entered.
Note: Column Titles when clicked will sort the list for the current session only. Refreshing the page will reset the original sort.
Name. This column lists the users and groups that have access rights to the specified folder.
Address. This column lists the level(s) of access the user or group has to the specified folder, i.e. Read, Create, Edit, Delete, or combinations of those levels.
IMail User (on page 380). Click to display all available IMail Users for specified domain.
New Contact (on page 380). Click to add a contact that is not a user within the specified
domain.
New Group (on page 381). Click to create a Contacts Group, which allows sending a message
to a group of addresses.
Note: Public Contacts groups should not be confused with Collaboration groups, which controls permissions access for Collaboration User's contacts and Public Folders.
Delete. Click Delete after selecting the check box next to the User/Group to remove access from the specified folder.
Done. Click this button to return to the Public Folder Properties page.
Related Topics
Public Folder Properties (on page 377)
Public Folder - Access Rights
Adding IMail Users to Public Contact Folder (on page 380)
Creating New Contact for a Public Contact Folder (on page 380)
379
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Creating a New Group within a Public Contact Folder (on page 381)
IMail User Selection
How to get here
The IMail User page will display all IMail Users for the selected domain that are currently not on the public contacts folder being updated.
Clicking column titles will sort ascending/descending. This will allow all System Admins,
Domain Admins, List Admins, or Disabled Accounts to sort to the top of the page.
IMail Users List
Full Name. This column lists all available IMail Users for selected domain.
Email. Displays e-mail address of the IMail User.
System Admin. Displays "Yes" or "No" depending on IMail User having System
Administrator permissions.
Domain Admin. Displays "Yes" or "No" depending on IMail User having Domain
Administrator permissions.
List Admin. Displays "Yes" or "No" depending on IMail User having List Administrator permissions.
Enabled. Displays "Yes" or "No" depending on IMail User's having a disabled account.
Save. Click to save your settings.
Cancel. Click Cancel to exit without saving changes.
New Contact for Public Contacts
How to get here
The New Contact page will allow adding a new contact to the Public Folder selected.
Primary Information
First Name. Enter First Name of the New Contact for selected domain.
Last Name. Enter Last Name of the New Contact for selected domain.
Email Address. Enter Email Address of the New Contact for selected domain.
Company Information
Company Name. (Optional) Enter Company Name of the New Contact for selected domain.
Job Title. (Optional) Enter the Job Title of the New Contact for selected domain.
Department. (Optional) Enter the Department of the New Contact for selected domain.
380
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Phone Numbers
Home Phone. (Optional) Enter the Home Phone of the New Contact for the selected domain.
Mobile Phone. (Optional) Enter Mobile Phone of the New Contact for selected domain.
Business Phone. (Optional) Enter Business Phone of the New Contact for selected domain.
Business Fax. (Optional) Enter the Fax number of the New Contact for the selected domain.
Home Address
Street. (Optional) Enter Home Street Address of the New Contact for the selected domain.
City. (Optional) Enter Home City of the New Contact for the selected domain.
State. (Optional) Enter Home State of the New Contact for the selected domain.
Zip Code. (Optional) Enter Home Zip Code of the New Contact for the selected domain.
Country. (Optional) Enter Home Country of the New Contact for the selected domain.
Business Address
Street. (Optional) Enter Business Street Address of the New Contact for the selected domain.
City. (Optional) Enter Business City of the New Contact for the selected domain.
State. (Optional) Enter Business State of the New Contact for the selected domain.
Zip Code. (Optional) Enter Business Zip Code of the New Contact for the selected domain.
Country. (Optional) Enter Business Country of the New Contact for the selected domain.
Save. Click to save your settings.
Cancel. Click Cancel to exit without saving changes.
New Groups for Public Contacts
How to get here
The New Groups page allows the IMail Administrator to organization contacts into groups.
The New Groups page was designed to manage the creation, maintenance and deletion of all
Groups.
The Group Contacts page has two displayed boxes.
The left display contains all contacts that currently exist in the Public Contact folder.
381
IMail v12 Administrator Help
The right display (empty when new) contains all contacts for the Group.
Button Selection
(Add to Group). Select contact and click to add a member to the group.
(Remove from Group). Select group member and click to remove a member from the group. If group member was only a recipient (not a contact), then this will permanently remove the recipient from the group after saving.
(Add All to Group). Click to add all contacts in list to the group.
(Remove All From Group). Click to remove all group members (from the list on the right) from the group.
Note: Removing a group member (recipient) that does not exist in the contact list, will remove the group member permanently after saving.
Group Options
Group Name. Enter the name for your new group in the text box.
Select Public Contact Folder. From the drop down list box, select any of the other
Public Contacts folders you need to for your new Contact Group.
Public Contacts List
Name. This column displays the corresponding names of the selected Public Contact folder that are not currently in the group.
Address. This column displays all e-mail addresses from the selected Public Contact folder that are not currently in the group.
Group Member List
Name. Group member name.
Address. Group member e-mail address.
Create a New Contact.
Add a New Address (on page 383). This will allow adding any e-mail address to a group that
does not exist in the selected Public Contact folder. Clicking will pop up a window to add a new contact to the group.
Save. Click to save your settings.
Cancel. Click Cancel to exit without saving changes.
382
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Adding a New Contact to a Group
You can add a new contact to a group by clicking the Add a New Address link on the
Contact Groups page.
Name. Type the name of your new contact in the text box.
Email. Type the email address of your new contact in the text box.
Create a New Contact Checked by default.
Create a New Contact (Checked). Will create a new contact and will also add as recipient to the group.
Create a New Contact (Not Checked). Will not add to the contact list; will only add this address as a recipient to the group.
Save. Click to add the new contact to the Group Members column.
Cancel. Click to cancel your changes.
Granting Access to Public Folders
To grant or change access to a public folder:
1 From the Collaboration tab, select Public Folders. The Public Folders page appears.
2 All shareable Public Folders are displayed in the Folder Name column. Click the public folder you wish to share. The Public Folder Properties page appears, listing existing users and groups that have access to the selected folder.
3 Click the Add button at the bottom of the page. The Access Level page appears, displaying all users that do not currently have access.
4 From the Access Level list box, select one of the following access levels you wish to assign to those users/groups:
Read
Read, Create
Read, Create, Edit
Read, Create, Edit, Delete
5 From the Users/Groups check boxes, you can select all (selects only the current page), or select individual users and groups.
6 Click Save. The selected users and groups are displayed on the Public Folder
Properties page.
Collaboration Settings
How to get here
383
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Use this page to set and modify the Collaboration settings for the Client and Server, the log settings, the synchronization options for attachments and appointments, and to allow users to self-administer their client folders.
Client Update Settings
Specify the number of minutes between automatic client updates.
Update Frequency (minutes). In the text box, enter the number in minutes of how frequently the client will connect to the Collaboration server in order to synchronize.
Clients may set their own synchronization schedule. Select the check box to allow users to set their own synchronization schedules. Users will be able to set their own schedules for synchronization in their Outlook client.
Server Settings
Specify the interfaces and the port that the Collaboration server will listen on.
Interface. The list box defaults to All Interfaces; however, if the server has more than one IP address, you can listen on that specific interface by selecting the appropriate IP address from the list box. server is connected to both the LAN and directly to the Internet on different interfaces, and you only want the server to listen on the local interface.
Listen On. Choose one of three options:
Unsecure port only. Select this option if you want to listen only on an unsecure port.
Secure port only. Select this option if you want to listen only on a secure port.
Both secure and unsecure ports. Select this option if you want to listen on both unsecure and secure ports.
Unsecure Port. In the text box, enter the port number for non-secure communications. The default port number is 8100. You will not be able to enter anything in the text box if you have chosen the Secure port only option.
Secure Port. In the text box, enter the port number for secure (SSL) communications.
The default port number is 8101. program on all client computers so they will recognize the new settings.
Log Settings
Log Communications. Select this check box if you want to configure the server to log every transaction with each client to a log file. The file will contain general details of transactions between the server and the clients.
Verbose Logging. Select this check box if you want the log file to contain specific details for each record. You will be unable to select this check box if the Log
Communications check box is clear.
384
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Attachment Synchronization
Synchronize attachments and images on contacts, appointments, and tasks.
Select this option if you want to synchronize attachments and images associated with contacts, appointments, and tasks.
Synchronize attachments and images on e-mail. Select this option if you want to synchronize attachments and images for e-mail. storage when synchronizing. You can select neither, one, or both of the options above.
Appointment Synchronization
Synchronize all appointments. Select to allow users to synchronize all their appointments.
Synchronize appointments from specified number of weeks in the past. Select to allow users to synchronize all their appointments from a specified number of weeks in the past. Enter the desired number in the text box.
Client Folder Administration
Select one of the following to allow users to administer access to their folders (via the
Outlook client) or not:
Users can administer access to their folders by default
Users cannot administer access to their folders by default
Save. Click to save your settings.
Granting Access
Select the Access Type:
Granting Access to a User's Personal Folders (on page 374)
Granting Access to Group (on page 376)
Granting Access to Public Folders (on page 383)
385
CHAPTER 10
Services
In This Chapter
Service Administration Overview ............................................................... 386
Commtouch (Premium Anti-spam)............................................................ 389
Service Administration Overview
How to get here
IMail Service Administration lets you manage a number of system services. The Service
Administration page lets you get a quick overview of these services and their status.
The list shows which services are installed. Each service, its version number, and its current state (Stopped or Running) is displayed. You can use the check boxes to the left of the Name list to stop and start individual services. By selecting or clearing all check boxes at once, you can also stop or start all services simultaneously. You can also click the link under any service to access its settings page.
Tip: Starting or Stopping multiple services may take a minute.
IMail IMAP4 Server Service (on page 392). Select this check box to let users access
remote message stores (on the mail server) as if they were local. Using an IMAP4 mail client, users can read their mail, move or delete mail, create mailboxes - all on the server system.
Note: IMail Web Messaging directly accesses the server to manage mail, and no longer requires IMAP.
386
IMail v12 Administrator Help
IMail LDAP Service (on page 395). Select this check box to publish and provide
access to user information on the server, and extend the IMail user database to include standard LDAP attributes such as name, address, organization name, and phone number. LDAP allows each user with an account on the system to add, delete, or modify information in his/her own LDAP entry.
IMail POP3 Server Service (on page 402). Select this check box to let any POP3 mail
client communicate with IMail Server.
IMail Queue Manager Service (on page 407). Select this check box to control the
flow of messages through the mail queue. The Queue Manager Service is a component of the SMTP delivery process.
IMail SMTP Service (on page 413). Select this check box to let the SMTP server send
and receive mail from other Internet hosts using the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
(SMTP) and process all incoming and outgoing mail.
Symantec Anti-virus Scan Engine (on page 279) (available separately). Select this
check box to provide consistently current, premium anti-virus protection.
IMail Sys Logger Service (on page 429). Select this check box to view the log files in
the IMail spool directory.
IMail WorkgroupShare Service (on page 372). Select this check box to enable
shared Microsoft Outlook global calendars, tasks, notes and address books with the installation of the the IMail Collaboration Client.
IMail Commtouch Service (on page 389) (available only with IMail Premium). Select
this check box to provide automatically updated, language-aware premium anti-spam technology.
IMail Commtouch IP Rep Service (on page 389) (available only with IMail Premium).
Select this check box to provide automatically updated, language-aware premium anti-spam technology.
Ipswitch Instant Messaging Server. Select this check box to enable secure instant messaging with Smart Tag.
Related Topics
Viewing Service Status from a Web Browser
Click the Services tab. The Service Administration page appears. Look in the Current State column corresponding to the row for the specific service.
Stopped), and a Start/Stop button appears. This allows you to Start or Stop individual
Services from their respective web pages, as well as from the Service Administration page.
Configuring IMail Services (on page 388)
IMail Administrator Services (on page 388)
387
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Configuring IMail Services
To start a service, select the check box to the left of that service and click Start. To stop a service, select the check box to the left of that service and click Stop.
To verify that you have successfully stopped or started a service, a page with a progress bar appears. The Service Administration page displays the service's new status.
Viewing the Status of IMail Services
Click the Services tab. The Service Administration page appears. Look in the Current State column corresponding to the row for the specific service.
Stopped), and a Start/Stop button appears. This allows you to Start or Stop individual
Services from their respective web pages, as well as from the Service Administration page.
Logging into IMail Services
Before you can access the Service Administration page, a separate dialog may appear during each browser session prompting you for a Windows User name and Password. This depends on your platform and security settings.
If the dialog box does not appear, the Services Administration page opens.
If the dialog box does appear, enter the administrator user name (administrator for the computer) and password. The Services Administration page opens.
Setting Service Administration Options
How to get here
388
IMail v12 Administrator Help
IMail Service Administration lets you manage a number of system services. The Service
Administration page lets you get a quick overview of these services and their status.
The list shows which services are installed. Each service, its version number, and its current state (Stopped or Running) is displayed. You can use the check boxes to the left of the Name list to stop and start individual services. By selecting or clearing all check boxes at once, you can also stop or start all services simultaneously. You can also click the link under any service to access its settings page.
IMail IMAP4 Server. Select this check box to start this service, which lets users access remote message stores (on the mail server) as if they were local. Using an IMAP4 mail client, users can read, move, delete mail, and create mailboxes all on the server system.
Note: IMail Web Messaging directly accesses the server to manage mail, and no longer requires IMAP.
Ipswitch Instant Messaging Server. Select this check box to stop or start IIM . If you click the link, the IIM Home page appears.
IMail LDAP Service. Select this check box to publish and provide access to user information on the server, and extend the IMail user database to include standard
LDAP attributes such as name, address, organization name, and phone number. LDAP allows each user with an account on the system to add, delete, or modify information in his/her own LDAP entry.
IMail POP3 Server. Select this check box to let any POP3 mail client communicate with IMail Server.
IMail Queue Manager Service. Select this check box to control the flow of messages through the mail queue. The Queue Manager service is a component of the SMTP delivery process.
Premium Anti-spam Service. (Available only with IMail Premium) Select this check box to enable Commtouchs Advanced Security Daemon (a.k.a. ctasd™).
IMail SMTP Server. Select this check box to allow users to let the SMTP server send and receive mail from other Internet hosts using the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
(SMTP) and process all incoming and outgoing mail.
IMail Sys Logger Service. Select this check box to allow users to view the log files in the IMail spool directory.
Ipswitch WorkgroupShare Service. Select this check box to enable IMail
Collaboration.
Commtouch (Premium Anti-spam)
How to get here
389
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Note: This Service page includes services for both the Premium Anti-spam
"IMailCommtouch" and Commtouch IP Reputation "IMailCommtouchIPRep".
Use the Commtouch Anti-spam Settings page to stop and start the IMailCommtouch and/or the IMailCommtouchIPRep service.
This page displays Commtouch license information, configuration settings for Commtouch
Advanced Security Daemon (ctasd™), and port settings for both Commtouch's IP Reputation port and Premium Anti-spam.
Note: Go to Anti-spam > Premium Filter to enable and set Commtouch Classification filters.
Server Settings
Port. Premium Anti-spam listening port number. (Default port is 8088)
IP Reputation Port. The HTTP listening server port number. (Default port is 8181)
Proxy Server Settings
Enable. Check box to enable proxy server settings. (Default not enabled)
Port. Port number used for connectivity with the proxy server.
Server Address. Specifies the host name or IP address of the proxy server.
Auth. Specifies the authentication mode for connectivity with the proxy server.
Options are Basic or NoAuth.
Username. The name of an authorized user.
Password. The password of the authorized user.
Save. Click to save your settings.
Related Topics
Commtouch Premium Anti-spam Filter
IP Ignore List
How to get here
The IP Ignore List contains a list of IP addresses of all local mail servers that should automatically be considered non-spammers and should not be validated for spam. When
390
IMail v12 Administrator Help
checking the servers from which the suspected message originated, ctasd™ ignores all references to local or remote mail servers predefined in the IP ignore list.
Note: Updating this list requires restarting the IMailCommtouch services.
Important: To edit an existing IP address or subnet mask, click the link under the IP address.
The Add IP Ignore List page appears with the existing information. Edit the information and click Save. Click Cancel if you no longer want to edit the IP address.
IP Address. This column lists all the local mail servers currently set to be considered non-spammers.
Subnet Mask. This column lists the Subnet Masks related to the IP Addresses.
Note: To edit, simply double click the IP Address to modify.
Add. Click this button to access the Add IP Ignore List page.
Delete. Click this button to remove an existing entry.
Related Topics
Premium Ant-spam (Commtouch) (on page 389)
IMAP
How to get here
Stopped), and a Start/Stop button appears. This allows you to Start or Stop individual
Services from their respective web pages, as well as from the Service Administration page.
You can use the IMAP Settings page to configure the IMAP Server. IMAP4 lets users access remote messages stored on the mail server as if they were local. Users can read, move, delete mail, and create mailboxes on the server system. Since messages reside on the server, users can access their mailboxes from multiple machines. the service.
Related Topic
Managing Mailboxes (on page 394)
391
IMail v12 Administrator Help
POP3 / IMAP - Control Access (on page 405)
IMAP Settings
How to get here
Stopped), and a Start/Stop button appears. This allows you to Start or Stop individual
Services from their respective web pages, as well as from the Service Administration page.
You can use the IMAP Settings page to configure the IMAP Server. IMAP4 lets users access remote messages stored on the mail server as if they were local. Users can read, move, delete mail, and create mailboxes on the server system. Since messages reside on the server, users can access their mailboxes from multiple machines. the service.
IMAP Logging
Save Logs To. Choose one of the following from the list box.
No Log. (Set by Default) Select this option to turn off event logging.
SYSMMDD.TXT. Select to send event information to a file of this name, where MM is the month and DD is the day the log was written. This file is stored in the Spool directory.
Log Server. Select to send event information to the Log file indicated on the Logging tab.
Debug Messages. Select the check box to enable writing debug messages to the log file.
General Options
Force Subscribe to Private Mailboxes. Select the check box to require the IMAP4 client to subscribe to use a private mailbox. A user who is not a subscriber is refused access. Do not enable this option if you wish to use web messaging. Choose this option if users are using Outlook or another client.
Force Subscribe to Public Mailboxes (on page 394). Select the check box to require
the IMAP4 client to subscribe to use a public mailbox. A user who is not a subscriber is refused access.
Allow Unsecured Access. Select the check box to allow users to login to the system without authenticating via secure mode (such as SSL).
392
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Account Harvesting Prevention
options. Changing an IMAP setting will also affect the POP3 setting.
Enable Session Security. (Turned on by default) Configurable session options for user authentication, allows the IMail Administrator to set the following session options.
Max Failed Logins Per Session. (Default set to 3) Once this setting has been reached by failed authentication attempts, the client will be disconnected.
Max Failed Sessions Per IP. (Default set to 9) After this setting has been met by disconnections from the failed authentication attempts, the client will be terminated and blacklisted.
Blacklist Duration (in Minutes). (Default set to 60) Length of time that the offending
IP will not be able to access the login page.
Tip: The Blacklist Duration is the length of time the IP address will be blocked and will remain in the Control Access list.
SSL Settings
Note: IMail Server uses OpenSSL Command Line Tool (v0.9.8e) which supports up to 4096-bit
RSA and 2048-bit DSA. OpenSSL is a cryptography toolkit implementing the Secure Sockets
Layer (SSL v2/v3) and Transport Layer Security (TLS v1) network protocols and related cryptography standards required by them.
Enable SSL. Select the check box to enable a dedicated port that accepts only SSL- encrypted connections from the IMAP4 service. You can change the default port used by the SSL Listener in the SSL port box.
SSL Port. Enter the port used by the dedicated SSL Listener to accept connections.
The default IMAP4 SSL port is 993; the valid range is from 1 - 32,000.
Enable TLS. Select the check box to enable the IMAP4 service to accept SSL/TLS connections over the IMAP4 port through use of the STARTTLS command.
Advanced Options
When logging on to IMAP4, the service returns a welcome message that identifies the mail server version and vendor. You can use the IMAP Advanced options to change the service's welcome message, for example, if you want to hide the mail server version and vendor information.
Hello Message. Enter the text you want display in the IMAP service welcome message. The text is limited to 400 characters or less. If you enter over 400 characters, the system uses the default message. To intentionally revert back to the default message, clear this field.
393
IMail v12 Administrator Help
need to change these settings, be aware that they can change the operation of the server.
Save. Click to save your settings.
Related Topic
Managing Mailboxes (on page 394)
Creating Public Mailboxes (on page 394)
POP3 / IMAP - Control Access (on page 405)
Creating Public Mailboxes
The IMAP4 server options provide a means of creating a public mailbox in which you can post
messages for reading by IMAP4 clients. To create a public mailbox, create a user (on page 166)
ID named "public". Any mailboxes in this user's directory will be available for reading by
IMAP4 clients.
Administrators can use the public user ID to post messages. Users other than public can only read the public mailboxes. Administrators can set an option that determines whether users must subscribe to a public mailbox before they can read it.
Public mailboxes are read-only by design, and only the user public can administer the public mailboxes. Messages received for this account and its sub-mailboxes are treated as normal, but users other than public who access these mailboxes through IMAP4 have read-only permissions. If a user tries to mark a message in a public folder as read, he will be notified that the mailbox is read-only. subscribe to a mailbox unless the client application provides this capability.
Managing Mailboxes
When a user creates a mailbox, the mailbox is created on the IMail Server system. Because the
IMail Server will be the permanent storage location for IMAP4 users' mail, you need to configure the server with appropriate disk space and manage the disk space by monitoring mailbox disk usage.
You can set maximum mailbox size and maximum number of messages for each user or you can set the maximum mailbox size and maximum number of messages globally for all users on a selected e-mail domain :
394
IMail v12 Administrator Help
For more information about global settings for a selected e-mail domain, see
Changing IMail Standard User Settings (on page 117).
For more information about individual user settings for a selected e-mail domain, see
Changing IMail User File Directory Settings.
Administrators can set an option (on the IMAP4 tab) that determines whether users must subscribe to a private mailbox before they can read it.
LDAP
Short for Lightweight Directory Access Protocol, a set of protocols for accessing information directories. LDAP is based on the standards contained within the X.500 standard, but is significantly simpler. And unlike X.500, LDAP supports TCP/IP, which is necessary for any type of Internet access. Because it's a simpler version of X.500, LDAP is sometimes called X.500-lite.
Because LDAP is an open protocol, applications need not worry about the type of server hosting the directory.
About LDAP Server
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) provides a standard way for applications to request and manage directory information. LDAP has become another popular feature for standards-based mail servers. A simplified subset of the much more elaborate X.500 Directory
Access Protocol, LDAP is more appropriate for many of today's applications, on both the client and server sides, because it makes fewer demands on system resources.
LDAP implementations use a client/server architecture to publish user information (such as address books) on the server and provide access to that directory information from
LDAP-enabled clients.
IMail Server supports OpenLDAP to provide the following capabilities to users with
LDAP-enabled clients:
Locate LDAP directory information that may include name, phone number, e-mail address, organization, department, and address.
List all users at a site.
About LDAP Data
IMail Server provides an LDAP database by extending the IMail user database to include standard LDAP attributes (such as name, address, organization name, and phone number) and any other attributes that a site defines.
Each user with an account on the IMail Server has an LDAP entry. When a user is added to the
IMail user database an LDAP entry is defined with the following attributes:
395
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Basic User Attributes
ObjectClass The type of entry. The value would be "inetOrgPerson".
CN CommonName
UID
Surname
The full name of the user.
The IMail Server e-mail address for the user. This is constructed from the user ID and the host name.
The IMail Server user ID.
The surname or last name of the user.
When a user receives mail on the IMail Server system, his/her LDAP entry is activated.
Using an LDAP enabled client, the user can add, delete, and modify information in his or her own LDAP entry. A user cannot modify another user's entry. The following table describes several additional attributes that the user can add (by using an LDAP client that supports the
Modify function):
Optional User Attributes
Organization
OU
Street
L
ST
C telephoneNumber
The user's company.
The department within the company or organizational unit.
The user's street address.
The user's city or locality.
The user's state or province.
The user's country.
The user's telephone number.
These are the most common attributes used in the LDAP entry. The system administrator or the user can define other attributes. by the LDAP server. Do not click Initialize LDAP unless you want to overwrite the database with the user IDs only that are stored in the Windows registry. First try synchronizing the
LDAP database to resolve any problems.
If the Open LDAP server is not running, you are asked whether you want to start it. Initializing
LDAP deletes all user changes to the attribute values and adds all users back to the LDAP server in the default state.
LDAP Service Settings
How to get here
396
IMail v12 Administrator Help
the service.
Stopped), a Start/Stop button appears and a Restart button appears. This allows you to Start,
Stop, or Restart individual Services from their respective web pages, as well as from the
Service Administration page.
Install Location. Enter (or Browse to) the location of the directory where the
OpenLDAP files are located. By default, the installation path for IMail is
"C:\Program
Files\Ipswitch\Messaging\IMail\OpenLDAP"
. The following folders are located under the
"..\OpenLDAP"
folder:
bin. Folder where all OpenLDAP binaries are stored. These are:
Openldap-data. Folder where all folders with domain specific databases are stored, containing a folder named after each existing domain.
schema. Folder where all OpenLDAP schema files are stored. Schema files are text files that determine the properties of each object.
Share\ucdata. Contains supporting data files for the LDAP server. These files should not be modified. files manually to the location that you specify in this field. The slapd.exe
file must also be unregistered and re-registered in the new location. You can also browse to the installation location by clicking the Browse button.
Create New Folder
New Folder Name. Enter the name for the folder in which you wish to manually move the OpenLDAP files, as described in the preceding Important section. Click
Create. Click OK.
Port. Enter the Port that the LDAP server runs on. This can be changed to allow
OpenLDAP to run on the same server as another LDAP server.
LDAP Actions
Sync LDAP. Click this button to synchronize the LDAP database in order to clean up orphaned accounts or add accounts that do not yet exist.
397
IMail v12 Administrator Help
by the LDAP server. Do not click Initialize LDAP unless you want to overwrite the database with the user IDs only that are stored in the Windows registry. First try synchronizing the
LDAP database to resolve any problems.
If the OpenLDAP server is not running, you are asked whether you want to start it. Initializing
LDAP deletes all user changes to the attribute values and adds all users back to the LDAP server in the default state.
LDAP domain or all the LDAP domains. This utility can be used in the case when the Web
Administrator does not properly Init or Sync all the LDAP domains on a server. This issue sometimes occurs on servers running Microsoft Windows 2003 machines with over 30 domains.
Init LDAP. Click this button to initialize the LDAP database for the server.
Save. Click to save your settings. An Update Successful message and the time of the update appears.
Related Topics
About LDAP Server (on page 395)
LDAP User Information (on page 172)
Populating the LDAP Database Using Ldaper.exe (on page 400)
Init & Sync LDAP DB - iLDAP.exe utility (on page 401)
LDAP Settings
How to get here
Use the LDAP Settings page to configure host options for OpenLDAP. This information is necessary for an LDAP client to edit the LDAP database. It is not necessary to enter an ID or password if you only want to view the OpenLDAP data.
Domain: Shows the current selected domain. From the drop down you can pick any of the domains available to this administrative user account.
LDAP Settings
LDAP Admin ID. Displays the LDAP administrator ID for the e-mail domain. This information is auto-populated. The administrator ID cannot be an IMail user ID.
Password. Enter the LDAP administrator password.
398
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Confirm Password. Enter the password a second time to confirm the original password. The two password entries must match in order for the value to be saved. user IDs only that are stored in the Windows registry. First try synchronizing the LDAP database to resolve any problems. importation, we highly recommend that you change it as soon as possible after completing setting up LDAP.
Important: You can also use the iLDAP.exe utility (on page 401) to Init or Sync a specified
LDAP domain or all the LDAP domains. This utility can be used in the case when the Web
Administrator does not properly Init or Sync all the LDAP domains on a server. This issue sometimes occurs on servers running Microsoft Windows 2003 machines with over 30 domains.
LDAP Actions
Init LDAP (Initialize the LDAP database). Click to Initialize the LDAP database
created for the current e-mail domain by the LDAP server (on page 395).
Sync LDAP (Synchronize the LDAP database). Click to synchronize the LDAP database. Synchronizing removes multiple database entries, deletes old accounts, and adds new accounts.
Save. Click to save settings. An "Update Successful" message and the time of the update appear.
Related Topics
About LDAP Server (on page 395)
LDAP Service Settings (on page 396)
LDAP User Information (on page 172)
Populating the LDAP Database Using Ldaper.exe (on page 400)
Init & Sync LDAP DB - iLDAP.exe utility (on page 401)
LDAP Information
How to get here
Enter user information on the LDAP Information page. LDAP user information is published on the server and the information is made available to LDAP-enabled clients.
Domain Name (OHN). Displays the name of the specified user's domain.
399
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Userid. Displays the ID of the specified user.
The following information can be updated to the LDAP database for the specified user:
Full name
Organization
Department
Address
City
State
Postal Code
Country
Telephone
Related Topics
About LDAP Server (on page 395)
Setting IMail LDAP Options (on page 396)
Populating the LDAP Database Using Ldaper.exe (on page 400)
Populating the LDAP Database (ldaper.exe)
Ldaper.exe
populates the LDAP database with user properties for all users on a selected e-mail domain. This may be particularly helpful after you have added a large number of users
at once using the Adduser.exe utility (on page 440).
conversion occurs during installation. The conversion can take a lengthy amount of time depending on the number of domains to convert. If the LDAP data is not available after the upgrade, run the LDAP Convert utility to correct the issue. In the command line utility, type: ldaper /CONVERT /Y
Basic Command Syntax
ldaper [options]:
Ldaper.exe
supports the following command line options. Options can be prefixed with a hyphen or a forward slash.
400
IMail v12 Administrator Help
-GN
-SN
-S
-C
-ST
Option
-H
-U
-P
-CO
-Z
-T
-O
-OU
- CONVERT
Explanation
Host name
User ID
Password
First name
Last Name (Sur Name)
Street Address
City
State
Country
Postal Code
Telephone
Organization
Organizational Unit (Department)
Converts LDAP dbases prior to version 8.1 to the new OpenLDAP dbase schema
Required option with the CONVERT option
Keeps the LDAP service running
-Y
-LSTART
Related Topics
Init & Sync LDAP DB - iLDAP.exe utility (on page 401)
Adding Users Using Adduser.exe (on page 440)
Initializing and Synchronizing LDAP Databases (iLDAP.exe)
iLDAP.exe is a utility to Init or Sync a specified LDAP domain or all the LDAP domains. This utility can be used in the case when the Web Administrator does not properly Init or Sync all the LDAP domains on a server. This issue sometimes occurs on servers running Microsoft
Windows 2003 machines with over 30 domains.
Basic Command Syntax
iLdap -i|s[<domain>]
Where domain is the domain you want to Init or Sync. All the domains are initialized or synchronized if no domain is specified.
Command
-i
-s
Function
Initializes the specified LDAP database.
Synchronizes the specified LDAP database.
401
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Related Topics
Populating the LDAP Database Using Ldaper.exe (on page 400)
POP3
How to get here
Stopped), Start/Stop and Restart button appears. This allows you to Start, Stop, or Restart individual Services from your respective web pages, as well as from the Service
Administration page.
The POP3 Server lets any POP3 (Post Office Protocol, Version 3) mail client communicate with
IMail Server. Supported POP3 clients include Internet Explorer, Netscape Messenger or
Communicator, Eudora, Pegasus, NuPOP, Z-Mail, and UNIX mail.
POP3 clients use the "offline" method of accessing the mail server. Mail messages are delivered to the IMail Server system and the mail client periodically connects to the server and downloads the user's mail to the client system. Mail messages are automatically deleted from the server system. Therefore, mail messages are stored only temporarily on the mail server. This method of access is best suited to users who always read their mail from the same client system.
See Request for Comments (RFC) 1725 for a description of the POP3 protocol. the service.
Related Topics
POP3 - Control Access (on page 405)
POP3 Settings
How to get here
Stopped), Start/Stop and Restart button appears. This allows you to Start, Stop, or Restart individual Services from your respective web pages, as well as from the Service
Administration page.
402
IMail v12 Administrator Help
The POP3 Server lets any POP3 (Post Office Protocol, Version 3) mail client communicate with
IMail Server. Supported POP3 clients include Internet Explorer, Netscape Messenger or
Communicator, Eudora, Pegasus, NuPOP, Z-Mail, and UNIX mail.
POP3 clients use the "offline" method of accessing the mail server. Mail messages are delivered to the IMail Server system and the mail client periodically connects to the server and downloads the user's mail to the client system. Mail messages are automatically deleted from the server system. Therefore, mail messages are stored only temporarily on the mail server. This method of access is best suited to users who always read their mail from the same client system.
See Request for Comments (RFC) 1725 for a description of the POP3 protocol. the service.
POP3 Logging
Save Logs To. Choose one of the following from the list box.
No Log. (Set by Default) Select this option to turn off event logging.
SYSMMDD.TXT. Select to send event information to a file of this name, where MM is the month and DD is the day the log was written. This file is stored in the Spool directory.
Log Server. Select to send event information to the Log file indicated on the Logging tab.
Debug Messages. Select the check box to enable writing debug messages to the log file.
General Options
Use APOP. Select the check box to secure user authorization (password encryption).
For more information, see RFC 1939.
Enable XTND XMIT Command. Select the check box to enable the IMail Server to accept outbound mail sent via XTND XMIT. Clients such as WinQVT/Net require this functionality.
Allow Remote Password Change. Select the check box to enable internal commands that allow remote password changes with older mail clients (such as an older version of Eudora).
Auto Deny Possible Hack Attempts. Select the check box to enable a remote IP address to be temporarily denied access (Control Access file).
403
IMail v12 Administrator Help
command) the remote IP address is temporarily put in the Control Access file until you stop and restart the IMail service. This data appears to the IMail Server as an attempt to hack into
the server. The IP address is not displayed in the Control Access (on page 421) list, but it is
reported in the log file.
Account Harvesting Prevention
options. Changing an IMAP setting will also affect the POP3 setting.
Enable Session Security. (Turned on by default) Configurable session options for user authentication, allows the IMail Administrator to set the following session options.
Max Failed Logins Per Session. (Default set to 3) Once this setting has been reached by failed authentication attempts, the client will be disconnected.
Max Failed Sessions Per IP. (Default set to 9) After this setting has been met by disconnections from the failed authentication attempts, the client will be terminated and blacklisted.
Blacklist Duration (in Minutes). (Default set to 60) Length of time that the offending
IP will not be able to access the login page.
Tip: The Blacklist Duration is the length of time the IP address will be blocked and will remain in the Control Access list.
SSL Settings
Note: IMail Server uses OpenSSL Command Line Tool (v0.9.8e) which supports up to 4096-bit
RSA and 2048-bit DSA. OpenSSL is a cryptography toolkit implementing the Secure Sockets
Layer (SSL v2/v3) and Transport Layer Security (TLS v1) network protocols and related cryptography standards required by them.
Enable SSL. Select the check box to enable a dedicated port that accepts only SSL- encrypted connections from the POP3 service. You can change the default port used by the SSL Listener in the SSL port box.
SSL Port. Enter the port used by the dedicated SSL Listener to accept connections.
Enable TLS. Select the check box to enable the POP3 service to accept SSL/TLS connections over the POP3 port through use of the STARTTLS command.
Advanced Options
When logging on to POP3, the service returns a welcome message that identifies the mail server version and vendor. You can use the POP3 Advanced options to change the service's
404
IMail v12 Administrator Help
welcome message; if for example, you wanted to hide the mail server version and vendor information.
Hello Message. Enter the text you want to be displayed in the POP3 service welcome message. The text is limited to 400 characters. If over 400 characters are entered, the default message is used. When APOP is enabled, if the message plus the timestamp exceed 400 characters, the message will be truncated. To revert back to the default message, clear this field. need to change these settings, be aware that they can change the operation of the server.
Save. Click to save your settings.
Related Topics
POP3 / IMAP - Control Access (on page 405)
POP3 / IMAP - Control Access
How to get here stop the service, wait 5-10 seconds and restart the service.
There are two ways to control who connects to this service. You can either grant access to everyone, except specific computers or subnets that you specify, or you can deny access to everyone, except specific computers or subnets that you specify.
Important: POP3 and IMAP both use and share the same Control Access settings.
ALLOW all computers to communicate with this server except. Select this option from the list box to grant access to specific computers or subnets. Click Add. A field with a cleared check box and an empty text box appears. Select the check box if you want to grant access to a single computer and enter its IP Address. If you want to grant access to a group of computers, select the check box and enter the IP address and Subnet Mask in the corresponding text boxes.
405
IMail v12 Administrator Help
DENY all computers from communicating with this server except. Select this option from the list box to deny access to specific computers or subnets. Click Add. A field with a cleared check box and an empty text box appears. Select the check box if you want to deny access to a single computer and enter its IP Address in the corresponding text box. If you want to deny access to a group of computers, select the check box and enter the IP address and Subnet Mask in the corresponding text boxes.
Control Access List
IP Addresses. This column lists the IP Address(es) of all computers either allowed or denied POP3 access.
Subnet Mask. This column lists the Subnet Mask(s) of all computer groups either allowed or denied POP3 access.
Never Expires. When added manually, this checkbox is set by default. Otherwise the expiration is controlled by the Blacklist duration setting.
Expires On. This expiration time is controlled by the Blacklist Duration setting fround on the POP3/IMAP Service page under Account Harvesting Prevention
Options.
Comments. Free format notes, for the IMail Administrator.
Attempts. Displays the actual attempts made by the offending listed IP Address. which radio setting is used (Deny All or Allow All) for the manual entries.
Add (on page 406). Click this button to add computers or computer groups you want
to be granted or denied access to the POP3 / IMAP service.
Edit (on page 406). Click this button to update an existing entry.
Delete. Click this button to delete selected computers or computer groups from the
Control Access list.
Save. Click to save your settings.
Add/Edit POP3 - IMAP Control Access
How to get here
Use the Access Control page to add or edit a single computer or group of computers to the
POP3 / IMAP Access Control List.
406
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Add a Single Computer. Select this option if you want to allow or deny access to a single computer. If you select this option, you may enter text into the IP address text box.
Add a Group of Computers. Select this option if you want to allow or deny access to a group of computers. If you select this option, you may enter text into the Subnet
Mask text box.
IP Address. Enter the IP address of a single computer that you want to allow or deny
POP3 / IMAP access.
Subnet Mask. Enter the subnet mask of the computer group that you want to allow or deny POP3 / IMAP access.
Expires. (Optional) Click the Calendar button to set an expiration date. Default is set to Never Expires.
--OR--
Never Expires. (Checked by Default) IP Address will never expire.
Comments. Free format notes, for the IMail Administrator.
Attempts. Displays the actual attempts made by the offending listed IP Address. which radio setting is used (Deny All or Allow All) for the manual entries.
Important: You must restart the POP3 and IMAP services for the changes to take effect.
Related Topics
POP3 / IMAP - Control Access (on page 405)
Queue Manager
The Queue Manager Service allows you to control the flow of messages through the mail queue. This service takes the place of SMTP32.exe, by delivering messages to both local and remote destinations. Although the SMTP32.exe program still exists, it simply informs the
Queue Manager when a message requires delivery.
Note: When sending mail, if a valid 1xx or 2xx response is not received when connecting, the
Queue Manager will roll to the next MX record.
The mail queue is also known as the spool is a directory that stores mail messages that are waiting for delivery. Files in the queue include incoming messages, outgoing messages, attachments, and error messages.
407
IMail v12 Administrator Help
The queue manager releases messages one at a time in the order that they were received.
Related Topics
Troubleshooting the Spool Directory (on page 412)
Daily Count Report - Queue Manager (on page 411)
Queue Manager Options
How to get here
Stopped), and a Start/Stop button appears. This allows you to Start or Stop individual
Services from your respective web pages, as well as from the Service Administration page.
The Queue Manager regulates the SMTP32 processes (or threads) so that the maximum number is not exceeded. This ensures that an attempt is made to deliver all messages and that delivery not be delayed by being bumped to a queue run delivery on heavily loaded systems. Files are processed according to priority, with files that have had no delivery attempt being first. Files that need to be retried are then processed based on the time that they were placed in the spool.
Disabling the Queue Manager may stop or delay mail delivery.
Delivery Threads. Enter the total number of delivery threads that can be used to deliver messages. Each thread processes one message at a time. This option is set to
30 by default; its minimum value is 5. Since each Queue Manager thread can deliver one message, if the option is set to 30, the Queue Manager can deliver 30 messages at a time. number of users who subscribe to list server mailing lists. If you do need to increase this value, you should do so in small increments, for, as you increase the number of SMTP processes, you increase the processing load on your mail server.
Max Retry Threads. Enter the maximum number of delivery threads that can be used simultaneously when the system retries to deliver messages in the queue. By default, this option is set to 15. The value for this option must be less than the number of Delivery Threads and cannot be less than 2.
408
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Listen Pipes. Enter the number of pipes that the queue manager opens in order to listen for files being dropped in the queue by other processes. This option is set to 4 by default. The minimum value for this option is 2 and the maximum is 20. The default value should be sufficient for most servers, but can be increased for better performance on busy servers. You must examine the log files to determine if you need to increase this number. If, prior to a queue run, you find log lines that say
"Adding Queue file XXX," this means that the Queue Manager has found files it was not notified of before. In this case, you should increase the number of listen pipes.
Retry Timer. Enter how often, in minutes, the Queue Manager will attempt to re-deliver messages that failed to be delivered on previous queue runs. This option works in conjunction with the Tries Before Return to Sender below. This option is set to 30 minutes by default. The minimum value for this option is 10; the maximum is
120.
Daily Report Address. Enter the e-mail address to which a Daily Count Report (on
page 411) will be sent. If no address is entered, no report will be sent. Through the
queue manager, IMail Server compiles and sends a daily report with detail server activity. These reports are sent once a day, 30 seconds after the date changes, to the e-mail address specified here.
Outgoing Helo/Ehlo Host Name. Enter the name you wish to use for outgoing communications with the recipient.
Tries Before Return to Sender. Enter the amount of times that delivery is attempted before returning the mail to the sender. Each time the Retry Timer reaches 0, a deliver attempt is made. We recommend leaving this at the default value of 20.
Example: If the Retry Timer is set to 30 (minutes) and the "Number of Tries" is set to 20
(default), then the message will be returned in about 10 hours. We recommend a value of 20.
Example: If the Retry Timer is set to 30 (minutes), and you want to attempt delivery for up to 3 days, then the "Number of Tries" box should contain 144.
Max Tries for NULL Senders. Enter the maximum number of times that IMail attempts to deliver a message that has no sender (including postmaster messages).
This value must be less than the value entered for Tries Before Return to Sender above. If the Tries Before Return to Sender value is less than the value entered here, the Max Tries for NULL Senders option is not enforced.
Delete After Max Tries. This will delete after Max Tries for NULL Senders criteria has been met.
Domain Name Server. Enter the IP address of the system that provides domain name service for your network. You can enter multiple names here, separated by a space. This option is required in order to send mail externally.
Auto Restart on Failure (recommended). Click this check box to enable SMTPD32 to check the status of the Queue Manager. If it is not running, SMTD32 attempts to restart it. The event is then written to the log file. The Queue Manager status is checked every 2 minutes. If, after two checks, the Queue Manager is not running,
IMail Server attempts to restart it. We recommend that you enable this option.
SMTP/Queue Manager Log Settings
Save Logs To. Select the file type from the drop down list, that you want to use for logging SMTP events:
409
IMail v12 Administrator Help
No Log. Selecting this option disables logging.
SYSMMDD.txt. Selecting this option causes all inbound and outbound mail to be logged in the file where MM is the month and DD is the day the log was written.
Log Server. Selecting this option causes messages to be sent to the log file specified on the Log Manager tab.
Debug Messages. Select the check box to write debug messages to the log file.
Verbose Logging. Select the check box to record more information than in standard logging. This can create very large log files; however, this can be helpful in troubleshooting problems.
DNS Caching
The DNS cache is an internal cache of positive DNS queries. The cached DNS response remains active for the length of time specified in the Time to Live (TTL) for the DNS record. and reusing positive queries.
Max DNS Entries. Enter the total number of entries allowed in the DNS cache. The
DNS cache is a first in, first out list, so the list is updated as new DNS queries are performed. We recommend that you enter a value of 200. However, you can enter any value between 5 and 5000.
Clear Cache. Click this button to clear the DNS cache in the Queue Manager. This is usually not required. When_to_Use.htm
Enable DNS Cache. Select this check box to enable the DNS cache.
Failed Domain Skipping Header
Failed Domain Skipping occurs when IMail Server tries to deliver a message but cannot connect to the domain. The domain is added to a list of failed domains (known as the Skip
List), and all recipients for that domain will be skipped for the amount of time entered as the
Skip Time. messages are destined for unreachable hosts.
Max Skip Tries. Enter the total number of entries allowed in the Skip List. This is a first in, first out list that is updated as new domains are added. We recommend entering a value of 500. However, you can enter any value between 5 and 5000.
Clear Skip List. Click this button to clear the current Skip List from memory.
Skip Time (minutes). Enter the amount of time, in minutes, that failed domains will remain in the Skip List before they are removed. Although we recommend 30, you can enter any value between 2 and 240 minutes.
Enable Domain Skipping. Select this check box to enable Failed Domain Skipping.
410
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Gateway Options
Remote Gateway Hostname. Enter the name of another domain to send mail to for further delivery, when that mail cannot be delivered directly to the destination host.
This can be used in conjunction with the Send All Remote Mail Through Gateway option, to force delivery of mail through the gateway host. Since IMail Server should be able to reach all hosts directly, this field should typically be blank.
Tries Before Send to Gateway. Enter the number of times that delivery directly to a remote host should be attempted before giving up and delivering to the gateway host. Proper function of this value is dependent on the validity of the Remote Mail
Gateway Host name and the Send All Remote Mail Through Gateway option.
Send All Remote Mail Through Gateway. Selecting this check box causes IMail
Server to send all mail to the Remote Mail Gateway Host above, which forwards it on to the addressee's mail host. If this option is not selected, IMail Server will send mail directly to the addressee's mail host.
Outbound SSL Connection Settings
Use SSL. Using SSL without Force SSL checked will attempt to use a TLS connection on port 25; if TLS is not supported then an attempt will be made to create an implicit
SSL connection on port 465. If a TLS connection or implicit connection cannot be made then the message is delivered normally on port 25.
Force SSL. This check box will attempt to use a TLS connection on port 25; if TLS is not supported then an attempt will be made to create an implicit SSL connection on port 465. If a TLS connection or implicit connection cannot be made then the message is not delivered. This method is useful for those who want to enforce a higher level of security.
Save. Click to save settings. A message at the top "Your changes have been saved" will confirm.
Queue Manager - Daily Count Report
Through the use of the Queue Manager, IMail Server has the ability to compile and send a
Daily Report that detail server activity. This report is sent once a day, 30 seconds after the date changes, to the e-mail address specified in the Daily Report Address text box located on the Queue Manager tab.
Performance Objects for IMail now exist for Perfmon utility.
IMail Objects
CTAS Spam Caught - Maintains a total ongoing count for Commtouch Anti-spam
CTAV Viruses Caught - Maintains a total ongoing count for Commtouch Anti-virus
CTZH Viruses Caught - Displays a total ongoing count for Commtouch Zero Hour.
SMTP Sessions Open - Displays the current sessions open for SMTP.
Daily Report Information
IMail Serial Number. XX-XXXXX-XXXXXXX.
Commtouch Anti-Spam License Days Left. Days left before expiration.
411
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Commtouch Anti-Virus License Days Left. Days left before expiration of updates.
Commtouch Zero-Hour Virus Protection License Days Left. Days left before expiration.
SpamContent. The number of statistical filtering matches.
SpamPhrase. The number of phrase filtering matches.
Virus. The number of viruses caught by IMail Anti-Virus.
LocalDeliver. The number of local deliveries.
RemoteDeliver. The number of remote deliveries.
SpamFeatures. The number of e-mails containing the selected HTML features.
SpamHREFDomain. The number of e-mails containing HTML links to one of the domains listed in the HREF domain blacklist.
Example Report
Date: Fri, 3 Jan 2003 08:50:47 -0500
Message-Id: <[email protected]>
Mime-Version: 1.0
Content-Type: text/plain; charset=us-ascii
From: "Postmaster" <[email protected]>
Sender: <[email protected]>
Subject: IMail Daily Report for Domain.Name
Commtouch Anti-Spam License Days Left 337
Commtouch Anti-Virus License Days Left 337
337 Commtouch Zero-Hour License Days Left
SpamContent 293
SpamPhrase 256
Virus 5
LocalDeliver 1281
RemoteDeliver 592
SpamFeatures 200
SpamHREFDomain 125
Troubleshooting the Spool Directory
Normally, IMail Server cleans up the .tmp and attached files as part of the delivery process.
However, if there is an SMTP failure during delivery, these files may not be deleted. You can
also run the Spool Cleaner utility (on page 114) (isplcln.exe) to delete old files.
A damaged or corrupt file in the queue can prevent mail from being received correctly. If you suspect that this is the cause of a problem you have, you can try moving all files from the
Spool directory to a temporary location (such as IMAIL\SPOOL\SAVE) and then see if you can
412
IMail v12 Administrator Help
receive mail. If you can receive mail, copy back pairs of files to the Spool directory and see if they get sent. Messages that are not sent may be damaged or corrupt files.
Related Topics
About the Spool Directory (Queue) (on page 112)
Beginning Character of Files in the Queue (on page 115)
File Extensions of Files in the Queue (on page 115)
SMTP
The SMTP service processes all incoming and outgoing messages. Outgoing mail is spooled until the SMTP server can confirm it has arrived at its destination. Incoming mail is spooled until users access it using POP3 or IMAP client. Spooling allows the transfer from client and server to occur in the background.
Related Topics
SMTP Control Access Options (on page 421)
SMTP Kill File Options (on page 422)
SMTP Accept List Options (on page 423)
SMTP Domain Forwarding (on page 425)
Supported SMTP RFCs (on page 427)
SMTP Service Options
How to get here
Stopped), Start/Stop and Restart button appears. This allows you to Start, Stop, or Restart individual Services from your respective web pages, as well as from the Service
Administration page.
413
IMail v12 Administrator Help
The SMTP Service processes all incoming and outgoing messages. Due to its openness, it is difficult to simultaneously block unwanted mail (spam) and keep your mail server available to its users. The following settings and options can be configured to help administer this protocol.
Important: After making changes, click Save, and restart the service.
General Options
Mail Relay Settings. Select one of the following from the drop down list:
No Mail Relay (Default setting). Selecting this option from the drop down list enables the SMTP server to refuse to accept mail destined for other hosts (any host not on the IMail Server), unless the user authenticates. Select this option if all of your users send and receive mail from the same host that IMail Server is on, or if they use web messaging to access mail. You will still receive mail for local users because a message destined for or originating from the IMail Server host does not use the relay function.
Relay Mail for Addresses. Select this option from the drop down list to allow the
SMTP server to transmit mail originating from local addresses and destined for other hosts. Likewise, the server will accept mail from other hosts that is destined for specified local addresses.
Addresses. This button is enabled when Relay Mail for Addresses is selected.
Click the Addresses button. The Relay Mail for Addresses (on page 419) page
appears.
Important: DomainKeys / DKIM Signature Verification will not be processed when an
address exists in the "Relay Mail for Addresses (on page 413)".
Relay for Local Users Only. Select this option from the drop down list to check the
"From" address of incoming mail and verify that it contains a valid IMail Server host name, then checks the host for the user ID. accept the named remote hosts and users as "local" hosts and users. If a user needs to use an alias for his/her e-mail address, the alias needs to be in the accept.txt file. You cannot use this option if you are using a "store and forward" setup to relay mail for another server. The accept.txt file is only used when the SMTP Relay Setting is set to Relay for Local.
Relay for Local Hosts Only. Select this option from the drop down list to check the
"From" address of incoming mail to determine that it contains a valid IMail Server host name, then checks that host for the user ID. It does not check user aliases. If the host name or User ID is not valid, the server does not relay mail.
414
IMail v12 Administrator Help
accept the named remote hosts and users as "local" hosts and users. If a user needs to use an alias for their e-mail address, the alias needs to be in the accept.txt file. You cannot use this option if you are using a "store and forward" setup to relay mail for another server. the accept.txt file is only used when the SMTP Relay Setting is set to Relay for Local.
Relay Mail for Anyone. Select this option from the drop down list to allow the SMTP server to accept mail from any host that is destined for any other host, and redeliver that mail (i.e. become a mail gateway). This option is the least secure because it allows your server to be used by anyone to send mail to anyone. Some bulk mailers may take advantage of this capability to not only relay mail through your server, but to make it appear as if mail is originating from your server.
open relay. To remedy this, you should choose to Relay Mail for Addresses. (on page 419)
SMTP/Queue Manager Log Settings
Save Logs To. Select the file type from the drop down list, that you want to use for logging SMTP events:
No Log. Selecting this option disables logging.
SYSMMDD.txt. Selecting this option causes all inbound and outbound mail to be logged in the file where MM is the month and DD is the day the log was written.
Log Server. Selecting this option causes messages to be sent to the log file specified on the Log Manager tab.
Debug Messages. Select the check box to write debug messages to the log file.
Verbose Logging. Select the check box to record more information than in standard logging. This can create very large log files; however, this can be helpful in troubleshooting problems.
SSL Settings
Important! Enabling SSL or TLS will only accept SSL and TLS connections. This will not initiate SSL and TLS connections.
Note: IMail Server uses OpenSSL Command Line Tool (v0.9.8e) which supports up to 4096-bit
RSA and 2048-bit DSA. OpenSSL is a cryptography toolkit implementing the Secure Sockets
Layer (SSL v2/v3) and Transport Layer Security (TLS v1) network protocols and related cryptography standards required by them.
Enable SSL. Select the check box to enable a dedicated port that accepts only SSL- encrypted connections from the SMTP service. You can change the default port used by the SSL Listener in the SSL port box.
SSL Port. Enter the port used by the dedicated SSL Listener to accept connections.
The default SMTP SSL port is 465; the valid range is from 1 - 32,000.
415
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Enable TLS. Select the check box to enable the SMTP service to accept SSL/TLS connections over the SMTP port through use of the STARTTLS command.
Dictionary Attack Options
Max Invalid Recipients Per Session. Enter the maximum number of invalid recipients the server will accept before the session is dropped. An invalid recipient is an addressee that is not valid for that server when the client issues a RCPT to command.
Soft Error Limits. Enter the number of errors that may occur on a session before error responses are delayed.
Hard Error Limits. Enter the amount of errors that may occur on a session before the session is dropped and the IP address is added to the Control Access table.
Minutes to Deny Access. Enter the number of minutes to deny a sender access after a session is dropped.
Error Delay Seconds. Enter the amount of time in seconds to delay error responses in the Soft Error Limits scenario.
Example of an error response:
'[email protected]' on 7/6/2005 11:59 AM
550 Connection denied after dictionary attack
Security Options
Copy to Mail Address. Enter the full e-mail address to which you want to send a copy of each message. This option will not function unless the Enable Copy All Mail check box is selected.
Enable Copy All Mail. Select this check box to enable copying of all mail.
Allow Remote Mail to Local Groups. Select this check box to allow the SMTP server to accept mail addressed to a group that has been defined using IMail Administrator.
The SMTP server re-sends the message to users in the group. Use this option to set access to local mail groups (Local groups are aliases of type Group) on the mail server.
Note: This option does not affect list-server mailing lists, standard aliases, or program aliases.
Check Valid Sender. Select this check box to require that the user's mail address
(user@host) is specified in the MAIL FROM or REPLY-TO line of an incoming mail message.
Auto Deny Possible Hack Attempts. (Set by default) When checked it will assume that sending more than 512 characters in a command other than the SMTP DATA command is an attempt to "hack" into your server. The remote IP address will be temporarily placed into the "deny access" (Control Access) file, until the services are restarted.
416
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Auto Deny with the use of extended SMTP will allow 1600 characters in a command other than the SMTP DATA command.
Warning: Sending between 512 and 1600 characters in a command will drop the connection. Over 1600 characters will be denied. file.
Disable SMTP "VRFY" Command. Select this check box to deny a remote host to test for valid user IDs. The SMTP VRFY command is used to verify a user ID on a host, and as such it can be used from a remote host to test for valid user IDs. Disabling the command helps prevent "spoofing" by not allowing someone outside your network to check if a user ID is valid.
If you select this option when IMail Server receives an SMTP VRFY request, it returns the message:
502 Command not implemented.
If you disable the SMTP VRFY command, when IMail Server receives an SMTP VRFY request, it will return the message: 502 Command not implemented needs to use this command to verify a user that is on the other peer. See Setting Up Peering
(on page 271) for more information.
Require CRAM-MD5 Authentication. This setting when set will force encryption authentication when logging in to SMTP services.
Note: CRAM-MD5 Authentication only functions when using an IMail User Database.
CRAM-MD5 Authentication is currently not supported for user databases with Active
Directory or ODBC.
Advanced Options
need to change these settings, be aware that they can change the operation of the server.
Max Recipients Per Message. Enter the maximum number of addresses that can receive a single message. The default is 0.
Note: Max Recipients Per Message option does not apply to authenticated users.
Delay Between Recipients. Sets a delay (Milliseconds), between message recipients, for relayed external mail. This prevents spammers from consuming all of the CPU time. However, the setting slows mail server performance. The default is 0.
417
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Host Delimiters. To change the default characters, enter the character(s) to use to delimit the host name. Each character is seen by IMail Server as equivalent to the @ in e-mail addresses. Any of the defaults can be used between the user ID and the virtual host name in the POP3 or IMAP4 login user ID. By default, the characters used are: @
% * : $ and &.
Important: Be sure to restart IIS (host delimiters are cached for web services), SMTP, and
Queue Manager Services.
Mailbox Delimiter. Enter the character that will be used to delimit the mailbox name in a user ID. If nothing is entered, the default delimiter is - (dash).
Max Connections. Enter the maximum number of connections handled by the SMTP
Service. Use the default of 0 (zero) for an unlimited number of connections.
Port. Enter the port that the SMTP service listens on. The default SMTP port is 25. The valid range is from 0-32000.
Hello Message. To change the SMTP service welcome message, enter the new message in this text box. The text is limited to 400 characters or less. If over 400 characters are entered, the default message is used. To revert to the default message, delete the custom message text from the Hello Message box.
Delivery application. To replace the mail delivery application with an external program, enter the full pathname of the file in this text box.
Enable Extra Port. Select to enable an extra port.
Extra Port. If you've chosen to enable an extra port, enter its number here.
Force AUTH on Extra Port. Select this check box to force SMTP authorization on an extra configured port.
Disable SMTP AUTH. Select this check box to disable SMTP authentication. SMTP
Auth provides a means of authenticating the user ID and password of a user sending mail. This is handled transparently by the mail server and client. When the mail client connects to the mail server, the server tells the client the authorization methods it can use. The client then sends the user ID and password to the server and the server verifies them. If a user issues the AUTH command when Disable SMTP AUTH is selected, SMTPD responds with the "502 command not implemented" message.
Enable SMTP to Listen on All IP. Select this check box if you want to have IMail
Server listen on all available IP addresses and configured ports on the server.
Save. Click to save your settings.
Related Topics
418
IMail v12 Administrator Help
SMTP Delivery Application Utility (on page 463)
Supported SMTP RFCs (on page 427)
Relaying Mail for Addresses
How to get here
You can specify the IP address or range of hosts and subnets that you want to relay mail for.
IMail Server considers these addresses to be local. If mail is received from any of the specified addresses, IMail Server will accept the mail that is destined for other hosts. Likewise, IMail
Server will accept mail from other hosts that is destined for the specified addresses.
Important: DomainKeys / DKIM Signature Verification will not be processed when an
address exists in the "Relay Mail for Addresses (on page 413)".
Allow these addresses to skip AntiSpam filters. Select this option to exempt these addresses from undergoing any spam tests.
IP Addresses. This column displays the IP addresses for which you want to relay mail.
Click the IP address link to edit the relay address. The Edit Relay Address (on page 420)
page appears.
Subnet Mask. This column displays the range of hosts and subnets for which you want to relay mail.
Add. Click to Add Relay IP Addresses. The Add Relay Address (on page 419) page
appears.
Delete. Click this button after selecting the check box to the left of the IP address you wish to delete.
Save. Click to save your settings. An "Update Successful" message and the time of the update appears.
Related Topics
Adding Relay Addresses
How to get here
Use this page to add a single computer or group of computers to treat as local to the IMail
Server.
419
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Add a single computer. Click to add a single computer to treat as local to the IMail
Server.
Add a group of computers. Click to add a group of computers to treat as local. The subnet mask appears automatically in the Subnet Mask field, below.
Example:
If you have a class C address space of 156.21.50.0, enter the (group) IP address of
156.21.50.0 in the IP Address text box, and if it is not automatically entered, 255.255.255.0 in the Subnet Mask text box. This will allow all 254 systems to be considered the same as the local system and they can use the mail server to send mail, without having to enter each IP address individually.
IP Address. Enter the IP address to add a single computer to treat as local to the IMail
Server.
Subnet Mask. Enter the subnet mask for the group to be considered local.
Save. Click to save your settings. An "Update Successful" message and the time of the update appears.
Cancel. Click Cancel to not save any changes. The settings will remain the same.
Related Topics
Relay Mail for Addresses. (on page 419)
Editing Relay Address
How to get here
Use this page to edit a single computer or group of computers considered as local to the IMail
Server.
Single Computer. Click to edit a single computer to treat as local to the IMail Server.
Your cursor appears in the IP Address text box.
Group of Computers. Click to edit a group of computers to treat as local. Your cursor appears in the Subnet Mask text box.
IP Address. Edit the IP address for a single computer considered as local to the IMail
Server.
Subnet Mask. Edit the subnet mask for the group considered as local to the IMail
Server.
Save. Click to save your settings. An "Update Successful" message and the time of the update appears.
Cancel. Click Cancel to not save any changes. The settings will remain the same.
420
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Related Topics
Relay Mail for Addresses. (on page 419)
DomainKey Relay For Addresses Note
Important: DomainKeys / DKIM Signature Verification will not be processed when an
address exists in the "Relay Mail for Addresses (on page 413)".
SMTP Control Access Settings
How to get here effect. To do this, click the Services > SMTP Tab to navigate to the SMTP Settings page.
Click the Restart button.
There are two ways to control who connects to this service. You can either grant access to everyone, except specific computers or subnets that you specify, or you can deny access to everyone, except specific computers or subnets that you specify.
DENY all computers from communicating with this server except. Select this option from the list drop-down box to allow access to specific computers or subnets.
Click Add, will bring up a pop-up window with options for entering a single computer's IP address to allow access or a group of computer IP address' and Subnet
Mask.
ALLOW all computers to communicate with this server except. Select this option from the list drop-down box to deny access to specific computers or subnets. Clicking
Add, will bring up a pop-up window with options for entering a single computer's IP address to deny access or a group of computer's IP address and Subnet Mask.
IP Address List
IP Addresses. IP address(es) of a single or group of computers that are being allowed or denied SMTP access.
Net Mask. Subnet mask of the computer group being allowed or denied SMTP access.
Expires. Date the IP Address will expire and no longer be on the control access list.
Comments. Space for IMail Administrator to enter comments pertaining to IP
Address entered.
Add (on page 422). Click this button to add computers or computer groups you want to
grant or deny access to the SMTP service.
421
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Edit. Click this button after selecting an IP address to modify in the Control Access list.
Delete. Click this button after selecting an IP address to delete from the Control Access list.
Related Topic
Add / Edit the SMTP Control Access (on page 422)
Add/Edit SMTP Access Control
How to get here
Use the Access Control Add page to add a single computer or group of computers to the
Access Control List.
Add a Single Computer. Select this option if you want to allow or deny access to a single computer. If you select this option, you may enter text into the IP address text box.
Add a Group of Computers. Select this option if you want to allow or deny access to a group of computers. If you select this option, you may enter text into the Subnet
Mask text box.
IP Address/Range. Enter the IP address of a single computer that you want to allow or deny SMTP access.
Net Mask. Enter the subnet mask of the computer group that you want to allow or deny SMTP access.
Expires. (Optional) Click the Calendar button to set an expiration date. Default is set to Never Expires.
--OR--
Never Expires. (Checked by Default) IP Address will never expire.
SMTP Kill File
How to get here
The SMTP server uses the Kill File to deny access to the IMail Server. It allows you to specify mail addresses or hosts from which you do not want to accept mail.
IMail Server checks the incoming message's "Mail From" user@host> line in the SMTP envelope. When it receives mail from an address listed in the kill file, IMail Server returns the message: 501 unacceptable mail address
Existing Entries in the Kill File. To add, delete, or edit an entry, place your cursor in the text box, and modify as necessary, all addresses from which you do not want to accept mail.
Save. Click this button to save your entries or changes.
422
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Related Topic
SMTP Kill File Examples (on page 423)
SMTP Kill file Examples
The kill.lst file is used by the SMTP server to deny access to the mail server. It allows you to specify mail addresses or mail hosts that you do not want to accept mail from. The kill.lst file is located in the IMail top directory and applies to the primary host and all virtual hosts. To create or edit the kill file, click the Edit kill file button. The kill.lst file appears in Windows
Notepad, or if no kill.lst file exists, one will be created.
Adding Entries
In the KILL.LST file, enter one entry per line in either of the following formats: userid@host
Examples:
To deny access from a user mail account
To deny access to all users from the mail host widget.com
@widget.com
@*partialhost
The following will reject all mail mail from widget.com, bluewidget.com, and nifty.widget.com.
@*widget.com
SMTP Accept List
How to get here
The Accept List lets you name remote hosts and users that you want the IMail Server to accept as local hosts and users.
Note: SMTP Accept List will only function correctly with settings for Relay for Local Users, and
Relay for Local Hosts.
423
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Existing Entries in the Accept File. To add, delete, or edit an entry, place your cursor in the text box and modify as necessary all addresses from which you want to accept mail. ignoring any E-mail addresses. Using Relay For Local Users Only will relay only User names in the Accept List, ignoring any Host name entries.
Save. Click this button to save your entries or changes.
Related Topics
SMTP Accept List Examples (on page 424)
SMTP Accept List Examples
The accept.txt file lets you name remote hosts and users that you want the IMail Server to accept as "local" hosts and users. IMail Server does this by checking the "from" address in the
SMTP conversation and comparing it against the entries in the accept.txt file.
Adding Entries
Enter one IP address, host name, or user per line. Do not use spaces or punctuation.
Examples:
To enter hosts:
mail1.acme.com
mail5.foo.com
To enter users:
The Accept List must have an exact match for the respective host or e-mail address. It does not accept wild cards or partial matches.
SMTP White List
How to get here.
Use the SMTP White List page to create a list of IP addresses and ranges that are trusted.
424
IMail v12 Administrator Help
IP Addresses. This column lists the trusted IP addresses.
Net Mask. This column lists trusted ranges of IP addresses.
Add. Click the button to add an IP address or range of IP addresses to the SMTP White List.
Edit. Select an IP address to modify and click Edit.
Delete. Click this button after selecting an IP address to delete from the SMTP White List. the Services > SMTP Tab to navigate to the SMTP Settings page. Click the Restart button.
SMTP Domain Forwarding
How to get here
Domain Forwarding will redirect all outgoing e-mail sent to a specific domain name to another IP Address. The Domain Forwarding page maintains all domain names that are to be forwarded in a binary file called "domfwd.dfw" which is located under the
"..\IMail" folder.
Note: Domain Forwarding ignores e-mail sent for local delivery.
Domain Name. This column lists domains to be forwarded
IP Address. This column lists the IP address to forward to.
Add. Click the button to add a Domain Name to be forwarded.
Delete. Click this button to delete Domain Name
Example 1:
"domain.com"
is setup to be forwarded to "
192.168.1.1". A ll e-mail going to
"domain.com"
will be redirected to its corresponding user with the same domain name but on "192.168.1.1". So, an e-mail addressed to: [email protected] would be re-routed to [email protected] at 192.168.1.1.
Domain Name IP Address
domain.com 192.168.1.1
Example 2:
425
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Administrator would like to forward e-mail to a faxing service. Domain Forwarding can be set where the domain name is in the format of
"phonenumber.domain.com"
and the IP Address is the Faxing Service. E-mail received by the faxing service, extracts the phone number and uses it for the fax machine. Using a wild card to capture the phone number, Domain
Forwarding would be as follows:
Domain Name IP Address
*.domain.name 192.168.2.2
Important: Wild card will only work at the beginning of the domain name.
Wild Card Examples:
*.domain.com
*wolf.domain.com wolf.*.com wolf*.com were*wolf.com
Related Topics
Adding to Domain Forwarding (on page 426)
Editing Domain Forwarding (on page 427)
Valid usages of wildcard
Invalid usages of wildcard
Adding to Domain Forwarding
How to get here
Use the Domain Forwarding page to redirect all outgoing e-mail sent to a specific domain name to another IP Address.
Domain Forwarding generates a binary file ("..\IMail\domfwd.dfw") containing domain names that are to be forwarded.
Domain Name. Enter add a domain name to be redirected.
IP Address. Enter the IP address that the stated domain will be redirected.
426
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Save. Click Save to save above settings to Domain Forwarding list.
Cancel. Click Cancel to return to Domain Forwarding page without saving.
Important: Wild card capability will only work at the beginning of the domain name.
Examples:
*.domain.com
*wolf.domain.com wolf.*.com wolf*.com were*wolf.com
Valid usages of wild card
Invalid usages of wild card
Editing Domain Forwarding
How to get here
Clicking on a Domain Name or IP Address link will allow modification to Edit the following:
Domain Name. Use this text box to change the domain name to be forwarded.
IP Address. Use this text box to change the forwarding IP address for stated domain. the Services > SMTP Tab to navigate to the SMTP Settings page. Click the Restart button.
Save. Click Save after you have made your changes. Then restart the SMTP service as mentioned above.
Cancel. Click Cancel to not save any changes and return to Domain Forwarding page.
Supported SMTP RFCs
The SMTP Server supports the following Request for Comments (RFCs):
RFC 2821 and 2822 SMTP
RFC 1869 SMTP Service Extensions
RFC 1870 SMTP Service Extensions for Message Size Declaration
RFC 1891,1892,1893,1894 SMTP Service Extension for Delivery Status Notifications
427
IMail v12 Administrator Help
RFC 1985 SMTP Service Extension for Remote Message Queue Starting. Currently,
IMail provides support for "ETRN host.name" and "ETRN @domain .name."
RFC 2222 SMTP Service Extension for Authentication. IMail supports PLAIN, LOGIN, and CRAM-MD5.
RFC 2487 supports TLS negotiation via the STARTTLS command.
428
CHAPTER 11
Logging
In This Chapter
About Logging
The generic format of a log file entry is:
Date - Time - Thread or Process ID - Virtual IP Address - Message
Example: 06:26 09:16 SMTPD(0015052C) [127.0.0.1] connect 127.0.0.1 port 2358
Typical Log Files
Following are examples of typical log files:
File names in the form of logMMDD.txt contain messages sent to IMail’s log server .
File names in the form of sysMMDD.txt are messages from services that have their log file format set to sysMMDD.txt.
The W1yymmdd.log is the daily log file for the Web Administration server (when the
Web Administration capability is enabled in the Monitor server).
The W2yymmdd.log is the daily log file for the Web Messaging server.
Large Log Files
You have the following options for logging events related to IMail services (on page 388)
(such as POP3 or IMAP).
No Log. Select this option to disable the logging of events.
SYSMMDD.TXT. Select this option to send system event information to a file of this name where MM is the month and DD is the day the log was written. This file is stored
in the Spool Directory (on page 112).
Log Server. Select this option to send event information to the Log file indicated on
the Log Manager (on page 430) page.
429
IMail v12 Administrator Help
your computer sees a lot of traffic, the Log Manager file can become very large. You can disable logging for individual services where you don't need the log information. Normally, logging is only necessary if you are having problems with a service.
Related Topics
About the Spool Directory (Queue) (on page 112)
Log Manager
How to get here
The Log Manager page shows the log files in the IMail spool directory (on page 112). Log files
are named with the format logMMDD.txt where MM is the month and DD is the date.
To view a log, click the link of the file you want to view, the page will open using Windows
Notepad.
File Name. This column displays the log files in the IMail spool directory. Click or to sort the list. To view a log file, select the link under the file.
Size (kb). This column displays the size of each log file. You can click or to sort the list.
Date Created. This column displays the date and time the log file was created. You can click or to sort the list.
Delete. To delete a log file, select the check box corresponding to a Log file in the list to the right. Then click the Delete button.
Access Control (on page 430). To manage (by allowing or denying) Sys log access to other
computers or client users.
Related Topics
Sys Log Access Control
How to get here
430
IMail v12 Administrator Help
The Access Control page allows you to manage (allow or deny) Sys log access to other computers or client users, and contains listings of IP addresses that are either granted or denied access.
Important: You must restart the Sys logger service for the changes to take effect.
Deny all servers from communicating with this server except. Choose this option if you want to grant access to a single specific computer or group of computers.
Note: This is an exception command; for example: deny access except to... 123.100.100.80.
Allow all servers to communicate with this server except. Choose this option if you want to deny access to a single specific computer or group of computers.
Note: This is an exception command; for example: grant access except to.. 123.100.100.80.
Important: To edit an existing IP address or subnet mask, click the link under the IP address.
The Add Access Control page appears with the existing information. Edit the information and click Save. Click Cancel if you no longer want to edit the IP address.
IP Address. This column lists the IP Addresses allowed or denied access to the server.
Net Mask. This column lists the Subnet Masks related to the IP Addresses allowed or denied access to the server.
Add. Click this button to access the Add Access Control page to grant or deny access to either a single computer or a group of computers.
Edit. Click this button to edit, after selecting from the list.
Delete. Click this button to remove an existing entry, after selecting from the list.
Save. Click to save your settings. A message "Your changes have been saved" will appear.
Related Topics
Adding to Access Control (on page 431)
Add / Edit Sys Log Access Control List
How to get here
Use the Access Control Add to add a single computer or group of computers to the Access
Control List.
Add a Single Computer. Select this option if you want to allow or deny access to a single computer. If you select this option, you may enter text into the IP address text box.
431
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Add a Group of Computers. Select this option if you want to allow or deny access to a group of computers. If you select this option, you may enter text into the Subnet
Mask text box.
IP Address. Enter the IP address of a single computer that you want to allow or deny
Sys log access.
Net Mask. Required only for a Group of Computers. Enter the subnet mask of the computer group that you want to allow or deny Sys log access.
Important: You must restart the Sys logger service for the changes to take effect.
IMail Log Analyzer
Analyze is a log file analysis tool which compiles reports based on your IMail Server log files. It sorts through the log files and separates the information into reports, enabling you to browse statistical information quickly and easily. You can select from up to 19 different reports that extract information such as:
the number of SMTPD connections
the number of IMAP errors
the number of web logins
the number of web hits
To navigate to the IMail Log Analyzer
1 Click Start > Programs > IMail Server > IMail Log Analyzer.
2 The Analyze dialog appears. Click the Help button at the bottom of the dialog for assistance.
Using the IMail Installation Log File
The IMail installation wizard generates an install log file to help you troubleshoot software installation issues. If you selected the default installation folders, the log file is located in
C:\install-log-mm-dd-yyyy.txt.
During installation each action that occurred with respect to permissions or IIS is prefixed with "***".
Permissions are logged as follows:
*** C:\WINDOWS\system32\cacls.exe "C:\Program Files\Ipswitch\IMail" /T /E
/G IUSR_WIN2K3- SRVR:F processed dir: C:\Program Files\Ipswitch\IMail processed file: C:\Program Files\Ipswitch\IMail\ActivationStub.exe
432
IMail v12 Administrator Help
processed file: C:\Program Files\Ipswitch\IMail\AVReadMe.htm
processed file: C:\Program Files\Ipswitch\IMail\IMailLogo.jpg
processed file: C:\Program Files\Ipswitch\IMail\css_releasenotes.css
Tip: "No
Mapping" or "!!!."
The first line is the command string used to set the permissions. If this fails, instead of seeing
"processed" lines in the log file, you will see:
*** C:\WINDOWS\system32\cacls.exe "C:\Program
Files\Ipswitch\Collaboration Suite" /T /E /G IUSR_WIN2K3- SRVR:F
No mapping between account names and security IDs was done.
IIS settings in the log file are not as detailed. If the item is not prefixed with "!!!" followed by
"Failed," then it was successful. For example, the first line in the following example is a success:
*** Disabling anonymous rights on "IIM /Status.asp".
*** Disabling anonymous rights on "IIM/StartStopServices.asp".
The following line, disabling the anonymous rights on IIM/StartStopServices.asp, failed because it is followed by an "!!! Failed.":
!!! Failed to disable anonymous rights on "IIM/StartStopServices.asp".
Enabling Web Client Logging
The following procedure allows you to verify (by enabling URI queries in IIS) when a user is logged in, if that login was successful, and when the user logged out.
Note: IIS log files are stored in the following directory: %WINDOWS%\System32\LogFiles\
How to place user login messages in the IIS logs:
1 Go to Start > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Internet Information Services
(IIS) Manager. The IIS Manager window appears.
2 On the left pane, select the Web site upon which the client resides, right-click, and select
Properties. The Web Site Properties window appears.
433
IMail v12 Administrator Help
3 The Enable Logging option should already be selected. Click the Properties button next to the Active log format list box. The Logging Properties dialog displays. Click the
Advanced (or Extended) Properties tab. Select the URI Query Option.
4 Click OK for each dialog until all dialogs are closed.
http://support.ipswitch.com/kb/IM-20051206-DM01.htm
(http://support.ipswitch.com/kb/IM-20051206-DM01.htm)
Examples of what the user data will look like in the IIS logs:
14:55:27 127.0.0.1 POST /cypress/login.aspx
Login+Attempt:+[Marc]Login+Successful:+[Marc]+Language+Used:+en-US 302
14:57:01 127.0.0.1 POST /cypress/Login.aspx
Login+Error:+[Marc]+Failed+to+authorize+user. 200
15:23:31 127.0.0.1 GET /cypress/Logout.aspx Logout:+[Marc] 200
434
CHAPTER 12
Command Line Utilities
In This Chapter
Adding Aliases using "addalias.exe" Utility ............................................. 435
Adding a Virtual Host (adddomain.exe) ................................................... 438
Rename a User (RenameUser.exe) .............................................................. 445
Overview (antispamseeder.exe) .................................................................. 446
IMail Configuration Export (IMailConfigExport.exe) ............................ 448
Web Site Updater (IClientUpdater.exe) .................................................... 454
Initializing and Synchronizing LDAP Databases (iLDAP.exe) ............ 455
Cleaning the Spool Directory (Isplcln.exe) .............................................. 456
Deleting Old Messages (immsgexp.exe) .................................................. 456
Populating the LDAP Database (ldaper.exe) .......................................... 458
Sending Mail to All Users (mailall.exe) ...................................................... 459
Checking the Registry (regcheck.exe) ....................................................... 459
SMTP Delivery Application (smtp32.exe) ................................................. 463
Self-Signed SSL Certificate(sslutility.exe) ................................................. 463
Importing "config_CommonAddrBook.cgi" to Public Contact folders464
Command Line Installations (Silent Installs) ........................................... 465
Adding Aliases using "addalias.exe" Utility
Addalias.exe is a utility for adding, modifying, and deleting batches of e-mail aliases stored in a text file. You can also import an existing Windows NT group into IMail and create a group alias. If you invoke Addalias.exe with no command line options (by entering only addalias
at the MS-DOS prompt), you can manually input command lines, then press Enter after each line. Make sure that you press CTRL-Z to exit the utility when you are done. Example (on
Basic Command Syntax
addalias [-h hostname] [-cX] [-{a|d|m}] alias [=destination]
435
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Command Function
-a aliasname Adds an alias if the alias does not exist. aliasname is the name of the alias you want to add. Only one alias may be added in a single command line.
-cX Specifies an alternate delimiting character, which replaces the default delimiter (the equal sign). Spaces are not allowed. (Using -c in a text file affects all lines in the file.)
-d aliasname Deletes an alias that already exists, where aliasname is the alias you want to delete.
Only one alias may be deleted in a single command line.
-f filename You can put multiple commands into a text file for one execution of Addalias. Use -f to specify the name of the text file containing the Addalias commands. (All the above commands are valid for the text file, but note that -h and -c persist across multiple lines of input.)
-h hostname Specifies the virtual domain for the alias. The primary domain is used if no e-mail domain is specified. (Using -h in a text file affects all lines in the file.)
-i groupname Imports an NT group as a group alias if the alias does not already exist. groupname is the group that you want to import. Only one alias can be added in a single command line.
-l Lists current aliases. This argument may not be used in a text file.
-m aliasname Modifies or adds an alias even if the alias exists. aliasname is the alias you want to modify. Only one alias may be modified in a single command line.
-? Displays a summary of argument options.
Addalias.exe Examples
Adding an Alias to the Default (primary) E-mail Domain (on page 214)
Adding an Alias to a Specific Domain (on page 213)
Deleting an Alias (on page 214)
Importing an NT Group as a Group Alias (on page 438)
Return codes
Addalias.exe returns 1 if it performed at least one of the requested operations; it returns 0 if it failed.
Using a Text File
Instead of entering commands at the MS-DOS prompt, you can use a text file to input multiple commands for one execution. You can use this technique to add aliases to IMail
Server from another mail system if the other mail server program can create a delimited text
file of aliases. Example (on page 215)
Adding Alias to a Domain Using "addalias.exe"
Adding an Alias to a Specific Domain Using the addaliase.exe Utility
436
IMail v12 Administrator Help
The following example adds an alias of newalias to the e-mail domain named secondhost.com and resolves to e-mail: addalias -h secondhost.com -a newalias e-mail
Adding Alias to Primary Domain Using "addalias.exe"
The following examples add an alias of newalias to the default (primary) e-mail domain which resolves to e-mail: addalias -c: -a newalias:email addalias -a newalias=email addalias -c: newalias:email addalias newalias=email addalias newalias email
Deleting an Alias using "addalias.exe" Utility
The following examples delete an alias: addalias -d oldalias addalias -h another.net -d alias1
Related Topics
Adding an Alias using Addalias.exe
Addalias Text File Example
Addalias.exe Text File Example
Create a text file named test.txt that contains the following lines. test1=me test2=test1 test3=test2
-h virtual001 test1=me test3=me
-m test2=him
-d test3
437
IMail v12 Administrator Help
At the MS-DOS prompt, enter: addalias < test.txt
The < symbol tells addalias to use test.txt as output.
You then get the following messages: current host is wks003.augusta.ipswitch.com
added [wks003.augusta.ipswitch.com ] test1 -> me added [wks003.augusta.ipswitch.com ] test2 -> test1 added [wks003.augusta.ipswitch.com ] test3 -> test2 current host is virtual001 alias exists [virtual001] test1 -> someone added [virtual001] test3 -> me modified [virtual001] test2 -> him deleted [virtual001] test3 -> me
Import NT Group as Group Alias using addalias.exe
This option is only for hosts using the Windows NT database. Global groups will be ignored if the server is not a Primary Domain Controller (PDC).
The following example takes an existing Windows NT group and converts it into an IMail group alias: addalias -h NThost.com -i groupname
Adding a Virtual Host (adddomain.exe)
AddDomain.exe is a utility for adding virtual domains. It can be used to simply add a single domain, but is especially useful in a batch file to add multiple domains.
Basic Command Syntax and Example
Usage:
adddomain -h Hostname -i IPAddress -t TopDir
[-a Aliases -u IM | NT | External -x MaxMBXSize -s MaxMBXMsgs -r MaxUsers] adddomain -h Hostname -m
438
IMail v12 Administrator Help
[-t TopDir -a Aliases -x MaxMBXSize -s MaxMBXMsgs -r MaxUsers] adddomain -h Hostname -i IPAddress -t TopDir -u External
[-e DLLFilename -o ODBC_DSN -n TableName] adddomain -h Hostname -delete adddomain -f Filename
Examples:
1 In the following example, since the -e, -o,or -n options are not specified, the external database relies on the default “values %“Imail_top dir”%odbcuser.dll , IMAILSECDB, and
[default] accordingly: adddomain -h newhost1 -i virtual -u external
2 The following command populates an external database with settings of C:\mydll.dll,
IMAILSECDB, and [default]: adddomain -h newhost2 -i virtual -u external -e C:\mydll.dll
3 The following example changes an existing host (notice the -m for modify) to use an
ODBC Data Source Name (DSN) of MyNewDSN. If the other fields of -e and -n were previously set, they will be preserved. If the other fields of -e and -n were not previously set, they will be set with the default values: adddomain -h ExistingHost -m -u external -o MyNewDSN
4 If you need to specify a DSN other than ‘IMailSecDB,’ or you need to specify a userID and password (required when setting up a DSN to connect to an SQL database), use the -o switch : adddomain -h ExistingHost -m -u external -o IMailSecDB;UID=MyUser;
PWD=MyPassword
5 The following example shows how to add a new virtual host (or virtual host with an IP ) using an external database: adddomain -u external -t C:\IMail\newdomain_com -i virtual
-o IMailSecDB;UID=sqluser;PWD=sqlpassword -n table_name
6 Adddomain.exe supports the following command line options:
Command Function
-h
-i
Fully qualified host name; must match the IMail official host name
IP address or virtual IP address for an IP-less host
-t
-m
-a
Path (full or relative) to the top directory for the domain
Command to modify existing settings instead of creating new ones
Alias list for a host
439
IMail v12 Administrator Help
-u
-e
-o
-n
-x
-s
-f
-r
-delete
User data base to use (IMail, NT, or external)
Path to external database implementation DLL
External database ODBC system Data Source Name (DSN )
External database table name
Default max mailbox size (in kbytes).
Default max number of messages for mailbox.
Path to the file containing the settings to modify
Maximum number of users allowed on this host.
Removes the virtual host.
Note: AddDomain.exe does not warn when assigning already claimed IP addresses to new hosts. Assigning an already used IP address to another host will orphan the original host without warning.
Adding Users (adduser.exe)
"Adduser.exe"
is a utility for adding, modifying, or deleting users, but can only be used if the domain is based on either an IMail database or on an external database. (Adduser.exe cannot be used to add users to domains which use the Windows NT database.)
You can use
"adduser.exe"
to add users whose user IDs and passwords are stored in a text
file (on page 442). Passwords must be between 4 and 15 characters. See how to user a text file
If you invoke adduser with no command line options (by typing only adduser at th e MS-DOS prompt), you can then manually input command lines, pressing Enter after each line. If you do this, press CTRL-Z to exit the utility when you are done. defined in IMail Administrator.
Basic Command Syntax
See all Options here (on page 441)
Adduser.exe [-h hostname] [-k userid] [-m userid] [-u userid]
[-p password] [-n name] [-f filename] [-/+chgpass] [-/+ web] [-/+ active]
[-/+ info]
440
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Return codes
Adduser.exe returns 1 if it performed at least one of the requested operations; adduser returns 0 if it failed.
Disabling Web Options
New users have all Web options enabled unless you disable one of the Web options
(-/+chgpass, -/+web, -/+active, - /+info) in the command line. Modifying a user does not change the user’s Web options unless you include at least one of the Web arguments in the command line: if you include any web argument, then all Web options are enabled except those you specifically disable.
Examples:
Adding a user ID of test01.
Adduser -h myhost.com -u test01 -n "ms test" -p yourpass
Adduser -u test01 -n "mr test" -p nopass
Adduser -u test01
Adduser test 01
Deleting a user ID.
Adduser -k -u test01
Adduser -h another.net -k test01
Related Topics
Using a Text File (on page 214)
adduser.exe Options
Adduser.exe Command Options
Command What it Does
-h hostname Specifies the user’s virtual host, where hostname is the name of the host. The primary host is used if no host is specified. Using -h in a text file, affects all lines in the file.
-k userid Deletes a user id, where userid is the id you want to delete. Only one user id may be deleted in a single command.
-m userid Modifies a user id, where userid is the id you want to modify. Only one user id
441
IMail v12 Administrator Help
may be modified in a single command.
-u userid Adds a user id, where userid is the id you want to add. Only one user id may be added in a single command.
-n "name" Specifies the full name of the user in double quotes, where name is the user’s full name.
-p password Specifies a password for the user. If you omit this command, the default password is 'password.'
-q Disables alias duplicate check.
-cX Specifies an alternate delimiting character represented by X. adduser.exe replaces the default delimiter (a comma) with the specified delimiter. Spaces are not allowed. Using -c in a text file, affects all lines in the file.
-f filename You can put multiple commands into a text file for one execution of adduser.exe. Use this command to specify the name of the file containing the commands. All commands are valid for the text file, but - h and -c persist across multiple lines.
-chgpass Disables the user’s ability to change his/her password.
+chgpass Enables the user to change his/her password.
-web
+web
Disables the user’s ability to use Web messaging.
Enables the user to use Web messaging.
-active
+active
-info
+info
-?
# : ;
Disables the user’s ability to log on.
Enables the user to log on.
Disables the display of the user's information in LDAP queries.
Enables the display of the user's information in LDAP queries.
Displays a summary of argument options.
Comments (for use in a text file)
Example Text File (Adduser.exe)
Example Text File (Adduser.exe)
#Entries below default to Primary domain automatically.
#Adds user test100 with password nopass, and full name Mr. Test100
442
IMail v12 Administrator Help
test100,nopass,"Mr. test100"
#adds user test101 with password nopass, name of Ms. Test101,
#has ability to #change own password, access from web,
#account is not disabled, user info is accessible from outside.
-u test101 -p nopass -n "Ms. test101" +chgpass +web +active +info
#Add user killthisone
-u killthisone
#Remove user killthisone
-k killthisone
#Change domain (host)
-h virtual001
#Change delimiter from default(,) to a (+).
-c+
#Add user test100 with password of password and name of Mr. Test100 test100+password+"Mr. Test100"
#Modify user test100 with new name of Mrs. Test100
-m -u test100 -n "Mrs. Test100"
#Change domain (host)
-h virtual002
#Change delimiter back to default
-c,
#Add user test101 with password nopass and name Mrs. Test101 test101,nopass,"Mrs. test101"
#Add user test103 with default password, with default name test103, has #ability to change own password, access from web, account is not disabled, user #information is accessible from outside.
-u test103 +chgpass +web +active +info
443
IMail v12 Administrator Help
#Add user test104 with default password, with default name test103, has #ability to change own password, access from web, account is not disabled, user #information is not accessible from outside.
-u test104 -chgpass +web +active -info
#Modify user test103 so user information is not accessible from outside.
-m test103 -info
Results from running file above: current host is mail.some.where.com
OK: added test100 to host mail.some.where.com
OK: added test101 to host mail.some.where.com
OK: added killthisone to host mail.some.where.com
OK: User "killthisone" removed from " mail.some.where.com ".
INF: current host is virtual001
OK: added test100 to host virtual001
OK: user test100 modified in virtual001
INF: current host is virtual002
OK: added test101 to host virtual002
OK: added test103 to host virtual002
OK: added test104 to host virtual002
OK: user test103 modified in virtual002
Using a Text File (adduser.exe)
Instead of entering commands at the MS-DOS prompt, you can use a text file to input multiple commands for one execution of adduser.exe. You can use this technique to add users to your IMail system from another mail system if the other mail program can create a delimited text file of user ids, passwords, and user names.
Let’s suppose you want to add four user IDs (userid, smith, test1, and jones) to the wks013 server . Adduser.exe assumes that if there are no arguments in a text file, then the information on each line is userid, password, and full name – in that order.
For example, you could create a text file named addfour.txt that contains the following lines: userid,password,full name
444
IMail v12 Administrator Help
smith,whypass,Mrs Smith test1,,Mr Smith jones,okpass,Tom Jones
At the MS-DOS prompt, you enter:
Adduser -h wks013.augusta.ipswitch.com -f addfour.txt
You then get the following messages: current host is wks013.augusta.ipswitch.com
OK: added userid to host wks013.augusta.ipswitch.com
OK: added smith to host wks013.augusta.ipswitch.com
OK: added test1 to host wks013.augusta.ipswitch.com
OK: added jones to host wks013.augusta.ipswitch.com
Note that the user named test1 will have "password" (the default) as his password.
Rename a User (RenameUser.exe)
"RenameUser.exe"
is a command line utility for renaming only one Username. This utility can only be used on an IMail or external database. RenameUser.exe cannot be used for domains using Windows NT or Active Directory as user database.
If you invoke "RenameUser" with no command line options (by typing only renameuser at the
MS-DOS prompt), you will be shown the syntax required for usage. user names.
445
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Basic Command Syntax
RenameUser.exe [old_user@domain_name] [new_user]
Return Errors
The user does not exist. The username does not exist within the domain entered. Be sure that the Username is correctly spelled.
Important: RenameUser will only allow changing a Username within the same domain.
The domain does not exist. Be sure that the Username and Domain name are correctly spelled.
Example:
Renaming "[email protected]" to "[email protected]" renameuser [email protected] flop
Overview (antispamseeder.exe)
The antispamseeder.exe utility, located in the IMail top directory, is used to manage the spam and non-spam word counts contained in the antispam-table.txt file. You can use this utility to modify the antispam-table.txt file in the following ways:
Re-assign the word counts contained in the antispam-table.txt
file, when e-mail is incorrectly identified as spam (false positive), or vice versa. This increases the likelihood that such messages will be correctly identified in the future.
Create a new antispam-table.txt file that applies only to a specific host.
Add new words to the antispam-table.txt
file.
Delete words from the antispam-table.txt
file that do not occur very often to decrease the size of the file.
Enter wildcards (i.e. g* *d) into the antispam-table.txt
file so that statistical filtering will identify such words as spam. either need to copy antispamseeder.exe to the secondary host’s directory, or access antispamseeder.exe from the primary IMail domain's directory.
Procedures:
Resolving incorrectly identified e-mail (on page 359)
Creating a host's antispam-table.txt file (on page 360)
446
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Customizing a host's antispam-table.txt file (on page 362)
Adding new words to the antispam-table.txt file (on page 357)
Modifying the word counts in the antispam-table.txt file (on page 363)
Deleting infrequent words from the antispam-table.txt file (on page 358)
Merging Antispam-table.txt files (on page 356)
Creating URL Domain Blacklists (on page 364)
Simultaneously Merge Domain Links List and Antispam-Table.txt Files
(Simultaneously_Merge_Domain_Links_List_and_Antispam_Table_txt_Files.htm)
Identifying wildcards in e-mail (on page 366)
Related Topics
Antispamseeder Parameters (on page 355)
Understanding the Antispam-table.txt file (on page 447)
Merging Antispam-table.txt Files Example
Suppose that at installation, you chose to store the updated word statistics in the antispam-table-ini.txt
file, and now you want to merge them with your existing antispam-table.txt
file. Assuming that your host is named "Host1", enter the following command: antispamseeder.exe -tantispam-table-ini.txt -hHost1
Understanding the antispam-table.txt file
The antispam-table.txt
file contains the word counts that content filtering uses to determine if a message is spam. Each word is assigned three values. The first value is the statistical value assigned by the antispam engine. The second value is the number of times that the word has occurred in non-spam e-mail messages. The third value is the number of times that the word has occurred in spam e-mail messages.
Note:
antispam-table.txt
file was created using e-mail messages and words that were received at Ipswitch. You may find that the words and values contained in it are not entirely appropriate for your use. In this case you can customize the file based on your needs
by using the antispamseeder.exe utility (on page 354).
447
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Antispamseeder.exe Wildcard Example 2
If you want the antispam engine to identify the word "2Sexy" as spam, add it to the antispam-table.txt file by entering the following command, replacing domain.com with your domain name: antispamseeder.exe -spam -w-sexy -c100 - hdomain.com
This command adds the word "-sexy" to the antispam-table.txt file as if it had occurred 100 times in spam e-mail. The word will now be treated as a spam indicator by the content filters.
If you want the antispam engine to identify the word"g00d" (with zeros) as spam, you must enter the word into the antispam-table.txt file by running the following command, substituting dashes for the non-alphabetic characters. In this example, " host1" is the hostname and "g- -d" is the word you want to be recognized as spam.
Once you run the above command, the antispam engine will recognize any variable of the word "g- -d" as spam, such as g00d, g**d etc. This command does not change the word count for the word "good" because it does not contain any non-alphabetic characters.
Antispamseeder.exe Wildcard Example 1
If you want the antispam engine to identify the word 2Sexy as spam, add it to the antispam-table.txt file by entering the following command, replacing domain.com with your domain name: antispamseeder.exe -spam -w-sexy -c100 - hdomain.com
This command adds the word "-sexy" to the antispam-table.txt file as if it had occurred 100 times in spam e-mail. The word will now be treated as a spam indicator by the content filters.
IMail Configuration Export (IMailConfigExport.exe)
IMail Configuration Export Utility
"IMailConfigExport.exe" is a command line utility located under the
"..\IMail"
top directory, that will export all the IMail Server registry configuration keys (including service settings, domain settings and user settings) to the IMail top directory at the following path:
" ..\IMail\IMailConfigExport.reg"
448
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Note: This utility will not backup user's mailboxes or databases.
The following registry keys are exported
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail\domains
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail\domains\192.168.XX.XXX
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail\domains\domain.com
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail\domains\domain.com\Users
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail\domains\domain.com\Users\admi n
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail\domains\domain.com\Users\root
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail\domains\domain.com\Users\_ali ases
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail\domains\domain.com\Users\_ali ases\imailsrv
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail\domains\domain.com\Users\_ali ases\postmaster
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail\Global
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail\Global\CTAV
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail\Install
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail\Services
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail\Services\IMAP4D32
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail\Services\IMAP4D32\Parameters
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail\Services\POP3D32
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail\Services\POP3D32\Parameters
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail\Services\QueueMgr
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail\Services\QueueMgr\Parameters
449
IMail v12 Administrator Help
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail\Services\QueueMgr\Parameters\
Counters
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail\Services\SMTP
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail\Services\SMTP\Parameters
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail\ssl
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\Licenses
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\Messenger Server
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\Messenger Server\Domains
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\Messenger Server\Domains\domain.com
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\Messenger
Server\Domains\domain.com\Users
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\Messenger
Server\Domains\domain.com\Users\admin
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\Messenger
Server\Domains\domain.com\Users\admin\BlockedUsers
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\Messenger
Server\Domains\domain.com\Users\admin\PublicAttributes
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\Messenger
Server\Domains\domain.com\Users\admin\QueuedConversations
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\Messenger
Server\Domains\domain.com\Users\admin\StatusMsgs
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\Messenger
Server\Domains\domain.com\Users\admin\StatusMsgs\0
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\Messenger
Server\Domains\domain.com\Users\admin\StatusMsgs\1
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\Messenger
Server\Domains\domain.com\Users\admin\StatusMsgs\2
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\Messenger
Server\Domains\domain.com\Users\admin\StatusMsgs\3
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\Messenger
Server\Domains\domain.com\Users\admin\StatusMsgs\4
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\Messenger
Server\Domains\domain.com\Users\admin\StatusMsgs\5
450
IMail v12 Administrator Help
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\Messenger Server\IP Addresses
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\Messenger Server\Settings
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\Messenger Server\Settings\Client ACL
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\Messenger Server\Settings\Client
ACL\Entries
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\Messenger Server\Settings\Server ACL
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\Messenger Server\Settings\Server
ACL\Entries
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Softalk
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Softalk\WorkgroupShare
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Softalk\WorkgroupShare\Setup
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\IMAP4D32\Parameters
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\POP3D32\Parameters
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\QueueMgr\Parameters
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\QueueMgr\Parameters
\Counters
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\SMTPD32\Parameters
Registry Backup
In This Section
Back Up IMail Registry (on page 125)
Restoring IMail Registry (on page 126)
Backing Up System Files (on page 126)
Backing Up User Mailboxes (on page 127)
Back Up IMail Registry
There are two methods of saving the IMail registry keys. Select one that is fits best.
451
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Important: This will only backup user data for domains that use the IMail User Database.
Backing Up Registry with Command Line
To backup the registry keys for IMail using command line use the following steps.
1 Click Start > Run > "cmd". This will open a DOS window.
2 At the DOS prompt enter the following command all on one line: regedit /e c:\imail\imail.reg
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Ipswitch\IMail
3 Entering a different path or file name is up to the administrator.
This will copy the complete IMail registry "hive" to the c:\imail directory folder.
Backing up Up Registry Manually
To backup the registry keys manually using export with the following steps:
1 Click on Start > Run > type "regedit" and click OK.
2 Go to the path:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Ipswitch\IMail
3 Select "IMail" Registry key
4 Right click and select "Export".
5 Select the desired path, and name the file.
6 The "selected branch" field should show the following:
7
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Ipswitch\IMail
8 Click Save.
This will save all domain data, user names and user passwords for all domains that use the
IMail user database.
Related Topics
Restoring IMail Registry (on page 126)
Backing Up IMail Server System Files (on page 126)
Backing Up User Mail (on page 127)
452
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Restoring IMail Registry
There are two methods of restoring the IMail registry keys. Select one that is fits best.
Restoring using Windows Explorer
1 Go to Windows Explorer and double click on the exported .reg file
2 A prompt asking if you are sure that you want to add the information in "path name".reg file to the registry. Click "Yes" if the path name looks correct.
3 A prompt telling you it was successfully entered into the registry.
Restoring using "regedit"
1 Make sure a copy of the registry file is on the server.
2 Click on Start > Run > type "regedit" and click OK.
3 Click File > Import
4 Browse to the copy of the registry file on the server.
The current IMail registry keys will be overwritten with the selected file.
Related Topics
Back Up IMail Registry (on page 125)
Backing Up IMail Server System Files (on page 126)
Backing Up User Mail (on page 127)
Backing Up IMail Server System Files
IMail Server stores its system files in the \IMail directory, unless you have given it a different name. You can make a backup copy of the IMail Server directory tree.
Related Topics
Back Up IMail Registry (on page 125)
Restoring IMail Registry (on page 126)
Backing Up User Mail (on page 127)
Backing Up User Mail
Users' mail is stored in directories below
\IMail
, usually under
IMail\users
, but each domain may have mail stored, under
\IMail\domain\users
, if default paths were selected.
453
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Daily backups should include these directories.
Related Topics
Back Up IMail Registry (on page 125)
Restoring IMail Registry (on page 126)
Backing Up IMail Server System Files (on page 126)
Web Site Updater (IClientUpdater.exe)
IClientUpdater.exe is a utility designed for users that have multiple IClient web sites for branding purposes. This utility will search through all web sites looking for the IClient.config file, and will allow the user to update web sites that were created for branding.
Warning: IIS will be stopped and restarted to avoid locked files.
Select the directory the updated IMail web client files were installed to. The text box displays the default path that the Install updated.
Note:
"web.config"
file will not be overwritten, to protect branding.
Browse. Use the Browse button to modify this path.
Select All. By default all web sites found will be selected. Uncheck the web sites that you do not want updated.
454
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Unselect All. Click Unselect All to uncheck all web sites.
Update. Click update to copy the contents of the new IMail web client to the selected web sites.
Close. Click this button to close the utility without running the utility.
Initializing and Synchronizing LDAP Databases
(iLDAP.exe)
iLDAP.exe is a utility to Init or Sync a specified LDAP domain or all the LDAP domains. This utility can be used in the case when the Web Administrator does not properly Init or Sync all the LDAP domains on a server. This issue sometimes occurs on servers running Microsoft
Windows 2003 machines with over 30 domains.
Basic Command Syntax
iLdap -i|s[<domain>]
Where domain is the domain you want to Init or Sync. All the domains are initialized or synchronized if no domain is specified.
Command
-i
Function
Initializes the specified LDAP database.
455
IMail v12 Administrator Help
-s
Related Topics
Synchronizes the specified LDAP database.
Populating the LDAP Database Using Ldaper.exe (on page 400)
Cleaning the Spool Directory (Isplcln.exe)
Isplcln.exe is a command utility that deletes all files in the spool directory that are older than a specified number of days.
Basic Command Syntax
isplcln -n x -l y
Where x is the number of days old a non-log file has to be before it is deleted, and y is the number of days old a log file has to be before it is deleted.
Note: Note that isplcln.exe deletes all files in the spool directory based on the parameters supplied without regard to whether a file is locked or not.
Example: isplcln -n 5 -l 30
The above example deletes all non-log files that are five days old or older and deletes all log files that are thirty days old or older.
Command
-x
-y
Function
The number of days old a file must be before it is deleted.
The number of days old a log file must be before it is deleted.
Deleting Old Messages (immsgexp.exe)
"immsgexp.exe" is a utility that deletes messages older than a specified number of days.
Basic Command Syntax
immsgexp -t startdirectory
-d #of_days_to_save
-m specific_mailbox
456
IMail v12 Administrator Help
-f fully_qualified_path_to_mailbox (cannot be used with -t and -m)
The
"startdirectory"
will be scanned search only
"specific_mailbox"
and any message older than
"#of_days_to_save"
will be deleted.
Option -f gives capability to delete
"#of_days_to_save"
from a
"fully_qualified_path_to_mailbox"
.
Warning: -t option cannot be used with the -f option.
Warning: -m option will be ignored if used with the -f option.
A log of exYYMMDD.log (or exYYMMDD.### if .log already exists) will be created and log which directories/mailboxes were scanned, how many messages were deleted, and the amount of disk space saved (by file and directory).
Examples:
The following command deletes all messages in the
"C:\Program
Files\Ipswitch\IMail"
directory that are more than 60 days old. immsgexp -t"C:\Program Files\Ipswitch\IMail" -d60
The following command deletes all messages in the "spam" mailbox located in the c:imail directory that are more than 60 days old. immsgexp -t"C:\Program Files\Ipswitch\IMail" -mspam.mbx -d60
The following command deletes messages in the
"sent"
mailbox of the User "jdoe" that are more than 90 days old. immsgexp -d90 -f"C:\Program Files\Ipswitch\IMail\jdoe\sent.mbx"
immsgexp.exe command line options
Command Function
-t The directory containing the mailboxes from which messages will be deleted.
-d
-m
-f
The number of days that a message will remain on the server before it is deleted.
The name of the mailbox from which messages will be deleted.
Full path to the specific mailbox.
Warning - Cannot be used with the -t option.
Warning - The -m option will be ignored when using this option.
457
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Populating the LDAP Database (ldaper.exe)
Ldaper.exe
populates the LDAP database with user properties for all users on a selected e-mail domain. This may be particularly helpful after you have added a large number of users
at once using the Adduser.exe utility (on page 440).
conversion occurs during installation. The conversion can take a lengthy amount of time depending on the number of domains to convert. If the LDAP data is not available after the upgrade, run the LDAP Convert utility to correct the issue. In the command line utility, type: ldaper /CONVERT /Y
Basic Command Syntax
ldaper [options]:
Ldaper.exe
supports the following command line options. Options can be prefixed with a hyphen or a forward slash.
Option
-H
-U
-P
-GN
-SN
-S
-C
-ST
-CO
-Z
-T
-O
-OU
- CONVERT
-Y
-LSTART
Explanation
Host name
User ID
Password
First name
Last Name (Sur Name)
Street Address
City
State
Country
Postal Code
Telephone
Organization
Organizational Unit (Department)
Converts LDAP dbases prior to version 8.1 to the new OpenLDAP dbase schema
Required option with the CONVERT option
Keeps the LDAP service running
Related Topics
Init & Sync LDAP DB - iLDAP.exe utility (on page 401)
458
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Adding Users Using Adduser.exe (on page 440)
Sending Mail to All Users (mailall.exe)
Mailall.exe is a command line utility that sends mail to all users on a particular host or on all hosts on the IMail system.
Basic Command Syntax
mailall -h hostname|ALL> -f sender -d [-s Subject] <FullPathToMessageFile>
Examples: mailall -h myhost -f admin@myhost -s "Admin note" C:\mailnotes.txt
The above example sends the file mailnotes.txt to all users on myhost. The message is from admin@myhost; the Subject is Admin Note.
Alias1=|mailall -h myname -d
The preceding example creates a program alias that is used to send mail to all users on the myname host. Then, you can send a message to [email protected], and it will go to everyone on the myname host. When an e-mail is sent to the program alias, the executable program is invoked and the entire contents of the message is passed as the text for the
"mailall.exe" message.
Command
-h hostname
-h ALL
-f sender
Function
The -h parameter is required. Use it to enter the hostname.
The -h parameter is required. Use this command to specify all hosts on the
IMail system.
Specifies what address appears in the From field. A value is required if you are using a text file that has no From header line.
This is an optional parameter that specifies the content of the Subject field. -s subject
-d Optional. Use -d to delete the source files when mailing is complete.
FullPathToMessageFile This parameter is required.
Checking the Registry (regcheck.exe)
Regcheck.exe
is run automatically during a repair or upgrade, and can also be run from the command line. Regcheck troubleshoots registry conflicts during upgrades and repairs.
459
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Basic Command Syntax
regcheck
What do the RegCheck messages mean?
Message Example Translation
Missing primary domain
%Official
Host
Name%
Missing primary domain imail.ipswitch.co
m
The hostname defined in the ‘HostName’ value under
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail\Global does not match a key in
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail\Domains.
Primary
Host
%Official
Host
Name% address is %IP
Address
%
Primary Host imail.ipswitch.co
m address is
192.168.1.1
This tells you the Primary Domain defined by the ‘HostName’ value under
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail\Global and its IP defined by the ‘Address’ value under
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail\Domains\%OfficialH ostName%.
Could not find address for primary host
%Official
Host
Name%
Could not find address for primary host imail.ipswitch.co
m
The ‘Address’ value under
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail\Domains\%OfficialH ostName% does not exist.
Could not find
Global
HostNam e, host key check failed
Could not find
Global
HostName, host key check failed
The ‘HostName’ value under
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail\Global does not exist.
Could not find
IMail
Global key, host key check failed
Could not find
IMail Global key, host key check failed
The Global key under the
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail does not exist.
Could not find
IMail
Domains key, domain
Could not find
IMail Domains key, domain registry check failed
The Domains key under the
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail does not exist.
460
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Message Example
registry check failed
Translation
Dup
Official
%Official
Host
Name%
Official
%IP
Address
% and
%IP
Address
%
Dup Official imail.ipswitch.co
m Official
192.168.1.1 and
192.168.1.2
There are multiple Address keys under
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail\Domains that contain the same ‘Official’ value under
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail\Domains\%IP
Address%.
Domain / official mismatc h: official
-
%Official
Host
Name%
Address -
%IP
Address
%
Domain / official mismatch: official – imail.ipswitch.co
m Address –
192.168.1.1
The ‘Address’ value under
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail\Domains\%OfficialH ostName% is %IP Address%, but other Address keys under
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail\Domains contain the same ‘Official’ value under
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail\Domains\%IP
Address%.
Domain / official mismatc h: missing address key in domain
%Official
Host
Name%
Domain / official mismatch: missing address key in domain imail.ipswitch.co
m
The ‘Address’ value under
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail\Domains\%Official
Host Name% does not exist.
Address
%IP
Address
% Official key
%Official
Host
Name% domain does not exist
Address
192.168.1.3
Official key mail3.ipswitch.c
om domain does not exist
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail\Domains\%IP
Address% contains an ‘Official’ value of %Official Host Name% that does not contain a key under
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail\Domains.
Dup
Address
%IP
Dup Address
192.168.1.1
Domain
The Address value for
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail\Domains\%Official
Host Name% and
461
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Message Example
Address
%
Domain
%Official
Host
Name% and
%Official
Host
Name% imail.ipswitch.co
m and mail2.ipswitch.c
om
Translation
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail\Domains\%Official
Host Name% are the same.
Dup
TopDir
Domain
%Official
Host
Name% and domain
%Official
Host
Name%
Dup TopDir
Domain imail.ipswitch.co
m and domain mail2.ipswitch.c
om
The ‘TopDir’ value for
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail\Domains\%Official
Host Name% and
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail\Domains\%Official
Host Name% are the same.
The ‘Address’ value under
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail\Domains\%Official
Host Name% references an address that does not contain a key under
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail\Domains.
Domain entry
%Official
Host
Name% has no IP entry
Domain entry mail4.ipswitch.c
om has no IP entry
Domain
IP / system IP mismatc h -
%Official
Host
Name%
Address -
%IP
Address
%
Domain IP / system IP mismatch - mail4.ipswitch.c
om Address-
10.10.10.1
The ‘Address’ value under
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ipswitch\IMail\Domains\%Official
Host Name% references an address that is not bound to the NIC.
System IP found -
%IP
Address
%
System IP found
- 192.168.1.4
The IP that is bound to the NIC.
462
IMail v12 Administrator Help
SMTP Delivery Application (smtp32.exe)
The smtp32.exe is a command line utility that lets you:
Start IMail queue runs
Pass messages back to IMail for delivery
Smtp32.exe supports the following command line options:
Parameter
smtp32 smtp32 queue_filename
Function
With no options, smtp32 will attempt to deliver all messages in the mail queue.
Causes smtp32 to process the single messages pointed to by the queue_filename. smtp32-qr smtp32 -v
Causes smtp32 to attempt to deliver all messages in the mail queue.
Activates full display of the conversation (verbose)
Self-Signed SSL Certificate(sslutility.exe)
IMail ships with an SSL Configuration Utility that you can use to create your own 128-bit SSL certificate. You can use the self-signed certificate within IMail, or you can purchase a trusted
SSL certificate from a registered CA. To create a self-signed certificate, use the following steps:
1 Open the IMail SSL Configuration Utility Start > Programs > Ipswitch IMail Server >
IMail Server > IMail SSL Configuration Utility and click the Certificate Creation tab.
2 Click the Browse (...) button in the Output Location box to select the folder you want the certificate created in.
3 Enter information in all of the Certificate Information boxes:
City/Town. City or town where you are located. (Ex. Augusta)
State/Province. State or Province where you are located. (Ex. Georgia)
Organization. Company or individual user name.
Common Name. The hostname you enter here should be the hostname users use in their browsers to connect to Web Client/Calendaring.
For example: If users normally connect to: http://webmail.maildomain.com
then, enter webmail.maildomain.com
into the Common Name field.
Pass Phrase. Pass phrase that is to be used to encrypt the private key. It is important to remember this pass phrase. The pass phrase can be any combination of words, symbols, spaces, or numbers.
463
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Pass Phrase Confirmation. Re-enter the same pass phrase as above.
Country. The country you are in. This must be a valid two letter country code. (i.e. US)
E-mail. E-mail address of an administrator for the server.
Unit. Name of organizational unit. (Ex. IT or Information Systems)
4 After all of the boxes are filled in correctly, click Create to generate the keys, certificate, and certificate signing request.
Note: If all of the boxes are not filled in, you cannot create the certificate.
5 Once the SSL Certificate has been created, you must select go to the Certificate
Selection tab and point to the new certificate to be used in SSL connections to the IMail server.
Private Key. Click browse and locate new key.
Certificate. Click browse and locate new certificate.
Pass Phrase. Enter pass phrase associated with new certificate.
Pass Phrase Confirmation. Re-enter pass phrase.
Click "Apply" to save settings.
Related Topic
Installing SSL Keys (on page 36)
Importing "config_CommonAddrBook.cgi" to Public
Contact folders
If you used public contacts in a previous version of Ipswitch Web Messaging, the
"config_CommonAddrBook.cgi"
file is no longer functional with the new V12 and later web client. A command line utility has been created to allow the IMail Administrators to import and merge their
"config_CommonAddrBook.cgi"
files into Public Contacts folders using
the IMail Collaboration database.
To successfully import and implement all your public contact
"config_CommonAddrBook.cgi"
files, the following steps are required:
Public Contact Folder Setup
1 Public Contact folders must be created before running this import utility. Go to your
Web Administration and select Collaboration > Public Folders. Click Add when the
Public Folders dialog appears.
2 Enter a unique name for each
"config_CommonAddrBook.cgi"
file. Keep in mind the name entered will be displayed within the Web Client under the user's Address
Books as follows:
464
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Address Books
Contacts
Department Contacts [Public]
3 Select
"Contacts"
from the Type drop down selection menu and click Save. This will bring up the Public Folder Properties dialog.
4 At this point all users that are required to have access rights must be added at this point.
Click Add.
5 Be sure to leave the Access rights to "Read" only for your normal users. Be sure to click
Save on every page.
Note: The IMail Collaboration database does not currently recognize users on a per domain level, the IMail Administrator will need to manually select all users for each domain, separately for each Public Contacts folder.
6 Next, add full permissions to Administrators to allow maintaining withing the Web
Client. The new public contacts folder will now display for all user's with access rights in their Web Client Address Books navigation folder.
Running "PublicContactsCGI Importer.exe"
1 The
"PublicContactsCGI Importer.exe"
is located under your
"../IMail" directory. Double click to initiate the import process.
2 The main dialog displays all available Public Folders (Calendars, Contacts, Notes and
Tasks).
3 Select (highlight) the Public Contact folder and use the "Browse" button to locate the matching
"config_CommonAddrBook.cgi".
4 Click
"Import"
, upon completion a dialog
"Import Complete"
will return.
Warning: There is no mechanism to avoid duplicate contact entries. Clicking "Import" again, will duplicate all entries.
Command Line Installations (Silent Installs)
Command Line installation is similar to silent installations as it is capable of installing IMail
Server with no User Interface. This method allows new IMail Server installations to be started with command-line settings initialized to suit each computers need, requiring minimal if any interaction from the user.
Note: Silent Installs will default to IMail User Database and Access for the IMail Collaboration
Database. IMail Collaboration database will be created using Access.
IMail User database will default to the IMail registry.
465
IMail v12 Administrator Help
designed for new installations only.
AddLocal and RemoveLocal Options
AntiSpam
Collaboration
CommandAV
ImServer
WebIClient
WebAdmin
WebIMailWebService
Command Line Examples
Example 1:
IMail_Server_Install.exe /s /v" /qn
LICENSING_SERIAL_NUMBER=XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX"
Above example will install all IMail Server products as follows:
No UI will display for new installation using the serial number
"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX".
Installation of all available products: Web Administration, Console Administration,
Web Client, IMail Collaboration and Ipswitch Instant Messaging applications will be added.
All available services will be started, except for LDAP and IMail Sys Logger.
IMail Collaboration database will be created using Access.
IMail User database will default to the IMail registry.
Default installation path will be
"c:\Program Files\Ipswitch\IMail"
with primary domain name being
"mydomain.com".
No system administrator will be created.
No default SSL keys will be installed.
Example 2:
IMail_Server_Install.exe /s /v" /qn
LICENSING_SERIAL_NUMBER=XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX"
REMOVELOCAL=ImServer
Above example will install all IMail Server products as follows:
466
IMail v12 Administrator Help
No UI will display for new installation using the serial number
"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX".
Ipswitch Instant Messaging will not be installed, if a previous installation is detected it will be removed.
Installation of all other available products: Web Administration, Console
Administration, Web Client and IMail Collaboration will be added.
All available services will be started, except for LDAP and IMail Sys Logger.
IMail Collaboration database will be created using Access.
IMail User database will default to the IMail registry.
Default installation path will be
"c:\Program Files\Ipswitch\IMail"
with primary domain name being
"mydomain.com".
No system administrator will be created.
No default SSL keys will be installed.
467
CHAPTER 13
Using IMail Web Client
In This Chapter
Access and Login to IMail Web Client ....................................................... 468
Configuring "IClient.config" for the Web Client .................................... 470
Configuring RSS Feeds for the Web Client .............................................. 472
Configuring Websites for the Web Client ................................................ 474
Importing "config_CommonAddrBook.cgi" to Public Contact folders476
User Impersonation by System Administrators ..................................... 478
Changing the Web Client Default Directory (setting a redirect for Web Messaging)
Accessing Spell Check Dictionary ............................................................... 480
Setting Up SSL for IMail Web Messaging ................................................. 481
What is the IMail Web Client?
IMail Web Client lets users send and receive mail using a web browser. Users can log on to
IMail Web Client from a browser on any computer with a supported browser and manage e-mail without installing e-mail client software.
IMail Web Client directly accesses the server to manage mail, and no longer requires IMAP.
After logging in, users can manage e-mail from the browser, organize e-mail into folders
(mailboxes), maintain an address book (contacts) and auto-synchronize it with Microsoft
Outlook contacts (if the IMail Collaboration Client has been installed), and set delivery rules for incoming mail.
When a user creates a mailbox in IMail Web Client, the mailbox is created on the mail server and mail folders and messages reside on the server.
Access and Login to IMail Web Client
Web Client Access
468
IMail v12 Administrator Help
To launch the Web Client, in your browser address box, type the IP address or URL of the IMail
Web Server followed by the IMail Web Client path.
Example:
http://123.100.100.80/IClient, then press ENTER. The IMail Web Client login page appears.
Note: IMail Web Client directly accesses the server to manage mail, and no longer requires
IMAP.
Web Client Login
Enter your Email Address and Password and then click Login. If the login information is correct, the client main page will appear.
Note: To login to Lite Web Client, check the Use Lite Web Client checkbox.
When logging in for the first time on a new computer a cookie is generated.
Note: Cookies must be enabled (on page 477) for a user to successfully login.
The cookie will remember all the settings below on their next login:
Language: The IMail Web Client contains a list box for Languages, you can read messages composed with international characters in the following languages:
English
Chinese Simplified
Chinese Traditional
French
German
Italian
Japanese
Spanish
Use Lite Web Client: This checkbox will log you into the lighter weight web client, designed especially for users with mobile devices. This web client has limited
capability (on page 477), and was not designed with all the advanced options and
features that the regular web client offers.
Remember My Email Address: Select this check box if you wish the client to remember your email address on the local machine, only.
Remember My Password: Select this check box if you wish the client to remember your password on the local machine, only.
469
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Note: Email Address and encrypted password information are stored in cookies on your computer.
Configuring "IClient.config" for the Web Client
The
"IClient.config"
file has many configurable web client settings that can be updated and change settings for all Web Client users. The
"IClient.config"
file default location is
"...\Program Files\Ipswitch\IMail\WebDir\WebClient"
See Maintaining XML File for Websites to configure websites to globally display for all web client users.
Listed below are the current configurable items to meet the different needs for the IMail
Administrator.
Note: The Auto Refresh Frequency has been moved to the Web Client User Options. Go to
Action >
Manage User Options > Receiving Messages.
Tip: For changes made to this file to take affect and restart of the web application is required.
Ajax Time Limit for Requests
Application Title
Auto Logout
Contact Photo Files
Contact Photo Sizing
Cookie Encryption
Default Theme
Disable Contact Photos
Disable System Admin Impersonation
Disable Web Client Logging
Disabling Web Client Features
Disk Space Usage
470
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Display Name Options
Help Link
IE Browser Image Tag Fix
Impersonation Delimiter
Impersonations Viewing Emails
Initial Language Default
Invalid Domain Log Setting
Language Display Option
Login Lockout Settings
Map URL
Map Display Options
Max Contacts to be Searched
Maximum Tab Limit
Message Encoding Options for Compose
Notes Display Option
Rules Escape Characters
SMTP Encryption Options
SMTP Port for Web Client
Sound for New Mail
System Message Display Option
Tasks / Appointments Notes Saved as RTF
Themes Link
Translations Language Codes
Web Admin Link
471
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Configuring RSS Feeds for the Web Client
The
"RssFeeds.xml"
file is a configurable XML file to maintain global RSS Feeds for all web client users. RSS Feeds are visible at the bottom of the web client navigation tree as shown below.
The
"RssFeeds.xml"
file is located at
"...\Program Files\Ipswitch\IMail\WebDir\WebClient v2\App_Data"
RSS Feeds entered in this XML file will display in all user's navigation panel under the RSS
Feeds node. When an RSS Feed is selected it will open in a new web client tab.
By default RSS Feeds are not set. It is up to the IMail Administrator to decide if an RSS Feed should be added to activate this feature. Once added and saved this link will display globally for all web client users before any personal user's RSS Feeds that a user may have setup.
Note: All RSS Feeds within this XML file can not be modified or deleted by user's via the Web
Client.
472
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Adding an RSS Feed
To add a new RSS Feed, copy the following tags and insert before the </rssfeeds> tag.
<feed>
<title>The MX Record</title>
<url>http://blogs.imailserver.com/feed/</url>
<iconfile></iconfile>
</feed>
Related Topic
Configuring Websites for the Web Client (on page 474)
473
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Configuring Websites for the Web Client
The
"Websites.xml"
file is a configurable XML file to maintain websites that are visible at the bottom of the web client navigation tree as shown below.
The
"Websites.xml"
file is located at
"...\Program Files\Ipswitch\IMail\WebDir\WebClient v2\App_Data"
Websites entered in this XML file will display in all user's navigation panel under the Website node. When a site is selected it will open in a new web client tab. Some websites have code in place to prevent being opened with frames. Please be sure all listed sites within the XML file are tested to verify they all correctly open in a new web client tab.
By default a website URL is not set and will not display. It is up to the IMail Administrator to decide what website should be added to activate this feature. Once added and saved this link will display globally for all web client users.
Adding a Website
To add a new website, copy the tags from
"<website>"
to
"</website>"
and insert before the
"</externalsites>"
tag.
474
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Example
<externalsites>
<website>
<title>Ipswitch Messaging</title>
<url>http://www.imailserver.com/</url>
<iconfile></iconfile>
</website>
<website>
<title>Ipswitch, Inc.</title>
<url>http://www.ipswitch.com/</url>
<iconfile></iconfile>
</website>
</externalsites>
Related Topic
Converting Contacts
If you used contacts or contact lists (distribution lists) in a previous version of Ipswitch Web
Messaging or in Microsoft Outlook with the IMail Collaboration plug-in, the contacts and contact lists are automatically imported into the new IMail Web Messaging client. A new
Contacts folder is created that includes contacts.
Ipswitch Web Messaging contacts and or contact lists (distribution lists) are imported and converted in a one-time process, during the IMail Collaboration installation, that imports the contact data from the aliases.txt file. The new data displays in the Web
Messaging Contacts folder.
Note: Contact lists (distribution lists) imported from a previous version of Ipswitch Web
Messaging are read only. They cannot be edited or added to after they are imported during the Ipswitch IMail Server V12 installation.
475
IMail v12 Administrator Help
If IMail Collaboration is installed and Contact sharing is enabled, contacts and contact groups imported from Microsoft Outlook will automatically begin synchronizing and updating in your Ipswitch Web Client Address Books on a regular basis. When you add new contacts in the Web Client Address Books, the new contact information will synchronize and update in your Outlook contacts.
Importing "config_CommonAddrBook.cgi" to Public
Contact folders
If you used public contacts in a previous version of Ipswitch Web Messaging, the
"config_CommonAddrBook.cgi"
file is no longer functional with the new V12 and later web client. A command line utility has been created to allow the IMail Administrators to import and merge their
"config_CommonAddrBook.cgi"
files into Public Contacts folders using
the IMail Collaboration database.
To successfully import and implement all your public contact
"config_CommonAddrBook.cgi"
files, the following steps are required:
Public Contact Folder Setup
1 Public Contact folders must be created before running this import utility. Go to your
Web Administration and select Collaboration > Public Folders. Click Add when the
Public Folders dialog appears.
2 Enter a unique name for each
"config_CommonAddrBook.cgi"
file. Keep in mind the name entered will be displayed within the Web Client under the user's Address
Books as follows:
Address Books
Contacts
Department Contacts [Public]
3 Select
"Contacts"
from the Type drop down selection menu and click Save. This will bring up the Public Folder Properties dialog.
4 At this point all users that are required to have access rights must be added at this point.
Click Add.
5 Be sure to leave the Access rights to "Read" only for your normal users. Be sure to click
Save on every page.
Note: The IMail Collaboration database does not currently recognize users on a per domain level, the IMail Administrator will need to manually select all users for each domain, separately for each Public Contacts folder.
6 Next, add full permissions to Administrators to allow maintaining withing the Web
Client. The new public contacts folder will now display for all user's with access rights in their Web Client Address Books navigation folder.
476
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Running "PublicContactsCGI Importer.exe"
1 The
"PublicContactsCGI Importer.exe"
is located under your
"../IMail" directory. Double click to initiate the import process.
2 The main dialog displays all available Public Folders (Calendars, Contacts, Notes and
Tasks).
3 Select (highlight) the Public Contact folder and use the "Browse" button to locate the matching
"config_CommonAddrBook.cgi".
4 Click
"Import"
, upon completion a dialog
"Import Complete"
will return.
Warning: There is no mechanism to avoid duplicate contact entries. Clicking "Import" again, will duplicate all entries.
Lite Web Client
The Lite Web Client allows users with mobile devices to access their mail quicker. To allow this capability, certain processes were removed to allow for faster load in a low-bandwidth environment. Users can log into the Lite Web Client from any computer with a supported browser, and manage e-mail without installing email client software.
The Lite Web Client has limited capability, and was not designed with all the advanced options and features that the regular web client offers.
Some of the features that have been removed are as follows:
Rule maintenance has been removed, functionality still exists but to update your existing rules, login to your regular web client is required.
Auto suggest has been disabled.
Web Admin link has been omitted.
Note: Lite Web Client Help was designed for mobile devices. To keep the Help light certain processes were removed, such as the Index and Search features. To access these features login to the normal web client and click Help.
Browser - Enable Cookies
If after attempting to login to the IMail Server web interface and you receive this error message:
"Your request could not be served because you have browser cookies disabled. Please enable cookies in your browser's settings, close your current web session and try again."
477
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Enable cookies
If after attempting to login to the IMail Server web interface you receive this error message:
"Your request could not be served because you have browser cookies disabled.
Please enable cookies in your browser's settings, close your current web session and try again."
Enable cookies for Windows Internet Explorer:
1 Open Internet Explorer.
2 Select Tools > Internet Options.
3 Select the Privacy tab.
4 Select Advanced.
5 Select Override automatic cookie handling.
6 Click OK to save changes.
Enable cookies for Mozilla Firefox:
1 Open Firefox.
2 Select Tools > Options.
3 Select the Privacy tab.
4 Select the Cookies tab.
5 Select Allow sites to set cookies.
6 Click OK to save changes.
Enable cookies for Google Chrome:
1 Open Chrome.
2 Select Options > Under The Hood.
3 Click Content Settings button.
4 Locate Cookies on the page and select Allow local data to be set.
5 Click "X" to exit and save changes.
User Impersonation by System Administrators
IMail System Administrators have the capability to access any users within their IMail Server without having to know the users password. Impersonation gives System Administrators access to a users web client mailbox to check, verify or assist with issues that may arise.
The
"iclient.config"
file has several options that can be modified as deemed important
by the IMail Administrator. See Configuring New Web Client (on page 470) for more details.
Impersonation can be disabled. Key name is
"AllowUserImpersonationBySystemAdmins"
Disable impersonators from viewing user's email. Key is
"AllowImpersonatorsToSeeMail"
478
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Modify the delimiter used for impersonation login. Key is
"ImpersonationDelimiter"
The System Administrator once logged in can do the following:
Delete mail messages
Move mail messages
Create / Modify mail folders
Full access to contacts
Full access to rules
Preference modification
Full Calendar access (with exception to private appointments)
Full Notes access
Full Tasks access (with exception to private items)
Important: System Administrator will not be allowed to send mail while impersonating.
Important: Impersonation will not allow access to a users private calendar appointments and private tasks.
Using the IMail Web Client Login Page for Impersonation
Enter the Username to be accessed (full domain name may need to be entered)
Enter "/" after the Username with no spaces
Enter System Administrator Username
Enter System Administrator Password, then click Login.
If the login information is correct, the IMail main page opens.
Language: If your version of Web Messaging contains a list box for Languages, you can read messages composed with international characters in English, Chinese
Simplified, Chinese Traditional, French, German, Italian, Japanese, or Spanish. You choose the language to send messages in via the Preferences page.
Remember my username: Select this check box if you wish the client to remember your username on the local machine, only.
Remember my password: Select this check box if you wish the client to remember your password on the local machine, only.
Note: For security, it is recommended to not check any Remember check boxes.
Impersonate Example:
Username: [email protected]/[email protected] password: System Administrator password
479
IMail v12 Administrator Help
Note: localhost login does not require full domain name when accessing primary domain users.
Changing the Web Client Default Directory (setting a redirect for Web Messaging)
To set a redirect so Web Messaging users do not have to use \IClient in the URL for Web
Messaging:
1 Click Start > Programs > Administrative Tools > Internet Information Services. The
IIS console opens.
2 Right-click IClient (usually located under Web Site > Default Web Site).
3 Select Properties. The IClient Properties dialog box opens.
4 In the Execute Permissions list, click Scripts only.
5 Copy the directory path in the Local Path box.
6 Click OK.
7 Right-click Default Web Site.
8 Select Properties. The Default Web Site Properties dialog box opens.
9 Click the Home Directory tab.
10 Paste the directory path you copied from the IClient dialog box Local Path box into the
Default Web Site Properties dialog box Local Path box.
Accessing Spell Check Dictionary
Modifications to the Spell Check Dictionary are not recommended, except for line deletions.
This file is named
"en-US.dic"
and exists under the
"WebDir\WebClient\dic"
directory.
Important: Any changes to dictionary files will be lost during an upgrade or re-installation.
If logging in with a different language the associated dictionary file is substituted as follows:
en-US.dic = English - United States
fr-FR.dic = French - France
it-IT.dic = Italian - Italy
de-DE.dic = German - Germany
es-ES.dic = Spanish - Spain
For convenience to the administrator other language dictionary files exist.
en-AU.dic = English - Australia
en-CA.dic = English - Canada
480
IMail v12 Administrator Help
en-GB.dic = English - United Kingdom
es-MX.dic = Spanish - Mexico
These files can be used in place of the default settings by renaming.
Example.
If administrator resides in Mexico and would like the dictionary to use "es-MX.dic".
Complete the following steps:
1 Create backup copy of Spanish file. Rename es-ES.dic to es-ES.bak
2 Create backup copy of Mexico file. Make a backup copy of es-MX.dic to es-MX.bak
3 Rename es-MX.dic to "es-ES.dic".
This will allow capability to restore back to original setup.
Setting Up SSL for IMail Web Messaging
IMail Server and Web Messaging use the Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS) Secure
Sockets Layer (SSL) features to encrypt communications between the IMail Web client and server. To learn more about using SSL with IIS, see the IIS help information at
http://localhost/iisHelp/ (http://localhost/iisHelp/).
481
Index
A
About ...... 1, 54, 93, 209, 281, 291, 369, 393, 427,
445
About Domain Aliases ......................................... 209
About External Address Verification .............. 107
About Group Aliases ............................................ 209
About Help ................................................................... 1
About LDAP Data .................................................. 393
About LDAP Server ............................................... 393
About Logging ...................................................... 427
About Program Alias ............................................ 210
About Standard Aliases ...................................... 208
About Virtual Mail Domains (Hosts) .................. 54
About Your Spam Signature ............................. 291
Access ........................... 19, 169, 376, 381, 466, 478
Default User Settings ........................... 115, 148
Web & Account Access - Global ................ 157
Access and Login to IMail Web Client ............ 466
Access Control ..................................... 403, 419, 428
Accessing Spell Check Dictionary ................... 478
Accessing the IMail Web Administration ......... 19
Account Settings ................................................... 164
Accounts, Orphan ................................................. 160
Activating ................................................................... 20
Active Directory (AD) ....................................... 53, 65
Example, AD Builtin .......................................... 53
ActiveSync ..... 79, See Mobile Synchronization
Add / Edit Auto Responder Account .............. 179
Add / Edit E-mail Alias ......................................... 207
Add / Edit Sys Log Access Control List ........... 429
Add Auto Responder Sub-Mailbox Responses
................................................................................ 180
Add Collaboration User ...................................... 371
Add User to Collaboration ................................. 168
Add/Edit External Address Verifier .................. 103
Add/Edit POP3 - IMAP Control Access ........... 404
Add/Edit Realtime Blacklist .................................. 92
Add/Edit SMTP Access Control ......................... 420
Addalias Text File Example ....................... 213, 435
Addalias.exe Utility ................... 210, 211, 212, 436
Adddomain.exe Utility ........................................ 138
Adding ...................................................... 46, 212, 223
Adding a New Collaboration Group ............... 373
Adding a New Contact to a Group .................. 381
Adding a New IMail Domain ................................ 46
Adding a New Word to the antispam-table.txt
File ......................................................................... 356
Adding a Rule Condition .................. 176, 230, 249
Adding a Subscriber by Forwarding ............... 237
Adding a Virtual Host (adddomain.exe) ....... 138,
436
Adding Alias to a Domain Using ............ 211, 434
Adding Alias to Primary Domain Using 212, 435
Adding Aliases using .................................. 210, 433
Adding an IMail User ............................................ 164
Adding Attachment Blocking types ................ 252
Adding Multiple Conditions for Domains ..... 249
Adding Multiple Conditions for Users ............ 176
Adding Relay Addresses ..................................... 417
Adding Rule for Domains ................................... 247
Adding Rule for Lists ............................................ 228
Adding Rule for Users .......................................... 174
Adding to Domain Blacklist ............................... 334
Adding to Domain Forwarding ........................ 424
Adding to Realtime Domain Whitelist ........... 268
Adding Users (adduser.exe) ............................... 438
Adding Users to a List .......................................... 223
Additional Resources ............................................. 20 adduser.exe Options ............................................ 439
Adduser.exe Utility ...................................... 438, 439
Administration .............................. 5, 6, 19, 141, 205
Administrators ..................................... 126, 127, 239
Ajax Time Limit Requests .................................... 468
Alert Administrator Email ................................... 280
Alias Administration ............................................. 205
Aliases ....................................................................... 205
Addalias.exe Utility............. 210, 211, 212, 436
Beeper, Alias ........................................... 205, 207
Domain, Alias ................................................... 209
Example, Setting Up Alias .............................. 33
Group, Alias ...................................................... 207
Pager, Alias ........................................................ 207
Program Alias ......................................... 205, 207
Standard, Alias ....................................... 207, 210
Allow Access to Users and Groups .................. 376
Allow remote mail to local groups .................. 210
Anti-spam..................................... 287, 290, 294, 342
Broken MIME Headers ......................... 318, 319
Commtouch Anti-spam ................................ 387
Connection Checks .............................. 331, 334
482
Example, Anti-spam Table .......................... 445
Forwarding SPAM ................................. 293, 294
HTML Filtering ........................................ 303, 305
Log Messages, Antispam .................... 340, 342
Connect Filtering, Log Messages ....... 342
Content Filtering, Log Messages ........ 347
Mailing Lists and Newsletters, Spam ....... 263
Phrase Filtering............................. 301, 302, 303
Premium Filter ................................................. 300
SPF ........................ 204, 289, 319, 320, 321, 329
Statistical Filter ...................................... 313, 314
URL Domain Blacklist ........................... 311, 312
X-Header, Spam .................................... 309, 349
Anti-spam Configuration Overview ................ 290
Anti-spam FAQs ..................................................... 294
Anti-spam Log Messages .................................... 342
Anti-spam Logging ............................................... 339
Anti-spam Overview ............................................. 287
Antispamseeder Parameters ............................. 354
Antispamseeder Utility ........................................ 352 antispamseeder.exe Utility.... 352, 353, 356, 357,
361, 364, 445
Antispamseeder.exe Wildcard Example 1 ..... 446
Antispamseeder.exe Wildcard Example 2 ..... 446
Antivirus ....................................... 277, 278, 279, 280
Anti-virus .................................................................. 274
Antivirus ............................................................. 277
BitDefender ................................... 274, 276, 277
Anti-virus
Antivirus ............................................................. 278
Anti-virus
Antivirus ............................................................. 279
Anti-virus
Antivirus ............................................................. 280
Anti-virus
Antivirus ............................................................. 280
Anti-virus
Commtouch Anti-virus ................................. 282
Anti-virus
Commtouch Anti-virus ................................. 284
Anti-virus
Commtouch Anti-virus ................................. 284
Anti-Virus Administration (Symantec) ............ 279
Archiving .................................................................... 74
Attachment Blocking ........................................... 250
Attachments ............................................. 27, 40, 265
Attachment Blocking .......................... 250, 252
Auto Logout ............................................................ 468
Auto Responder ..................................................... 178
Auto Responder Variables .................................. 181
Automated Response .......................................... 178
B
Back Up IMail Registry ................................ 123, 449
Backing Up IMail Server System Files ... 124, 451
483
Backing Up User Mail .................................. 125, 451
Backups ........................................ 123, 124, 125, 446
Restoring IMail Registry ............................... 124
Bayesian Filter ........................................................ 313
Beeper, Alias .................................................. 205, 207
Beginning Character of Files in Queue .......... 113
Beginning Character of Files in the Spool .... 113
BitDefender ........................................... 274, 276, 277
Blacklists ..................................... 92, 93, 94, 311, 334
Blocking Message ................................................. 253
Bouncing Spam Messages using Rules ............ 56
Broken MIME Headers ................................ 318, 319
Browser ......................................................................... 5
Cookies ..................................................... 466, 475
Browser - Enable Cookies ................................... 475
Browser Title Bar ................................................... 468
C
Calendars, Adding ....................................... 376, 381
Certificate, SSL
SSL Keys ...................................................... 34, 461
SSL Setup .............................. 390, 400, 411, 479
Change Password ........................................ 142, 143
Changing Default Directory .............................. 478
Changing the IP Address of a Host .................... 61
Changing the Web Client Default Directory
(setting a redirect for Web Messaging) .... 478
Changing the Word Count for a Word
(Example) ............................................................ 366
Characteristics ............................................... 255, 258
Check Registry - regcheck.exe .......................... 457
Checking the Registry (regcheck.exe)............ 457
Cleaning the Spool - Isplcln.exe ....................... 112
Cleaning the Spool Directory (Isplcln.exe) .. 112,
454
Collaboration ................................................ 370, 381
Groups, Collaboration ................ 373, 374, 381
Public Calendar ...................................... 376, 381
Public Contacts, Collaboration ......... 376, 381
Users, Collaboration ............................. 370, 371
Collaboration Settings ........................................ 381
Collaboration User Account Details ............... 371
Collaboration User Folders and Access ......... 371
Collaboration Users .............................................. 370
Command Line Installations (Silent Installs) 463
Command Line Utilities 112, 138, 162, 163, 210,
352, 398, 399, 433, 438, 446, 457, 461
Backups ................................. 123, 124, 125, 446
Commtouch
Commtouch Anti-spam ................................ 387
Commtouch Anti-virus ....................... 282, 284
Commtouch (Premium Anti-spam) ................. 387
Commtouch Premium Filter (Only Premium
Versions) .............................................................. 297
Commtouch Zero-Hour Filter ............................ 203
Commtouch Zero-Hour Virus Protection ...... 203
Condition and Quantifier Syntax ..................... 257
Conditions ............................................ 176, 242, 250
Config_CommonAddrBook.cgi ........................ 462
Configuring
Configuring Antispam .................................. 290
Configuring Inbound ....... 173, 226, 242, 244,
253, 255
Configuring Outbound ...... 40, 242, 245, 253,
255
Configuring Services ..................................... 384
Configuring ............................................................. 468
Configuring an NT/AD database ............... 53, 136
Configuring IMail Services .................................. 386
Configuring RSS Feeds for the Web Client ... 470
Configuring Sender Policy Framework (SPF)320
Configuring Websites for the Web Client ..... 472
Connect Filtering Log Messages ...................... 342
Connect Filtering, Log Messages ..................... 342
Connection Checks ..................................... 331, 334
Connection Checks Overview ........................... 330
Contact Display Name Options ........................ 468
Contact Photo Files ............................................... 468
Contacts, Adding ......................................... 462, 466
Content Filtering .... 204, 301, 303, 305, 314, 317
Content Filtering Log Messages ....................... 347
Content Filtering, Log Messages ...................... 347
Control Access ..................................... 403, 419, 428
Converting Contacts ............................................ 473
Cookie Encryption ................................................. 468
Cookies ........................................................... 466, 475
CRAM-MD5 .............................................................. 411
Creating .................................................................... 209
Creating a rule to filter messages listed in a blacklist .................................................................. 96
Creating a URL Domain Blacklist ............ 311, 362
Creating an Account ......................... 164, 179, 438
Creating and Managing Lists ............................. 218
Creating External User Database for a Mail
Domain .......................................................... 68, 134
484
Creating Peer List .................................................. 270
Creating Public Mailboxes ................................. 392
Creating Separate antispam-table.txt Files for
Multiple E-mail Domains ............................... 358
Creating URL Domain Blacklist and
Antispam-Table.txt Files ................................ 364
Creating URL Domain Blacklist with antispamseeder.exe ........................................ 362
Creating User Database ......................................... 65
Customizing an E-Mail Domain's antispam-table.txt File ................................... 360
Customizing the Full Mailbox Notification
Message ................................................................. 71
D
Daily Count Report ............................................... 409
Database ....................................................... 40, 65, 68
Database ....................................................... 40, 68
IMail Database .......................................... 68, 438
NT Database ..........33, 40, 53, 65, 66, 137, 436
Deceptive Text ....................................................... 308
Deceptive URLs ...................................................... 307
Default Subject Values for SPF ......................... 329
Default Theme ....................................................... 468
Default User Settings .................................. 115, 148
Default X-Headers for Premium Filter
Classifications .................................................... 300
Deleting .............................. 137, 161, 168, 212, 356
Deleting Messages by Date ........................ 161 immsgexp.exe - Deleting Old Messages 162
Deleting a Collaboration Group ...................... 374
Deleting an Alias using .............................. 212, 435
Deleting an IMail Domain .................................. 137
Deleting an IMail User from Aliases/Lists ...... 168
Deleting Messages by Date ............................... 161
Deleting Messages by Date for User .............. 172
Deleting Old Messages (immsgexp.exe) ...... 162,
454
Deleting Words from Antispam-table.txt ..... 356
Delivery Rules . 173, 230, 242, 244, 245, 260, 264
Deny Access ...... 27, 232, 400, 403, 411, 419, 420,
428
Determining which Rule Trapped a Message
................................................................................ 264
Dictionary ................................................................ 478
Dictionary Attack Settings .......................... 411
Digest ............................................................... 214, 233
Digest Scheduling ................................................ 234
Directory ................................................................... 112
Disable Contact Photos ....................................... 468
Disable System Admin Impersonation .......... 468
Disable Web Client Logging .............................. 468
Disabling Web Client Features .......................... 468
Disk Space Usage .................................................. 468
Disk Space, Monitoring ........... 115, 148, 169, 392
DKIM / DomainKeys ....................... 83, 84, 183, 191
DNS Whitelists ................................................. 96, 267
Do I need to alter the word tables in the antispam-table.txt file? ................................... 366
Domain ................................................................ 40, 55
Alias Administration ...................................... 205
Attachment Blocking .......................... 250, 252
Domain Management .. 46, 62, 127, 138, 204
Domain, Alias ............................................ 209
485
Inbound Rules ............................... 173, 226, 244
List Administrator .............. 164, 224, 239, 240
Outbound Rules ............................................. 245
Peering List ..................................... 269, 270, 271
Spam Filtering, Domain Level .................... 204
User Administration .................... 141, 143, 170
White List Administration ........................... 265
Domain (Host) Administrator ........................... 127
Domain Administration ...................................... 126
Domain Administrator ........................................ 164
Default User Settings ........................... 115, 148
Domain Default User Settings .......................... 148
Domain Default Web Client User Options .... 151
Domain Forwarding ............................................. 423
Domain Properties ........................................ 40, 128
Domain Selector Add / Edit ............................... 185
Domain Selector List (Signatures) ................... 183
Domain Trailer ....................................................... 201
System Trailer ..................................................... 76
Domain User Changes ........................................ 157
DomainKey Relay For Addresses Note .......... 419
DomainKey Result - Invalid DNS Selector ..... 194
DomainKey Result - Invalid Signature ........... 193
DomainKey Result - No Signature ................... 192
DomainKey Result - Pass .................................... 196
DomainKey Result - Verification Failed ......... 195
DomainKeys / DKIM ............. 83, 84, 182, 183, 191
DomainKeys / DKIM Verification Settings .... 191
DomainKeys / DKIM Wizard............................... 198
DomainKeys Default Subject Values .............. 197
DomainKeys Result - DNS Unreachable ........ 194
Domains ................................................................... 127
E
Editing Domain Forwarding .............................. 425
Editing Relay Address .......................................... 418
Email ................................................................... 27, 164
Embedded Comment .......................................... 308
Enabling Symantec Anti-virus Logging ......... 280
Enabling Web Client Logging ........................... 431
Ensuring Delivery of Lists and Newsletters .. 362
Ensuring Mailing List and Newsletter Delivery
................................................................................ 362
Error Codes in the SMTP Log ............................. 281
Example - Non-Spam Word Counts ................ 361
Example - Spam Word Counts .......................... 361
Example - Total Number Signatures / Message
................................................................................ 197
Example 4 for Entering Inbound Rules in the
Rules.ima file ...................................................... 261
Example for Entering Inbound Rules in the
Rules.ima file ...................................................... 261
Example for Entering Outbound Rules in the
Orules.ima file .................................................... 262
Example for Entering Rules in the Rules.ima
File ............................................................... 259, 262
Example HTML Feature Configuration ........... 309
Example of Active Directory ....................... 53, 137
Example of Peering ............................................... 272
Example Text File (Adduser.exe) ...................... 440
Example, Install Log ................................................ 38
Examples
Example, AD Builtin ......................................... 53
Example, Anti-spam Table ........................... 445
Example, Full Mailbox Notify ........................ 71
Example, Install Log ......................................... 38
Example, Peering ............................................ 272
Example, Setting Up Alias .............................. 33
Example, X-Header ...................... 309, 310, 349
Examples, HTML Filtering .................. 309, 310
Examples, Rules . 96, 250, 254, 259, 260, 261,
262, 263, 264
Examples, URL Domain Blacklist ...... 312, 313
Examples of Delivery Rules ................................ 260
Exclude List (definition) ....................................... 318
Existing System Selectors ................................... 190
Exporting Domain Users to File ........................ 160
Exporting Users to File ............................... 157, 160
External Address Verification .................. 101, 107
External Address Verification - Verifier Example
................................................................................ 105
External Address Verification - Wildcard
Examples ............................................................. 105
External Text File Example ................................. 254
F
False Positive Example......................................... 300
False Positives .......... 262, 291, 300, 314, 367, 368
File Attachment Setting ........................................ 27
File Attachment Settings ...................................... 27
File Directory ........................................................... 171
File Extensions of Files in the Spool ................ 113
File Extenstions ...................................................... 113
Filtering ...................... 212, 289, 301, 306, 307, 313
Finding Orphan Mail Accounts ......................... 160
486
Flow of Processing................................................... 27
Folder Permissions and IIS Configuration ....... 34
Forwarding SPAM ........................................ 293, 294
Forwarding Spam Messages (Example) ........ 294
Forwarding Spam to Commtouch .................. 293
Full Mailbox Notification ................................ 40, 71
Example, Full Mailbox Notify ......................... 71
Full Mailbox Notify Example ................................ 71
G
Gateway
External Address Verification ............ 101, 107
Setting Up a Mail Gateway ............................. 62
Global Properties .................................................. 115
Global User Changes ........................................... 157
Granting Access ..................................................... 383
Granting Access to a User's Personal Folders
................................................................................ 372
Granting Access to Group .................................. 374
Granting Access to Public Folders ................... 381
Granting to Users .................................................. 164
Group
Group, Alias ...................................................... 207
Groups, Collaboration ................ 373, 374, 381
H
Hack Attempts, Denying ........................... 400, 411
Hand Held Devices .............................. See Mobile
Synchronization
Help .............................................................................. 20
Help Link .................................................................. 468
Helpful Definitions .................................................. 26
Hosts ......................... 40, 54, 74, 127, 138, 140, 209
How Blacklists Work ................................................ 94
How Peering Works .............................................. 271
How Rules are Stored and Processed ............. 242
HTML Features Filter ............................................ 303
HTML Filtering .............................................. 303, 305
Examples, HTML Filtering ................... 309, 310
HTML Filtering Example of Scanning E-mail 310
HTML Online Editor ................................................. 77
HTML or Plain Text Scan Example ................... 313
HTML Scan Example ............................................ 313
Hyperlinks................................................................ 306
I
IClient.Config .......................................................... 468
Ajax Time Limit Requests ............................ 468
Auto Logout ..................................................... 468
Browser Title Bar ............................................. 468
Contact Display Name Options .................. 468
Contact Photo Files ........................................ 468
Cookie Encryption .......................................... 468
Default Theme ................................................. 468
Disable Contact Photos ................................ 468
Disable System Admin Impersonation .... 468
Disable Web Client Logging ....................... 468
Disabling Web Client Features ................... 468
Disk Space Usage ............................................ 468
Help Link ............................................................ 468
IE Browser Image Tag Fix ............................. 468
Impersonation Deliimiter ............................. 468
Impersonations Viewing Emails ................ 468
Inline Image Prefixes ..................................... 468
Language Default ........................................... 468
Language Display Option ............................ 468
Login Lockout Settings ................................. 468
Map Display Options ..................................... 468
Map URL ............................................................. 468
Max Contacts to be Searched ..................... 468
Message Encoding Options for Compose
........................................................................ 468
Notes Display Option .................................... 468
Rules Escape Characters ............................... 468
SMTP Encryption Options ............................ 468
Sound for New Mail ....................................... 468
System Message Display Option ............... 468
Themes Link ..................................................... 468
Translation Language Codes ...................... 468
Web Admin Link .............................................. 468
Identifying spam with double byte characters
...................................................................... 354, 369
IE Browser Image Tag Fix .................................... 468
IIS
IIS Configuration ............................................... 34
IIS Setup ............................................... 19, 20, 478 iLDAP.exe - Init & Synch LDAP DB .................... 399
Image Tags .............................................................. 306
IMail Administrator Requirements ....................... 5
IMail Anti-spam Processing Order ................... 291
IMail Antivirus powered by BitDefender -
Settings ................................................................ 274
IMail Anti-virus powered by Commtouch -
Settings ................................................................ 282
IMail Anti-virus powered by Symantec -
Settings ................................................................ 277
IMail Configuration Export
(IMailConfigExport.exe) .................................. 446
IMail Database ................................................. 68, 438
IMail Getting Started Guide Links ...................... 22
IMail Log Analyzer ................................................. 430
487
IMail Processing Order ........................................... 27
IMail User Selection .............................................. 378
IMAP ........................................................ 389, 390, 392
IMAP Settings ......................................................... 390 immsgexp.exe - Deleting Old Messages ....... 162
Impersonation Deliimiter ................................... 468
Impersonation, Web Messaging ...................... 476
Impersonations Viewing Emails ....................... 468
Import NT Group as Group Alias using addalias.exe ....................................................... 436
Importing ........................................................ 462, 474
Importing NT Users ....................................... 66, 157
Importing Windows NT Users .................... 66, 159
Inbound / Outbound Rules ............................... 242
Inbound Delivery Rules for Domains ............. 244
Inbound Delivery Rules for Lists ...................... 226
Inbound Delivery Rules for Users .................... 173
Inbound Rules ...................................... 173, 226, 244
Information Manager ................................. 178, 179
Init and Synch LDAP - iLDAP.exe ..................... 399
Adduser.exe Utility ............................... 438, 439
Populating LDAP DB - ldaper.exe ............. 398
Initializing and Synchronizing LDAP Databases
(iLDAP.exe) ................................................ 399, 453
Inline Image Prefixes ............................................ 468
Installation ...................22, 30, 32, 33, 34, 293, 365
Installing ..................................................................... 30
Installing IMail Server Administrator ................. 30
Installing Patches and Upgrades ................. 22, 37
Installing SSL Keys ................................................... 34
Installing Updated Anti-spam Files ................ 293
Interaction with AntiVirus Scans ............. 278, 281
Introduction to IMail Administrator .................... 1
Invalid Tags ............................................................. 306
IP Address .................................. 46, 54, 61, 138, 140
IP Ignore List ........................................................... 388
IP Reputation, Commtouch ... See Commtouch
Anti-spam
IPhone ..................... See Mobile Synchronization isplcln.exe - Cleaning the Spool Utility .......... 112
K
Kill File for a List ..................................................... 232
Kill Files .................................. 27, 232, 411, 420, 421
L
Language Default ................................................. 468
Language Display Option ................................... 468
LDAP ................................................ 55, 170, 393, 394
Access Info Svcs for LDAP - Global ............ 157
Default User Settings ........................... 115, 148
LDAP Information ........................................ 170, 397
LDAP Service Settings .......................................... 394
LDAP Settings ........................................ 55, 240, 396 ldaper.exe - Populating LDAP DB .................... 398
License
License Refresh .................................................. 74
Licensing .................................................................... 72
List Administration ................................................ 214
List Command Syntax .......................................... 238
List Digest Subscribers ......................................... 232
List Header ............................................................... 224
List Moderator ........................................................ 240
List Owner ...................................................... 236, 240
List Owner Shortcuts for Subscribing and
Unsubscribing .................................................... 236
List Subscribers ...................................................... 223
List Trailer ................................................................. 225
List, Digest ............................................................... 233
List, Open .............................................. 216, 217, 218
Lists ......................................................... 216, 218, 223
List Administrator ............... 164, 224, 239, 240
Default User Settings .................... 115, 148
List Moderator ........................................... 240
List Owner ........................................ 236, 240
488
List Header ....................................................... 224
List Rules ......................................... 226, 230, 362
List Trailer.......................................................... 225
List, Digest ........................................................ 233
List, Maximum Size ........................................ 214
List, Open ........................................ 216, 217, 218
Lite Web Client ...................................................... 475
Local List Administrator ...................................... 239
Log Analyzer ........................................................... 430
Log Files ................................ 38, 281, 340, 427, 428
Log Manager ........................................ 411, 427, 428
Log Messages, Antispam ........................... 340, 342
Setting Log Messages ................................... 411
Logging .................................................................... 427
Logging for External Address Verification .... 107
Logging for IMail Anti-virus powered by
BitDefender ........................................................ 277
Logging for IMail Anti-virus powered by
Commtouch ....................................................... 284
Logging into IMail Services ............................... 386
Login ................................................ 19, 386, 466, 476
Login Lockout Settings ....................................... 468
Low Bandwidth Web Client ...................... 466, 475
M
Mail Domain (Host) Configuration ..................... 40
Mail Gateway
External Address Verification ............ 101, 107
Setting Up a Mail Gateway ............................. 62
Mail Processing ......................................................... 27
Mail Queue Considerations ............................... 281 mailall.exe - Mail All Utility ................................. 163
Mailbox Path ........................................................... 365
Mailbox Path - Antispamseeder ....................... 365
Mailbox Size Report .................................... 162, 171
Mailing Lists ................................................... 214, 216
Mailing Lists and Newsletters, Spam ....... 263
Mailto
Hyperlink ........................................................... 307
Manage ........................................................... 127, 141
Mailbox Size Report .............................. 162, 171
Managing Messages ..................................... 392
Managing Collaboration Groups ..................... 373
Managing Lists ....................................................... 234
Managing Mailboxes ........................................... 392
Managing Spool Manager ................................. 111
Managing the Client Disk Space Indicator ... 169
Map Display Options ........................................... 468
Map URL ................................................................... 468
Max Contacts to be Searched............................ 468
Maximum Size ........... 40, 115, 148, 164, 207, 214
List, Maximum Size ......................................... 214
Max Mailbox Settings - Global ................... 157
Merging Antispam-Table Text Files ................ 355
Merging Antispam-table.txt files ..................... 355
Merging Antispam-table.txt Files Example .. 445
Message Area .......................................................... 259
Message Encoding Options for Compose ..... 468
Message Flow ........................................................... 27
Method 2 Example .................................................. 60
Method 3 Example .................................................. 61
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync ......................... 79
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync Users ........... 156
Minimizing False Positives ................................. 368
Mobile Synchronization ..... 40, 74, 115, 143, 148
Moderated Lists ..................................................... 217
Modify Subject for URL Domain Blacklist ...... 365
Modifying the Subject for Broken MIME
Headers ................................................................ 319
Modifying Word Counts of Existing Words .. 361
N
Nested Tables ......................................................... 305
New Contact for Public Contacts ..................... 378
New for Version 12 .................................................. 10
New Groups for Public Contacts ...................... 379
No List Message ..................................................... 236
Nobody Alias ........................................................... 209
Nolist.txt file ............................................................ 236 normalizing words ................................................ 303
Normalizing Words ............................................... 303
Notes Display Option ........................................... 468
Notifications ............................................................ 277
NT Database ................ 33, 40, 53, 65, 66, 137, 436
O
Open Lists ................................................................ 217
Order, Mail Processing ........................................... 27
Orphan Accounts ........................................ 157, 160
Outbound Delivery Rules for Domains .......... 245
Outbound Rules ..................................................... 245
Overview ............ 20, 110, 233, 242, 278, 319, 384
Overview (antispamseeder.exe) ............. 352, 444
Overview of HTML Filtering ............................... 305
489
Overview of IMail Anti-virus powered by
Bitdefender® ...................................................... 276
Overview of IMail Anti-virus powered by
Commtouch ....................................................... 284
Overview of IMail Anti-virus powered by
Symantec ............................................................ 278
Overview of Mail Digests .................................... 233
P
Pager ......................................................................... 205
Pager Notification .......................................... 369
Pager, Alias ....................................................... 207
Pager Problems ..................................................... 369
Password
Allow Password Change - Global .............. 157
Change Password .......................................... 143
Default User Settings ........................... 115, 148
Password Complexity ...................................... 40
Patches .......................................................... 20, 22, 34
Peer List .................................................................... 269
Peering List ........................................... 269, 270, 271
Example, Peering ........................................... 272
Permissions ................................................................ 34
Phrase Filter Options (Content Filtering) ...... 301
Phrase Filtering ...................................................... 301
Phrase List .......................... 293, 294, 301, 302, 303
POP3 ........................................................ 384, 400, 403
POP3 / IMAP - Control Access ........................... 403
POP3 Settings......................................................... 400
Populating LDAP DB - ldaper.exe .................... 398
Adduser.exe Utility ............................... 438, 439
Init and Synch LDAP - iLDAP.exe .............. 399
Populating the LDAP Database (ldaper.exe)
....................................................................... 398, 456
Ports ............................................................................. 57
Poster File for a List .............................................. 231
Posters List ............................................ 217, 231, 236
Posters List (Moderated Lists) ........................... 236
Poster's List (Subscribed List) ............................ 236
Premium Anti-Virus (Symantec) . See Antivirus
Premium Options................................ 204, 289, 290
Preparing Mailboxes for use with antispamseeder.exe ........................................ 353
Processing Order ...................................................... 27
Program Alias ................................................ 205, 207
Public Calendar............................................. 376, 381
Public Contacts ...................................................... 462
Public Contacts, Collaboration ......... 376, 381
Public Contacts Management ........................... 377
Public Folder Properties ...................................... 375
Public Folders ......................................................... 375
Q
Queue ................ 111, 113, 281, 384, 386, 405, 406
Cleaning the Spool - Isplcln.exe ................ 112
Queue Manager ........................................... 405, 406
Queue Manager - Daily Count Report ............ 409
Queue Manager Options .................................... 406
R
Realtime Blacklists ............................ 92, 93, 94, 334
Realtime Blacklists (Server Level) ....................... 90
Realtime Domain Whitelists............................... 267
Realtime Whitelist - Add / Edit ............................ 98
Realtime Whitelists ........................................ 96, 267
Realtime Whitelists (Server Level) ...................... 96
Receiving Mailing Lists and Newsletters that are identified as spam ..................................... 263
Redirect Address .......................................... 277, 278
Regcheck.exe - Checking the Registry ........... 457
Registry ................................................ 19, 33, 61, 457
Backups .................................. 123, 124, 125, 446
Check Registry - regcheck.exe .................... 457
Restoring IMail Registry ................................ 124
Registry Backup............................................ 122, 449
Relaying Mail for Addresses ............ 411, 417, 418
Remote Administration Utility ............................... 5
Rename a User (RenameUser.exe) ................... 443
Rename User ID ...................................................... 170
Rename Username ................................................ 170
Reply To Addresses, Setting..................... 157, 161
Requesting and Subscribing to List Information238
Requesting List Information .. 217, 231, 233, 238
Resolving Incorrectly Identified E-mail .......... 357
Restoring IMail Registry ............................. 124, 451
Restricted Post ........................................................ 216
RFCs ............................................................................ 425
RSS Feeds ................................................................. 470
Rule with Multiple Conditions Example ........ 250
Rules................................................. 56, 242, 244, 245
Examples, Rules . 96, 250, 254, 259, 260, 261,
262, 263, 264
Inbound Rules ............................... 173, 226, 244
List Rules ......................................... 226, 230, 362
Outbound Rules .............................................. 245
Syntax, Rules ........................ 255, 257, 258, 259
490
Rules Escape Characters ..................................... 468
Rules Syntax ............................................................ 255
S
Script tag .................................................................. 307
Searching ............................................... 141, 235, 370
Searching Lists for a User ................................... 235
Self-Signed SSL Certificate - sslutility.exe ..... 461
Self-Signed SSL Certificate(sslutility.exe) ...... 461
Sending Mail .................................................. 218, 238 mailall.exe - Mail All Utility .......................... 163
Sending Mail to a List .......................................... 238
Sending Mail to All Users (mailall.exe) .. 163, 457
Sending spam to a specific folder in a user account ................................................................ 262
Server .......................................................... 19, 20, 466
Server Level Anti-spam Options (Blacklists) ... 95
Service Administration Overview .................... 384
Services .................................................................... 384
Set .............................................................................. 161
Setting Access to Personal Information
Management ..................................................... 169
Setting Database Options ..................................... 33
Setting Permissions ................................................. 34
Setting Service Administration Options ....... 386
Setting the Anti-spam Logging Options ....... 341
Setting the E-Mail Domain Name (Official Host
Name) ...................................................................... 32
Setting the IP Address for a Virtual Host ....... 140
Setting up a Dial-up Internet Connection ....... 57
Setting Up a Mail Gateway ................................... 62
Setting Up a Virtual Host Without an IP
Address ................................................................ 140
Setting Up an Alias for a Host .............................. 33
Setting up an SPF record .................................... 321
Setting up IMail Server as a Backup Mail
Spooler ................................................................... 63
Setting Up Peering ............................................... 271
Setting Up SSL for IMail Web Messaging ...... 479
Setting User Properties .............................. 141, 143
Settings
File Attachment Setting .................................. 27
IMAP Settings .................................................. 390
Reply To Addresses, Setting .............. 157, 161
SMTP ....... 210, 411, 419, 420, 421, 422, 425, 461,
See Domain Forwarding
CRAM-MD5 ....................................................... 411
SMTP Delivery Application - smtpd32.exe
........................................................................ 461
SMTP White List ............................................... 422
SMTP Accept List ................................................... 421
SMTP Accept List Examples ............................... 422
SMTP Control Access Settings ........................... 419
SMTP Delivery Application (smtp32.exe) ...... 461
SMTP Domain Forwarding ................................. 423
SMTP Encryption Options ................................... 468
SMTP Kill File ........................................................... 420
SMTP Kill file Examples ........................................ 421
SMTP Service Options .......................................... 411
SMTP White List ..................................................... 422
Sound for New Mail .............................................. 468
Spam Filtering (Domain Level) ............... 204, 297
Spam Filtering, Domain Level ........................... 204
Spam X-Header Explanations ............................ 349
Spam, Preventing .........93, 287, See Anti-spam
SPAM, See Antispam
Forwarding SPAM ................................. 293, 294
Spell Check .............................................................. 478
SPF ............................... 204, 289, 319, 320, 321, 329
SPF Filtering ............................................................ 319
SPF Result - Error .................................................... 326
SPF Result - Fail ...................................................... 324
SPF Result - Neutral ............................................... 327
SPF Result - None .................................................. 328
SPF Result - Pass ..................................................... 329
SPF Result - Soft Fail ............................................. 325
SPF Result - Temp Error ....................................... 326
Spool Directory ...................................................... 111
Cleaning the Spool - Isplcln.exe ................ 112
Spool Manager ....................................................... 110
SSL Keys ............................................................. 34, 461
SSL Setup ..................................... 390, 400, 411, 479
Standard, Alias .............................................. 207, 210
Nobody Alias .................................................... 209
Statistical Filter ............................................. 313, 314
Statistical Filter Options (Content Filtering) . 314
Statistical Filtering ................................................. 313
Status, Services ....................................................... 384
Storing and Processing.............................. 242, 253
Storing Search Strings in an External Text (.rul)
File ......................................................................... 253
Subscriber - Mailing List ................... 217, 218, 237
Subscriber Lists ...................................................... 217
491
Subscribing ............... 217, 231, 233, 236, 237, 238
Subscribing to a Digest ....................................... 233
Support ....................................................................... 20
Supported SMTP RFCs ......................................... 425
Symantec's Scan Engine ................... 278, 279, 280
Synchronize and Initialize LDAP Utility ......... 399
Adduser.exe Utility ............................... 438, 439
Populating LDAP DB - ldaper.exe ............. 398
Synchronizing With Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync ............................................................. 81
Syntax Message ..................................................... 235
Syntax, Rules ............................... 255, 257, 258, 259
Sys Log Access Control ....................................... 428
System ............................. 74, See Administration
System Admin Impersonation .......................... 476
System Administration .......................................... 72
System Administrator .......................... 72, 126, 164
Default User Settings ........................... 115, 148
System Default User Settings ........................... 115
System Default Web Client User Options ..... 117
System Message Display Option ..................... 468
System Requirements .............................................. 6
System Selector Add / Edit ................................... 85
System Selector List (Signatures) ....................... 84
System Settings ........................................................ 74
System Trailer ............................................................ 76
Domain Trailer................................................. 201
System WebMail Message .................................... 79
T
Table of Features ...................................................... 23
Testing a List ........................................................... 237
Testing a List-Server Mailing List ..................... 237
Text Patterns........................................................... 258
The .................................................................... 230, 231
Themes Link ............................................................ 468
Timer ......................................................... 63, 406, 411 trailer.txt
Domain Trailer................................................. 201
List Header ....................................................... 224
List Trailer.......................................................... 225
System Trailer ..................................................... 76
Translation Language Codes ............................ 468
Troubleshooting ................................. 367, 410, 457
Troubleshooting Anti-spam .............................. 367
Troubleshooting the Spool Directory ............ 410
Types Of .......................................... 54, 216, 217, 289
Types of Anti-spam Filters .................................. 289
Types of List Server Mailing Lists ...................... 216
U
Understanding Anti-virus Entries in the Mail
Queue ................................................................... 281
Understanding Realtime Blacklists .................... 93
Understanding Realtime Whitelists ................ 100
Understanding the antispam-table.txt file ... 445
Unsubscribing ..................................... 236, 238, 240
Untrusted Blacklist Examples ............................ 336
Updating Symantec Virus Definitions ............ 280
Updating Virus Definitions ................................. 280
URL Domain Blacklist ........................................... 311
URL Domain Blacklist Entry (Example) ........... 312
URL Domain Blacklist Options ...... 287, 289, 291,
293, 311
Examples, URL Domain Blacklist ...... 312, 313
User
User Administration .................... 141, 143, 170
User Properties ................................................ 143
User Utilities ........ 66, 157, 160, 161, 162, 170
Users, Collaboration ............................ 370, 371
Users, Exporting To File ...................... 157, 160
Users, IMail ........ 115, 141, 143, 148, 157, 164,
170, 173, 438
User Administration ............................................. 141
User Impersonation by System Administrators
................................................................................ 476
User Mail Accounts ................................................. 65
User Properties ....................................................... 143
User Utilities ............... 66, 157, 160, 161, 162, 170 immsgexp.exe - Deleting Old Messages . 162 mailall.exe - Mail All Utility .......................... 163
Public Contacts ................................................ 462
Using a Text File (adduser.exe) ............... 212, 442
Using Anti-spam Log Entries ............................. 340
Using Antispamseeder.exe to identify wildcards ............................................................. 364
Using Delivery Rules for a List-Server Mailing
List .......................................................................... 230
Using ETRN to Retrieve Mail on a Dial-up
Connection. .......................................................... 60
Using IMail Rules to Filter Spam ....................... 243
Using IMail Web Client ........................................ 466
Using Internet Information Services (IIS) Virtual
Directories ............................................................. 19
Using the antispam-table.txt File ..................... 365
Using the IMail Database ...................................... 68
492
Using the IMail Installation Log File ........ 38, 430
Using the Windows NT/Active Directory
Database ................................................................ 65
Utilities
Backups ................................. 123, 124, 125, 446
Command Line Utilities .. 112, 138, 162, 163,
210, 352, 398, 399, 438, 446, 457, 461
V
Vacation Message .......................... 27, 70, 177, 178
Verification, Address ................................... 101, 107
Versions, IMail ........................................................ 311
View ........................................................................... 224
Viewing
View Antivirus Logs ....................................... 280
Viewing Queue Manager ............. See Queue
Viewing Vacation Message Recipients ... 178
Viewing Anti-virus Log Files .............................. 280
Viewing Auto Responder Message Recipients
................................................................................ 181
Viewing the Status of IMail Services ............... 386
Viewing Vacation Message Recipients .......... 178
Virtual Hosts .................................. 54, 138, 140, 242
W
Web Access ........................................... 115, 143, 148
Web & Account Access - Global ................ 157
Web Admin Link .................................................... 468
Web Administrator and Client ............................... 3
Web Browser Support .............................................. 5
Web Calendaring ........................................... 19, 169
Web Messaging ......................... 127, 169, 466, 478
Web Site Updater (IClientUpdater.exe) ......... 452
Web.config settings ...................................... 27, 169
Websites within the Web Client ....................... 472
What is the IMail Web Client? ........................... 466
What should be in the phrase list? .................. 302
White List Administration .................................. 265
White Lists
DNS Whitelists .......................................... 96, 267
SMTP White List .............................................. 422
White lists ................................................ 265, 266
Wild Card Examples for Trusted Addresses . 266
Windows NT Database ............. 33, 53, 65, 66, 436
Wireless .................. See Mobile Synchronization
Word (defined for the antispam-table.txt file)
................................................................................ 366
Word count ............................................................. 366
Word Value (definition) ....................................... 317
Working with Individual User Accounts .......... 70
X
X-Header Example 1 ............................................. 309
X-Header Example 2 ............................................. 310
X-Header, Spam ........................................... 309, 349
493
Lejupielādēt
Publiskā saite ir atjaunināta
Ir atjaunināta publiskā saite uz jūsu tērzēšanu. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
Dokumenta publiskā saite
Reklāma
